Subscribe to the Bombay Chartered Accountant Journal Subscribe Now!

State of Marathi Manoos when Maharashtra turns fifty

New Page 1

58 State of Marathi Manoos when Maharashtra turns fifty

Before 1960, a bulk of commercial activity was in the hands
of non-Maharashtrians : Gujaratis, Marwaris, Khojas, Bohras, Sindhis, Parsis and
Punjabis. That is true today as well.

With the exception of the Kirloskars, no Marathi-owned
company figures prominently in the country’s corporate world. The Marathas, who
dominate politics and therefore hold the bureaucracy in a tight grip, have done
pretty well for themselves. Political clout has enabled them to operate in areas
where the resources of the state can be manipulated for personal gain: real
estate, agricultural cooperatives and educational institutions.

In national politics, too, there is no Maharashtrian with an
all-India appeal. That requires a reputation for intellectual rigour, personal
integrity and a steadfast commitment to a set of ideas and principles. The last
politician with such a reputation was Y. B. Chavan. Much the same conspicuous
absence can be found in areas of scientific and artistic endeavour. How many
Marathi-speakers have emerged as national, let alone international, icons? In
some fields notably classical music and cricket you can cite three or four
names. Add to that a couple of scientists and writers. In the upper echelons of
the armed forces and civil services, in think tanks and prestigious
universities, in the national media and in the entertainment business too,
Maharashtrians are few and far between.

Unable or unwilling to accept why things have come to this
pass above all, an aversion to risk and adventure most Maharashtrians prefer to
rail against the world. Those who exploit Marathi grievances for short-term
political gains are content to promote vada-pao, force shop-owners to put up
signs in Marathi and compel taxi drivers from outside the state to speak the
language. Such swagger in an urban, increasingly cosmopolitan India invites
ridicule.

(Source:Extracts from an article by
Shri Dilip Padgaonkar in The Times of India, dated 30-4-2010)

levitra

201 Technical and Management Institutes are illegal

New Page 1

59 201 Technical and Management Institutes are illegal

Many private institutions have been imparting technical and
management courses without the mandatory approval from the All India Council for
Technical Education, HRD Minister Kapil Sibal informed Lok Sabha. There are in
all 201 such institutions across the country.

The big names include Indian School of Business, Hyderabad;
ICFAI Business School, Delhi, Gurgaon and Chandigarh; Ansal Institute of
Technology, Gurgaon; Indian Institute of Planning and Management, Delhi; K. R.
Mangalam Global Institute of Management, New Delhi; J. K. Business School,
Gurgaon; M. B. Birla Institute of Management Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan, Bangalore;
and Sikkim Manipal University, Bangalore.

Maharashtra tops the list with 74 such institutions followed
by 24 in Delhi, 22 in Karnataka, 19 in Tamil Nadu and 13 each in UP and Bengal.
Besides, the UGC has identified 21 fake universities running in violation of
provisions of the UGC Act, he said. The 21 fake universities include eight in UP
and seven in Delhi, Sibal said.

(Source : The Times of India, dated 29-4-2010)

(Note : What penal action has the Govt. taken ? What about
documented rampant corruption in AICTE ?)

levitra

Changes in Indian Visa Regulations for expats

New Page 1

57 Changes in Indian Visa Regulations for expats

India has changed the rules concerning work visas for
foreigners to remove the ceiling on the number of foreigners a company can hire
as well as the minimum stipulated salary.

Though the new rules are designed to favour skilled workers
and have an ‘Indians first’ bias, they should please expats who are willing to
work here but were hindered by the cap on the number of foreigners who could
have been hired, as well as the minimum salary requirement. Indian companies had
to limit their foreign recruitments to 1% of their total workforce and pay them
annual salaries of $ 25,000.

The rules are sure to be welcomed by the non-governmental
organisations (NGOs) in India who have been allowed to hire, just like a private
concern, ‘skilled’ foreigners.

In the old regime, NGOs were not allowed to hire foreigners
forcing those who were still willing to work for such organisations to come to
India on tourist visa to work as volunteers for a limited period.

(Source : The Times of India, dated 8-7-2010)

levitra

Won’t dump US Treasuries : China

New Page 1

56 Won’t dump US Treasuries : China

China ruled out the ‘nuclear’ option of dumping its vast
holdings of US Treasury securities but called on Washington to be a responsible
guardian of the dollar.

In the third in a series of statements explaining its work to
the Chinese public, the State Administration of Foreign Exchange (SAFE) sought
to allay concerns in the outside world that arise whenever Beijing shifts its
holdings of US government debt.

In a series of questions and answers posted on its website,
www.safe.gov.cn, SAFE asked rhetorically whether China would use its $ 2.45
trillion stockpile of reserves, the world’s largest, as a ‘nuclear weapon’. SAFE
said such concerns were completely unwarranted.

(Source : The Times of India, dated 8-7-2010)

levitra

Hard-up Italy to sell treasures

New Page 1

55 Hard-up Italy to sell treasures

Italy is preparing to sell thousands of national treasures,
including islands in the Venice lagoon and on the Emerald coast of Sardinia, to
pay back spiralling debts.

The islands and other landmark properties on a provisional
‘for sale’ list are worth more than £ 2.5 billion. They include palaces and
castles, former convents, lighthouses and aqueducts, as well as leases on
beaches, rivers, lakes and Alpine summits.

(Source : The Times of India, dated 5-7-2010)

levitra

Why can’t Indian politicians retire if work gets tiring ?

New Page 1

54 Why can’t Indian politicians retire if work gets tiring ?

The Union Minister for Food, Civil Supplies and Agriculture,
Sharad Pawar, who also doubled as President of the Board of Control for Cricket
in India (BCCI) and has now become President of the International Cricket
Council (ICC), has reportedly pleaded with Prime Minister Manmohan Singh that
his ministerial burdens be reduced so that he can devote more of his time to his
cricketing responsibilities. The Prime Minister should request Mr. Pawar to
choose between Government and cricket. Mr. Pawar will not be any less popular in
his home state of Maharashtra, or any less respected as an elder statesman or
any less influential in Indian politics if he ceased to be a Union Minister.
Indeed, his popularity may shoot up if he prefers to give up his ministerial
perks and devotes the rest of his life to promoting cricket in India and around
the world. He could make cricket an Olympian sport ! He could get a bigger
audience for Indian Premier League matches compared to World Cup soccer. There
are so many new frontiers to be crossed and Mr. Pawar could become a global
mentor for cricket. Why should he seek to keep his Cabinet berth if he does not
have the time and energy for it ? Mr. Pawar says he needs more hands in his
ministry. There are already too many ministers in India and most junior
ministers complain that they have no work. Indeed, even senior ministers
complain these days of not having much work ! Mr. Pawar has been widely
criticised for keeping one foot in cricket and one eye on Maharashtra even as he
had his other foot in the Union Government and the other eye on the top job in
Delhi. No one can grudge a politician such political ambition. But when a
minister says he wants less work in Government to be able to devote more time to
cricket, then one must ask whether it is not time to force a choice on him. With
just nine members in the Parliament, and some of them willing to return to the
parent Congress party, Mr. Pawar demands too much generosity from the Prime
Minister, who, in fact, has been among his limited circle of well-wishers in the
Congress party. Rather than push the Prime Minister into being even more
generous, Mr. Pawar should think of retiring from Government, asking someone
younger, perhaps his daughter, to take his place. When Mr. Pawar took charge of
agriculture in 2004, the Prime Minister asked him to repeat in the rest of India
the developmental miracle he had wrought in his home constituency of Baramati.
Regretfully, he has failed on that score and Indian agriculture has suffered due
to neglect. The so-called Second Green Revolution is yet to take off, and food
price inflation has hurt. Perhaps a change of hands at the Food and Agriculture
Ministry can help.

(Source : Business Standard, dated 7-7-2010)

levitra

Quota seats go abegging at IITs

New Page 1

53 Quota seats go abegging at IITs

Nearly 700 seats reserved for scheduled castes (SCs),
scheduled tribes (STs) and other backward classes (OBCs) are lying vacant at the
Indian Institutes of Technology (IITs) this year after the first allotment of
seats.

The IITs had set aside 2,570 seats for OBCs, but only 2,023
were filled, according to T. S. Natarajan, Chairman of the Joint Entrance
Examination (JEE) at IIT Madras — the institute which conducted the JEE this
year. Of the 2,570 seats under the OBC category, 78 (around 3%) are reserved for
students with physical disabilities. Of the remaining 2,492 seats, only 2,023
have been filled.

(Source : Business Standard, dated 5-7-2010)

[Will meritocracy ever flourish in our country ? There are no
statistics available as to how many quota candidates fail or drop out of IITs ?
All at the cost of deserving students belonging to so-called upper castes ?]

levitra

Media companies oppose service tax on copyright services

New Page 1

52 Media companies oppose service tax on copyright services

PVR Pictures, Balaji Telefilms, Yash Raj Films and UTV Motion
Pictures have moved the Delhi High Court against the Government’s recent
decision to levy service tax on copyright services.

The Finance Ministry introduced the tax for the first time on
July 1, 2010. PVR Pictures, in its petition, alleged that copyrights are treated
as goods and the transfer of copyrights are treated as sale of goods, which
falls within the domain of taxation by States under Article 246, and not the
Union.

The company said treating copyright as goods as well as a
service is ultra vires (beyond the powers of) the Constitution of India and
contravenes Articles 14, 19(1)(g), 265 and 300A of the Constitution.

(Source : Business Standard, dated 8-7-2010)


levitra

ICSI told to suggest changes in LLP Structure:

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

74 ICSI told to suggest
changes in LLP Structure:


The
Ministry of Corporate Affairs has asked the Institute of Company Secretaries of
India (ICSI) to suggest changes to make the limited liability partnership (LLP)
model more suitable for the small and medium sector enterprises in the country.


Converting to an LLP structure will also help SME units get easier access to
credit from banks, the official said. LLP’s registrations were opened in April
last year but the response has been very poor, with only 677 entities being
registered till date. The official further points out that the present number
mainly comprises big consulting groups and law firms, with a relatively small
portion of small-sized entities and new entrants showing interest. “This (LLP
form of business) is a fantastic new opportunity and will inevitably give a
whole new profile to the MSME sector.

It will
be possible for the sector to reach out to venture capital. This can be the
stepping stone for partners becoming much larger industrialists and logging
bigger growth,” Minister for Corporate Affairs Salman Khurshid had earlier said,
on the advantages for SMEs to leverage out from the LLP model. The report of the
task force on SMEs, which was recently presented to Prime Minister Manmohan
Singh, had highlighted the need for giving wide publicity to the LLP model,
which it said will provide SMEs an interim solution to move from the informal to
the formal economy.

(Source:
The Economic
Times dated 06.02.2009)

levitra

Top-level vacancies frustrating tax targets: CBDT

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

73 Top-level vacancies frustrating tax targets: CBDT


Three
weeks to go before presentation of India’s national budget and the finance
ministry called for urgent steps to fill top-level vacancies in the direct tax
administration as delays were affecting the realisation of targets.

Central
Board of Direct Taxes (CBDT) Chairman S.S.N. Moorthy has even written to the
chairman of Union Public Service Commission requesting an urgent meeting of what
is called the departmental promotion committee for filling up the vacancies.

In the
letter, Moorthy says after the recent promotion of some officials to the grade
of chief commissioners, the vacancies in the posts of commissioners of income
tax had gone up to as high as 71.

Some of
these vacancies are in key circles of the tax administration in large metros
such as Mumbai, New Delhi and Chennai, which account for the bulk of the
country’s direct tax collections.


“Needless to say, this is adversely affecting the efforts of the department in
meeting the revenue collection targets,” the tax board chief says in the letter
to Union Public Service Commission Chairman D.P. Agarwal.

The
letter also comes against the backdrop of Finance Minister Pranab Mukherjee
directing the Income Tax Department to make all efforts to achieve the revised
collection target of Rs.4,000 billion by the end of this fiscal.

India’s
direct tax collections have been just Rs.2,500 billion in the first nine months
of this fiscal, growing at 8.5 per cent over the corresponding period of the
previous year. In fact, personal income tax has actually seen a decline of 0.41
per cent. This has obviously made the tax administration jittery.

Senior
officials said one of the main ways to enhance tax collections would be by
regular sharing of information among the commissionerates and developing a
common database. But vacancies at the top slots are frustrating such efforts.

Revenue
Secretary Sunil Mitra is also holding an urgent meeting with 18 chief
commissioners of income tax here to review the shortfall in tax collections and
find ways to make it up.

(Source:
www.topnews.in dated 05.02.2010)

(Compiler’s
Note:
Revenue collection will increase when taxpayers are treated with respect and
trust due to a worthy customer. Today, an honest tax payer is the most harassed
lot as he finds himself unable to deal with the corrupt officials and has to
face time consuming and costly litigation. A dishonest taxpayer has the money to
smoothen his way. The FM should inculcate the habit amongst his officers to
treat the taxpayer with trust and respect. Otherwise, he will be killing the
goose which lays the golden egg!!!)

 

levitra

S&P threatens to downgrade Japan’s rating:

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 171 S&P threatens to
downgrade Japan’s rating:

S&P
threatened to downgrade Japan’s rating unless the world’s second-largest economy
took more steps to rein in its mounting public debt.

The
warning by Standard & Poor’s, which cut its outlook for Japan’s sovereign rating
for the first time since 2002, reflected concerns that the government’s efforts
to trim its mounting public debt were proceeding too slowly.

S&P
retained its long-term credit rating for Japan of AA, defined by the agency as a
very strong capacity to meet financial commitments, but said it had revised the
outlook associated with that rating from stable to negative. The AA rating puts
Japan in the same category as Slovenia, Chile and Ireland, according to S&P’s
website.

(Source:
The Times of India dated 28.01.2010)

levitra

Learn technology in your language:

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

72 Learn technology in your
language:


Spoken
Tutorials, a technology that explains software applications in your mother
tongue, will be launched by the Indian Institute of Technology – Bombay.


Nowadays, software applications find use in everyday living. For example, to
book a train ticket online one can log on to www.spoken-tutorial.org and get a
demonstration on steps to book an e-ticket with a commentary in a language of
one’s choice.

The
technology developed by IIT-B will now allow non-English speakers to negotiate
the information highway.

The
technology will soon be introduced in educational institutions across the
country by the National Mission on Education through Information and
Communication Technology (NMEICT), an initiative of the Human Resource
Development Ministry.

(Source:
Hindustan Times dated 26.01.2010)

levitra

SMEs to be exempt from IFRS:

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

70 SMEs to be exempt from IFRS:


Small
and medium enterprises (SMEs) in the country will not have to prepare their
accounts as per the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) from
April 1, 2011, saving them significant cost of switching to the more rigorous
accounting standards. A government-constituted core panel on IFRS has decided to
exempt SMEs from the first phase of convergence falling due in 2011.


Convergence to IFRS is a costly exercise which includes an overhaul of
operational and IT processes apart from training costs. A small enterprise, for
this exemption, is likely to be one where the investment in plant and machinery
is more than Rs 25,00,000 but does not exceed Rs 5 crore.

A medium
enterprise is one where investment in plant and machinery is more than Rs 5
crore but does not exceed Rs 10 crore.


Recently, a core committee of the government finalised the road map for IFRS
convergence in India. The ICAI has said that all entities having net worth in
excess of Rs 1,000 crore will have to follow IFRS. The list also includes all
NSE and BSE listed companies, entities having foreign borrowings of more than Rs
500 crore, insurance entities, mutual funds, venture capital funds and all
scheduled banks having operations outside India.

(Source:
The Economic
Times dated 25.01.2010)

 

levitra

CBDT seeks report on Mumbai I-T refund scam:

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

69 CBDT seeks report on Mumbai
I-T refund scam:


The
Central Board of Direct Taxes (CBDT) has sought a detailed report from the field
formation in Mumbai over the reported “income- tax refund scam” in that
jurisdiction. No insider of the Income-Tax Department has been identified in any
wrong doing. “It looks as if some external people were involved, but we have to
wait for the complete information,” official sources said. Indications are that
the findings of the report, once obtained, will be placed before the Finance
Minister. CBDT also maintained that the amount involved was not as high as Rs 41
crore as reported in certain sections of the media. Meanwhile, a CBI spokesman
said that the matter has come to the notice of the investigation agency.
However, no case has been registered as yet. “Only if a case is registered can
an investigation begin. More details can be shared only if a case is
registered,” the spokesman added.

(Source:
The Hindu Business Line Newspaper dated 25.01.2010)

(Compiler’s
Note:
The issue
arises: Can we trust the safety and security of confidential financial data
which assessees upload on the Department’s website, if the Department cannot
protect its own interest?)

 

levitra

RCom wants action against its special auditor:

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

68 RCom wants action against
its special auditor:


Reliance
Communications (RCom) has asked the Department of Telecommunications (DoT) to
take action against its special auditor, Parakh & Co, for alleged breach of
confidentiality and misconduct. It has also asked DoT to scrap Parakh’s report,
saying the conclusions are incorrect, unilateral and biased.

The
audit report, commissioned by the DoT, had alleged that RCom had hidden revenues
of Rs 2,799 crore for the financial years 2006-07 and 2007-08, costing the
government Rs 315 crore in licence and spectrum fees that are charged as a
percentage of revenue.

The
auditor also said RCom inflated wireless revenue by 23 per cent or Rs 2,915
crore, to Rs 15,213 crore in the report to shareholders in 2007-08.

The
terms of reference did not require the auditor to make observations on
consolidated financial statements. Moreover, they have finalised the report
without any discussion or communication with us, the company said.

(Source:
Internet & Media Reports dated 25.01.2010)

 

 

levitra

Licences of Entities Would Be Revoked If TheyzSource Funds From India –Mauritius:

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

67 Licences of Entities Would
Be Revoked If TheyzSource Funds From India –Mauritius:


The Financial Services Commission of Mauritius has imposed a
stringent set of conditions on Mauritius-based companies investing in India in a
bid to allay fears about round-tripping of funds. The Mauritian government has
also warned that licences of entities investing in India would be revoked if
they source funds from India. The move provides a new turn to the lingering
debate over allegations of Indian corporates using the Mauritius route to escape
capital gains tax. Mauritius is the top source of foreign direct investment (FDI)
flowing into India. During the first seven months of the current financial year,
nearly $8 billion of the $18 billion FDI flowing into India came from Mauritius.
An annual audit of Mauritius-based entities investing in India has been made
mandatory, said Milan J N Meetrabhan, chief executive of the Financial Services
Commission of Mauritius. The Indian side has been apprised of the steps taken to
check round-tripping, and Mauritius hopes that this will take care of the
concerns about tax evasion.

The move is significant since it comes at a time when the
government is planning to review all double taxation avoidance treaties to plug
loopholes. Also, the direct taxes code which is to replace the I-T Act next year
proposes a number of changes in the country’s tax laws, including some that will
nix the capital gains tax exemption enjoyed by investing through havens.

A Mauritian team headed by Dr Rama Sithanen, Vice Prime
Minister and Minister of Finance and Economic Empowerment, met FM Pranab
Mukherjee. Mr. Sithanen said that FDI was flowing into India through Mauritius
not because of the tax benefit only. There are a number of other countries with
more attractive tax treaties with India, but so much investment is not flowing
through them. Mauritius is preferred because we have a transparent regulatory
system and a sound financial sector, he emphasised.


(Source:

Economic Times, dated 20.01.2010
)

levitra

Get up, sitting for long can kill you – Even Exercising Won’t Help If You Spend Hrs At Office Desk Or Watching TV:

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

65 Get up, sitting for long
can kill you – Even Exercising Won’t Help If You Spend Hrs At Office Desk Or
Watching TV:


Here’s a
new warning from health experts: Sitting is deadly. Scientists are increasingly
warning that sitting for prolonged periods — even if you exercise regularly —
could be bad for your health. And it doesn’t matter where the sitting takes
place — at office, at school, in the car or before a computer or TV — just the
number of hours it occurs.

In an
editorial published this week in the

British Journal of
Sports Medicine
,
Elin Ekblom-Bak of the Swedish School of Sport and Health Sciences suggested
that authorities rethink how they
define physical activity to highlight the dangers of
sitting.

“After
four hours of sitting, the body starts to send harmful signals,” Ekblom-Bak
said. She explained that genes regulating the amount of glucose and fat in the
body start to shut down.

(Source: The Times of India dated 22.10.2010)

levitra

ICAI finds Haribhakti & Co guilty of negligence – As Karvy auditor:

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

66 ICAI finds Haribhakti & Co
guilty of negligence – As Karvy auditor:


The accounting regulator is finally swinging into action in
the multiple demat account scam that was detected over three years ago.

The disciplinary committee of the Institute of Chartered
Accountants of India (ICAI) has found the internal auditors — Haribhakti & Co —
guilty of negligence, while checking the books of Karvy Depository Participant.

ICAI’s disciplinary committee has found one audit partner and
an audit manager of Haribhakti guilty.

But sources said of the three charges that were framed,
Haribhakti has been found guilty on only one charge.

Shailesh Haribhakti, a senior partner of the chartered
accountancy firm, refused to comment, saying “it would be premature”. The
central council of ICAI, which is the highest decision-making body of ICAI, will
now either ratify or overrule the report of the disciplinary committee. The
central council is likely to decide the fate of the two auditors next month. To
give a brief background of the case, the Securities and Exchange Board of India
had unearthed a multiple demat accounts scam in the year 2006.

A person named Roopalben Panchal opened thousands of demat
accounts and illegally cornered shares in various IPOs.

Sebi, in its April 2006 order, among others, faulted the
internal auditors of Karvy – Haribhakti, for failing to detect thousands of
demat accounts being opened with the same address.


(Source:

www.taguru.in & www.bloombergtv.com
dated 19.01.2010)

levitra

Politicos, money bags own ‘doomed varsities’

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 164 Politicos, money bags
own ‘doomed varsities’


Politicians, property dealers and industrialists-turned-politicians dominate the
list of those who owned the 44 deemed universities that are set to lose ‘deemed’
status in the coming days.

D Y
Patil, Governor of Tripura, is an old Congress hand and runs an education empire
in Maharashtra. Only one of his institutes — D Y Patil Medical
College, Kolhapur — will lose deemed status.

Then,
there is S Jagatharakshakan of DMK, Minister of State, Information &
Broadcasting, whose Bharath Institute of Higher Education & Research will lose
deemed status. BIHER has six constituent institutions involved in teaching
medical and dental science, nursing, physiotherapy and engineering.

Another
one from DMK stable is former Union minister M Thambidurai who runs St Peter’s
Institute of Higher Education and Research in Chennai. It has 1,051 students
enrolled in engineering, computer science, electronics and IT at
undergraduate/postgraduate level and also research. AIADMK leader A C Shanmugham
runs Dr MGR Educational and Research Institute and has dental and engineering
colleges affiliated to it with more than 6,000 students on its rolls.

Santosh
University in Ghaziabad is run by P Mahalingam, personal physician to BSP
founder Kanshi Ram. It has 800 students on its rolls and claims to have three
colleges teaching medical, dental and paramedical sciences. BLDE University,
Bijapur, Karnataka is run by Congress MLA M V Patil. It has a medical college
named after Patil’s father late B M Patil and has nearly 400 students on its
rolls. Former Congress MP R L Jalappa is at the helm of Sri Devraj Urs Academy
of Higher Education & Research, Kolar in Karnataka. Industrialist M A M
Ramaswamy, a member of Rajya Sabha and belonging to JD(S), runs Chettinad
Academy of Research and Education. It has two constituent institutes, a hospital
and research institute and a nursing college.

If it’s
Haryana, it has to be a property dealer. No wonder Maharishi Markendeshwar
University, Mullana, with a host of engineering and medical colleges as its
constituents, is run by Tarsem Garg who started as a property dealer and
graduated to become education entrepreneur.


(Source:
The
Times of India dated 20.01.2010
)


(Compiler’s Note:

The above is an incomplete
list. The remaining must also be owned/controlled/managed by vested interests.
In such a situation, is policy reform or corrective action possible?)

levitra

Deemed Below Par: India’s university education system needs an overhaul

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

63 Deemed Below Par: India’s
university education system needs an overhaul


We have an acute paucity of quality colleges and universities
in this country. Those already established can barely meet the growing demand
for higher education. Given this situation, government must welcome private
investors who could lend muscle to efforts to scale up the higher education
sector. But such a move would not suit many of our politicians who have a
substantial stake in perpetuating the licence raj in this sector. They often use
their clout to flout norms and unfairly profit from the business of higher
education, arm twisting governing bodies that are meant to be unbiased and independent to do
their bidding. Competition from genuinely interested parties is thus viewed as a
threat by our netas.

The concept of a deemed university itself is a questionable
category and must be done away with. Either a university is autonomous or is
state-run – there is no need for a nebulous in-between category. The
inconsistencies marking deemed universities are there for all to see: They have
the freedom to make profits but are also given huge central government and UGC
grants. Universities and colleges must be given the freedom to run their own
affairs if they are not funded by the union or state exchequers. Instead of
doling out large sums of money, which may go unaccounted for, the government
would do well to make it easier for those seeking to enter the education sector
establish themselves. This could be done by, for instance, allocating land
speedily and eliminating red tape.


(Source:
The
Times of India dated 21.01.2010
)

levitra

Disgruntled Junior Ministers open their heart to the PM: Complain of Lack of Work, Powerful Babus

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 162 Disgruntled Junior
Ministers open their heart to the PM: Complain of Lack of Work, Powerful Babus

PM
Manmohan Singh called junior ministers for a rare interaction. Within minutes,
however, he realised he was face to face with a band of unemployed workers. By
the end of the 45-minute session, he had promised to take up their case with the
Cabinet ministers who were in the line of fire.

The
interaction was a long sob story with MoS after MoS lamenting that their seniors
were not giving them enough work, that ‘babus’ were more powerful and that they
wanted more. The PM called junior ministers the energy pool, asking them to
focus on flagship schemes and use technology to improve governance.

The
juniors have been a perennially disgruntled lot, saddled with insufficient work
or unacceptable quality of it. This was true of both the NDA rule and UPA-1. The
story does not appear to have changed in UPA-2. The aggrieved ministers said
that as they do not go to the Planning Commission or attend Cabinet meetings,
they be allowed to give inputs in policy-making and, at least, be informed about
decisions.

The PM
looked grim when told that many ministers don’t even get to see official files.
Panabaka Lakshmi, it is learnt, said she had seen just one solitary file in
eight months. An exasperated MoS asked why could he not be trusted with a file.
The case of the Trinamool underlined an irony. E Ahmed and K H Muniappa, both
deputy to party chief Mamata Banerjee in the Rail Ministry expressed their
unhappiness.


(Source:
The
Times of India dated 20.01.2010
)


(Compiler’s Note:

The situation in various
States is no better. No wonder the pace of reforms and implementation is so
slow!)

levitra

Bar councils under RTI Act purview: CIC

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

61 Bar councils under RTI Act
purview: CIC


The bar councils are open to public scrutiny under the Right
To Information (RTI) Act and should set-up a mechanism to facilitate processing
of applications directed to them under the transparency law, the Central
Information Commission has held.

The Bar Council of India and Bar Council of Punjab and
Haryana had rejected several RTI applications saying though they were set-up
under the Advocates Act, 1961 they did not get direct or indirect funding from
the government, hence are out of the purview of the RTI Act.

However, the commission in a recent order held that the
councils might not have been financed by the central or state governments but
they were setup under an Act passed by Parliament and hence they are covered by
the RTI act.


(Source:

www.dnaindia.com, dated 19.01.2010)

levitra

RBI notifies relaxation in remittance norms

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

60 RBI notifies
relaxation in remittance norms


The Reserve Bank of India has notified relaxation
in remittance norms regarding salary earned by foreign nationals employed in
India by a foreign company or an Indian citizen employed by a foreign company
outside India. These individuals, according to the RBI, may open, hold and
maintain a foreign currency account with a bank outside India and receive the
whole salary payable to him for the services rendered to the
office/branch/subsidiary/joint venture in India of such foreign company, by
credit to such account, provided that income-tax chargeable under the Income-tax
Act, 1961, is paid on the entire salary as accrued in India. Hitherto, the
amount that could be credited to the foreign currency account with a bank
outside India could not exceed 75 per cent of the salary accrued to or received
by the expatriate or Indian national from the foreign company. Further, the RBI
said that a citizen of a foreign State resident in India employed with a company
incorporated in India may open, hold and maintain a foreign currency account
with a bank outside India and remit the whole salary received in India in Indian
rupees, to such account, for the services rendered to the Indian company,
provided that income-tax chargeable under the Income-tax Act, 1961 is paid on
the entire salary accrued in India. The relaxation in the remittance norm by the
RBI follows the Government notifying the same through a Gazette notification.

(Source:
The Hindu Business Line
Paper
dated 19.01.2010)

levitra

Another law, more trouble

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

59 Another law, more trouble


When governments say they want to protect wages, they often
end up killing employment. They, of course, deny that, but that is what minimum
wages and legalized job security imply. The Union Labour Ministry plans to amend
the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970. This amendment will
allow Labour Commissioners and other officials to fix minimum wages for seasonal
workers. You may say that a law that prescribes minimum wages will only make
people get their due. Instead, it leads to incentives that are detrimental to
the workers.

It will permit appointed officials to harass employers.
Worse, it will permit collusion between firms and officials. If you take the law
and the officials out of the equation, then wages are set by the market. A firm
requiring labourers will have to pay market wages if it wants to get workers.
But with officials in the picture, as the new amendment will ensure, chances are
that they will pay much less. Official collusion and loopholes will ensure that.


(
Source:
Mint Newspaper
dated 19.01.2010
)

 

levitra

Delay as stratagem — The Supreme Court makes a serious attempt to wake up slumbering babus who do not appeal in lost cases

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

18. Delay as stratagem — The Supreme Court makes
a serious attempt to wake up slumbering babus who do not appeal in lost cases

When the revenue departments sleep over cases they
had lost in the courts and do not appeal for long, it is difficult to tell
whether it is just red tape or something else. Their lethargy causes losses to
the government and gains to tax dodgers.

The new chief justice of India (CJI) started his
stint in the Supreme Court a few months ago with a strict code for the indolent
babus. Some appeals are filed after a delay of a thousand and one nights. He has
ordered investigation into the delays in some gross cases. His campaign is
expected to nudge bureaucrats to move appeals faster. On the part of the
assessees, the CJI has insisted on them paying a substantial part of the tax
demand before hearing their late appeals.

The judges stated : “We feel that the beneficiary
of the judgment may be hand-in-glove with the officials in the government
department who deal with the files, and files are suppressed for a long period,
and then the appeal before the High Court or the Supreme Court is filed after a
long delay to get the appeal dismissed on the ground of delay. Huge amounts of
public money or public property may be involved and the government will be the
loser on the technical point of limitation in such cases. This racket has been
going on for a long time. Now the time has come that this racket is ended and
the officials responsible given severe punishment.”

Last year, the Court asked the Karnataka Government
to pay INR10,00,000 for filing an appeal after a delay of 14 years (State of
Karnataka v. Moideen Kunhi). It also asked the government to take action against
“every person responsible for the alleged fraud and delay in pursuing legal
remedies”.

In another case, State of Delhi v. Ahmed Jaan, the
court passed a similar order. The Courts go by the maxim : “Equity aids the
vigilant, not those who slumber on their rights.” Therefore, the Limitation Act
specifies the delays permissible in filing different types of petitions. The
Companies Act and most other legislation have similar clauses setting time
limits to press claims. Stale claims do not impress the judiciary.

(Source:Extracts from
M. J. Anthony’s Column ‘Out of Court’ in The Business Standard, dated
13-10-2010)

levitra

America’s wars

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

23. America’s wars


The book raises a troubling thought : What is it that,
generation after generation, impels America’s best and the brightest to lead
their country into war, with little clarity regarding national interests and war
aims, but pursued with an extraordinary passion and firepower that destroy the
lives of thousands of its soldiers and leave behind a horrendous debris of
devastated nations and cities, wrecked societies and broken peoples that take
decades to repair and heal ?

(Source: Extracts from Book Review by Talmiz Ahmad, a Diplomat,
of “Obama’s Wars” by Bob Woodward in
 

levitra

DOMESTIC ARBITRATION

Laws and Business1.
Introduction :

1.1 Arbitration is one of
the oldest dispute resolution systems across the world. Even in India,
arbitration has been in existence from ancient times. Considering the time it
takes in India for a Court case to be resolved, the importance of arbitration
has increased manifold in the last few years. Almost all types of civil disputes
can be subjected to arbitration, such as disputes in relation to joint ventures,
infrastructure projects, concession agreements with the Government, property
matters, etc.

1.2 The Arbitration and
Conciliation Act, 1996 (‘the Act’) totally revamped the law in relation to
arbitrations in India. The Act replaces the Arbitration Act, 1940. Let us
examine the process in relation to an arbitration under the 1996 Act.

1.3 An arbitration means any
arbitration whether or not administered by permanent arbitral institution.

1.4 This Article gives a
bird’s-eye view of some of the important features of ‘arbitration’.



2.
Arbitration Agreement :


2.1 An Arbitration Agreement
means an agreement by the parties to submit to arbitration all or certain
disputes which have arisen or which may arise between them in respect of a
defined legal relationship, whether contractual or not. An arbitration agreement
should be in writing and signed by both the parties. There is no prescribed form
for the same. It could also be by way of an exchange of letters, telex,
telegram, etc. The reference in a ‘contract document’ containing an arbitration
clause constitutes an arbitration agreement as that arbitration clause is part
of the contract.

2.2 The Arbitration
Agreement is the starting point by which parties refer disputes to arbitration.
Since it is an agreement, the provisions of the Indian Contract Act, 1872 must
also be borne in mind. Thus, provisions, such as capacity of parties to
contract, agreements opposed to public policy, etc., should be considered.

2.3 Salient features of an
Arbitration Agreement :


(a) The intention for
reference to arbitration must be clear and unambiguous.

(b) It should mention :

(i) the place/venue of
arbitration

(ii) the law which would
be followed

(iii) the procedure for
appointing
arbitrators

(iv) the language in
which the arbitration proceedings will be conducted



Full freedom is accorded to
the parties in selecting the above features. In addition, the agreement may also
lay down the procedure for conducting arbitration proceedings, use of experts,
etc.

2.4 An arbitration agreement
is not discharged by the death of one of the parties and his legal
representatives would step into the shoes of the deceased party.

2.5 The arbitration
agreement may also provide that arbitration would be the only dispute resolution
mechanism and none of the parties will approach any Court for resolving the
dispute.



3.
Arbitrators :


3.1 The parties can decide
on the number of arbitrators to be appointed, provided that the number of
arbitrators is not an even number. Thus, they could be 1, 3, 5, etc. If the
agreement is silent, then the Act provides for a sole arbitrator. Usually, an
arbitral tribunal consist of 3 arbitrators with each party appointing one
arbitrator and the two appointed arbitrators jointly appointing the third
arbitrator, who is known as the presiding arbitrator.

3.2 There is no
specification as to who can be appointed as an arbitrator. However, it is
preferable that he should be a man of commerce, law, or having expertise in the
field of dispute resolution and he should be someone who is perceived to be fair
and impartial to all parties. Usually, advocates, chartered accountants,
chartered engineers, bankers, and retired judges, etc. are appointed as
arbitrators.

3.3 If there is a failure to
appoint arbitrators, then the Chief Justice of the High Court has powers to
appoint an arbitrator under the Act.

3.4 Before accepting
appointment, the arbitrator must disclose to the parties any matters which are
likely to give rise to justifiable doubts about his independence or
impartiality. Similarly, the appointment of an arbitrator may be challenged on
grounds that there are circumstances which give rise to justifiable doubts about
his independence or impartiality. A challenge can also be made on grounds that
he does not possess the qualifications agreed to by the parties.



4.
Procedure of arbitration :


4.1 The arbitration tribunal
is not bound by the Code of Civil Procedure, 1908 or the Indian Evidence Act,
1872. The parties are, and failing them the tribunal, is free to determine the
procedure to be followed. In the absence of defined or agreed procedure.

4.2 The arbitral tribunal
would issue notice of hearing to the parties.

4.3 The parties would make their written and/ or oral submissions. The parties must submit their statement of claim and defence. They can also rely on various documents and evidence in support of their claims and defence. They may also rely on and submit expert testimony if so permitted by the tribunal or agreed upon by the parties. The other party may file rebuttal submissions against the expert testimony.

4.4 The arbitrator is bound to observe the principles of natural justice whilst conducting the proceedings. He must give an equal opportunity of being heard to both parties.

4.5 The arbitrator may also prescribe certain deposit for the costs of arbitration which both parties have to pay.

    5. Award:

5.1 The award shall be in writing, state its date and place of making. It must be signed by the arbitrator.

5.2 The reasons on the basis of which award was passed, shall be recorded unless the parties agree otherwise. The sum awarded may include ‘interest’ if the claimant is entitled to interest either under the agreement or the arbitration agreement.

5.3 It must provide for the costs and which party would bear them. Costs would include costs relating to fees and expenses of the arbitrators and witnesses, legal fees, administration and other costs in connection with the arbitration proceedings.

5.4 A signed copy of the award must be delivered to each party. Within 30 days from the receipt of an award by a party, the party may request the arbitration tribunal to correct any errors in the award.

5.5 The arbitrator can also make an interim arbitral award.

5.6 The award is final and binding on the parties and it can be enforced under the Code of Civil Procedure, 1908 in the same manner as if it is a decree of the Court. However, this is subject to award not being be challenged and set aside by the Court.

    6. Setting aside of an award:

6.1 The Court would set aside an award in the following cases:

    a. The party was under some incapacity.
    b. The arbitration agreement is invalid.
    c. The party was not given proper notice of hearing or was unable to present its case.
    d. The award deals with a dispute not contemplated by the agreement or contains matters beyond the scope of the agreement.
    e. The award is in conflict with the public policy.
    f. The composition of arbitral tribunal was not in accordance with the arbitration agreement.

6.2 An application for setting aside the award may be made to the Court u/s.34 of the Act. It must be made within 3 months from the receipt of the award. The Court may grant an additional 30 days in some circumstances.

    7. Role of CAs:

7.1 CAs can play a very important role in arbitration proceedings of their clients. They can make submissions on behalf of their clients or appear as an expert and give testimony on subjects, such as valuation, accounting, etc., or can even preside as an arbitrator. They can get empanelled with Chambers of Commerce, such as IMC, CII, etc., as arbitrators. Considering the slow pace of court litigation, CAs should advise their clients to strongly consider arbitration as a dispute resolution mechanism. They could also advise the clients whilst reviewing contracts during the course of audit to have an ‘arbitration agreement’ unless an arbitration clause is already included in the contract.

Development Control Regulations

Laws and Business

1. Introduction :


1.1 The erstwhile Press Note 2 of 2005 and para 5.23 of the
current Circular 1 of 2010 on Foreign Direct Investment issued by the Ministry
of Commerce are some of the most contentious Press Notes. S. 80-IB(10) of the
Income-tax Act, 1961 has given rise to some of the most interesting issues.
Article 25 of Schedule I to the Bombay Stamp Act, 1958 witnesses the maximum
debate. What do all these laws have in common ? They all deal with Real
Estate
! ! If there was a competition for the one sector in India which is
regulated by the maximum laws, then Real Estate would win hands down. It is
regulated by several laws, both Central and State and often there is no
co-ordination of definitions used under one law with those under another law.
This leads to confusion, ambiguity and litigation.

1.2 The Development Control Regulations for Greater Bombay,
1991 (‘the DC Regulations’) are one of the several laws which impact real
estate development in Maharashtra. These Regulations have been framed under the
Maharashtra Regional and Town Planning Act, 1966 (‘the MRTP Act’). As the
name suggests, these Regulations are applicable only for the city and suburbs of
Mumbai. The MRTP Act provides for the town planning and the development of land
for public purposes within the State of Maharashtra.

1.3 The importance of these Regulations stems from the fact
that they define several terms which are not defined elsewhere under other laws,
but are nevertheless used under those laws. Thus, the definitions under these
Regulations could serve as a guide in dealing with complexities under those
laws. This Article examines some of the key provisions of the DC Regulations.

2. Important definitions :


2.1 The DC Regulations lay down some important definitions
which one often comes across when dealing with real estate.

2.2 Building — A building means a structure
constructed with any materials for any purpose. The definition also includes a
part of a building. This is the most important definition since a good part of
the DC Regulations revolve around the construction of buildings. Thus, the term
‘building’ includes, those used for residential, office, educational, etc.,
purposes. A high-rise building is defined to mean a building which has a height
of 24 meters or more above the surrounding ground level.

2.3 Built-up area — It means the area covered
by a building on all floors including the cantilevered portion, if any. A
cantilever in common parlance means a projecting structure, such as a beam, that
is supported at one end and carries a load at the other end or along its length,
e.g., a beam supporting a balcony. Areas specifically excluded are not
counted for built-up area calculations.

2.3.1 Some of the exclusions from the definition of built-up
area are :


    (a) Basement area which may be used for parking, storage, bank deposits, housing equipment used for servicing the building, electric sub-station, etc. The basement area cannot exceed the lower of twice the plinth area of the building or the plot area.

    (b) Covered parking spaces as specified in the DC Regulations.

    (c) Balcony areas provided they are not more than 10% of the floor area from which they project.

    (d) Areas for recreational open spaces such as elevated/underground water reservoirs, electric sub-stations, pump houses, pavilions, gymnasiums, club houses, other sports and recreation facilities, swimming pools, etc.

    (e) Certain types of features permitted in open spaces, such as sanitary blocks, covered parking spaces, pump room, meter room, water tank, dustbins, plant nursery, etc.

    (f) Area covered by certain types of stair-case rooms, lift rooms, passages, etc.





2.3.2 The definition of this term is useful not only under
the DC Regulations, but also under the Stamp Act. Stamp duty on a conveyance is
payable on the built-up area of the property transferred. As per the Stamp Duty
Ready Reckoner if the built-up area is unascertainable it is presumed to be 20%
more than the carpet area.

2.3.3 For the purposes of FDI in real estate, the minimum
built-up area must be 50,000 sq. mts. The issue which arises here is that what
is the meaning of the term ‘built up area’ ? The DIPP Circular does not
define this term. One of the conditions under the Circular is that the project
shall conform to the norms and standards, including land use requirements and
provision of community amenities and common facilities, as laid down in the
applicable building control regulations, bye-laws, rules, and other regulations
of the State Government/Municipal/Local Body concerned. Hence, it stands to
reason that the definition of this term should be understood in the context of
which it is approved by the Municipal/Local Authority which sanctions the
building plans. E.g., land development in the city of Mumbai is regulated
by the Development Control Regulations of 1991. Thus, if the DC Regulations
treat something as a part of the built-up area, then it stands to reason that
the same should be so counted even for the purposes of reckoning whether the
project is FDI compliant.

2.4 Carpet area — This is the net usable floor
area within a building excluding area covered by walls. It also excludes any
area specifically excluded from computation of the floor space index. The
Maharashtra Ownership of Flats Act, 1963 requires every Flat Ownership Agreement
and every advertisement for the project to mention the carpet area of the flat
sold.

2.5 FSI — The term FSI means Floor Space Index.
FSI has been defined under the Regulations to mean the quotient of the ratio of
the combined gross floor area of all floors in a building to the total area of
the plot. However, the areas which are specifically exempted under the
Regulations are excluded from the computation of the FSI. Thus, FSI would be
computed as under :

Total Covered Area on all floors

Total Plot Area

Hence, the FSI quotient denotes the total constructed area
which is possible on a given plot of land. For instance, if the area of a plot
of land is 100 sq. mts. and the prevailing FSI quotient for that area is 1.33,
then the total possible constructed area on that plot would be 1,330 sq. mts.
The FSI computation and the permissible FSI varies depending upon the location
of the plot, the nature of intended use, etc. For instance, additional FSI is
allowed for Slum Rehabilitation Projects, redevelopment of cessed buildings,
hotels, etc.

2.6 Plinth — One often comes across this term in the real estate sector. It means the portion of the structure between the surface of the surrounding ground and the surface of the floor immediately above the ground. Plinth area on the other hand means the built-up covered area measured at the floor level of the basement or any other storey.

2.7 Plot means a parcel or piece of land which is enclosed by definite boundaries.

    Construction process:

3.1 In a variety of laws, such as S. 80-IB(10), Circular 1/2010 issued by the DIPP, etc., one comes across terms like the commencement of the project, completion of the project, obtaining of all statutory approvals, etc. Hence, it becomes important to understand the process involved in constructing a project, what steps are involved and what approvals are required.

3.2 Given below is a brief description of the processes and the approvals/certificates required for projects in Mumbai:
   a) Plan submission: The initial plan is submitted to?the?BMC?to?obtain a No Objection Certificate or approval based on guidelines laid down under the DC Regulations. A notice is to be given to the BMC along with a host of prescribed documents, such as the title documents, site plans, layout plan, building plan, etc.

 b)   Intimation of disapproval: This permission is an in-principle approval with respect to the plans submitted subject to conditions set out in the plans. The Intimation of Disapproval or IOD is worded in a very unique fashion. It gives an impression that the development has not been approved. However, actually it means that the development would be approved if the objections specified therein are addressed. Following compliance with these conditions, a Commencement Certificate is granted at various stages set out in the conditions. The IOD allows the developer to vacate and rehabilitate existing tenants and demolish existing structures. The developer is required to submit drawings of the proposed building for a project, together with details of the plot survey and survey drawings to the concerned planning authority.

 c)   Commencement certificate: The CC is required to commence work. The builder submits various documents as evidence of compliance of the conditions set out in the plans delivered with respect to intimation of disapproval at the time of applying for this certificate. Examples of such documents include no objection certificates from relevant authorities for cutting trees, from the Airport Authority of India for height clearance with respect to airport distance, structural design and drawings submissions and temporary structure permissions. Further, approvals for parking layout and a soil investigation report, for example, are also required to be in place at the time this application is made for obtaining a commencement certificate up to the plinth level. The CC is valid for 4 years, but needs to be renewed every year.

 d)   Further/full commencement certificate: This certificate is an endorsement with respect to the commencement certificate. This endorsement to undertake construction above the plinth level for which there are formal inspections by the officials of the BMC. It may be obtained either in phases or at one time for the entire project.

    e) Building Completion/Occupancy certificate: The Occupancy Certificate or OC is granted on the completion of the project and is required for occupants to move into their respective apartments. Some of the documents required to obtain this approval are?: a Structural Completion Certificate, a Lift Completion Certificate, a No Objection from the Fire Department and a Storm Water Drain Compliance Certificate. On receipt of these documents, the BMC inspects the work and issues a Certificate of Acceptance of the Completion of the Work. Once this Certificate is received, the builder submits the Development Completion Certificate along with the completion plan to the BMC. If the BMC is satisfied that there is no deviation from the sanctioned plans, then it grants an OC within 21 days or it may refuse to grant the OC. There are a good number of buildings in Mumbai where even though all flats are sold, the OC has not been obtained. The grant of the OC signifies the completion of the project.

   f)  Permanent electricity and water connection: This certificate is obtained after the occupancy certificate has been awarded.

    Consequences of violation:

4.1 In cases of DC Regulation violations, i.e., where the constructed area exceeds the maximum FSI permissible under the Regulations and/or allowed under the DRC, the BMC has power to demolish the illegal construction. It can also recover the costs of such demolition from the accused. In addition, a penalty for unauthorised development/use of a property otherwise than for the purpose it was planned may be imposed in the form of an imprisonment and a fine.

4.2 A very famous case in this respect is that of Pratibha Co-operative Housing Society Ltd. where the Society violated the FSI laws by constructing an unauthorised additional area of up to 24,000 sq.ft, equivalent to 8 additional areas. Ultimately, the matter went to the Supreme Court which upheld the demolition of the illegally constructed floors. While concluding the Supreme Court observed that “this case should be a pointer to all the builders that making of unauthorised construction never pays and is against the interest of society at large”.

4.3 Recently, an important decision was rendered by the Bombay High Court in the case of a writ petition filed by Sudhir M. Khandwala, writ petition No. 1077 of 2007. The case pertained to the demolition of illegally constructed Gaurav Gagan building and the petition was filed by the flat owners seeking re-spite from the BMC’s Orders. The High Court refused to stay the demolition and refused to regularise the unauthorised construction.

Real Estate Laws: Recent Developments-II

Laws and BusinessI. Stamp Duty Ready Reckoner 2010


1.1 The State Government has issued the Ready Reckoner for
computing the Fair Market Values for immovable property in Maharashtra for the
year 2010. As expected, the property rates in Mumbai have been increased by
10-20% compared to last year. The state government expects to mobilise Rs.
5,075 crore as revenue through stamp duty and registration fee by the end of
2009-10 and hence, it has hiked the rates to achieve its target. Stamp duty is
only second to VAT in terms of revenue earners for the State of Maharashtra.
Even though on one hand, the State has reduced the peak duty rate to 5% when
compared to other States, it has on the other hand, consistently increased the
Reckoner rates which have more than compensated for the fall in duty rates.
Thus, the State has been able to increase its Stamp Duty revenue year after
year. Readers may be interested to know that as far back as in 1993, the State
Government had given an undertaking before the Bombay High Court in the case
of Ashok Bansilal Mutha v State of Maharashtra & Ors. (Contempt Petition No.
28 of 1993), that it will not use the Ready Reckoner for calculating stamp
duty. In spite of this, the Sub-registrars always insist upon payment of duty
as per the Reckoner.

1.2 There are no changes in the Valuation Guidelines. The
rates mentioned in the Reckoner are on a per square metre of built-up area
basis, i.e., the same as previous years. There were news reports that the
Reckoner would be aligned with the amendment to the Maharashtra Ownership Flat
Act and that henceforth the property rates would be on a carpet area basis.
This would have enabled parity between the Flat Ownership Agreement and the
Reckoner rates. However, the 2010 Reckoner continues with the built-up area
pricing only. All other valuation parameters are the same as before.

1.3 When one considers the hike in the registration fee
along with the hike in the Reckoner rates, it is a double whammy for property
buyers. It is high time that the Ministry of Urban Development, along with the
Ministry of Housing and Urban Poverty Alleviation crack the whip by
threatening to refuse disbursement of funds to the State under the Jawaharlal
Nehru National Urban Renewal Mission (JNNURM). Only then can we expect some
relief and rationalisation of stamp duty rates and /or property values.


II.
Property Tax Calculation




2.1 Currently, the BMC levies a property tax based on the
Rateable Value of flats. Under the rateable value system, property tax is
based on the expected rent which a property can fetch. In the case of owner
occupied properties, the rateable value is arrived at on the basis of a
schedule of rates prepared by the BMC for different buildings. In these rates,
what is noteworthy is that newer buildings have a higher rateable value as
compared to older buildings. Accordingly, newer buildings, no matter where
located, would pay a higher tax as compared to older buildings, no matter
where located. Accordingly, a new building in Dahisar would pay higher
property tax as compared to an old building in Cuffe Parade.

2.2 To rectify this anomaly and in a bid to earn more
revenue, the BMC has devised the Capital Value System of levying property tax.
This new method is to be implemented from the next financial year, i.e., from
1st April, 2010. Under the Capital Value taxation, property tax will be levied
based on the current market value of the property and not on the basis of the
erstwhile rateable value.

2.2.1 To arrive at the market value, the rates given in the
Stamp Duty Ready Reckoner are sought to be used. Once the market value is
determined on this basis, it would remain frozen for 5 years. Thus, if the
Reckoner Rates for 2010 are adopted on 1st April 2010, then they would
continue till 31st March 2015.

2.2.2 The rate of property tax would be decided every year
by the BMC in its Annual Budget. It is expected to be 0.30% to 0.45% of the
Capital Value of the Property. for example, if the Capital value of a flat at
Churchgate is Rs. 2,00,00,000, then the property tax @ 0.45% will be Rs.
90,000 per annum.

2.2.3 In computing the property tax, various factors need
to be borne in mind, such as, carpet area, use of the property, etc. In a
subsequent Article, we will examine the Capital Value System in greater depth.

2.2.4 After an increase in Reckoner Rates, removal of the
cap on registration fees, flat buyers / owners in Mumbai have been gifted one
more exploitive tax by the Government in 2010. The New Year could not have
gotten off to a better start for the real estate sector!


III. Stamp Duty on Agreements not provided for



3.1 A few years ago, Schedule I to the Bombay Stamp Act was
amended to introduce Art. 5(h) (A) which provides for a duty on any Agreement
not otherwise provided for under the Schedule and creating any obligation,
right or interest and having a monetary value. The duty was 0.1%.

Thus, all Agreements which created a monetary obligation or
an interest and which were not otherwise covered under the Act were chargeable
with duty under this Article. These included Share Subscription Agreements for
PE Funding, etc.

3.2 The 2009 Amendment Act has increased the duty under
this Article. Accordingly, the stamp duty would be 0.1% in case the value of
the agreement is Rs. 10 lakhs or less. In the case of an agreement which
exceeds Rs. 10 lakhs in value, the duty would now be @ 0.2% of the amount
agreed in the contract. E.g., in case a real estate fund agrees to invest Rs.
100 crores in a real estate project, the Share Subscription Agreement would
now be stamped with a duty of Rs. 20 lakhs.

ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS

Laws and Business

1. Introduction :


1.1 The environment in which businesses operate is extremely
important and valuable. If it is not preserved it would be lost forever since it
is rapidly depleting. Pollution of the environment is one of the main culprits.
Pollution could be of air, water, noise and could be caused by sewage,
effluents, waste, bio-medical waste, release of chemicals or smoke, etc. in the
air, noxious chemicals, etc.

1.2 Businesses need to follow the principle of sustainable
development and have legal and moral responsibility towards preserving the
environment. To protect and preserve the environment, the Government has enacted
various laws. Let us briefly examine some of the important Central enactments on
this subject.

1.3 The Courts are also taking a very strict view when it
comes to violation of environmental laws and have not hesitated in prosecuting
directors responsible along with offending companies. A recent judgment of the
Supreme Court in the case of UP Pollution Control Board v. Dr. B. K. Modi,
(2009) 2 SCC 147, has examined this issue in the context of discharge of
pollutants by a company in the river. The company, Modi Carpets was prosecuted
by the Board for discharging noxious effluents in the Sai River. The Pollution
Control Board also filed a criminal complaint against the Directors and MD. The
Allahabad High Court quashed the operation of the complaint against the MD by
holding that there was no material to prove that he was responsible for the
daily conduct of the business or that the offence was committed by his consent
or connivance. The SC referred to its earlier decision in the case of UP
Pollution Control Board v. Mohan Meakins Ltd., (2000) 3 SCC 745. In that case
also, the Directors were sought to be prosecuted for discharge of effluents by
the company in a river. In that case, the SC observed that in view of the
specific averments in the complaint against the Directors, the prosecution of
the Directors was permitted. The SC further observed in the impugned case, that
in matters of public health, the Courts cannot afford to take matters lightly.
All persons big or small should share the parliamentary concern over the
escalating pollution levels. Those who discharge effluents in the environment
should be dealt with sternly, irrespective of technicalities. Hence, the Court
ruled that the Magistrate should proceed with the complaint against the MD and
declined to quash the proceedings against him. Thus, compliance with
environmental laws has become extremely important.


2. Environment
(Protection) Act, 1986 :


2.1 This is a general Act which deals with
the protection and improvement of the environment. Although there were specific
Acts which dealt with air, water, and other pollution, the need was felt for a
general Act which would cover other environmental hazards which were left out.
The Act fixes responsibilities on persons carrying out industrial operations or
those who handle hazardous substances to comply with prescribed safety standards
and also to control and prevent pollution arising from the same. The Government
lays down various standards for the same under the Act and also requires the
filing of information, inspections, etc.


2.2 Definitions :


The Act defines the term environment to include water, air
and land and the inter-relationship which exists among and between water, air
and land and human beings, other living creatures, plants, micro-organisms and
property.


An environmental pollutant is any solid, liquid or
gaseous substance present in such concentration as may be or tend to be
injurious to the environment.

The all important term ‘environmental pollution’ means
the presence of any environmental pollutant in the environment.

A hazardous substance means any substance or
preparation which by reason of its chemical or physico-chemical properties or
handling is liable to cause harm to human beings, other living creatures,
micro-organisms, property or the environment.


2.3 Obligations :


2.3.1 The Act lays down various obligations on industries,
factories, etc. It prohibits the carrying on of any industry, operation or
process which discharges or emits any environmental pollutant in excess of the
prescribed standards. The standards are prescribed under the Environmental
Protection Rules, 1986. Further, no person can handle any hazardous substance
otherwise than in accordance with the prescribed safety standards.

2.3.2 If the discharge of any pollutant is or is likely to be
in excess of the prescribed standards, then the person responsible should take
steps for prevention or mitigation of the pollution and should also furnish
certain prescribed information to the authorities of the same. The authorities
would then take such remedial measures as are necessary, at the cost of the
polluter.

2.3.3 The Act prescribes for powers of entry, inspection,
examination, testing, searching, etc. of any place in connection with the
prevention of environmental pollution. The person so authorised can take samples
of air, water, soil or other substances for this purpose. However, he needs to
comply with the procedure prescribed in this respect.

2.3.4 The Act also empowers the Government to establish
environmental laboratories for carrying out certain inspection, testing,
analysis, functions under the Act.


2.4 Penalties :


Whoever contravenes any provisions of the Act or Rules, is
punishable with imprisonment up to five years or with a fine up to Rs.1 lakh or
both. Continuing defaults attract a fine of Rs.5,000 per day. Where the
contravention continues beyond a period of one year from conviction, the
punishment is an imprisonment of up to seven years.


2.5 Environmental
clearance :


The Government is empowered to prohibit or restrict the
location of industries, operations, in certain areas keeping in mind maximum
allowable limits of concentration of environmental pollutants, the climatic
features, the net adverse environmental impact, the proximity of the proposed
project to protected areas, etc.


2.6 Environmental
audit :


Every person carrying on an industry, operation or process
requiring consent under the Water Pollution Act, Air Pollution Act, and the
Hazardous Wastes Rules must submit an environmental statement for every
financial year to the State Pollution Control Board.


2.7 Rules :


The following Rules have been framed under the Act :

    a) Environmental (Protection) Rules, 1986

    b) Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules, 1989

    c) Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989

    d) Manufacture, Use, Import, Export and Storage of Hazardous Micro-Organisms/Genetically Engineered Organisms or Cells Rules, 1989

    e) Chemical Accidents (Emergency Planning, Preparedness and Response) Rules, 1996

    f) Bio-Medical Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 1998

    g) Plastics Manufacture Sale and Usage Rules, 1999

    h) Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000

    i) Ozone Depleting Substances (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000

    j) Municipal Solid Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules, 2000

    k) Batteries (Management and Handling) Rules, 2001

    l) Hazardous Wastes (Management, Handling and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2008
    
3. Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 :

3.1 This is a specific Act dealing with prevention, control and abatement of air pollution.

3.2  Definitions :

Air pollutant means any solid, liquid or gaseous substance including noise which is present in the atmosphere in such concentration as may be or tend to be injurious to human beings or living creatures or plants or property or environment.

Air Pollution means the presence of any air pollutant in the atmosphere.

Emission means any solid, liquid or gaseous substance coming out of any chimney duct or other outlet.

3.3 The Act provides for establishing Central and State Pollution Control Boards for prevention of air pollution. The same Boards also serve as Boards for water pollution. The Central Boards can establish or recognise laboratories to assist the Board in carrying out its functions. The State Boards lay down standards for emission of air pollutants into the atmosphere from industrial plants and automobiles or for the discharge of any air pollutant into the atmosphere from any other source.

3.4    Prevention and control of air pollution :
3.4.1 The State Government may, after consultation with the State Board, declare any area or areas within the State as air pollution control areas for the purposes of the Act. If the State Government is of opinion that the use of any fuel, other than an approved fuel, in any air pollution control area may cause air pollution, then it may prohibit the use of such fuel in such area. It can also direct that no appliance, other than approved appliances, shall be used in the premises situated in an air pollution control area.

3.4.2 With a view to ensuring that the standards for emission of air pollutants from automobiles laid down by the State Board are complied with, the State Government shall give such instructions as are necessary to the concerned authority in charge of registration of motor vehicles under the Motor Vehicles Act, 1939.

3.4.3 No person shall, without the previous consent of the State Board, establish or operate any industrial plant in an air pollution control area.

3.4.4 No person operating any industrial plant, in any air pollution control area shall discharge or cause or permit to be discharged the emission of any air pollutant in excess of the standards laid down by the State Board.

3.4.5 If the emission of any air pollutant, is or is likely to be in excess of the standards laid down by the State Board by reason of any person operating an industrial plant or otherwise in any air pollution control area, then the Board may make an application to Court for restraining such person from emitting such air pollutant.

3.4.6 The Act gives powers to the State Board to authorise any person for entry, inspection, examination, testing, searching, etc. of any place in connection with the prevention of air pollution. The person so authorised can also take samples. However, he needs to comply with the procedure prescribed in this respect.

3.5    Penalties :

Failure to comply with the key provisions of the Act attracts a penalty in respect of each such failure, or imprisonment for a term which shall not be less than one year and six months but which may extend to six years and with fine, and in case the failure continues, with an additional fine which may extend to Rs. 5,000 for every day during which such failure continues after the conviction for the first such failure. If the failure continues beyond a period of one year after the date of conviction, the offender shall be punishable with imprisonment for a term which shall not be less than two years but which may extend to seven years and with fine.

    4. Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 :

4.1 This Act seeks to prevent and control water pollution and for maintaining or restoring the wholesomeness of water.

4.2  Definitions :

‘Pollution’ means such contamination of water or such alteration of the physical, chemical or biological properties of water or such discharge of any sewage or trade effluent or of any other liquid, gaseous or solid substance into water (whether directly or indirectly) as may, or is likely to, create a nuisance or render such water harmful or injurious to public health or safety, or to domestic, commercial, industrial, agricultural or other legitimate uses, or to the life and health of animals or plants or of acquatic organisms.

‘Sewage Effluent’ means effluent from any sewerage system or sewage disposal works and includes sullage from open drains.

‘Sewer’ means any conduit pipe or channel, open or closed, carrying sewage or trade effluent.

‘Trade Effluent’ includes any liquid, gaseous or solid substance which is discharged from any premises used for carrying on any industry, operation or process or treatment and disposal system, other than domestic sewage.

4.3 The Act provides for establishing Central and State Pollution Control Boards for prevention of water pollution. The Central Boards can establish or recognise laboratories to assist the Board in carrying out its functions. The State Boards lay down standards for sewage and trade effluents and for the quality of receiving waters, works for the purification thereof and the system for the disposal of sewage or trade effluents.

4.4 Prevention of water pollution :

The State Government can restrict the application of the Act to certain areas, known as Water Pollution Prevention and Control area. No person shall cause any poisonous, noxious or polluting matter to enter into any stream or well or sewer or on land.

The State Board may make surveys of any area and gauge and keep records of the flow or volume and other characteristics of any stream or well in such area. A State Board may give directions requiring any person who in its opinion is abstracting water from any such stream or well in the area in quantities which are substantial in relation to the flow or volume of that stream or well or is discharging sewage or trade effluent into any such stream or well, to give such information as to the abstraction or the discharge at such times and in such form as may be specified in the directions.

The  State  Board  is  empowered  to  samples  of effluents or sewage or trade effluents. The Act gives powers to the State Board to authorise any person for entry, inspection, examination, testing, searching, etc. of any place in connection with the prevention of water pollution.


4.5 No person shall, without the previous consent of the State Board :

    a) Establish or take any steps to establish any industry, operation or process, or any treatment and disposal system or any extension or addition thereto, which is likely to discharge sewage or trade effluent into a stream or well or sewer or on land.

    b) Bring into use any new or altered outlet for the discharge of sewage.

    c) Begin to make any new discharge of sewage.

The Act lays down the procedure for the same.

4.6 Penalties :

Whoever fails to comply with any directions on information about abstraction of water or discharge of effluence or information regarding construction, installation or operation of any establishment of or any disposal system shall, on conviction, be punishable with imprisonment for a term which may extend to 3 months or with fine which may extend to Rs.10,000 or with both and in case the failure continues, with an additional fine which may extend to Rs.5,000 for every day during which such failure continues after the conviction for the first such failure.

Certain other offences are punishable with imprisonment for a period ranging from 18 months to 6 years and with fine. Continuing offences attract a fine of Rs.5,000 per day. Where such a failure continues beyond one year, the offender can be punished with imprisonment for a term of 2 to 7 years.

    5. Director’s responsibilities :

5.1 The Board of Directors should enquire of the company’s compliance with the environmental laws. This especially true in the case of industries where environmental law compliance is critical to the survival of the entity. The recent example of the oil spill by British Petroleum in the Gulf of Mexico is an example in this direction. The issue has escalated into a high-profile political issue and could end up causing substantial losses to BP.

5.2 The company must designate a Compliance Officer to ensure compliance with various environmental laws. He must be a person who is well versed with the legal and commercial field. At every Board Meeting, the Compliance Officer should be asked to table a Compliance Certificate certifying compliance with all environmental laws. This should also be preferably signed by the Managing Director and/or the Whole-Time Directors and must be backed up with supporting certificates from various departmental heads who are responsible for compliance at an operational level.

    6. Auditor’s duty :
6.1  In case the Auditor comes across a serious violation of environmental laws, then he should consider obtaining an opinion on its validity and/ or appropriate disclosure in the accounts and his report. In case of a hazardous chemical company, a serious lapse of an environmental law can make or mar the future of the company. In some cases, it could affect the ‘going concern concept’ of the company.

6.2 It needs to be repeated and noted that the audit is basically under the relevant law applicable to an entity and an auditor is not an expert on all laws relevant to business operations of an entity. All that is required of him is exercise of ‘due care’. By broadening his peripheral knowledge, the Auditor can make intelligent enquiries and thereby add value to his services.

Shops & Establishments Act

Laws and Business

1. Introduction :


1.1 The Bombay Shops and Establishments Act, 1948 (‘the
Act’
) regulates the conditions or work and employment in shops, commercial
establishments, residential hotels, restaurants, theatres, other places of
public amusement or entertainment. It applies to the whole of Maharashtra.

1.2 The Act operates in municipal areas specified in Schedule
I to the Act. However, the State Government has power u/s.4 to exempt all or any
of the provisions of the Act to any establishment, employees or other persons.

2. Definitions :


2.1 Establishment — A shop, commercial
establishment, residential hotel, restaurant, theatre, other place of public
amusement or entertainment to which the Act applies and any other establishment
which is notified by the State Government.

2.2 Commercial establishment — It means an
establishment which carries on any business, trade or profession or any work in
connection with or incidental or ancillary thereto. The following establishments
are included within the definition of the term commercial establishment :

  • Legal practitioner —
    However, the same has been held to be invalid and has been struck down by the
    decision in the case of N. K. Fuladi v. State of Maharashtra, 1985 1 LLJ 512 (Bom.)


  • Medical practitioner


  • Architect


  • Engineer


  • Accountant — However, the
    same has been held to be invalid and has been struck down by the decision in
    the case of A. F. Ferguson & Co. v. State of Maharashtra (Bom.)


  • Tax consultant


  • Any other technical or
    professional consultant


2.3 Employer — means a person having owning or having
ultimate control over the affairs of an establishment.

3. Registration :


3.1 Every establishment to which the Act applies must apply
for registration with the inspectors designated under the Act within the
specified time. The application must be made in the prescribed form along with
the prescribed fees.

3.2 The inspector would on being satisfied about the
application, register the establishment and issue a certificate of registration
to the employer. This certificate needs to be renewed every year.

3.3 Any change in the particulars submitted while making the
application must be communicated to the inspector by the establishment. Further,
within 10 days of closure of the establishment, the employer must communicate
such fact to the inspector and get his certificate cancelled.

4. Regulation of establishments :


4.1 The Act lays down the opening and closing hours of shops
and commercial establishments. For instance, no commercial establishment can be
opened earlier than 8.30 a.m. and close later than 9.30 p.m. It also empowers
the State Government to modify the same for different classes of shops and
commercial establishments. Offices which work “It also specifies that no
employee can be made to work for more than 9 hours per day and 48 hours in any
week.

4.2 Every shop and commercial establishment must remain
closed for one day in a week, e.g., a Sunday. The employee cannot be called for
work on this day and must be paid his salaries as if he has attended office on
that day.

4.3 The Act also prescribes similar rules for residential
hotels, restaurants, theatres or other places of public amusement or
entertainment.

4.4 Anybody who is between 15 and 17 years of age is
considered to be a young person. No young person can be required or allowed to
work, whether as an employee or otherwise, in any establishment

(a) after 7.00 p.m.

(b) for more than 6 hours in any day; and

(c) if the work involves danger to life, health or morals.





Women cannot be allowed to work in any establishment after
9.30 p.m.

4.5 Every employee, who has worked for at least 3 months in a
year, shall be entitled to leave of 5 days for every 60 days of service during
the year. However, if he has worked for at least 240 days in a year, then he is
entitled to 21 days leave. Further, he would be entitled to additional holidays
on certain days, such as 26th January, 15th August, etc. An employee is
prohibited from working when he is given a holiday or is on leave as per the
provisions of the Act.

4.6 If an employer wants to terminate the services of any
employee who has been working for a continuous period of one year or more, then
he needs to give him a notice period of 30 days. If this is not done, then the
termination is bad in law and the employee can claim reinstatement with full
wages. However, this provision would not apply in case of a termination due to
misconduct.

4.7 It should be remembered that the State can, on an
application, exempt the operation of the above provisions to any establishment
or employee. For instance various 5-star hotels have got exemptions from the
provisions of S. 33 which mandate that women cannot work after 9 p.m. However,
various conditions have been imposed while granting such an exemption.
Similarly, BPOs have got exemptions from some of the provisions pertaining to
working hours, etc.

5. Application of other laws :


5.1 The State Government may prescribe that the Payment of
Wages Act, 1936 shall apply to any class of establishments or employees to which
this Act applies.

5.2 The provisions of the Industrial Employment (Standing
Orders) Act, 1946 apply to any establishment to which this Act applies as long
as it employs more than 50 employees.

5.3 The State Government may prescribe that the Maternity Benefit Act, 1961 would apply to any establishment to which this Act applies.

    6. Health & Safety :

6.1 Every establishment shall be kept clean and have proper ventilation. It must be sufficiently lit during all working hours. The Act prescribes standards for the same.

6.2 Every establishment must take precautions against fire. Further, certain types of establishments must also maintain a first-aid kit.

    7. Registers & inspection :

7.1 The Act requires establishments to maintain such registers and records and display such notices as may be prescribed. The rules framed under the Act require every establishment’s name board to be in Marathi in addition to any other language. However, the lettering of the Marathi script should be of the same size as that of the other language.

7.2 The inspectors appointed under this act have power of entering and inspecting any establishment, examine the prescribed registers and records, take evidence of any persons he considers necessary.

7.3 The Act prescribes various penalties for contravention of the provisions of the Act. For instance, S. 52 lays down the penalties for contravening a majority of the provisions of the Act. It specifies a penalty of Rs.1,000 to 5,000 for each offence. There is also an enhanced penalty for repeat offenders who have already been convicted under the Act.

    Role of a CA :

A CA can make his clients about the provisions of this Act and enlighten them about the requirements of compliance with the Act. This would be a value-added service which he can provide to his clients. He can also undertake a compliance audit for his clients. By broadening his peripheral knowledge, a CA can add value to his services.

Corporatisation of Firms

Laws and Business

1. Introduction :


1.1 Partnership firms and sole proprietary concerns have been
and continue to be one of the most popular business entities in India. However,
concerns of growth, limited liability, expansion, private equity funding,
foreign investment, etc., have forced even the staunchest supporters of these
business entities to consider a company structure. Some of the biggest benefits
of a corporate structure are limited liability, perpetual existence, a body
corporate, etc.

1.2 In the light of this background, let us examine how a
firm can be converted into a company. Further, what are the issues in this
connection.

1.3 Two routes :


There are two alternative options by which a firm can be
converted into a company :


(a) Conversion under Part IX of the Companies Act, 1956

(b) Sale of the business by the firm to a company and
claiming of exemption u/s.47(xiii) of the Income-tax Act.


2. Conversion under Part IX of Companies Act :



2.1 Steps to be
taken :





(a) One of the options available for converting a firm
into a company, is a conversion under Part IX of the Companies Act. Here the
firm is converted into a limited company by registering it under Part IX of
the Companies Act, 1956.

(b) Some of the important steps to be taken in this
respect, include :

(i) Increasing the number of partners from 3 to a
minimum of 7, since the company to be registered should have a minimum of
7 members

(ii) Restructuring the Partnership Deed keeping in mind
the requirements of Part IX of the Companies Act, 1956

(iii) Applying to the ROC for Registration under Part
IX along with the applicable fees

(iv) Obtaining the Certificate of Registration as a
company from the ROC

(v) Issuing the equity shares to the erstwhile partners

(vi) Intimating the Registrar of Firms

(c) Upon conversion of the firm into a limited company,
the partners of the firm at the time of conversion will become the
shareholders of the company.


2.2 No Stamp Duty :


A conversion under Part IX of the Companies Act, 1956 would
not attract any incidence of Stamp Duty, as under Part IX, there is a
statutory vesting
of the assets of the firm in the company and there is no
transfer. This view is supported by the decisions in the case of Vali
Pattabhirama Rao, 60 Comp. Cases 568 (AP) and Rama Sundari Ray v. Syamendra Lal
Ray, ILR (1947) 2 Cal. 1, which state that under Part IX, there is a statutory
vesting of the assets of the firm in the company and there is no transfer.
Therefore, there is no conveyance and hence, no incidence of Stamp Duty.

2.3 No Capital Gains Tax :


A conversion under Part IX of the Companies Act, 1956 would
not attract any incidence of Capital Gains Tax, as under Part IX, there is a
statutory vesting of the assets of the firm in the company and there is no
transfer or distribution of capital asset as envisaged by S. 45(1) or S. 45(4).
This view is supported by the decision in the case of Texspin Engineering and
Manufacturing Works, 263 ITR 345 (Bom.), which states that under Part IX, there
is a statutory vesting of the assets of the firm in the company and there is no
transfer. As per
S. 45(4), transfer should be on account of dissolution of the firm which is not
the case here. Hence, the liability to pay Capital Gains Tax would not arise.

2.4 Sale of shares :


Once the firm is converted into a limited company under Part
IX, the shareholders of that company can sell their shares at any time to anyone
without holding it for a certain minimum period. The condition u/s.47A of the
Income-tax Act, 1961 that 50% of the shareholders must continue to hold the
shares for a minimum period of five years does not apply to a conversion under
Part IX of the Companies Act. This condition only applies to the second mode of
conversion, i.e., a sale of the business by the firm to a company and the
partners claiming exemption u/s.47(xiii) of the Income-tax Act. This proposition
has also been laid down by the AAR’s recent decision in the case of Unicore
Finance Luxembourg, 189 Taxman 250(AAR).

2.5 Tenancies :


An interesting issue arises in the case of conversion of a
partnership firm which is a tenant into a company under Part IX of the Companies
Act, 1956. Various High Court decisions mentioned earlier have held that under
Part IX, there is a statutory vesting of the assets of the firm in the company
and there is no transfer. Thus, a conversion under Part IX of the Companies Act,
1956 would not be treated as a transfer, since there is a statutory vesting of
the assets of the firm in the company. Hence, there is a good case for holding
that there would not be a transfer of tenancy or an illegal subletting of
tenancy.

3. Sale of
business :



3.1
Steps :


The firm would make a slump sale of its business as a going
concern or a lock, stock and barrel sale to the company. In return for the same,
the company would issue shares to the partners of the firm.

3.2 Capital Gains Tax :


The sale by the firm would be taxable u/s.50B of the
Income-tax Act as capital gains. However, S. 47(xiii) of the Income-tax Act
exempts the gains arising from the transfer of any capital asset by a firm to a
company as a result of the succession of the firm by a company in the business
carried on by the firm. The conditions to be satisfied for availing this
exemption are as follows :


(a) all the partners of the firm must become shareholders
in the company in the same proportion as their capital;

(b) the aggregate shareholding of the partners in the
company must be at least 50% and it must so continue for 5 years from the
date of the succession;

(c) the partners do not receive any other consideration
for the sale from the company; and

(d) all the assets and liabilities of the firm become the
assets and liabilities of the company.


If these conditions are satisfied, then the gain on sale would be exempt. However, if any of these conditions are violated, then S. 47A of the Income-tax Act provides that gains which were exempt would become taxable in the company’s hands in the year of violation of conditions.

3.2 Stamp Duty :

Stamp duty as on a conveyance would be levied on the slump sale on the net value of the undertaking after reducing the liabilities from the total assets. For this purpose, it would be necessary to bifurcate the assets into movable and immovable assets. The immovable assets would require an instrument of transfer and would have to be registered. However, the movable assets may be transferred by delivery and possession without an instrument of transfer. If no instrument is executed for the movable assets, then there would not be any Stamp Duty incidence on their transfer.

3.3 Other :

One of the more contentious issues would be under the Rent Act in regard to the change in the tenancies of the firm. On a slump sale, the landlord can contend that there is an illegal subletting or assignment and hence, he can terminate the tenancy. It may be noted that the earlier Bombay Rent Act contained a provision that if the tenancies were transferred along with the sale of the business as a going concern and the goodwill and stock-in-trade of the business, then the transfer was not illegal. However, such a provision is not found under the current Maharashtra Rent Control Act, 1999.

Any bona fide measures taken by revenue to prevent circulation of black money, cannot be objected as interference with personal liberty or freedom of a citizen — SC

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1



  1. Any bona fide measures taken by revenue to
    prevent circulation of black money, cannot be objected as interference with
    personal liberty or freedom of a citizen — SC



The carrying of a huge sum itself gives rise to a
legitimate suspicion; the intelligence officers of revenue are, therefore,
entitled to satisfy themselves, not only that the money is from a legitimate
source, but also satisfy themselves that such a large amount is being carried
for a legitimate purpose; therefore, even if the carrier is not guilty of any
offence in carrying the money, the verification or seizure may be warranted to
ensure that the money is not intended for commission of a crime or offence.

Rajendran Chingaravelu v. R. K. Mishra, Addl. CIT,
(Civil Appeal No. 7914 of 2009) dated November 24, 2009.

(Source : Internet & Media Reports, dated 14-12-2009)

levitra

Foreign investment proposals — via Mauritius

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

  1. Foreign investment proposals — via Mauritius

As per recent press reports, the Foreign Investment
Promotion Board (FIPB) has rejected the view of the Tax Authorities to reject
foreign direct investment (FDI) proposals where such investments are proposed
to be made via Mauritius. The FIPB is said to have taken a policy decision not
to overrule such FDI proposals merely because they are proposed to be made
from Mauritius. The Tax Authorities are suspecting that ‘Treaty shopping’ is
being done by foreign investors by using Mauritius jurisdiction for investing
in India.

This question came up before the FIPB while considering a
proposal by a Mauritian holding company which wanted to invest a large sum of
money in a fund in India (India Value Fund). It is reported that rejecting the
‘Treaty shopping’ objection of the Department of Revenue, Ministry of Finance
(Revenue Department), the FIPB has approved this proposal and the proposal
will now be placed for final approval before the Cabinet Committee of Economic
Affairs (CCAE) of the Government of India.

The Revenue Department was having a generic objection to
foreign investment routed through Mauritius, with which India has signed a
DTAA. The concern of the Revenue Department is that Treaty shopping by a
resident of a third country results in loss of tax revenue for the Indian
Government by claiming capital gains tax exemption in India under the DTAA. It
is worth mentioning here that a large portion of FDI in India comes from
Mauritius.

The view of the FIPB is that since India has signed a DTAA
with Mauritius which is in force, the Revenue Department cannot take a generic
objection of ‘Treaty shopping’ for denying the foreign investment proposed via
Mauritius.

[It will be pertinent to note here that the Revenue
Department has issued a clarification dated 13 April 2000 (Circular No. 789)
clarifying that Foreign Institutional Investors (FIIs) and other foreign
investors who hold a valid ‘Tax Residency Certificate’ granted by Mauritius
Tax Authorities, will be regarded as residents of Mauritius and also the
beneficial owners of shares, etc. for granting of capital gains tax exemption
in India as per the India-Mauritius DTAA. The legal validity of this Circular
was later approved by the Supreme Court of India in its landmark ruling in the
case of Union of India v. Azadi Bachao Andolan, (2003) 263 ITR 706.]

(Source : Business Standard, New Delhi, dated
7-11-2009)

levitra

Non-residents can work on Indian projects only on employment visa; Business visa norms to be tightened.

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

  1. Non-residents can work on Indian projects only on
    employment visa; Business visa norms to be tightened.

In the present liberalised economic environment, Indian
companies are awarding work for execution of projects/contracts to foreign
companies, including Chinese. This has resulted in inflow of foreign
nationals, including Chinese, for execution of projects/contracts in several
sectors e.g., steel, power, etc. It has come to the notice of the
Government that a large number of foreign nationals, including Chinese were
coming for execution of projects/contracts in India on Business Visas instead
of the Employment Visas.

The matter has, therefore, been reviewed by the Government
and it has been decided that henceforth Business Visa will be issued only to
bona fide foreign businessmen who want to visit India to establish an
industrial/business venture or to explore possibilities to set up
industrial/business venture in India or who want to purchase/sell industrial
or commercial products or consumer durables, etc. according to provisions of
Visa manual.

It has also been decided that all foreign nationals coming
for execution of projects/contracts in India will have to come only on
Employment Visa and that such Visa will be granted only to skilled and
qualified professional appointed at senior level, skilled position such as
technical expert, senior executive or in a managerial position, etc. and will
not be granted for jobs for which a large number of qualified Indians are
available. Suitable instructions/guidelines have been issued to the Indian
Missions abroad to effectively regulate Employment and Business Visa regimes
and ensure that these are issued strictly as per prescribed norms.

As per the guidelines issued by the Government, Employment
Visa for foreign personnel coming to India for execution of projects/contracts
may be granted by Indian Missions to highly skilled and professionals to the
extent of 1% of the total persons employed on the project, subject to a
maximum of 20. However, this has been raised to 1% or maximum of 40 for power
and steel sector projects till June 2010. In case more foreign nationals are
required for any project then clearance of Ministry of Labour & Employment is
required.

(This information was given by the Minister of State for
Labour and Employment Shri Harish Rawat in a written reply in the Rajya Sabha.)

(Source : Internet & Media Reports, dated 16-12-2009)

levitra

Anti-money laundering Act : RBI tightens KYC norms for politically exposed persons

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

  1. Anti-money laundering Act : RBI tightens KYC norms for
    politically exposed persons

With the Prevention of Money Laundering (Amendment) Act,
2009 (No. 21 of 2009) coming into force from June 1, the RBI has advised all
NBFCs to maintain records of clients for a period of 10 years from the date of
transaction. The NBFCs will have to keep records of the identity of the
clients, both domestic or international, which will permit reconstruction of
individual transactions so as to provide, if necessary, evidence for
prosecution of persons involved in criminal activity.

However, records pertaining to the identification of the
customer and his address (e.g., copies of documents like passports,
identity cards, driving licences, PAN card, utility bills, etc.) obtained
while opening the account and during the course of business relationship would
continue to be preserved for at least 10 years after the business relationship
is ended as required under Rule 10.

RBI has further issued detailed guidelines on Customer Due
Diligence (CDD) measures to be made applicable to Politically Exposed Persons
(PEP) and their family members or close relatives. It is further advised that
in the event of an existing customer or the beneficial owner of an existing
account, subsequently becoming a PEP, NBFCs (including RNBCs) should obtain
senior management approval to continue the business relationship and subject
the account to the CDD measures as applicable to the customers of PEP category
including enhanced monitoring on an ongoing basis.

(Source : Internet & Media Reports, dated 17-11-2009)

levitra

Fin panel moots dual rate for GST, end to all sops

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

  1. Fin panel moots dual rate for GST, end to all sops

A task force on GST set up by the Thirteenth Finance
Commission has recommended that the tax on all goods and services be dropped
to 5% at the Centre and 7% at the state level, and that all exemptions be
scrapped. It does not, however, recommend a concessional rate for essential
items, as is the norm at present with the central excise and state value-added
tax.

The task force recommendations need not form the basis of
any decision on GST framework made by the Centre and states, both of which are
at an advanced stage of finalising their proposals for a dual GST. However, it
would serve as an input for the Finance Commission to work out the formula for
sharing Centre’s tax revenues with states. The report suggests that states as
well as the Centre completely give up their discretion to effect any changes
to tax rates unilaterally.

The changes will have to be approved by a council of
ministers, which would have the state finance ministers and the Union finance
minister as members. States would see this as an encroachment on their fiscal
autonomy. The council is to be a constitutional body, unlike the empowered
panel of state FMs which is a toothless body.

The panel has recommended that exemptions given to SEZs be
scrapped, and instead all goods and services exports be zero-rated. Only
public services provided by all levels of government, unprocessed food covered
by the PDS, education and health are to be exempt.

Other far-reaching recommendations include bringing real
estate into the ambit of GST. Thirteenth Finance Commission Chairman Vijay
Kelkar had been keen on this, and said as much at various fora. GST on real
estate would benefit homebuyers. Prices would fall as developers would get
credit for taxes paid on all inputs.

The impact of broadbasing the tax and dropping the rate
would be mixed. At one level, tax rates on most items will plummet,
translating into lower prices for buyers. The report suggests the transition
to the ‘flawless GST’ would result in a 1.22-2.53% drop in the prices of most
manufactured goods. Conversely, a host of items that are currently outside the
tax net or enjoy concessional rates — such as agri commodities and services —
may become slightly expensive.

(Source : The Economic Times, dated 16-12-2009)

levitra

The CAG report on public sector units is a scandal in numbers.

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

  1. The CAG report on public
    sector units is a scandal in numbers.

  • 419 number of Central public sector undertakings.

  • Rs.4,77,191 crore invested in equity and loans in
    government companies, corporations and institutions.

  • 284 companies and corporations audited by CAG. Of these
    185 earned profits, 70 were in the red and 24 were not operational.

  • 30 number of PSUs that were defunct or under liquidation.

  • 13 number of companies recommended for closure, winding
    up.

  • 72 number of companies with a negative net worth.

  • Rs.94,428 crore accumulated losses of the 72 companies in
    2007-08.

(Source : Business India Magazine, dated 8-11-2009)

levitra

No entry for foreign law firms : Bombay High Court

fiogf49gjkf0d

New Page 1

  1. No entry for foreign law
    firms : Bombay High Court

Foreign law firms have finally got a firm no-entry sign for
India. Almost 15 years after the RBI permitted three foreign law firms to set
up shop in India, the Bombay High Court said the decision of the bank was
unjustified under the existing laws that governed advocates and their practice
in the country.

Putting a full stop on the ‘can-they-can’t-they’ arguments
over entry of foreign law firms into India even for practice on only
non-litigious matters, the HC Bench headed by the Chief Justice held that
foreign law firms were barred from practising in the country under the
existing Advocates Act of 1961 and the various bar councils under it.

The HC disposed of a public interest litigation filed by
Lawyers’ Collective way back in 1995 against the permission given by the RBI
to the three foreign law firms. In 1995, the HC had stayed the bank’s
decision, but then the matter lay in cold storage for years before a lengthy
and heated hearing on the issue took place in Court for and against the
proposition. The Government said that practice by lawyers under the law meant
only litigious practice in Court, but dismissing that argument, the HC held
that, “It would mean that advocates debarred for professional misconduct would
then merrily carry on with practice in litigious matters.’’

“When efforts are being made to see that the legal
profession stands tall in the fast-changing world, it would be improper to
hold that the 1961 Advocates Act and the bar councils have limited role to
play in the field relating to practice of law,’’ the Court held.

But on the issues of reciprocity and other rules to enable
practice by foreign law firms in India, the HC directed the Central Government
which has been dealing with the issue for the last 15 years, to take an
appropriate decision ‘expeditiously’. The Centre was all for paving the way
for foreign law firms, but the Bar Council of India (BCI) was against letting
them in.

Till the Government decides to come out with a new law or
amend the existing laws, the HC said that persons practising the legal
profession whether in litigation or non-litigation work will be governed by
the Advocates Act, the Bar Council of India and the various state bar councils
as well as Courts to take action for professional misconduct.

Non-litigious practice of law in India is not unregulated
said the HC, quashing an argument made by the pro-foreign law firms’ lobby
that the law in India only covered practice in Court.

(Source : The Times of India, dated 17-12-2009)

levitra

Suggestions on Discussion Paper on ‘Issue of Shares for Concideration other than Cash’

fiogf49gjkf0d

Representation


Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society


Discussion Paper issued by DIPP on

‘ISSUE OF SHARES FOR CONSIDERATION OTHER THAN CASH’

Representation by

BOMBAY CHARTERED ACCOUNTANTS’ SOCIETY

1. Background :


1.1 FEMA classifies transactions into two kinds — Current
Account Transactions and Capital Account Transactions.

1.2 Issue of shares by an Indian company to a non-resident is
classified as a Capital Account Transaction.

1.3 At present, FEMA permits non-cash consideration for issue
of shares by way of :


(i) a permissible Current Account Transaction (e.g., in
lieu of ‘royalty’); or

(ii) a permissible Capital Account Transaction (e.g.,
conversion of shares/securities, ECB, etc.).


2. Non-cash consideration — need of the
hour :


2.1 Two-way cash remittances involve the following financial
and non-financial costs :




v Transaction charges levied by the bank.



v With increased volatility in exchange rates, hedging costs are required to
be borne to mitigate the exchange fluctuation risk.


v Opportunity cost and
period cost arising from time delay in two-way remittance of the same
amount.




2.2 Hence, non-cash consideration is the need of the hour.

3. Premise of Representation :


This representation is based on the following premise.

3.1 No discrimination :


No discrimination should arise merely because the shares are
issued for non-cash consideration.

For instance, generally, a Current Account Transaction is not
required to be valued. Hence, such requirement should not be stipulated merely
because shares are issued for non-cash consideration.

3.2 Intangibles/Extraordinary Payments :


Proper valuation of intangibles/extraordinary payments may
pose substantial challenge, particularly at the regulatory end. Hence, non-cash
consideration by way of intangibles/extraordinary payments may be deferred till
acceptable norms for valuation of intangibles/extraordinary payments are
evolved.

3.3 Checks and Balances :


Proper system of adequate checks and balances should be
instituted to ensure against misuse. The system should ensure that where :




v income tax, customs duty, R & D Cess, etc. are payable, they are duly paid
before the shares are issued; and


v KYC norms or any such
compliances that are required to be done to protect against money laundering
possibilities, are properly done and supervised/recorded by the relevant
regulatory authorise.




4. Representation on Issues posed by DIPP :


4.1 S. 4.1(a) :


Does the issue of shares for considerations other than cash
represent a valid and unaddressed business need ? Should the Government amend
the FDI policy to address this need ? Will adoption of such an approach dilute
the objective of FDI policy by decelerating the flow of physical capital into
the country ?

Issue of shares for non-cash consideration is a business need
particularly because two-way cash remittances involve avoidable transaction
costs. Hence, FDI policy may be appropriately amended.

The objective of FDI policy should be to encourage
investments but not necessarily only by inflow of physical capital. The total
FDI can always be ascertained with proper reporting mechanism and adequate
checks and balances.

4.2 S. 4.1(b) :


Should the Government consider categories not covered under
extant policy for the issue of shares against considerations other than cash ?
Should such consideration be limited to the cases mentioned in S. 3 above or
should other categories also be added ? What regulatory safeguards should be
prescribed for each such case/category ?

To begin with, the categories mentioned in S. 3 should be
considered, and based on the experience as well as the perceived need, other
categories may be added.

The regulatory safeguard should ensure that the statutory
obligations (income tax, customs duty, R & D Cess, etc.) are fulfilled.

4.3 S. 4.1(c) :


Where allotment of shares for considerations other than cash
is permitted, should the Government be concerned with the valuation of shares ?
Should objective valuation of services/goods received as consideration for the
issue of shares be the prime concern in such cases and should it form the basis
for amendments to the FDI policy ? What are the guidelines that should be
adopted for listed/non-listed companies in such cases ? Can concerns relating to
valuation be effectively addressed elsewhere ?

Valuation norms as regards the shares should be the same,
irrespective of whether the shares are being issued for cash consideration or
for non-cash consideration.

Objective valuation of services/goods should be the concern
of the regulatory authority that normally deals with it. For instance, valuation
of imported goods is dealt with by Customs. Hence, that should be the authority
and FDI policy should provide for reliance on the valuation accepted by Customs.
As regards services, presently, no valuation norms are stipulated for
remittance. Hence, similarly, in case of issue of shares in lieu of services, no
norms for valuation of services should be applied.

Similarly, valuation norms for shares should be uniformly
followed, irrespective of whether the shares are issued for cash consideration
or for non-cash consideration.

4.4 S. 4.1(d) :


Should issue of shares to set off payment in the current
account/intangibles/one-time extraordinary payments be permitted ? Should the
broad
principle be adopted that whenever money has been received in India or value has
been received in India in lieu of money and valuation protocols are in place,
issue of shares may be permitted, with prior Government approval ?

As proper valuation of intangibles/extraordinary payments could pose challenge, non-cash consideration by way of intangibles/extraordinary payments may be deferred till acceptable norms for valuation of intangibles/extraordinary payments are evolved.

4.5 S. 4.1(e):
Is there a possibility that the issue of shares for non-cash considerations listed in S. 3 above could be misused, especially in the context of money laundering? If so, what steps should be taken to address such a contingency?

Proper system of adequate checks and balances should be instituted to ensure that where:

  • income tax, customs duty, R & D Cess, etc. are payable, they are duly paid before the shares are issued; and

  • KYC norms or any such compliances are required to be done to protect against money laundering possibilities, these are properly done and supervised/recorded by the relevant regulatory authorise.

Smallwood v. Revenue and Customs Comrs (2010) EWCA Civ 778 (Court of Appeals)

Smallwood v. Revenue and Customs Comrs

(2010) EWCA Civ 778

(Court of Appeals)

Facts of the case:

This article is based on the judgment of the Court of Appeal of the UK. The case relates to capital gain earned by Mr. & Mrs. T. Smallwood (TS) during the tax year ended on 5th April 2001 (tax year comprised period 6th April 2000 to 5th April 2001). They were domiciled and residents of the UK.

In the year 1989, TS had made settlement for the benefit of himself and his family members (‘the Trust’). The Trust held certain assets, bulk of which comprised shares of two listed companies of the UK.

In April 2000, the trustee of the Trust was a Jersey company (L). The trustee was advised to dispose of the shares of listed UK companies which had appreciated considerably in value and to diversify the trust investment. Had the shares been sold by the Trustee directly, capital gain earned would have triggered significant taxation in the hands of the settlor (TS) in the UK. This is because the UK tax provisions permit taxation of income of a trust in the hands of the settlor if he himself happens to be a beneficiary of the trust.

As against the general provision permitting taxation of income in the hands of the settlor, the UK statute also has a provision which mandates assessment of trust income in the hands of the trustee if at any time during the tax year, the trustees are resident of the UK. As a result, the trust was advised ‘Round the World’ tax scheme by K, according to which (a) for part of the year, residence of its trustee was to be shifted to Mauritius (treaty favoured jurisdiction) by appointing a Mauritius-based corporate trustee (KM) in place of L, and (b) thereafter to be shifted to the UK before the end of the year by resignation of KM and appointment of LTS. This was to ensure that shares of UK companies were disposed of by the Trust while trustee was resident of Mauritius and therefore assessment in the name of the Trustee would permit the Trust to enjoy benefit of the UK-Mauritius treaty.

The following is the schematic description of the scheme.

In the return of income, TS claimed the capital gain on sale of shares as exempt, by claiming advantage of the DTAA between the UK and Mauritius.The claim was rejected by H.M. Revenue and Customs (HMRC), as a result of which the taxpayer appealed to the Special Commissioners.

The Special Commissioners held that residential test had to be applied for a given tax year. The Trust had dual residence and the tie-breaker test of Article 4(3) resolved in favour of the UK since Place of Effective Management (POEM) was in the UK. Factual finding and conclusion of the Special Commissioners were as follows:

    (i) POEM is not defined in the DTA; it is the place which is the centre of top-level management; that is, where the key management and commercial decisions are actually made.

    (ii) In this case the key decision was to dispose of all the shares in a tax-efficient way.

    (iii) The facts surrounding the appointment of KM leads one to the view that the real top-level management, or the realistic, positive management of the Trust, remained in the United Kingdom.

    (iv) It was a representative of K who approached KM and told them about the tax planning proposals and set out the basis of their appointment.

    (v) Although KM’s duties as trustee were laid down in legislation and in the trust deed and KM would only act within the context of what it was allowed to do, and the representative of KM stated on examination that the sale of the shares was not a condition for KM to accept the appointment as trustee and that the trustees only wished to receive appropriate advice and recommendations, nevertheless, it was also accepted by the representative that eventually as part of the tax planning exercise the shares would be sold at some time.

    (vii) All the actions of KM in Mauritius were carried out correctly and were properly documented. The appropriate meetings took place there and the necessary resolutions were passed. However, this merely meant that the administration of the Trust moved to Mauritius, but the ‘key’ decisions were made in the United Kingdom.

    (viii) The decision to sell the shares on the particular day was taken by the directors of KM at the telephone meeting; however, this only meant that if, for example, the price of the shares had fallen to a level as a result of which no gain would be realised on their disposal, the shares would not have been sold, but would have been retained and perhaps sold later. This was a lower-level management decision as there was no doubt that the shares would be sold; the real top-level management decisions, or the realistic, positive management decisions of the Trust, to dispose of all the shares in a tax efficient way, had already been, and continued to be, taken in the United Kingdom. The ‘key’ decisions were made in the United Kingdom.

    (ix) The state in which the real top-level management, or the realistic, positive management of the Trust, or the place where key management and commercial decisions that were necessary for the conduct of the Trust’s business were in substance made, and the place where the actions to be taken by the entity as a whole were, in fact, determined between 19 December 2000 and 2 March 2001, was in the UK.

On appeal by taxpayer to the High Court, the decision of Special Commissioners was reversed. The High Court adopted ‘snap-shot’ view of residential status and concluded as under at para 44:

    (i) The Commissioners erred in creating a simultaneous residence for the trustees.

    (ii) The correct analysis is that there were three periods of successive residence in the relevant UK tax year — Jersey, Mauritius and then the UK.

    (iii)    Article 13(4) gives the right to tax capital gains to the state in which there was residence at the time of the disposition.
    (iv)    That state was, at that date, Mauritius.
    (v)    Since there were no two jurisdictions vying for a claim of residence in that period, there is no tie for Article 4 to break.
    (vi)    Accordingly, Mauritius has the right to tax and the UK does not.

    The matter finally went to Court of Appeals. The Court, inter alia held (by majority) that on the primary facts which the Special Commissioners found, the POEM of the Trust was in the UK in the fiscal year in question. The scheme was devised in the UK by TS on the advice of K. The steps taken in the scheme were carefully orchestrated throughout from the UK. It was integral to the scheme that the trust should be exported to Mauritius for a brief temporary period only and then be returned, within the fiscal year, to the United Kingdom, which occurred. TS remained in the UK. There was a scheme of management of the trust which went above and beyond the day-to-day management exercised by the trustees for the time being, and the control of it was located in the UK.

    The Court of Appeal also adjudicated on a number of other issues. This Article is confined to treaty-related issue of POEM and does not deal with other issues which had an interplay of domestic law and treaty provisions.

    Inferences:

    From the judgment, the following inferences can be drawn:
 

  (i)    A formal resolution by board of directors does not establish that POEM is where the Board passes the resolution.
  
(ii)    The Board minutes are not conclusive as to where the POEM is.
 (iii)    If a scheme is devised at a particular place from where the steps in the scheme are orchestrated, it is that place where the scheme is devised/orchestrated is where the POEM is situated.
   
(iv)    Such scheme of management goes beyond the day-to-day management exercised by the Trustees for the time being and the control of it is located at a place where the scheme if devised. If a particular decision is taken in place ‘X’, then its implementation in other place ‘Y’ where the corporate trustee is situated does not make the other place the POEM. The POEM is situated where the key decisions are made.

    OECD/UN Commentaries:

    The OECD Commentary on Article 4(3), India’s observation to the OECD Commentary and the UN Commentary on A. 4(3) are reproduced below:

    OECD Commentary (2005) on Article 4(2):

    The place of effective management is the place where key management and commercial decisions that are necessary for the conduct of the entity’s business are in substance made. The place of effective management will ordinarily be the place where the most senior person or group of persons (for example a board of directors) makes its decisions, the place where the actions to be taken by the entity as a whole are determined; however, no definitive rule can be given and all relevant facts in these circumstances must be examined to determine the place of effective management.

    OECD Commentary (2008) on Article 4(3):

    “24. As a result of these considerations, the ‘place of effective management’ has been adopted as the preference criterion for persons other than individuals. The place of effective management is the place where key management and commercial decisions that are necessary for the conduct of the entity’s business as a whole are in substance made. All relevant facts and circumstances must be examined to determine the place of effective management. An entity may have more than one place of management, but it can have only one place of effective management at any one time.”

    India’s Observation to OECD Commentary on Article 4(3):
    “11. India does not adhere to the interpretation given in paragraph 24 that the place of effective management is the place where key management and commercial decisions that are necessary for the conduct of the entity’s business as a whole are in substance made. It is of the view that the place where the main and substantial activity of the entity is carried on is also to be taken into account when determining the place of effective management.”

    UN Commentary on Article 4(3):

    “10. It is understood that when establishing the “place of effective management”, circumstances which may, inter alia, be taken into account are the place where a company is actually managed and controlled, the place where the decision-making at the highest level on the important policies essential for the management of the company takes place, the place that plays a leading part in the management of a company from an economic and functional point of view and the place where the most important accounting books are kept.”

    Indian Perspective:

    The Indian perspective is explained separately for:
    (a)    the period up to 31st March 2012 (the last date up to which the Income-tax Act, 1961 (‘the Act’) will remain in force), and
    (b)    the period from 1st April 2012 (when the Direct Tax Code (DTC), assuming it will be enacted in the form in which the Bill is presented, will come into force).

    Income-tax Act, 1961:
    There is no definition of POEM in the Act. For the purposes of DTAAs, it has been held as follows by Tribunal/Authority for Advance Rulings (AAR):
    (i)    P. No. 10 of 1996, In re (1996) 224 ITR 473(AAR):
    In this case the Authority dealt with the issue of determining POEM for two companies. In the case of the first company, it was contended that the POEM is in Mauritius on account of the following facts:

            The company has two resident directors of appropriate calibre to exercise independence of mind and judgment.

  •             The company’s secretary is a resident in Mauritius;

  •             The registered office is in Mauritius;

  •             Banking transactions will be channelled through the Hongkong and Shanghai Banking Corporations;

  •             Accounting records will be maintained in Mauritius in accordance with the Companies Act, 1984;

  •             Board meetings will be held in or chaired from Mauritius;

  •             All statutory records, such as minutes and members’ register, will be kept at the registered office;

  •             The company has an ordinary status.

    The Authority observed that it is difficult to say that the effective management of the affairs of the company is not in Mauritius in the above situation unless there are facts to at least prima facie indicate that such control emanates elsewhere than from Mauritius.

    In case of the second company, the Authority observed that the POEM of a company is the place where its board of directors takes the decisions; the position would remain the same even if the board would rely, to a considerable extent, on advisors if these advisors are not decision-taking bodies and regardless of the delegation, the company remains responsible for all decisions and acts of any delegate as if it has been done by itself.

    (ii) P. No. 9 of 1995, In re. (1996) 220 ITR 377(AAR)

    The Authority held that the word ‘Place of ef-fective management’ refers to place from where factually and effectively, the day-to-day affairs of the company are carried on and not to the place in which may reside the ultimate control of the company (shareholder).

    (iii)    DLJMB Mauritius Investment Co., In re (1997) 228 ITR 268 (AAR):

    The applicant contended that its place of effective management was situated in Mauritius under Article 4(3) of India-Mauritius Tax Treaty on account of the following facts:

  •             At least two directors of the company were resident in Mauritius and such directors had appropriate caliber to exercise independence of mind and judgment.

  •             The company secretary of the company was resident in Mauritius.

  •             The registered office of the company was in Mauritius.

  •             Banking transactions were channeled through an offshore bank account in Mauritius.

  •             Accounting records were maintained in Mauritius in accordance with the Mauritian Companies Act.

  •             Director’s meetings were held in Mauritius.

  •             All statutory records, such as minutes and members’ register were kept at registered office.

  •             The auditors were Mauritian residents.

  •             The company had a Mauritian custodian for its assets.

  •            The company was regulated by the Mauritius

    Offshore Business Activities Authority of Mauritius (MOBAA).

  •             The company was required to report on a quarterly basis its investments operations to MOBAA.
  •             The company was subject to such enactments and conditions as may from time-to-time be adopted Mauritian authorities in relation to investment funds, collective investment schemes and conduct of investment business.

  •             The company was incorporated for investment in Indian companies and investors from different jurisdictions were investing in the Mauritian company and directors in the company were appointed from different jurisdictions.
  •             Dividends were remitted from India to the Mauritian company.

    The Authority quoted the observations in P. No. 9 of 1995, In re (1996) 220 ITR 377 (AAR) [see(ii) above] and held that the said reasons were equally applicable. Accordingly, it held that the POEM of the applicant was in Mauritius. It did not comment on the aforesaid factors pointed out by the applicant.

    (iv)    Integrated Container Feeder Service v. JCIT, (96 ITD 371) (Mum.):

    The appellant, a shipping company incorporated in Mauritius and carrying on activity of operating ships in international traffic from India contended that its POEM was in Mauritius. The Tribunal observed that:

    The term ‘place of effective management’ has neither been defined in DTAA, nor defined in Income Tax Act, 1961. Therefore, the said term should be understood in its natural meaning. It is plausible to say that the words ‘place of effective management’ refer to a place from where factually and effectively the day- to-day affairs of the company are managed and controlled and not to the place in which may reside the ultimate control of the company. In the context of the Company, it observed that it refers to a place where ships are put into service.

    It held that the company’s POEM was not in Mauritius on the following grounds:

  • No business activity was carried out in Mauritius.

  • The directors’ meetings were held in Mauritius only as a necessary formality to maintain its corporate status and to obtain tax residency certificate.
  •  The owners were from Dubai and entire business correspondence was made from Dubai.
  • Operating instructions were received only from Dubai.

  • The place of management was in UAE since all the staff, officers and captains were sitting in Dubai.

    The Tribunal observed that determination of the existence of effective management at a particular place is a question of fact which has to be determined according to facts of a particular case and that the certificate from Mauritian Authorities that the company’s POEM is in Mauritius is not sufficient.

    (v)    Saraswati Holding Corporation Ltd. v. DDIT, 16 SOT 535 (Del.):

    The appellant executed power of attorney in favour of Indian residents who conducted transactions through stock-brokers in India. The Assessing Officer held that the appellant had its POEM in India on the following grounds:

  •             The POA holders were in India; they were entitled to carry on activities on behalf of the appellant and that decisions regarding investments were taken by them.

  •             The share transactions were either concluded through one share-broker in India (V) who was managing investments of the appellant or through other brokers, in which case V was kept updated.

  •            The shares were being purchased and sold within a short span of three to four days and such decisions required close monitoring of the mood of the market.

    The Tribunal held that the reasons assigned by the Assessing Officer were insufficient to come to a conclusion that POEM of the appellant was in India. It observed that:

    The law is well settled that control and management of affairs does not mean the control and management of the day-to-day affairs of the business. The fact that discretion to conduct operations of business is given to some person in India would not be sufficient. The word ‘control and management of affairs’ refers to head and brain, which directs the affairs of policy, finance, disposal of profits and such other vital things consisting the general and corporate affairs of the company.

    It held that the place of effective management was not in India on account of the following reasons:

  •             The POA merely empowered the persons in India to conduct the day-to-day affairs of the company.

  •             Directions were issued by the two non-resident shareholders as evidenced by the telephone bills recording the calls made to India from time to time.

  •             The board of directors of the appellant had passed a resolution whereby the authority to take decisions was only with one of the two non-resident shareholders.

    (vi)    SMR Investments Ltd. v. DDIT, 2010 TII 66 ITAT Del-Intl:
    In this case, the orders for sale of shares held by the appellant were placed by a shareholder holding 99% of the shares in the appellant and who was a resident of India. The telephone calls were made from India. The appellant was asked to furnish the passport of the shareholder to verify whether the telephone calls were made from India or not. The passport was not furnished in spite of various opportunities. The AO held that it is the actual place of management of a company and not the place where it ought to manage and control the company that determines the POEM and accordingly he held that the appellant was resident of India. The appellant filed passport copies of a former director of the company and contended that from the passport it was clear that the director was in Mauritius on the dates on which the Board meetings of the Appellant were held. An affidavit of the director was also placed on record. Accordingly, the appellant indicated that the effective control was in Mauritius. The Revenue doubted the authenticity of the signatures. In view of this, the Tribunal restored the matter to the AO for examining the authenticity of the documents and deciding the issue afresh/ de novo. The facts and the Tribunal’s decision suggest that the Tribunal accepted that it was not the place where the orders were placed but the place where the board meetings were held that decided the POEM.

    DTC:

    The DTC Bill proposes to introduce a definition of POEM as follows:

    “(192) ‘place of effective management’ means —

    (i)    the place where the board of directors of the company or its executive directors, as the case may be, make their decisions; or
    (ii)    in a case where the board of directors routinely approve the commercial and strategic decisions made by the executive directors or officers of the company, the place where such executive directors or officers of the company perform their functions.”

    Summary:

    The OECD Commentary of 2008, specifically re-moves the reference to the board of directors. It reiterates the emphasis on the place where the decisions are made in substance. The UN Commentary provides for a number of circumstances to be taken into account for determining the POEM. It also uses the word ‘actually manage and control’ suggesting that it is the place of actual management which is relevant. The Commentary also states that the place that plays a leading part in the management of the company from economic and functional point of view is also a circumstance to be considered. It is not clear from this, whether the Commentary alludes to top management or the day-to-day management. It is also not clear as to how the place where the accounting books are kept could constitute a circumstance in deciding the POEM.

    5.2 So far as the judgment in Smallwood is concerned, it provides a useful guidance in inter-pretation of POEM, a concept which will acquire paramount significance in the DTC regime. A finer reading of the judgment reveals that the Court has accepted both OECD and UN Commentary’s (partly) understanding of concept of POEM. It has given weightage to the place where key and real topmost-level decisions were made in substance and held that place to be POEM. This place need not necessarily be the same place where Board meetings are conducted. In the Court’s view, the place where the whole tax planning scheme was orchestrated constituted the POEM.

    In the Indian context, the AAR/Tribunals have taken diverse views on the matter?: On the one hand it has been held that the place where the board of directors takes the decision is the POEM. On the other hand it is also been held that POEM refers to a place from where the day-to-day affairs of the company are managed and controlled. Again, factors other than the directors e.g., Company Secretary, Registered Office, etc. have also been considered to hold that the POEM was in Mauritius. Further, the Tribunal has held that the POEM refers to the place where all the employees were based and from where the revenue generating assets (ships) are put in service. In that case, the Tribunal went behind the Board meetings.

    It appears that:

    (a)    the POEM is at the place where the key man-agement decisions are actually taken. This is also supported by the dictionary meaning of the word ‘effective’ as ‘existing in fact, actual’ (www.thefreedictionary.com) and ‘real’ [see Worley Persons Services Pty. Ltd., In re (2009) 312 ITR 273 (AAR) interpreting ‘effectively connected’].

  

(b)    the place where the day-to-day affairs of the company are carried on does not constitute its POEM;
   
(c)    the factors such as company secretary, regis-tered office may not be relevant in the overall scheme of determination of POEM;
 
  (d)    the POEM is not necessarily at a place where the employees are based;
   
(e)    ordinarily it is the place where the board meet-ings are held is the POEM. However, this is a rebuttable presumption. If facts reveal that key management decisions are really or are actually taken at a place other than the place where board meetings are held and the board merely follows instruction or works within the framework provided by other person, then the POEM will lie at a place from where such other person instructs;
  
(f)    for the above, the onus would be on the Tax Department to prove that POEM lies at a place other than the place where board meetings are held. Some facts which may be relevant in deciding whether POEM lies at the place where the Board meetings are held or at some other place are:
   
(i)    Minutes of board meeting: Whether minutes provide evidence of elaborate discussion at the time of passing a particular resolution;
 
  (ii)    Composite of directors on the board:
    Their reputation, qualification, experience, attendance in board meetings, etc.
   
(iii)    Documentation of commercial rationale behind taking a particular decision.
   
(iv)    Residency of directors. If meeting are held through audio/video conferencing reason for their physical absence.
    (v)    Power of Attorney (POA) under which some functions of Board are delegated: Whether such POA is under the authority of the board and there are sufficient checks and control whereby actions taken by the attorney holder are monitored and controlled.

Taxability of Professional Fees Payable to a Head-Hunting Company in USA — A case study

In a series of articles published in this Journal (November, 2009 to March, 2010) the concept of ‘Make Available’ used in the article in the Tax Treaties relating to ‘Fees for Technical Services (FTS)’ or ‘Fees for Included Services (FIS)’ has been discussed and analysed. We have also analysed in brief, Indian judicial decisions dealing with the subject and provided relevant information regarding all Indian DTAAs and related aspects and issues dealing with the subject. In this case study, we have sought to illustrate application of this concept.

1. Facts of the case :

    1.1 An educational foundation established by a leading Indian industrialist is in the process of setting up a world-class educational complex/university to provide cutting-edge higher education in all streams of physical sciences, technology, medicine and management services.

    1.2 The foundation has engaged a consultant in the USA to conduct a search for the Vice-Chancellor for the University and to locate, screen, interview and present qualified candidates for this position in the foundation.

    1.3 The main financial terms and conditions of the contract are as follow :

    Professional fees :

    The consultant works on a retainer arrangement. The minimum retainer fee for this assignment will be $ 1,50,000. The fee will be invoiced in four instalments.

    Engagement expenses :

    The consultant will also be reimbursed for direct and indirect expenses (‘Reimbursable Expenses’), which are invoiced on a monthly basis.

    Direct expenses are costs associated with the candidate development, interview and overall selection process.

    Examples include candidate’s travel, consultants’ travel to meet with the client and to interview candidates, project-specific advertising and mailing costs. Indirect expenses are costs that are attributable to client projects as incremental costs, but are not possible to be attributed to each individual project. Examples include com unications, courier and external database research costs.

    1.3 The consultant is a company incorporated in the USA and is a Tax Resident of USA and that it does not have a Permanent Establishment in India.

2. Issues for consideration :

    In the context of deducting tax at source from payment of Professional Fees to the consultant and reimbursement of expenses, the major issues for our consideration are as follows :

    (a) Whether the Professional Fees payable under the contract constitute ‘Fees for Included Services’ (FIS) as defined in Article 12(4) & (5) of the Double Taxation Avoidance Agreement (DTAA) with the USA ?

    (b) Whether the said Professional Fees payable are taxable as ‘Business Profits’ under Article 7 read with Article 5 of the DTAA with the USA ? In other words, whether service activities of the consultant constitute a Service PE in term of Article 5(2)(l) of the India-USA DTAA ?

3. Analysis and observations :

    3.1 Fees for Included Services — Meaning thereof :

    The DTAA with the USA uses the term ‘Fees for Included Services’ (FIS), whereas other tax treaties use the term ‘Fees for Technical Services’ (FTS); both terms essentially relate to rendering of technical services. However, the term FIS has been defined differently in the India-USA DTAA when compared with the definition of the term FTS as used/defined in other tax treaties.

    3.2 Definition of FIS in Tax Treaty with USA :

    The term FIS has been defined in Article 12(4). Paragraphs (4), (5) and (6) of Article 12 of the India-USA DTAA are reproduced below :

    Article 12 — Royalties and fees for included services

    1.

    2.

    3. The term ‘royalties’ as used in this article means :

    (a) …………………

    (b) …………………

        4. For purposes of this article, ‘fees for included services’ means payments of any kind to any person in consideration for the rendering of any technical or consultancy services (including through the provision of services of technical or other personnel) if such services?:

        b. are ancillary and subsidiary to the application or enjoyment of the right, property or information for which a payment described in paragraph 3 is received; or

        a. make available technical knowledge, experience, skill, know-how or processes, or consist of the development and transfer of a technical plan or technical design.

        5. Notwithstanding paragraph 4, ‘fees for included services’ does not include amounts paid:
        a. for services that are ancillary and subsidiary, as well as inextricably and essentially linked, to the sale of property other than a sale described in paragraph 3(a);

        b. for services that are ancillary and subsidiary to the rental of ships, aircraft, containers or other equipment used in connection with the operation of ships or aircraft in international traffic;     
    c. for teaching in or by educational institutions;
        d. for services for the personal use of the individual or individuals making the payment; or
        e. to an employee of the person making the payments or to any individual or firm of individuals (other than a company) for professional services as defined in Article 15 (Independent Personal Services).

        6. The provisions of paragraphs 1 and 2 shall not apply if the beneficial owner of the royalties or fees for included services, being a resident of a Contracting State, carries on business in the other Contracting State, in which the royalties or fees for included services arise, through a permanent establishment situated therein, or performs in that other State independent personal services from a fixed base situated therein, and the royal-ties or fees for included services are attributable to such permanent establishment or fixed base. In such case the provisions of Article 7 (business profits) or Article 15 (Independent Personal Ser-vices), as the case may be, shall apply.

     7.   (a)
        (b)
        

    8.    …………………

    3.3    Extract from the Memorandum of Understanding dated 15th May, 1989:

    The Governments of India and the USA have signed a Memorandum of Understanding intended to give guidance in interpreting various aspects of Article 12 relating to the scope of ‘included services’ i.e., paragraph 4 of Article 12. We reproduce below the relevant extracts from the said MOU. Various examples given in the MOU have not been reproduced here as the same are different from the facts of the case and therefore, not relevant.

    Memorandum of understanding concerning fees for included services in Article 12

    Paragraph 4 (in general):

    This memorandum describes in some detail the category of services defined in paragraph 4 of Article 12 (Royalties and Fees for Included Services). It also provides examples of services intended to be covered within the definition of included services and those intended to be excluded, either because they do not satisfy the tests of paragraph 4, or because, notwithstanding the fact that they meet the tests of paragraph 4, they are dealt with under paragraph 5. The examples in either case are not intended as an exhaustive list but rather as illustrating a few typical cases. For ease of understanding, the examples in this memorandum describe U.S. persons providing services to Indian persons, but the rules of Article 12 are reciprocal in application.

    Article 12 includes only certain technical and con-sultancy services. By technical services, we mean in this context services requiring expertise in a technology. By consultancy services, we mean in this context advisory services. The categories of technical and consultancy services are to some extent overlapping because a consultancy service could also be a technical service. However, the category of consultancy services also includes an advisory service, whether or not expertise in a technology is required to perform it.

    Under paragraph 4, technical and consultancy services are considered included services only to the following extent?: (1) as described in paragraph 4(a), if they are ancillary and subsidiary to the application or enjoyment of a right, property or information for which a royalty payment is made; or (2) as described in paragraph 4(b), if they make available technical knowledge, experience, skill, know-how, or processes, or consist of the development and transfer of a technical plan or technical design. Thus, under paragraph 4(b), consultancy services which are not of a technical nature cannot be included services.

    Paragraph 4(a):

    Paragraph 4(a) of Article 12 refers to technical or consultancy services that are ancillary and subsidiary to the application or enjoyment of any right, property, or information for which a payment described in paragraph 3(a) or    is received. Thus, paragraph 4(a) includes technical and consultancy services that are ancillary and subsidiary to the application or enjoyment of an intangible for which a royalty is received under a licence or sale as described in paragraph 3(a), as well as those ancillary and subsidiary to the application or enjoyment of industrial, commercial, or scientific equipment for which a royalty is received under a lease as described in paragraph 3(b).

    It is understood that in order for a service fee to be considered ‘ancillary and subsidiary’ to the application or enjoyment of some right, property, or information for which a payment described in paragraph 3(a) or (b) is received, the service must be related to the application or enjoyment of the right, property or information. In addition, the clearly predominant purpose of the arrangement under which the payment of the service fee and such other payment are made must be the application or enjoyment of the right, property, or information described in paragraph 3. The question of whether the service is related to the application or enjoyment of the right, property, or information described in paragraph 3 and whether the clearly predominant purpose of the arrangement is such application or enjoyment must be determined by reference to the facts and circumstances of each case. Factors which may be relevant to such determination (although not necessarily controlling) include:

        1. the extent to which the services in question facilitate the effective application or enjoyment of the right, property, or information described in paragraph 3;

        2. the extent to which such services are customarily provided in the ordinary course of business arrangements involving royalties described in paragraph 3;

        3. whether the amount paid for the services (or which would be paid by parties operating at arm’s length) is an insubstantial portion of the combined payments for the services and the right, property, or information described in paragraph 3;

        4. whether the payment made for the services and the royalty described in paragraph 3 are made under a single contract (or a set of related contracts); and

        5. whether the person performing the services is the same person as, or a related person to, the person receiving the royalties described in paragraph 3 (for this purpose, persons are considered related if their relationship is described in Article 9 (Associated Enterprises) or if the person providing the service is doing so in connection with an overall arrangement which includes the payer and recipient of the royalties).

    To the extent that services are not considered ancillary and subsidiary to the application or enjoyment of some right, property, or information for which a royalty payment under paragraph 3 is made, such services shall be considered ‘included services’ only to the extent that they are described in paragraph 4(b).

    Paragraph 4(b):

    Paragraph 4(b) of Article 12 refers to technical or consultancy services that make available to the person acquiring the service technical knowledge, experience, skill, know-how, or processes, or consist of the development and transfer of a technical plan or technical design to such person. (For this purpose, the person acquiring the service shall be deemed to include an agent nominee, or transferee of such person.) This category is narrower than the category described in paragraph 4(a), because it excludes any service that does not make technology available to the person acquiring the service. Generally speaking, technology will be considered ‘made available’ when the person acquiring the service is enabled to apply the technology. The fact that the provision of the service may require technical input by the person providing the service does not per se mean that technical knowledge, skills, etc., are made available to the person purchasing the service, within the meaning of paragraph 4(b). Similarly, the use of a product which embodies technology shall not per se be considered to make the technology available”.

    (Emphasis supplied)

    3.4    In view of the above, in our opinion, the Professional Fees payable to the consultant do not satisfy the requirements of either clause or clause (b) of Article 12(4) as above and therefore the Professional Fees payable by the foundation to the consultant do not constitute FIS under Article 12(4) of the India-USA DTAA.

    3.5    Thus, we are of the opinion that professional fees payable by the foundation to the consultant do not constitute FIS as defined in Article 12(4) of the India-USA DTAA. We may, however, add that the same would constitute Fees for Technical Services (FTS) u/s.9(1)(vii) of the Income-tax Act, but in view of S. 90(2) of the Act, the Foundation has the option to be governed by the provisions of the Tax Treaty, if the same are more beneficial.

    However, though the payment would not constitute FIS, one has to consider whether the payment would be taxable as Business Profits. We shall discuss the issue in the following paragraphs.

    3.6  Whether the consultant’s activities in India    would constitute a Service PE  :


    Article 5 of the DTAA defines the term ‘Permanent Establishment’ as under  :
    “Article 5 — Permanent Establishment
    1.   For the purposes of this Convention, the term ‘permanent establishment’ means a fixed place of business through which the business of an enterprise is wholly or partly carried on.
    2.   The term ‘permanent establishment’ includes especially  :
    (a)  a place of management;
    (b)  a branch;
    (c)  an office;
    (d)  a factory;
    (e)  a workshop;
    (f)  a mine, an oil or gas well, a quarry, or any other place of extraction of natural resources;
    (g)  a warehouse, in relation to a person providing storage facilities for others;
    (h)  a farm, plantation or other place where agriculture, forestry, plantation or related activities are carried on;
    (i)  a store or premises used as a sales outlet;
    (j)  an installation or structure used for the exploration or exploitation of natural resources, but only if so used for a period of more than 120 days in any twelve-month period;
    (k)  a building site or construction, installation or assembly project or supervisory activities in connection therewith, where such site, project or activities (together with other such sites, projects or activities, if any) continue for a period of more than 120 days in any twelve-month period;
    (l)  the furnishing of services, other than included services as defined in Article 12 (royalties and fees for included services), within a Contracting State by an enterprise through employees or other personnel, but only if  :
    (i)  activities of that nature continue within that State for a period or periods aggregating to more than 90 days within any twelve-month period; or
    (ii)  the services are performed within that State for a related enterprise [within the meaning of paragraph 1 of Article 9 (associated enterprises)].
    3.   Notwithstanding the preceding provisions of this article, the term ‘permanent establishment’ shall be deemed not to include any one or more of the following  :
      (a)  the use of facilities solely for the purpose of storage, display, or occasional delivery of goods or merchandise belonging to the enterprise;
      (b)  the maintenance of a stock of goods or merchandise belonging to the enterprise solely for the purpose of storage, display or occasional delivery;
      (c)  the maintenance of a stock of goods or merchandise belonging to the enterprise solely for the purpose of processing by another enterprise;
         (d)     the    maintenance    of    a    fixed    place    of    business    
    solely for the purpose of purchasing goods or merchandise, or of collecting information, for the enterprise;
         (e)     the    maintenance    of    a    fixed    place    of    business    
    solely for the purpose of advertising, for the supply    of    information,    for    scientific    research    or    for other activities which have a preparatory or    auxiliary    character,     for     the    enterprise.

        4. Not relevant

      5.  Not relevant

      6.  Not relevant”
    What is relevant for our purposes is Clause (l) of paragraph 2 of Article 5. All the Professional Services will be rendered in/from the USA, and, the con-sultant’s visits to India in this connection are not likely to exceed 90 days in a year. In other words, the professional activities of the consultant to the foundation would be for less than 90 days within 12-month period. The payee company does not appear to be covered under any other paragraph of Article 5 of the treaty. Therefore, the service activities of the consultant would not constitute a PE in India within the meaning of Article 5, and therefore, the professional fees receivable by the consultant, would not be taxable as Business Profits under Article 7 of the Tax Treaty.

    3.7    In view of the above, the foundation need not deduct any TDS from payment of Professional Fees to the consultant.

     4.   Reimbursement of expenses:

    Reimbursement of expenses will stand on the same footing as payment of Professional Fees. In view of discussion in paragraphs 3.1 to 3.8, the foundation need not deduct any TDS from reimbursement of various expenses under the said Contract.

       5. Precautions:

    The foundation should obtain a Tax Residency Certificate from the consultant to the effect that it is a tax resident of the USA in terms of Article 4 of India-USA DTAA to ensure that it is eligible to access the India-USA DTAA and that it does not have and is not likely to have a Permanent Establishment in India under Article 5 of the Treaty.

    6.    Summation:

    We wish to reiterate that the concept of ‘make available’ is still continuously subject to judicial scrutiny under different circumstances and in respect of various kinds of services. In some cases, there are conflicting/differing views and in some cases the concept has not been considered/applied while examining the taxability of the payment of FIS/FTS. As the law is not yet settled, continuous and ongoing monitoring and study of various judicial pronouncements would be necessary for the proper understanding and practical application of the concept in practice.

CONTROL SELF ASSESSMENT IN RETAIL STORE AUDITS

Internal Audit

Every successful audit is based on sound planning and an
atmosphere of constructive involvement and communication between the auditor and
the auditee. The purpose of writing this article is to provide insights on the
use of a tool for organisations with dispersed geographical locations,
especially the retail sector.

Any corporate body establishes Internal Controls & Procedures
to ensure that employees abide by laws, regulations and human resources policies
when performing tasks. One of the many tools available to gauge internal control
effectiveness for organisations is the Control Self Assessment (CSA) activities.

Definition of Control :

The Institute of Internal Auditors (IIA) defines control and
control processes as :

“A control is any action taken by management, the board, and
other parties to manage risk and increase the likelihood that established
objectives and goals will be achieved. The management plans, organises, and
directs performance of sufficient actions to provide reasonable assurance that
objectives and goals will be achieved.

Control processes are the policies, procedures, and
activities that are part of a control framework, designed to ensure that risks
are contained within the risk tolerances established by the risk management
process. Risk management is a process to identify, assess, manage, and control
potential events or situations to provide reasonable assurance regarding the
achievement of the organisation’s objectives.”

Generally, controls are of two types :

Preventive controls :

Designed to discourage errors or prevent irregularities from
occurring. They are proactive controls that help prevent a loss. Examples :
Separation of duties, proper authorisation, adequate documentation, and physical
control over assets.

Detective controls :

Designed to find errors or irregularities after they have
occurred. Examples : Reviews, analyses, variance analyses, reconciliations,
physical inventories and audits.

Internal controls are policies and instructions within an
organisation that top leadership puts into place to prevent losses resulting
from malfunction, employee carelessness, error, fraud and neglect. The
Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, introduced as a consequences of internal control
failures across the globe, has emphasised that the need for internal control
compliance & documentation.

From a retail perspective, there is an increased attention to
governance, compliance and risk management spread across many thousands of
locations. This necessitates retailers to implement an appropriate store
compliance process in order to monitor the identification of issues and remedial
measures. Primary focus of retailers is on reducing costs, increasing margins,
reducing shrinks, balancing inventory levels, managing vendors, tackling
regulators and attracting customers.

An effective store compliance process can be achieved through
traditional store audits or through a self assessment technique.




 Traditional Audits :



  •  In a traditional audit, the internal audit team
    identifies issues and suggests remedial measures. The field work is
    undertaken by the audit team which visits the stores. The major challenge in
    this traditional approach is that all stores may not be visited and/or there
    can be infrequent coverage. The audit team personnel require training,
    travel budgets and their presence ‘interrupts’ store operations. Undoubtedly
    such an approach is costly, untimely and at times ineffective.


  Control self assessment :



  •   Control self assessment is operations oriented. It provides auditors with
    additional hands and eyes, specialised expertise, operational
    knowledge and a commitment to implement internal audit recommendations. To
    implement the CSA methodology, it is imperative that there is a buy-in by
    the top management. Training to all operating managers is another critical
    pre-requisite. CSA is a cost effective and efficient alternative for wider
    store audit coverage. Wider coverage leads to increased availability of
    information for managing and monitoring retail operations. CSA significantly
    increases the accountability of the store managers who, in any case, are the
    control owners and places the responsibility of control in their hands.




Why CSA ?

Who is responsible for internal control? The auditors, right?
Wrong! Everyone plays a part in the internal control system. Ultimately, it is
the management’s responsibility to ensure that controls are in place. That
responsibility is delegated to each area of operation, which must ensure that
internal controls are established, properly documented and maintained. Every
employee has some responsibility towards the functioning of this internal
control system. Therefore, all employees need to be aware of the concept and
purpose of internal controls. Internal audit’s role is to assist management in
their overlooking and operating responsibilities through independent audits and
consultations designed to evaluate and promote the systems of internal control.

This is where CSA, as a technique, can play an important
role. Modern Internal Auditors need to understand and practise this technique.

CSA defined :

The Institute of Internal Auditors (IIA) defines Control Self
Assessment as :

“Control self assessment (CSA) is a technique that allows
managers and work teams directly involved in business units, functions or
processes to participate in assessing the organisation’s risk management and
control processes. In its various forms, CSA can cover objectives, risks,
controls and processes.”

Internal auditors can utilise CSA programmes for gathering
relevant information about risks and controls; for focussing audit work on high
risk, unusual areas; and to forge greater collaboration with operating managers
and work teams. Business Managers can utilise CSA programmes to clarify business
objectives and to identify and deal with the risks in achieving those
objectives.

Internal auditors, in a consulting role, often act as facilitators to help managers in the assessment of risks and controls. Involvement of people working in evaluation of risks and controls utilises the expertise of the organisation, increases buy-in to any action items and focusses efforts on important business activities.

However, CSA is not a complete process by itself. It does not substitute the auditing effort. The audit function has to validate the CSA results, develop the remedial action plan and ensure a timely follow-up on issues identified during the CSA process. This combined effort is the most cost effective and result-oriented method of monitoring all stores on a regular basis.

Benefits of CSA in retail:

  •     Better buy-in of results because of the participative and collaborative approach.

  •     Does not require a battalion of internal auditors.

  •     Ensures complete coverage of all stores.

  •     Optimum utilisation of all resources for an audit.

  •     Cost effective.

  •     Better appreciation of issues since the store managers have a more intimate eye on store operations.

  •     Focus is on key risks & controls which is monitored by the corporate audit team.

  •     Store managers can give more appropriate remedial measures requiring corporate audit only to review and follow-up on the remedial plans.

  •     Helps store managers to understand and assume responsibility and accountability for effective control and risk.

Pre-requisites of an effective CSA in retail:

  •     Mature state of operations.

  •     Corporate culture should support and value communication, openness and trust.

  •     Organisation should have clear objectives.
  •     Internal Audit should study existing processes deeply.

  •     Clearly defined parameters for CSA.

  •     System to collect, corroborate and analyse information collected through CSA.

  •     Training of staff.

    Lastly, ‘above par’ facilitation skills of the Internal Auditor. In most successful implementation of CSA, the top-most reason for successes has been the facilitation skills of the Internal Auditor.

Undoubtedly, CSA is an integrated part of the audit process for mitigating risks and adding value to the organisations, especially in retail.

 

Sr.

Review
area

Compliance status

 

 

No.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(Yes/No/NA)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cashiering

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Entire cash sales for the day is deposited

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

All
credit card sales for the day are supported by credit card slips

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

Sales
through other mode of payments (MOP) such as gift coupons, etc. are

 

 

 

 

backed by the MOP

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

Petty
cash, float cash & sales cash are kept separately

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

Petty
cash expenditure is authorised by store manager

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

Petty
cash expenditure is recorded on a daily basis

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Inventory

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Goods
receipt notes are prepared for all goods received in the store

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

Damaged
goods are segregated and kept separately in the backroom

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9

Expired
goods are identified and kept separately in the backroom

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10

All
damaged and expired goods received during the month are sent back to the

 

 

 

 

distribution centre/vendor in the last week of the month

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

11

Physical
inventory verification is carried out as per plan

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Front Office Management

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

12

Goods
are arranged on the shelves as per the planogram of the store

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

13

Correct
labels are displayed on the shelves

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

14

High-shrink
items are kept near the cashier

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

15

Near-expiry
items are identified and marked down as per policy

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

17

Promotion
schemes launched in the store are properly updated in the billing

 

 

 

 

software

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Legal & Compliance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

18

All
certificates requiring mandatory display are displayed

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

19

All
certificates expiring during the month are sent for renewal

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

20

Notice,
if any, received from any government department is immediately

 

 

 

 

communicated to the central legal department of the company

Yes / No / NA

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

IMF — India’s growth strategy

New Page 1

68 IMF — India’s growth strategy

levitra

Suggestions on the draft Point of Taxation (for services provided or received in India) Rules, 2010

fiogf49gjkf0d

Representation

4th
November, 2010


To,

The Chairman,
Central Board of Excise & Customs,
Department of Revenue,
Ministry of Finance & Company Affairs,
North Block,
New Delhi-110001.

Dear
Sir,


Subject
: Suggestions on the draft Point of Taxation (for services provided or received
in India) Rules, 2010



The Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society (BCAS) is a voluntary organisation established on 6th July 1949. BCAS has about 8,000 members from all over the country at present and is a principle-centred and learning-oriented organisation promoting quality service and excellence in the profession of Chartered Accountancy and is a catalyst for bringing out better and more effective Government policies & laws and for clean and efficient administration and governance. We make representations regularly on Direct and Indirect Taxes.

Please find attached suggestions on the draft Point of Taxation (for services provided or received in India) Rules, 2010 (‘Rules’).

Thanking you,

Yours truly,

For Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society

Mayur B. Nayak    
President 

Govind G. Goyal
Chairman Indirect Taxes & Allied Laws Committee

Encl : Suggestions

Bombay Chartered Accountants’
Society

Suggestions on the draft
Point of Taxation (for services provided or received in India) Rules, 2010
(‘Rules’)

Rules to be restricted only
for the purpose of ascertaining the date for determination of rate of service
tax and not for altering the time for payment of service tax from the present
receipt basis to accrual/invoice basis/receipt whichever is earlier.

1. The Point of Taxation
(for Services Provided or Received in India) Rules, 2010 (‘Rules’) are sought to
be issued in exercise of the powers conferred on the Government of India u/s.
94(2)(hhh) of the Chapter V of Finance Act, 1994 (hereinafter referred to as the
‘Act’), which is the law governing service tax.

2. The purposes of the draft
rules as stated in the preamble are :

    (i) To introduce clarity and certainty as to the date from which a new service would become payable

    (ii) To provide for the above in the context of continuous supply of services

    (iii) To link the liability to pay tax to provision of service, raising of the invoice or receipt of payment for service provided or to be provided, whichever is the earliest

    (iv) To bring the service tax law in line with Central Excise Laws and VAT laws; and

    (v) To smoothen transition to GST.

3. However, an important
point to be noted is that the Point of Taxation (for Services Provided or
Received in India) Rules, 2010 are sought to be issued pursuant to S. 94(2)(hhh)
which is dealing with ‘the date for determination of rate of service tax and the
place of provision of taxable services’. Hence in the present context, the Rules
must confine themselves primarily to prescribing the date for determination of
the rate of service tax whenever there are changes in the rate of service tax.

It cannot legally entrench
into other areas such as linking the liability to pay tax to provision of
service, raising of the invoice or receipt of payment for service provided or to
be provided, whichever is earliest or imposition of service tax on new services.
These areas would be outside the legal scope of S. 94(2)(hhh) of the Act.

4. Secondly, the charge of
service tax is on the value of ‘taxable services’. S. 65(105) defines ‘taxable
service’ as ‘any service provided or to be provided’ to ‘any person’, ‘client’,
‘customer’, etc. Thus, S. 65(105) which defines ‘taxable services’ covers — (a)
services ‘provided’; and (b) services agreed ‘to be provided’ within the ambit
of service tax. The intention is to collect tax when advance payments are
received for services to be provided. Thus, service tax would be payable even on
advances received. Thus, the taxable events would be two :

(a) a service provided;
and

(b) a service agreed to be
provided.

‘Taxable event’ with regard to services ‘provided’ is identified by the time of provision of the service and with regard to services ‘to be provided’ is identified by time of payment towards value of service to be provided. This has a significant bearing on the rate of tax. Thus where there has been a provision of services but no monies towards the value of services have been received, the rate of tax prevailing at the time of provision of services would apply. Similarly, in cases where monies have been received towards the value of services but the services are yet to be provided, the rate of tax prevailing at the time of receipt of payment towards the value of services would apply. These propositions are implicit in the law [S. 65(105), S. 66 & S. 67] and the Service Tax Rules, 1994 (Rule 6). The Rules sought to be notified must not alter these provisions but must make them explicit. Thus the relevant date for the purpose of determination of rate of tax would be the ‘date of provision of service’ or ‘the date of receipt of money, whichever is earlier. This is the present understanding.

5.    Thirdly, it would be better not to disturb the existing arrangement of paying service tax when monies for taxable services provided or to be provided are received. The changeover from the present dispensation which allows payment of tax on receipt of the payment (including advances) to a system where tax is paid to the Central Govern-ment on provision of service, raising of the invoice or receipt of payment for service provided or to be provided, whichever is earliest would involve several issues :

(i)    Changes in the Act to provide for the taxable event at the time of supply as in the UK. VAT law.

(ii)    Change in Rule 6 of the Service Tax Rules, 1994.

(iii)    Changes in Cenvat Credit Rules,2004 which allow credit of input services only when they are paid.

(iv)    Further, there are no provisions relating to bad debt adjustment or reduction in the invoices in case monies are not received or monies are received less as compared to the invoice amount. Hence the service providers would have to pay tax even on monies not received. Thus, the service provider would be out of pocket if they have to pay service tax on invoices issued but the monies for the service are not received.

(v)    The payment of tax upon issue of invoices without having received the payment would mean that the tax would have to be financed by internal accruals or borrowings which in most cases would be difficult for service providers.

(vi)    The provision of service is quite different compared to sale/manufacture of a product. Firstly, services are intangible unlike goods where the sale/clearance of a product is verifiable physically by delivery challans, transport documents, etc. In case of services the delivery of a service cannot be verified. Out of the three events — (i) provision of services; (ii) issue of invoice and (iii) receipt of payment, the last event viz., receipt of payment is historically and factually verifiable by the Department with a greater degree of certainty. Secondly, the service provider may not have a lien on the service unlike in case of goods.

There are no documents of title to services which can be put through the bank and hence the recoverability is suspect. The rights of an unpaid seller of goods are well guarded and recognised in law as against the rights of an unpaid service provider. Hence it may not be correct to equate goods and services. Thirdly, in case of Central Excise law and VAT law, the tax is not payable on advances. Thus, the purpose of the Rules viz., to bring the service tax law in line with Excise law and VAT law is not achieved nor is it necessary.

(vii)    Further there will be several issues when there is a transition from payment of service tax on receipt basis to/payment of service tax on provision of service, raising of the invoice or receipt of payment for service provided or to be provided, whichever is earliest. There would be several system and software issues. This needs to be avoided.

In this regard, it has to be appreciated that the payment of service tax on receipt of money towards provision of services was in vogue since 1998 and has worked quite well mainly due to its simplicity and more importantly, since it provides a more factually verifiable basis for the Department to collect service tax.

6.    In view of the above, it is submitted that the Rules must confine themselves only to provide for the date for determination of rate of service tax.

7.    Accordingly, a suggested draft of the Rules centred around carrying out the objective viz. prescribing the date for determination of rate of service tax is attached herewith marked Annexure A. Basically, the suggested draft revolves around an important maxim that the rate of service tax would be the ‘date of provision of service or receipt of payment of money for services, whichever is earlier’.

Other suggestions:

8.    In Rule 6 of the draft Rules, it has been provided that where the payment has been made before the date of introduction of service tax on a service, no tax shall be payable to the extent of payment received. In our view, this provision must be made by way of an exemption notification and cannot find place in the proposed Rules.

9.    A closely related issue is with regard to determination of value where invoiced amount is in foreign currency. In such cases, the Service tax (Determination of Value) Rules, 2006 must be amended to provide that the rate of exchange applicable shall be the rate prevailing on the ‘date of provision of service or receipt of payment of money for services, whichever is earlier’.

Draft of Service Tax (Determination of the Rate of Tax) Rules, 2010
 
In exercise of the powers conferred by clause (hhh)    of Ss.(2) of S. 94 of the Finance Act, 1994 (32 of 1994), the Central Government hereby makes the following rules, namely:

Short-title and commencement:

1.    (1) These Rules shall be called the Service Tax (Determination of the rate of tax) Rules, 2010.

(2) They shall come into force on the date of their publication in the Official Gazette.

 

Definitions:

2.    In these Rules, unless the context otherwise requires:

(a)    ‘Act’ means the Finance Act, 1994 (32 of 1994);

(b)    ‘continuous supply of service’ means any service which is provided, or to be provided, under a contract, for a period exceeding one year and for a consideration the whole or part of which is determined periodically and includes any service which the Central Government, by a Notification, prescribes to be a continuous supply of service, whether or not subject to any condition;

(c)    ‘Invoice’ shall have the meaning assigned to it in Rule 4A of the Service Tax Rules, 1994 and shall include any bill or challan as prescribed therein;

(d)    Words and expressions not defined in these Rules but defined in the Act or the Rules made thereunder shall have the meanings, in-sofar as maybe, assigned to them in the Act or the Rules made thereunder.

Date for determining the rate of service tax:

3.    For the purposes of ascertaining the date for determining the rate of service tax, the following provisions shall apply, namely:

(a)    where the service has been provided and no payment has been received, the rate of service tax shall be the rate prevailing on the date when the services are provided and if for any reason date of provision of services is not determinable, the date of receipt of money towards the service provided or to be provided shall be date for determining the rate of service tax.

(b)    If, before the provision of service, the service provider receives a payment in respect of the service to be provided, the rate of service tax shall be the rate prevailing on the date of payment to the extent covered by the payment.

Explanation: An interest-free refundable deposit shall not be considered as a ‘receipt of payment in respect of the service to be provided’. However, if the terms of the contract provide that such interest-free refundable deposit is adjustable against the consideration payable by the service receiver, then the date of adjustment shall be considered as the date of receipt of payment.

Continuous supply of service:

4.    In case of continuous supply of services, where the whole or part of the value is determined or payable periodically or from time to time, the rate of service tax shall be the rate prevailing at the following times:

(i)    If the date of payment is prescribed in the contract, the date on which the payment is liable to be made by the service receiver, irrespective of whether or not any invoice has been raised or any payment received by the service provider;

(ii)    If the payment is to be made on the completion of an event, the time of completion of that event;

(iii)    If the date of payment is not prescribed in the contract, each time when the service provider receives the payment, or issues an invoice, whichever is earlier.

Provided that the clauses (i) to (iii) shall be applied sequentially for the purposes of this rule.

Explanation: Where service tax is payable as a service recipient the date of issue of invoice has to be understood as date of receipt of invoice by the service recipient.

Associated enterprises:

5.    The rate of tax in respect of transactions between associated enterprises shall be the rate prevailing on the date on which the payment has been made, or the date of debit or credit in books of accounts, or issuance of invoice, whichever is earlier.

Explanation: Where service tax is payable as a service recipient the date of ‘issuance of invoice’ has to be understood as date of receipt of invoice by the service recipient.

Royalties and similar payments:

6.    In respect of royalties and similar payments, where the whole amount of the consideration for the provision of service was not ascertainable at the time when the service was performed, and subsequently the use or the benefit of this service by a person other than the supplier gives rise to any payment of consideration, the rate of service tax shall be the rate prevailing:

(i)    each time that a payment in respect of such use or the benefit is received by the provider; or

(ii)    an invoice is issued by the provider, whichever is earlier.

BCAS/MBN/40    November 9, 2010

To
The Concerned Officer,
Foreign Investment Promotion Board (FIPB),
Government of India,
New Delhi-110001

Dear Sir,

Subject : Submission of Representation on Issue of Shares for Consideration other than Cash

We are pleased to submit our considered represen-tation on the aspects of Foreign Direct Investments with regard to Issue of shares for Consideration other than Cash.

We hope that the same would be useful and would find your favour.

Please feel free to contact us for any further clarification or explanation in the matter.

We shall be pleased to assist you in framing a pragmatic policy on Foreign Direct Investment.

Thanking you,

Yours faithfully,

Mayur B. Nayak
President

Landmark US financial reform Bill passed

New Page 1

51 Landmark US financial reform Bill passed

The Bill would impose tighter regulations on financial firms
and reduce their profits. It would boost consumer protections, force banks to
reduce risky trading and investing activities and set up a new government
process for liquidating troubled financial firms.

Republicans say the Bill would hurt the economy by burdening
businesses with a thicket of new regulations. They also point out that it ducks
the question of how to handle troubled mortgage finance giants Fannie Mae and
Freddie Mac, which Democrats plan to tackle next year.

Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, which own or guarantee half of
all US mortgages, have received a total of about $ 145 billion in taxpayer
bailouts since being seized by the government in September 2008. Their regulator
has said he does not know how much more taxpayer support they will need.

(Source : Business Standard, dated 2-7-2010)


levitra

Proposed recast of Takeover Regulations

fiogf49gjkf0d

Securities Laws

(1) The SEBI (Substantial
Acquisition of Shares and Takeovers) Regulations, 1997 (‘the Regulations’ or
‘the Takeover Regulations’) are, at first impression, a set of Regulations that
has a fairly narrow applicability as they would seem to apply to the occasional
event of company takeovers. However, in reality, the scope of the Regulations is
far broader. They apply in a multitude of situations such as investments by
major investors, regular disclosures, inter-se transfers, sharing of control and
so on. The Regulations were originally notified in 1994 and then replaced by a
fresh set in 1997. Thereafter, there have been several amendments to them.

(2) However, particularly
considering the stakes involved and the wider application, many of the
provisions had to be tested and interpreted repeatedly and several times. This
required appeal to the Supreme Court. Further, the repetitive and sporadic
amendments made the Regulations complex. It was also felt that these amendments
were fire-fighting measures to meet rather than a considered overview of the
whole subject.

(3) SEBI thus set up a
Committee with very learned members from a range of background to reconsider the
Regulations in light of experience of more than a decade and in light of several
complaints and contentious issues. The Committee, after due deliberations and
inviting comments from all concerned, submitted its Report on 19th July 2010
making major recommendations for amending the Takeover code.

(4) The Report is quite
detailed and it not only contains the recommendations for amendments but also
provides a draft of the proposed and rewritten Regulations. Thus, even in legal
terms, it is possible to see what the exact proposed amendments and examine
their implications.

(5) It is worth considering
some important recommendations here since it would help us understand the
existing Regulations better and would also give a glimpse of things to come.
However, while the Report is quite detailed and makes numerous recommendations,
only certain important aspects are discussed here, though we can consider the
amendments in far more detail when they are actually made.

(6)
Increase of threshold limit from 15% to 25% :


(a) Presently, if a person
acquires 15% or more shares in a company, then he is required to make an open
offer for another 20%. Earlier, this threshold limit was 10%. Now, it is
proposed to increase it to 25%. Thus, acquisitions till such holding will only
require disclosures at various stages but no open offer. The increased threshold
would make things easier for large investors such as private equity funds. A
concern widely expressed, however, is that this will make it easier for
‘predators’ to increase their holdings to a larger extent and threaten existing
promoters. However, I do not see what is wrong in an outside investor increasing
his stake, even if the existing Promoters feel threatened. An existing Promoter
seeking to retain his control may well ensure that he invests sufficiently in
the company so as to retain control.

(b) The 25% limit is
apparently derived from the limit beyond which it may be possible to veto
special resolutions. Of course, this is only theoretically true. In practice, a
25% holding would be almost always more than 25% since at least some
shareholders would not come to the meeting and/or would not vote.

(c) A practical significance
of this increase in limit is that significant shareholders below 25% can now
increase their holding up to 24% without having to make an open offer.

(7)
Requirement of making 100% open offer :


(a) It is proposed that the
acquirer making an open offer should offer to buy 100% of the shares held by the
public shareholders instead of the existing just 20% of the capital from the
public shareholders. Thus, for example, if an acquirer acquires the Promoters’
holding of 40% of the share capital, then under existing Regulations, he would
be required to make an offer of another 20% of the share capital from the public
shareholders. If the public response is higher than the offered quantity, the
acceptance is on a proportionate basis. To give an example, if the response is
of 40%, then only half of the shares offered by every such public shareholder
would be accepted.

(b) Under the proposed
Regulations, the offeror would be required to acquire all the shares offered.

(c) This proposal is
strongly criticised on the ground that it would increase the cost of acquisition
since, at least theoretically, the offeror would have be ready to pay for 100%
of the share capital of the company. However, on another plane, it is not
difficult to see the logic and benefit of such a requirement. The existing
requirement allows the Promoters to sell the whole of his shareholding but the
public gets a chance to sell only a lesser quantity of their shares. Often,
takeover of companies are at a price that is at a premium over the ruling market
price. In such a case, the Promoters get the full price for their shares but
shareholders get a partial benefit only. The price of the shares in the market
often falls to the pre-takeover position.

(d) The proposed amendment
thus restores the balance and allows the public also to get the benefit of the
higher price.

(e) Skeptics have also
pointed out that the concern that there would be a higher response than the
existing 20% is theoretical and is not borne out of past experience. In other
words, in the past too, only in a few cases, the response from the public was
more than such 20%.

On the other hand, the
seamless delisting procedure may encourage multinationals to convert their
existing subsidiaries or new acquisitions into wholly-owned subsidiaries. If
this is not done at a fair price, then this could be an unhealthy trend and
deprives the Indian shareholder of sharing in the growth of the target. Thus
these provisions as well as related delisting and buyback provisions need to be
reconsidered.

(8) Voluntary open offer:


    If an acquirer triggers off any of the thresholds requiring a mandatory open offer, he has to offer to acquire 100% of the shares held by the public. However, in case the open offer is purely voluntary, then there is a special dispensation proposed. The acquirer can offer to acquire at least 10% of the equity share capital by way of a voluntary open offer. In such a case, the acquirer would acquire only that extent of shares that are offered within the limit he has proposed. In case of excess response, he would accept proportionately.


    Minimum public shareholding:

    An issue that comes up repetitively and is unfortunately covered by a diverse of provisions of law is that relating to the minimum public shareholding. It is worth reviewing the conceptual issue involved here. When a company makes a public issue, the law requires that a certain minimum percentage of the capital be issued to the public. This percentage has changed over a period of time and hence there are listed companies having differing initial public shareholding. In other words, different companies listed today on the stock exchanges have been subjected to differing initial public holding requirement. The matter is further complicated by the fact that owing to poor legal drafting and legal requirements, the holding of the public in numerous cases has fallen below even such initial public shareholding requirement. Where the public shareholding is very low, the purpose of listing may be lost.

    Over several years now, the government as well as SEBI has been making attempts to ensure that the companies, whose public shareholding is below a specified minimum holding, increase such holding to such minimum level. These attempts have been generally unsuccessful.

    However, while attempts continue to get all listed companies have a minimum specified public shareholding, in the meantime, steps are also taken to ensure that the existing situation does not get worse. That is to say, that existing companies do not cross this minimum shareholding limit and if they have already crossed such limit, they do not go further.

    One such situation where public shareholding can cross such limit is in case of a mandatory open offer under the Takeover Regulations. To take an example, if an acquirer acquires the Promoters’ holding of 60%, then he is required to make an open offer of 20%. The post-open offer holding could thus go to 80%. The Regulations thus provide that in such a case, since the maximum limit of 75% is breached, the acquirer should dilute his holding in the specified manner to at least 75%.

    Under the Report, the recommendation creates a situation where in every case, there is a chance of this limit being breached. The recommendation is that 100% of the public shareholding should be offered to be acquired.

    The Report suggests a better solution to the problem. Firstly, it states that in case the limit is breached, then the acquirer shall scale down his acquisitions from the Promoters as well as the public proportionately, so that the final share-holding of the acquirer is not more than the maximum permissible percentage.

    The alternative situation allowed is a case of delisting where the acquirer may actively pursue delisting of the shares. In such a situation he is permitted to acquire and retain shares beyond this limit. However, this is provided that he actually gets enough shares that are cumulatively beyond the 90% minimum holding required to permit delisting of the shares. If this limit is not reached, delisting is not permitted and the acquirer is required to scale down his acquisitions accordingly.

    A valid criticism against this proposal is that it permits direct delisting and to some extent circumvents the normal delisting requirements. Under the current Regulations, there is an elaborate procedure for delisting whereby the offer price has to be worked out in a certain manner and approval from the shareholders is also required as per the prescribed majority and manner. Further, though the proposal is well intended, it does not alleviate the existing complexity of multiple provisions of law dealing with the same issue.

    Having said this, in fairness, it must be also said that the Committee had to cover a situation where the maximum limit would be breached and within the scope of its mandate it has offered a reasonable compromise. However, ideally, SEBI should separate this issue and provide for a comprehensive solution at one place.

    Creeping acquisitions:

    Finally, an area that has seen numerous amendments in the past with the result that there is a complex set of provisions governing creeping acquisition. As readers may be aware, persons holding more than the threshold limit are permitted to increase their holdings by a specified percentage every year. In other words, they can increase their holding in a creeping manner without requiring an open offer.

    The Report seeks to simplify the provisions relating to creeping acquisitions considerably. Firstly, a uniform creeping acquisition of 5% per annum for all persons having holding between 25% and 75% is proposed. Thus, the elaborate set of existing provisions governing creeping acquisition at various percentages is sought to be dropped. Secondly, even the complications, explicit and implicit, relating to how this creeping acquisition would be counted, are clarified.

    Conclusion:

    It seems to me that the Takeover Regulations are given an importance in the media that is far disproportionate to its actual relevance. There are other serious issues such as insider trading, price manipulation, corporate governance, etc. that need more attention. Having said that, the Takeover Regulations also have relevance directly or indirectly in many areas. Rarely can any financial restructuring, investment, etc. in relation to listed companies be soundly worked out unless the provisions of the Takeover Regulations are kept in mind. Thus, the auditors and even other Chartered Accountants who have some or the other concern with listed companies would need to keep track of these Regulations and amendments thereto.

SUPREME COURT ON PUNISHMENT UNDER SECURITIES LAWS — Prohibition to access securities markets is only a procedural direction

fiogf49gjkf0d

Securities Laws

(1) The Supreme Court has
recently laid down a principle in securities laws that can have far-reaching
effects for existing and future cases. Essentially, it has held that prohibiting
a person from operating in the securities markets is not a ‘punishment’, nor is
it a penalty. That being so, even if SEBI did not have power to so prohibit when
the act complained of took place, and though such power was derived many years
later, such prohibition can still be made for such act. Undoubtedly, this is
because of the peculiar nature of securities laws and their objectives.
Nevertheless, this decision requires us to view securities laws in a different
light and in a special way and hence this decision, though a few months old now,
is worth discussing.

(2) In an extreme sense (and
even to exaggerate a little), SEBI now does not need powers to punish. A change
in the law is sufficient to cover even old violations. Now, SEBI cannot complain
that it does not have enough teeth to deal with wrongdoers !

(3) Let us summarise the
issues involved first. The law gives powers to SEBI to issue various types of
orders against persons who are found to have violated any of the securities
laws. As it happens with experience, the Parliament modifies from time to time
the law and thus the powers may get enhanced or modified later on. Will SEBI be
able to use such enhanced powers even in respect of violations prior to such
amendment ? Will the constitutional protection under Article 20 against
retrospective amendment of law providing for punishment in respect of offences
be available in such a case ? The Supreme Court has answered this question in
the positive in the context of securities laws in the matter of SEBI v. Ajay
Agarwal
.

(4) A brief review of the
facts as stated in the decision is first made. The chronology of events would
particularly need to be noted, since they have direct bearing on the issues
raised and the final decision of the Court.

(5) It appears that the
respondent is the promoter of a company (Appellant is SEBI) that made a public
issue. Without going into more details, it can be summarised that, as per the
decision, there was a factual finding that there were certain material
false statements in the prospectus
for the public issue. Pursuant to this,
SEBI held inquiries and after proceedings SEBI passed the final order (‘the
Order’) in 2004.

(6) The chronology of
important events is as follows. The company issued a prospectus in October 1993
and the public issue was made in November 1993. Thereafter, certain incorrect
statements were found in the prospectus relating to disclosures of pledge of
shareholding of the promoters, dividends, etc. Apparently, these were not
disputed. Finally, SEBI passed an order debarring the respondent from buying,
selling, etc. in the securities markets for 5 years.

(7) This order finally
reached the Supreme Court. The essential issue was, since the order was passed
under certain provisions of the SEBI Act that came into force only in 2002,
whether an order could be made in respect of violations committed in 1993.
SEBI’s point was that the order was passed in 2004, i.e., after the law
was amended. It may be added that there were some prior proceedings and issues
but the Supreme Court was concerned with the final order passed in 2004.

(8) This raises a
fundamental constitutional issue (in the words of the Supreme Court) “the right
of a person not to be convicted of any offence except for violation of a law in
force at the time of the commission of the act charged as an offence and not to
be subject to a penalty greater than that which might have been inflicted under
the law in force at the time of commission of the offence”.

(9) The Supreme Court noted
that for this protection under Article 20 to be available, first, there has to
be an offence and, secondly, such offence should be subject to a
penalty.

(10) The Supreme Court noted
that the respondent was not subjected to any penalty. The Supreme Court first
observed, :

“In the instant case, the
respondent has not been held guilty of committing any offence nor has he been
subjected to any penalty. He has merely been restrained by an order for a
period of five years from associating with any corporate body in accessing the
securities market and also has been prohibited from buying, selling or dealing
in securities for a period of five years.”

(11) Then, the Supreme Court
turned to the issue whether the violation in respect of which SEBI had passed
the order was an ‘offence’ as defined in law. The Supreme Court held as
follows :

“The word ‘offence’ under
Article 20 sub-clause (1) of the Constitution has not been defined under the
Constitution. But Article 367 of the Constitution states that unless the
context otherwise requires, the General Clauses Act, 1897 shall apply for the
interpretation of the Constitution, as it does for the interpretation of an
Act.

If we look at the
definition of ‘offence’ under the General Clauses Act, 1897 it shall mean any
act or an omission made punishable by any law for the time being in force.
Therefore, the order of restrain for a specified period cannot be equated with
punishment for an offence as has been defined under the General Clauses Act.”

(12) The Supreme Court then
analysed the history and object of the SEBI Act and observed as follows :

“If we look at the legislative intent for enacting the said Act, it transpires that the same was enacted to achieve the twin purposes of promoting orderly and healthy growth of securities market and for protecting the interest of the investors. The requirement of such an enactment was felt in view of substantial growth in the capital market by increasing participation of the investors. In fact such enactment was necessary in order to ensure the confidence of the investors in the capital market by giving them some protection.

40. The said Act is pre-eminently a social welfare legislation seeking to protect the interests of common men who are small investors.

41. It is a well-known canon of construction that when the Court is called upon to interpret provisions of a social welfare legislation, the paramount duty of the Court is to adopt such an interpretation as to further the purposes of law and if possible eschew the one which frustrates it.

    42.Keeping this principle in mind if we analyse some of the provisions of the Act, it appears that the Board has been established u/s.3 as a body corporate and the powers and functions of the Board have been clearly stated in Chapter IV and u/s.11 of the said Act.”

    13. Then the Court considered the real nature of the powers that enabled SEBI to pass such an order of restraint. The Court held that this was a procedural Section and any procedural Section can apply to pending as well as future proceedings. The Supreme Court observed:

“Provisions of S. 11-B being procedural in nature can be applied retrospectively…  The Appellate Tribunal made a manifest error by not appreciating that S. 11-B is procedural in nature. It is a time- honoured principle if the law affects matters of procedure, then prima facie it applies to all actions, pending as well as future.”

    14. Thus, the Supreme Court upheld the order of SEBI restraining the respondent in the manner stated earlier.

    15. One observation of the Supreme Court, though may be held as obiter dicta, is still worth noting as it could be taken in an extreme sense by SEBI and applied in its proceedings. It is stated in paragraph 37 of the order of the Supreme Court that:

“Even if penalty is imposed after an adjudicatory proceeding, person on whom such penalty is imposed cannot be called an accused.”.

This statement is not taken further to a logical conclusion perhaps because this was not the issue before the Court. But it would be interesting to see how SEBI views this statement in its later decisions. One can imagine that even if power to levy penalties through adjudicatory orders is procedural, then the powers of SEBI would be even stronger and more discretionary and with lesser safeguards than one would expect.

    16. To conclude, the Supreme Court has laid an important precedent not just in terms of the subject matter of this decision, but also in the approach towards interpretation of securities laws and how securities laws should be treated differently. Securities laws, thus, is well on its way to becoming a special and very distinct subject by itself to which many general rules of interpretation may not apply.

ACHIEVING ‘OTHER OBJECTIVES’ THROUGH DEMERGERS — High Court disallows achieving of certain other objects through schemes of restructuring

fiogf49gjkf0d

Securities Laws

(1) Companies carry out
restructuring by various methods and the popular method is by carrying out a
scheme of restructuring u/s.390-u/s.394 of the Companies Act, 1956 with the
approval of the Court. While this route is quite a complicated procedure
involving numerous and time-consuming steps, there are several advantages not
only under the Companies Act, 1956, but also under various other laws including
securities laws, the Income-tax Act, 1961, stamp duty, etc. The important thing
is that the Court considering the scheme is said to be a ‘single-window’, under
which several approvals can be received without going to various other forums
and authorities. Further, this single-window channel gives approval under
different laws.

(2) Other bodies including
SEBI, etc., do not interfere with the directions of the Court and the
transaction is exempt under certain laws. For example, if allotment of shares is
made under a scheme of amalgamation or demerger, the acquisition of the shares
is exempt from the requirements of the provisions relating to open offer under
the SEBI Takeover Regulations.

(3) This single-window
service, however, in recent times, has apparently been misused. Forced buyback
of shares has been carried out by a company at predetermined price without any
choice being given to the shareholders. Such schemes have also been used for
accounting of certain transactions in a manner which, according to, Accounting
Standards and prudent accounting policies would not have been allowed.

(4) However, recently, a
decision of the Calcutta High Court has partly reversed this trend and rejected
a scheme of demerger on, inter alia, grounds that certain transactions
were proposed to be carried out as part of the scheme without compliance of the
other provisions of law. Thus, the Court did not sanction a scheme that went
beyond the original intention and was apparently formulated to avoid several
provisions of not just the Companies Act, 1956, but also of other laws — J.
K. Agri Genetics Limited v. Florence Alumina Ltd.,
[(2010) 102 SCL 495
(Cal.)].

(5) This is a case where the
petitioners had proposed a scheme of demerger. There were several points of
dispute including whether votes of certain persons who objected to the scheme
were validly considered or not. However, the areas of disputes which are the
focus of this article related to certain transactions being carried out as a
part of the scheme of demerger and which would have resulted in certain acts
being carried out that were beyond the inherent nature of a scheme of demerger.
Further, the scheme of demerger would have resulted in allotment of shares to
the promoters out of turn and without compliance with the relevant provisions of
the Companies Act, 1956, and of the Securities Laws.

(6) It may be clarified that
in the normal course, such an allotment of shares does happen as part of a
scheme of restructuring, including merger/demerger. Such an allotment of shares
is taken as part of the single-window facility and additional approval or
compliance as envisaged under other provisions of the Companies Act, 1956, or
Securities Laws is not required. However, in the present case, the facts were
peculiar and it appeared that the allotment was strictly not a part of the
scheme of demerger. It appears that the allotment of shares was not an inherent
part of the demerger and it was introduced in the scheme just to take advantage
of the benefits available to transactions covered in a scheme.

(7) The following are some
observations of the Court while rejecting the scheme :

“The scheme, sanction of
which is sought, seeks demerger of the seed division from the investment
division. This does not, however, seem to be the sole purpose of the scheme.
It also seeks conversion of the Zero Coupon Redeemable Preference Shares (ZCRPS)
and Zero Coupon Non-Convertible Bonds (ZCNCB) given under the 2003 scheme.”

“By such conversion, J. K.
Industries Ltd. (JKIL), the promoter-company, acquires shares in Florence
Alumina Ltd. (FAL), the applicant No. 2, whereby its shareholding increases.
This increase will not benefit any shareholder except the promoters. Therefore
the conversion contemplated will benefit the promoters and none else. This
cannot be the intention of the propounders of the scheme.”

(8) The Court also found
that the conversion of certain bonds and preference shares were at such terms
that were unacceptable and not in the overall interests of persons other than
the promoters. The Court reviewed these proposals and did not find them
something that a prudent person acting at arm’s length would do. The Court
noted :

“6.10 The Bonds and
Preference Shares were to be redeemed over a period of time. In fact the Bonds
were to be redeemed in 5 instalments. The 1st instalment was to be redeemed on
the expiry of the 4th year, i.e. 1-4-2006 till the 8th year, i.e.
1-4-2010. The appointed date of the instant Scheme is 1-4-2005, i.e.
prior to 1-4-2006 and will take effect from 1-4-2005 if sanctioned.

6.11 The 1st instalment in
respect of the Preference Shares was to be paid on the expiry of the 8th
instalment (i.e. 2010).

6.12 By virtue of the
conversion, the said Bonds and Preference Shares are being redeemed much
before the time specified and the present day discounted value ought to have
been considered. This has also not been done.

6.13 This is relevant as
no prudent businessman while considering the commercial aspect of the Scheme
in his wisdom would have proposed a Scheme without considering the discounting
aspect. Furthermore, such a Scheme could also not have been approved by a
prudent businessman cloaked with commercial wisdom unless such men approving
were nothing but ‘yes-men’ of the Transferor Company, Transferee Company and
Promoter Company.

    It may be recollected that schemes of restructur-ing by listed companies are required to be submitted to the stock exchanges concerned for approval before filing the same for approval of the Court. The Court also reviewed the nature and purpose of such grant of approval by the stock exchange. It highlighted the limited scope of review that the stock exchange carries out. In the words of the Court?:

“6.14 In the Supplementary Affidavit filed, the reason given for conversion is the decision of the Bombay Stock Exchange. The application filed before the Bombay Stock Exchange was only in respect of the Listing agreement. Therefore, the Scheme has been examined by the Bombay Stock Exchange only for the purpose of approving listing on the Stock Exchange and for no other purpose. The said approval is also subject to certain relax-ation granted by SEBI under the 1957 Rules.”

    The Court then found that the scheme was intended to benefit the promoters and the
Court gave the following detailed reasoning and precedents to reject the scheme and thus deny sanction to it?:

“6.17 A Scheme is aimed at not adversely affect-ing the share-holders or creditors and, therefore, is placed before the class of share-holder (equity or preference). If the opinion of the share-holder was not needed, the Scheme could have been accepted without their approval. In the instant case the Scheme is not intended to benefit the share-holder but it’s promoters.

6.18 Single window clearance though accepted in P.M.P. Auto Industries Ltd.’s case (supra) and followed in subsequent decisions, will not be applicable in the instant case as by virtue of the conversion further shares are being allotted to JKIL and for this purpose, the special procedure laid down in S. 81(1A) ought to have been followed.

6.19 The single window clearance contemplated will only apply if the alteration is restricted to the structural changes of the Company for implementation of the Scheme. The issuance of shares for purposes of increasing the share capital is not such alteration and the procedure laid u/s.81(1A) of the Companies Act ought to have been followed and, thereafter, the Scheme sanctioned. No copy of the resolution taken u/s.81(1A) of the 1956 Act has been produced.

6.20 As the single window clearance theory has no application in the instant case the decisions cited in respect thereof can also have no application.

6.21 As held in Miheer H. Mafatlal’s case (supra) and Bedrock Ltd.’s case (supra) that the sanctioning Court while ascertaining the real purpose underlying the Scheme can judiciously x-ray the same and not function as a rubber-stamp or post office, but must satisfy itself that the Scheme is genuine and bona fide and in the interest of the creditor or shareholder and in doing so the Scheme, to the extent it promotes conversion, is not just, fair or bona fide.

6.22 In 1960(1) AER 772, the objection was rejected as no unfairness could be established. Such is not the case here as the conversion will only benefit the promoter share-holder and none-else.

6.23 The conversion is intended to promote the interest of JKIL which is a separate class and a meeting of such class ought to have been called as held in 1975(3) AER 382 to ascertain the intention of its shareholders with regard to acceptance of the arrangement. This, according to 1975(3) AER 382, is fatal to the arrangement and there is no reason to differ therefrom.” (emphasis supplied)

    To conclude, the Court has laid down several useful principles as precedent for the future. Schemes have to be focussed on the main intention of the provisions relating to restructuring and they cannot be used to achieve other objectives, particularly if they are against the interests of others having a say in the matter. The Court confirmed that it will examine whether the scheme will be one which a commercial and prudent man would approve and for this purpose, it would even go into the financial calculations involved. The scheme cannot be used to circumvent (at least on these particular facts) the provisions of S. 81(1A) and other provisions of law. This decision along with certain other initiatives by SEBI should help in reducing misuse of schemes of restructuring.

Pushing corporate governance through mutual funds — SEBI’s recent circular creates unique dilemmas for listed companies

fiogf49gjkf0d

Securities Laws

SEBI recently made an innocuous appearing requirement for
mutual funds that has far-reaching implications on listed companies and on the
mutual funds. Simply stated, the SEBI Circular (SEBI/IMD/CIR No. 18/198647/2010,
dated March 15, 2010) now requires mutual funds to disclose in their annual
report as to how they voted at general meetings in respect of each of the shares
held by them in respect of specified matters. There are a few other connected
requirements.

As will be seen, these requirements have equal — if not more
— implications on the listed companies wherein shares are held. But let us first
outline the requirements. Incidentally, this article discusses only the
requirements relating to ‘corporate governance’ in the Circular and not other
requirements relating to ASBA, brokerage and commission, etc.

Firstly, it is required that the Asset Management Companies
(‘the AMCs’), i.e., the entities that manage the mutual funds, should disclose
‘their general policies and procedures for exercising the voting rights in
respect of shares held by them’. This disclosure is to be given on the website
of the AMC as well as in the annual report distributed to the unit-holders for
the financial year 2010-11 and onwards.

Secondly, disclosures in a similar manner and timing are to
be given of the ‘actual exercise’ of the proxy votes at general meetings of such
investee companies in respect of the following matters :

(a) Corporate governance matters, including changes in the
state of incorporation, merger and other corporate restructuring, and
anti-takeover provisions.

(b) Changes to capital structure, including increases and
decreases of capital and preferred stock issuances.

(c) Stock option plans and other management compensation
issues.

(d) Social and corporate responsibility issues.

(e) Appointment and removal of directors.

(f) Any other issue that may affect the interest of the
shareholders in general and interest of the unit-holders in particular.

The first annual report in which such disclosure is required
to be made is away more than a year from now and hence it may appear that the
implications would be realised/felt at that time. However, that may not be true
for at least two reasons.

(a) Firstly, since it is now mandated that such disclosures
have to be made, and since public disclosures often result in immediate public
scrutiny, the AMCs/mutual funds should today start considering as to how they
should vote.

(b) Secondly, while the schedule for disclosure in the annual
report is clear enough, the timing for disclosure on the website is not. Is such
disclosure required immediately, or as and when the vote is cast ?

(c) Thirdly, just as the mutual fund is now immediately
concerned with how it would vote, the investee company would also face the
implications of :

  • a possibly changed
    approach to voting by the mutual fund; and


  • disclosure of how a
    mutual fund shareholder voted at its general meetings.


Having outlined the requirements, let us consider some issues
in some detail.

This requirement is not, unlike what has been incorrectly
reported in the press, a new or even ‘innovative’ one. In fact, it is a
requirement simply copied — a copy of a good, even if a little inappropriate,
requirement — from the west where this is a fairly standard requirement. This
requirement is extensively discussed in most corporate governance reports (see
for example the Hample Committee Report). What is more, many large institutional
shareholders in western countries publicly declare, in great detail, their
voting policies. Even, statutorily, in 2003 the SEC of USA has mandated a
similar requirement.

However, is this requirement appropriate to India — or, more
specifically, does it have such important consequences in India as it has in
western countries ? Indeed, any step towards making listed companies and their
Promoters more accountable to shareholders and otherwise raising the levels of
corporate governance are obviously welcome. However, this requirement continues
to reflect the approach in India of adopting western practices where the facts
are different. In the west, the mutual funds and other institutional
shareholders hold a significant stake in such companies and hence can easily bar
proposals of management as according to the Hample Committee report which is
almost two decades old, institutional shareholders held more than 60% of the
shares in listed companies. The shareholding of the Promoters/management in the
west was usually below 10%. The situation in India is different (almost
opposite) where the Promoters clearly dominate the shareholding, usually with a
clear majority holding. Even if mutual funds participate and even vote against,
the mutual fund vote cannot reject a proposal. The situation is similar to
wagging of its tail by the dog — the difference is that in the western
countries, the dog is the institutional shareholder who can wag the tail, i.e., the Promoters. In India, the mutual
funds are the tail and they can hardly wag the dog !

Interestingly, this is one of the first of ‘external’
corporate governance requirements in the sense that it applies to a person other
than the listed company itself. Clause 49 had this limitation of scope purely on
account of its placement in the listing agreement that applies only to the
listed company.

These requirements apply only to AMCs/mutual funds. But these
are not the only collective investment vehicles in India and others include
insurance companies, FIIs, NBFCs, etc. This limited scope is obviously because
SEBI does not have jurisdiction over other entities. One will have to see
whether the respective authority governing such other institutional investors
will also issue similar requirements.

The spirit behind such requirement is obviously to make
mutual funds active investors. As the SEBI Circular states — “It was felt that
mutual funds should play an active role in ensuring better corporate governance
of listed companies”. The disclosure requirement is an indirect pressure to
ensure that they are actively involved in important issues relating to the
company since their votes would now be disclosed.

However, at the cost of repetition, while this may make sense in a situation where such institutional shareholders dominate the holding, it is meaning-less in a Promoter-dominated company. True, there have been some cases where serious opposition by major shareholder has helped. However, there is a tendency to point out the finger-countable cases where exceptional interest taken in the rare public-shareholder dominated company and conclude that such exceptions prove the rule that there is a lot of scope for shareholder activism in India.

Also SEBI has not mandated that mutual funds should vote. It has just required such institutions using public money to disclose whether and how they are voting. But this transparency is sufficient to put them on guard.

One wonders whether this can have negative effect. Isn’t it likely that many mutual funds may want to play extra safe and oppose, at least by casting a vote against every resolution that could possibly be slightly or potentially controversial ? Their vote may not make a difference to the out-come, but such a step may help them avoid controversy later on. A vote cast may be viewed critically later by the media and others though with the benefit of hindsight. Of course, some mutual funds may want to remain objective and not act in this manner, but obviously there would be a subtle pressure to play safe. On the other side, companies who are at the receiving end may find it a little embarrassing to explain why certain mutual funds voted against their proposals.

Of course, it was not that mutual funds presently do not participate. Actually, often, many companies sound off institutional investors informally (though often the spirit, if not the letter, of insider trading regulations may be violated) what views they have in respect of major proposals, even where the Promoters command a significant stake. Thus, often, the mutual funds would have already given their views and hence may not bother to participate further or vote. This may now change.

In the end, in a little lighter vein, I wonder whether the requirements could and should end with mutual funds. After all, the technique of achieving the objective of entities that have public involvement through disclosure could apply to other persons too. For example, would it not make sense to require Independent Directors to also disclose the votes that they cast on important matters ? ! While one may argue that Board Meetings where they cast their vote are confidential events, this may also be a way in which there is pressure and accountability on these directors who are in a situation similar in some respects to mutual funds.

Promoter – to be or not to be? – the identity crisis of Promoters resolved partly by a recent SAT decision

fiogf49gjkf0d

Securities Laws

This series of articles, introducing securities laws for
listed companies to the lay reader continues…




When is a person a Promoter of a listed company? When is he
not? What are the liabilities and disabilities of a Promoter that a person
connected with a listed company should know? Would a mere executive director
be a Promoter? Would a financial or strategic investor be a Promoter? Would
relatives of an existing Promoter be considered as Promoters? Would a
significant shareholding be the deciding factor? Would holding more shares
than the Promoter make a person a Promoter? These issues are of general
interest but they have come into sharper focus in the light of a recent
decision of the Securities Appellate Tribunal (“the SAT”) in the case of
Subhkam Ventures (I) Private Limited v. SEBI – Appeal No, 8 of 2009, order
dated 15th January 2010. In this decision, the SAT has considered a situation
where the issue was whether a private equity investor holding significant
quantity of shares and having certain rights was a ‘Promoter’.

Being a Promoter is a status that, in recent times, creates
more obligations than rights or advantages. The term Promoter, as we will see
in more detail later on, is really a result of being in control of a company.
However, it is a result and the fact that a person may be a promoter does not
give any right of control. Once a person is a Promoter, he faces several
handicaps – for example:-

1. if shares are allotted to him on a preferential basis,
lock-in period is higher.

2. he cannot increase his holding beyond a general
percentage (this restriction is for any significant shareholder but in
practice, would apply mainly to Promoters).

3. he cannot be granted ESOPs.

4. he will be counted for restriction on the number of
non-independent directors.

In addition, there are many disclosure requirements of his
holdings, his share pledges, etc. The irony is that though the Promoter in
India is in de facto and generally de jure control of a company, there are no
specific provisions holding the Promoter directly responsible. However, there
is a general provision holding a ‘person in control’ responsible for violation
by companies but it is a general provision and there is nothing specific
holding Promoters responsible for non-compliance or violation of laws.

Thus, there are sound reasons for a person to be hesitant
at being classified as a Promoter. Non-executive independent directors would
by definition not be Promoters and thus, they can avoid this categorisation.
The problem may be difficult for other non-executive directors, particularly
those who are nominees of the Promoters though not part of the Promoter Group.

There is a unique category of persons who are ex-promoters.
These include persons who have handed over control of the company to a new
Promoter but continue to hold significant shares. A category that is also not
infrequent is when a Promoter Group partitions and one branch gets control of
the company while the other holds shares but does not participate in control.
In an old case involving the Modi family/Modipon Limited

(Appeal No. 34/2001),
the Securities Appellate Tribunal held on the facts that a brother and his
group who were originally part of the Promoter Group were no more part of the
current Promoter Group, since they had separated and did not participate in
control.

However, recently, a more significant problem is faced by
persons who are significant investors in a company such as private equity
investors or similar financial investors. The category of ex-promoters may, on
facts, also fall in this group since they often retain significant holding and
also have certain contractual rights of representation and share decision
making power.

Would such persons be deemed to be in “control” of a
company or in joint control with the “main” Promoters?

The SAT had to consider a typical case and thus, we now
have the benefit of fairly detailed principles that have been laid down in
this decision. It must be clarified that SAT, in this case, had to decide
whether a person had acquired “control” and it can be seen that this issue is
substantially identical in determining ‘whether a person is a Promoter’. This
is because a person becomes a Promoter if he acquires “control”.

The facts of the case were that Subhkam, that has been
described as a private equity investor (“the PE Investor”), took a significant
24.26% stake in a listed company. As required under the Takeover Regulations,
for a person taking a 15% or higher stake, it made an open offer for another
20% shares. The terms of acquisition of shares by the PE Investor in the
listed company were that the PE Investor had certain rights. The significant
ones worth highlighting include the right to nominate a director, right of
consultation for appointment of certain senior officials, and a veto power in
the taking of certain specified acquired decisions. The issue was whether, by
virtue of such rights, the PE Investor had control and was thereby a Promoter.

Interestingly, the agreement giving the PE Investor such
rights specifically stated that the PE Investor was not a Promoter or in
control of the company.

The issue arose in a peculiar context. Subhkam had made an
open offer and in the draft letter of offer, it had specified itself only as a
financial investor. It specifically did not make an open offer under
Regulation 12 of the Takeover Regulations, which is attracted when a person
acquires control. However, SEBI, after much discussions, directed it to make
an open offer under Regulation 12 also. This direction was the subject matter
of appeal.

Incidentally, Regulation 12 requires open offer to be made by a person acquiring control in a listed company, irrespective of any acquisition of shares by him.

The SAT meticulously analysed important provisions of the agreement and also in the process, laid down important principles of determination of when a person is said to be in control of a listed company.

It is worth considering the exact wording of the definition of “control” under the SEBI Takeover Regulations:-

    “control” shall include the right to appoint majority of the directors or to control the management or policy decisions exercisable by a person or persons acting individually or in concert, directly or indirectly, including by virtue of their shareholding or management rights or shareholders agreements or voting agreements or in any other manner;

The SAT considered the above definition and observed:-

“This definition is an inclusive one and not exhaustive and it has two distinct and separate features: i) the right to appoint majority of directors or, ii) the ability to control the management or policy decisions by various means referred to in the definition. This control of management or policy decisions could be by virtue of shareholding or management rights or shareholders agreement or voting agreements or in any other manner.” Having considered the above, the SAT then went on to give a detailed description of what constitutes control and under what circumstances:-

“Control, according to the definition, is a pro-active and not a reactive power. It is a power by which an acquirer can command the target company to do what he wants it to do. Control really means creating or controlling a situation by taking the initiative. Power by which an acquirer can only prevent a company from doing what the latter wants to do is by itself not control. In that event, the acquirer is only reacting rather than taking the initiative. It is a positive power and not a negative power. In a board managed company, it is the board of directors that is in control. If an acquirer were to have power to appoint a majority of directors, it is obvious that he would be in control of the company but that is not the only way to be in control. If an acquirer were to control the management or policy decisions of a company, he would be in control. This could happen by virtue of his shareholding or management rights or by reason of shareholders agreements or voting agreements or in any other manner. The test really is whether the acquirer is in the driving seat. To extend the metaphor further, the question would be whether he controls the steering, accelerator, the gears and the brakes. If the answer to these questions is in the affirmative, then he alone would be in control of the company. In other words, the question to be asked in each case would be whether the acquirer is the driving force behind the company and whether he is the one providing motion to the organization. If yes, he is in control but not otherwise. In short, control means effective control.”

Having laid down what constitutes control, it examined the rights of the PE Investor in light of the agreement. It particularly stated that grant of rights to a significant investor can be expected since he would be likely to safeguard his investment. It held that having one nominee on the Board does not amount to having control.

The SAT analysed the provisions that give “veto rights” under certain circumstances to the PE Investor. If the company proposed to take certain acts as described in the agreement, which are typically significant and out of the normal course of business, the affirmative vote of the PE Investor was necessary. Would such a right mean that the PE Investor had acquired control? The SAT held that it did not. It observed:-

“The list of matters provided in clauses 9(a) to 9(o) are not in the nature of day to day operational control over the business of the target company. So also, they are not in the nature of control over either the management or policy decisions of the target company. These provisions merely enable the acquirer to oppose a proposal and not carry any proposal on its bidding… The mere fact that any such amendment requires an affirmative vote from the appellant is again indicative of the fact that it wants to protect its investment and that the basic structure of the company is not altered without its knowledge and approval. By no stretch of logic, can such an affirmative vote confer control over the day to day working of the company.”

Accordingly, the SAT held that the PE Investor had not acquired control and therefore was not required to make an open offer under Regulation 12. Curiously, the PE Investor would have held, if the open offer to acquire 20% was wholly successful, 44.26% shares, that would have been far more than the holding of the Promoters.

The decision was of course on facts. Often, depending upon situations, resulting also from the bargaining power of the investee company, the rights obtained may be more or less. The answer may be different. However, the general principles laid down by SAT can surely help in resolving situations such as these that are relatively quite common.

Time is running out

fiogf49gjkf0d
Namaskaar

The water-drop playing on a lotus petal has an extremely
uncertain existence; so also as life ever unstable.

(Stanza 4 — Bhaja Govindam — Aadi Shankaracharya)

We lost Hitenbhai Shah in June this year. He was only 51. We
lost another active member Manesh Gandhi in October. He was only 50. Lives of
both these were plucked while they were still in their prime. Such tragedies
convey a very clear message to us. ‘Time is running out.’ We all know
that death is the ultimate certainty and that everything that is born has to die
some day. Only the time is the question.

Yet, we live as if we have all the time in the world to do
whatever we want As if death is never going to come. This is an eternal paradox.
One recalls the incidence in Mahabharat when Yaksha asks Yudhishthir as to ‘what
is the greatest wonder in this world’ and Yudhishthir without hesitation
replies : “Man sees death around him everyday. Hundreds and thousands are dying
all around. Yet he goes on living as if that is never going to come.” How true !
Doesn’t this apply to all of us ?

A renowned Gujarati poet, Mareez has expressed this
beautifully :

Mareez, hasten Thy drinking from the cup of life. Only very
little wine is left and the cup too is leaking.”

— Mareez

This is not a pessimistic message, but a wake-up
call
to all of us to live life fully. Whatever our pious intentions and
noble thoughts are, let us put them in practice now, without waiting for
tomorrow, which may or may not come.

This applies to all the fields of our life. How many things
worthy of doing we go on postponing ? We want to call on a friend who is not
well. We wish to write to our mother to whom we have not met for quite a while
and who is pining for our letter. We have not expressed our love to the near and
dear ones. We have not found time to play with our children and spend time with
them. We have deferred showing our gratitude to the Almighty for the blessings
showered on us, we have procrastinated doing charity and paying our debt to
society by giving something to the universe which has provided us with many
priceless gifts. We have not found time to take a vacation with our family. This
list is endless. However, we have been investing our time in pursuit of false
values — always seeking praise and power.

It is of course true that whenever our end comes, our
desk is not likely to be clear. There will always be an unfinished
agenda. However, we can prioritise and first do the things which are really
important to us. As Stephen Covey says keep “First Things First“. In his
book there is a chapter called “How Many People on Their Deathbed Wish They’d
Spent More Time at the Office
?” This is an eye-opener for us. We just give
too much of time to our work and very little to that which is really
meaningful
. Reversing this would make our lives happy and satisfying — it
will reduce tension. We would then leave this world with far less regrets and
leave behind an unfinished agenda of relatively less important things. We do not
have to do things faster and in haste, but we have to do ‘right’ and
first attend to the important.

Let us resolve today to step on the accelerator to prioritise
and then act.

From today let us make it our mission to pursue only
fulfilling and satisfying goals, and not get bogged down in the mire of the rat
race — all the time seeking wealth, power and position. Let us pursue our
childhood dreams. Let us learn to sing, dance and enjoy life. Let us do those
things, which we really wanted to do but were scared to do. Let us lift up the
anchor, unfurl the sails, catch the winds and sail the seven seas. Let us
discover new lands, explore new places, climb mountains. Let us sit down and
write down at least three things which we always wanted to do but have not done.
This will put us on the path to realise our unrealised dreams. Let us start
living and remember :

‘Better a moment of glow than a lifetime of smoke.’ —
Mahabharat

“The tragedy of life is not that it ends too soon, but that
we wait so long to begin it.”

levitra

END TO ACCOUNTING ‘FLEXIBILITY’ IN CORPORATE RESTRUCTURING ? — Amends to The Listing Agreement

fiogf49gjkf0d

Securities Laws

SEBI has sought to limit certain accounting ‘flexibility’ in
mergers, demergers and other restructuring. SEBI has done this by issuing a
Circular directing an amendment to the listing agreement. The focus of the
amendment is on certain deviations from Accounting Standards commonly carried
out as part of schemes of mergers, demergers, reduction of capital, etc.

SEBI has sought to attain this objective indirectly and, one
could even say cleverly, and with apparently more effect than it would have done
it directly. It has also attempted to kill several birds with one stone. Or has
SEBI attempted too much and ended up with a provision with limited effect?

In essence, SEBI has required that companies proposing
certain schemes of mergers, demergers, etc. shall submit, in advance, a
certificate from their auditors that the matters contemplated in the scheme are
in compliance with Accounting Standards.

Let us consider some background.

First, let us consider mergers and demergers. Schemes of
mergers, demergers, etc. provide for transfer of assets and liabilities and/or
for other matters. The implications of accounting for amalgamations are
substantial enough to warrant a separate Accounting Standard 14 on Accounting
for Amalgamations.

While AS-14 deals with several matters, it makes a special
provision for treatment of Reserves. It states that if the scheme provides for
treatment of reserves otherwise than what the AS requires, the scheme should be
followed, but certain disclosures should be made particularly about what would
be the effect if the AS was followed. In other words, deviations would be
possible but through disclosure. Thus, the scheme would, to that extent,
override the Accounting Standard, subject to the safeguard of disclosure.

In fact, as a general principle, we know that ICAI’s
Accounting Standards do not override provisions of law. As paragraphs 4.1 and
4.2 of the Preface to the Statements on Accounting Standards says, in case of
inconsistency, the provisions of law will prevail. However, in such a case, the
ICAI will determine the extent of disclosure required in the financial
statements and the auditors report. See also the general ‘Announcement’ of the
ICAI on the implications of a Court/Tribunal order sanctioning an accounting
treatment which is different from that prescribed by an Accounting Standard
which is highlighted later.

It is quite common then that such schemes provide for an
alternate accounting treatment of reserves, etc. and Courts usually approve
them. Thus, there is a fairly widespread practice of what I would call
‘deviations through disclosure’
.

The SEBI amendment also covers other forms of restructuring
such as capital reduction. Even under such schemes, inter alia, capital reserves
such as securities premium and capital redemption reserves can be used for
purposes which otherwise are not allowed. Moreover, as we will see in the Bombay
High Court’s decision in Hindalco’s restructuring case, such schemes may go
beyond mere freeing up of the capital reserves. They may even provide for
debit of certain expenses to such reserves where such debit may otherwise
(allegedly in that case) not be permissible under the Accounting Standards.

Of course, it is not as if all such deviations are
necessarily attempts to avoid the spirit of the Accounting Standards and, very
often, the intention may be bona fide including avoidance of some archaic
provisions of law or simply to give a better picture of the underlying
commercial reality. There is also at least the small safeguard of disclosure.
However, it is also true that, particularly as we will see in case of other
restructuring such as reduction of capital, this was also seen to be an almost
carte blanche power.

SEBI has pointed out in the Circular that in some recent
schemes filed before the High Courts, the accounting treatment of ‘various
items’ is not in accordance with the applicable Accounting Standards (‘AS’). To
stop this, it has introduced the requirement of auditors’ certificate that the
scheme is in compliance with Accounting Standards. More importantly, the actual
amendment further provides that a mere disclosure as permitted under AS-14
giving certain details relating to a departure from the AS is not sufficient.


The amendment, as I said earlier, is clever. No regulation
has been laid down (which would have required certain law-making procedures to
be followed) to make such requirement. Nor has SEBI needed to plead to the MCA
to amend its rules relating to Accounting Standards. Indeed, no substantive
requirement has been made at all even in the listing agreement to follow the
Accounting Standards. Instead, a simple procedural requirement is made
that the auditors’ certificate will be obtained — in advance — stating that
Accounting Standards have been complied with in respect of matters covered in
the scheme. And further, the usual route of deviating by disclosing would not
be permitted.


Does this stop the accounting ‘flexibility’ through such
schemes ?

The amendment does make the listed company indirectly comply
with Accounting Standards and the specific requirement that deviation through
disclosure is not permitted makes it even more effective.

Note several implications and limitations though.

The auditors’ certificate is required for compliance of all
Accounting Standards and not merely Accounting Standard-14.

Secondly, the certificate is required for all types of
schemes
— whether of mergers,
demergers, reduction of capital, etc. — in fact, all scheme/petitions to
be filed before any Court or Tribunal u/s.391, u/s.394 and u/s.101 of the
Companies Act, 1956. AS-14 is, of course, applicable only to amalgamations and
not to other type of schemes. Courts have also held that the said AS-14 applies
only to amalgamations and hence its applicability cannot be raised in other
schemes [see, e.g., Gallops Reality’s case 150 Comp. Cas. 596 (Guj.)]. However,
where other Accounting Standards apply to the particular transactions in a
scheme, the certificate would cover them too.

Having said that, the requirement applies only to compliance
of Accounting Standards and not to accounting of transactions where Accounting
Standards do not apply.

Further, if certain restructuring of reserves is carried out
under a statutory provision, the clause cannot apply. A good example is
restructuring of capital reserves such as share premium or other similar capital
surpluses. Even though SEBI has sought to cover schemes involving reduction of
capital, it is arguable that since the accounting of share premium is strictly
not covered by Accounting Standards, the new provisions will not apply.

Consider another aspect that is not touched by the Accounting Standards and therefore remains untouched by the amendment. If a reserve is treated as a ‘capital reserve’ as so required by the AS, does that, by itself, make it a ‘capital reserve’ for the purposes of the Companies Act, 1956, particularly for the provisions relating to reduction of capital

    Thus, for example, would such reserve would become thereby at par with ‘Share Premium’ ? To take it further, would it make at par with ‘Revaluation Reserve’ — particularly when, in reality, its source may be revaluation ? Would the statutory restrictions relating to dividends, bonus shares, etc. apply to such a reserve ? I believe that this would continue to remain a grey area even after this amendment.

Then there is a larger issue and this can be explained by a case study in the form of a recent Bombay High Court decision in the case of Hindalco Industries Limited (2009) 94 SCL 1 (Bom.). In this case, to summarise the essence, the company proposed a scheme of restructuring u/s.391 of the Companies Act, 1956, under which the Securities Premium Account of the company would be transferred to a ‘Reconstruction Reserve Account’. To this account, certain specified expenses and losses would be debited. The question was, if such adjustment was otherwise not in compliance with Accounting Standards, whether such a scheme could be permitted and generally whether non-compliance with accounting standards was permissible.

    Essentially, the Court stated that, firstly, the provisions of S. 211(3A)-(3C), while they do create a requirement of compliance with accounting standards, do also provide that where they are not followed, certain disclosures shall be made. In other words, it held that there is also a form of ‘deviation through disclosure’ possible.

    The Court also referred to ICAI’s ‘Announcement on Disclosures in cases where a Court/Tribunal makes an order sanctioning an accounting treatment which is different from that prescribed by an Accounting Standard’. This substantive part of this Announcement reads as under :

Paragraph 4.2 of the ‘Preface to the Statements of Accounting Standards’ (revised 2004) provides as under :

“4.2 The Accounting Standards by their very nature cannot and do not override the local regulations which govern the preparation and presentation of financial statements in the country. However, the ICAI will determine the extent of disclosure to be made in financial statements and the auditor’s report thereon. Such disclosure may be by way of appropriate notes explaining the treatment of particular items. Such explanatory notes will be only in the nature of clarification and therefore need not be treated as adverse comments on the related financial statements.”

In the case of companies, S. 211(3B) of the Companies Act, 1956, provides that “Where the profit and loss account and the balance sheet of the company do not comply with the Accounting Standards, such companies shall disclose in its profit and loss account and balance sheet, the following, namely :

  a)  the deviation from the accounting standards;

  b)  the reasons for such deviation; and

    c) the financial effect, if any, arising due to such deviation.”

In view of the above, if an item in the financial statements of a company is treated differently pursuant to an order made by the Court/Tribunal, as compared to the treatment required by an Accounting Standard, following disclosures should be made in the financial statements of the year in which different treatment has been given :
  (1)  A description of the accounting treatment made along with the reason that the same has been adopted because of the Court/Tribunal Order.
  (2)  Description of the difference between the accounting treatment prescribed in the Accounting Standard and that followed by the company.
  (3)  The financial impact, if any, arising due to such a difference.It is recommended that the above disclosures should be made by enterprises other than companies also in similar situations.

  (c)  The question then is whether this decision is now overridden by the SEBI amendment ? The answer does not seem to be wholly clear. One view can be that the company has to obtain an auditor’s report stating that the Scheme is in compliance of the Accounting Standards. If it can be held on the facts that the scheme is not and therefore the auditor’s certificate states so accordingly, then, despite the aforesaid decision, the requirement would not be complied with. The other view can be that since SEBI has specifically stated that ‘deviation through disclosure’ of only the specified requirements of   AS-14  would not be permitted and therefore, in case of ‘deviation through disclosure’ for other Accounting Standards remains open.
  (i)  Incidentally, there can also be two views whether, particularly in light of the Supreme Court’s decision in J. K. Industries v. UOI, (2007) 80 Comp. Cas. 415 (SC), whether the aforesaid decision in Hindalco’s case is, with respect, correct. This is specifically on the Bombay High Court’s view that ‘deviation through disclosure’ is permissible and that, in that sense, the Accounting Standards are not strictly mandatory. However, this controversy is best left open here and may be a subject of a separate discussion.

In the end, it is seen that SEBI’s shot, howsoever well intended, has limited effect. It has limited cover-age of types of transactions and schemes. It does not cover all types of reserves — indeed, in practice, it may not cover statutory reserves such as share premium, etc. and the impact on other reserves is also limited. With slightly better wording, it could have covered assuredly even covered matters other than treatment of reserves.

However, the amendment is likely to bring a partial end to the route of deviation through disclosure.

SEBI has thus attempted to hit several birds with one stone, but apparently it has brushed, not even hit, one bird, but that, I guess, is better than nothing.

Conviction

fiogf49gjkf0d
NamaskaarI have earlier shared my thoughts on ‘commitment’ and
‘comparison’. I believe that there can be no ‘commitment’ to a thought or an
ideal or an action unless one is convinced of the virtue of the action. The same
equally applies to an act of ‘compromise’. Hence, in this article I will deal
with ‘compromise’ and ‘conviction. These two also in a manner control our lives.
Ludwig Erhard defines ‘compromise’ as the art of dividing a cake in such a way
that everyone believes he has the biggest piece’.

Do we realise that we make ‘compromises’ every day.
Compromise made without conviction leads to unhappiness — whereas compromise
made with conviction leads to satisfaction and happiness.

True ‘Compromise’ happens only when one is convinced that compromise results in a win-win situation or it is best of the
worst options. In both options there are no regrets because, I repeat, conscious
compromise happens only when one is convinced that the solution is in one’s own
interest. Any action taken without conviction results in misery. The question I
have is :

Are we conscious of our convictions ?

Before we get into the answer let us examine how dictionary
defines

‘conviction’.





‘A strong persuasion or belief-awakened consciousness,
strong belief on the ground of satisfactory reasons or evidence, a settled belief or opinion’.


Firstly, whilst practising our profession we have to be first
convinced about the fairness of the financial statements before we certify the
same as ‘true and fair’. Secondly, whilst arguing an issue before an authority —
conviction in an argument makes all the difference in our presentation. I know
advocacy is an art and is said to have no connection with conviction — for
example — a lawyer advocating for a person accused of murder will do his best to
save his client, but defence based on conviction that the accused has not
committed murder will have a different


impact. I believe any action based on conviction smells different and sends a
very effective message.

Let us consider a few examples :


  • We prefer
    democracy over dictatorship because we as a nation are convinced it is a
    better form of government.

  • We practise team-building
    because we are convinced it is good for our organisation and gives better
    results.


  • We prefer consensus over
    conflict because it is our conviction that consensus brings harmony.


  • Mohandas became Mahatama
    because of his conviction in truth.


  • Arjun agreed to fight the
    war with his kith and kin once he was convinced that it was not only right but
    also moral.


  • Paramhansa Ramakrishna
    suffered pain of cancer and didn’t seek relief from Ma Kali because of his
    conviction in ‘Karma’.


  • Jesus’ conviction in
    forgiveness made him say ‘Father forgive them for they know not what they do’.


  • Every action of human
    repentance is based on the conviction of having done wrong.


  • Churchill won the second
    world war because of the conviction of the British that he will win the war.


  • Obama delayed committing
    additional troops to Afghan war till he was convinced that there is no
    alternative or is the best of options.


The message of the above examples is : Without conviction
there is no convincing action.

Swami Dayanand Saraswati in his book on ‘Teachings of Gita’
says that values are initially taught to us by our parents and teachers. One
acts according to those values in one’s childhood, but unless one adopts those
values as one’s own values, the same are easily overlooked and transgressed.
Hence, to live a life according to ‘values’ one has to be convinced of the value of those ‘values’.

We have heard about it, we have read about it, hence we know
that there is no difference between ‘atma’ and ‘parmatama’, but we are not
convinced about it — the paradox is that we will experience and realise this
truth only when we are convinced — that is why it is said :

‘Guru vaka mol mantra’.

The ‘Guru Mantra’ helps us get convinced about the truth that
there is no difference between ‘atma and parmatama’.

Conviction plays a very important part in our lives and compromise based on
conviction is the basis of a happy life. Hence, to have a successful and
harmonious life, let us live our life with ‘conviction’.

levitra

Destiny

fiogf49gjkf0d

Namaskaar

“The fault, dear Brutus, is not in our stars, but in ourselves
that we are underlings.”




Julius Caesar


Shakespeare


What is destiny? What role does it play in our lives? How
much of what happens to us is pre-ordained? Is everything in our life
predetermined? If everything that is going to happen is already decided in
advance, what is the role of self effort? Why should we work and struggle at
all? Can destiny never be changed? What should we do? Should we sit with folded
hands and leave everything to destiny?

We Asians, particularly Indians are accused (and sometimes
rightly) of being fatalist and believing too much in ‘fate’. But this is not
true! Our wisdom and literature teaches us otherwise. The

Bhagwad Gita
tells us that we have ‘the right to work and not to the fruits of action’,
meaning that one must do one’s best and act and not get attached to the results.
The results have to be accepted. This is succinctly borne out by the following
excerpt from the

Bhagwad Gita
, where Lord Krishna has
explained it thus:


“What the outstanding person does, others will try to do. The
standards such people create will be followed by the whole world.”

“O Parth, there is nothing in the three worlds for me to
gain, nor is there anything I do not have. I continue to act, but am not driven
by any need of my own.

If I ever refrained from this continuous work, everyone would
immediately follow my example.

If I ever stopped working, I would be the cause of cosmic
chaos, and finally of the destruction of this world and these people.”


In
Yoga Vasistha,
sage Vasistha explains destiny to Rama as follows:


“If an astrologer predicts that a young man would become a
great scholar, does that young man become a scholar without study? No. Then why
do we believe in destiny? Sage Vishamitra became a Brahmarishi by self effort;
all of us have attained self knowledge by self effort alone. Hence renounce
fatalism and apply yourself to self effort.

The concept of fate has been concocted to give momentary
relief to people of low intellect during periods of grief.”

We have to learn that we must work — and build our own
destiny by our own efforts…as has been so clearly expressed by an Urdu couplet
that translates as follows:

“Make yourself so great that God Himself asks you before
granting your destiny as to what thy desire is.


We also learn from Karna in
Mahabharat
when he says, “I may be a charioteer or a charioteer’s son. Where one is born,
is in the hands of God; but what one does in one’s life, is very much in one’s
own hands.”

A Gujarati poet explains further:

We have, therefore, to understand that most of our destiny is
the result of our own efforts during this very lifetime. And what passes off as
‘destiny’ is the result of the efforts and karmas of earlier lives…

It has been aptly stated thus: “Perhaps one can think of
‘destiny’ as two different things.” The accidents that may befall us, the death
of a close relative or a dear friend, natural calamities like earthquakes and
tsunamis, and man-made disasters like riots — all fall in one category. These
are happenings over which we have no control and which have no relevance to self
effort. These have to be accepted. But for things over which we have control or
are the fallouts of our actions/inactions, we have to own full responsibility
and not blame destiny or fate for them. We cannot absolve ourselves by passing
on the buck to fate. In all such matters we have to ask ourselves, “Have I done
my best?”

In the ultimate analysis, one comes to the conclusion that
‘destiny’ comes into the picture only after events have occurred; it is relevant
only to the past and should never come in our way when we plan to reach great
heights. One cannot achieve great goals by merely banking on destiny. We have to
take charge of our lives.

I believe, destiny is the result of action.

“Over the same sea, on the same winds,

A ship sails in one direction.

Another in the opposite,

It is not the wind that decides

In which direction the ship goes;

It’s the sails: how they are tied and how they are
manoeuvered…

Similarly, it is not fate that decides where

Your life is going —

It is all about how you take life,

And where you take it.”

levitra

SOUL SEARCHING

fiogf49gjkf0d

Namaskaar

As I put down Gurucharan Das’ book ‘The Difficulty of Being
Good,’ the question that arises in one’s mind is if we want to be good, why are
we not able to be good ? He has written on the subtle art of Dharma based on the
Mahabharata. He examines closely the moral idea the Mahabharata has thrown up
and how it relates to our daily life.

I was reminded of another well-written and researched book,
‘Bury the Chains’ by Adam Hochschild. This book is about the slavery trade — how
a few individuals fought to free the slaves. While slavery is reprehensible
today, it was an accepted practice in the 18th and 19th centuries. Both George
Washington and Thomas Jefferson were slave owners. Thomas Clarkson, Granville
Sharp and others led the fight for eradication of slavery which took several
decades to yield results. It was not before 1833 that the Slave Emancipation
Bill was passed in the British Parliament, although the matter had come up in
the Parliament as early as the second half of the 18th century.

The abolitionists had good motives but the difficulties that
they had to surmount were huge. Otherwise normal and sane people kept quiet when
the dehumanising slave trade was on and even demanded compensation from the
government when slaves were freed (Slaves being property, there should be
compensation for loss, was the argument).

63 years after Independence, what is the relevance of the
above books for India ? We want to be good, would like to fight for the right
causes and being human beings, would like to have fairness, equity and justice.
Given this positive mindset, can we resolve to make the changes that will impact
favourably the vast sections of the population ?

Take just three areas — primary education, health and water.

Only 66% of students complete primary education. More often
than not, teachers are not present in government schools. Classrooms are
crowded. Amidst the noise, it will be the child’s fortune if she can even hear
what the teacher says.

Maternal mortality is 450 per 100,000 live births (10 times
that of China). The under-5 mortality rate is 72 per 1000 live births.

People still have to walk some distance to get water. Potable
water is a far cry in many places.

To say that this is not a satisfactory state of affairs is a
gross understatement. Yes, there has been remarkable improvement in several
directions after the Independence. In the post-liberalisation era of last 19
years, benefits have reached far and wide.

Intentions of every government — central or state — are
honourable. Good intentions do not itself make for effective actions. Funds
allocated in budgets for education and health are increasing. There is no dearth
of new schemes. A report on Bharat Nirman scheme in Business Standard of 23rd
February, 2010 is telling. The targets achieved in 2009-10 have been
disappointing, whether for road construction, electrification or drinking water.
For example, Pradhan Mantri Gram Sadak Yojna has a target of 13,000 villages in
2009-10. Till November, 2009 it had covered only 1,643 villages i.e., about 13%.
Rajiv Gandhi Vidyutikaran Yojna has targeted 4,73,000 villages in 2009-10 — it
has achieved coverage of only 8% till October, 2009. In addition to target
slippages, sustainability and maintenance of assets created is a problem.

Can we move towards a situation where we can say with pride
that every child completes secondary education regardless of gender, quality of
education is comparable to private schools, potable water is available at the
doorstep and improved sanitation facilities are available to one and all ?
Education, particularly of girl child, and improved health care can make all the
difference to society. I was ‘volunteering’ in Bangalore in a school for
children of disadvantaged sections of society. Located in a crowded area on a
narrow road, this school caters to children who were once child labourers or
whose parents are barely literate. It was a pep talk for students taking 10th
standard examination. For their families, it was an important occasion as
perhaps for the first time someone in their family would pass out of school.
When I asked the students what they want to be later in life, answers came back
spontaneously — engineers, computer professionals, doctors (to my chagrin, none
said CA !) This school caters primarily to members of the minority community and
some students who wanted to be doctors were girls. This is what education does.

Can we ask ourselves the following questions ?

(1) Do we agree that everyone in the country should have
certain minimum entitlements ?

(2) How do we have elected representatives who work
altruistically to make this possible ?

(3) Can we depend only on the government to make this
possible ? If so, how do we hold the government accountable ?

(4) If we agree that we should not leave it to the government
alone to make this possible, can civil society take up this duty ?

(5) Is civil society equipped to do this ? Can it work
effectively with the government in bringing about the change ?

(6) What is the role of professionals like us ? Do we go
beyond management of our clients’ affairs ?

The freedom struggle produced men who were selfless,
innovative (take the case of Salt March) and importantly, produced leaders who
not only sent the British back home but made freedom possible in every British
colony. They had a common objective and worked towards achieving it.

The freedom struggle has lessons even today for us to arrive at a common
goal. Perhaps 50 years from now, posterity will remember what their forefathers
did in the second decade of the 21st century.

levitra

Amendments in Port/AIrpor Services

1. Statutory provisions :

[Finance Act, 1994, (as amended from time to time) ‘Act’]

(a) Port Services :

S. 65(82) of the Act :

‘Port Service’ means any service rendered within a port or other port in any manner.

  •  S. 65(105) of the Act :

Taxable services means any service provided or to be provided :

(zn) to any person by any other person in relation to port services in a port in any manner :

Provided that the Provisions of S. 65A shall not apply to any services when the same is rendered wholly within the port :

. . . . . . . . .

(zzl) to any person, by any other person, in relation to port services in other port in any manner :

Provided that the provision of S. 65A shall not apply to any service when the same is rendered wholly within other port :

(b) Airport Services :

  •  S. 65(105) of the Act :

Taxable services mean any service provided or to be provided :

(zzm) to any person, by airports authority or by any other person, in any airport or a civil enclave.

Provided that the provision of S. 65A shall not apply to any service when the same is rendered wholly within the airport or civil enclave.

2. Departmental clarifications :

(a) Extracts from Department Circular DOF No. 334/1/2010-TRU, dated 26-2-2010) —(Annexure B) :

1. Service provided in an airport or port :

    1.1 Two services, namely, Port Services and the Airport Services were introduced in Budget 2001 and 2004, respectively. The services provided by minor ports covered under other port became taxable from 2003. The purpose behind creating these was that since a number of activities are undertaken within the premises of port and airports, it would be easier to consolidate all such services under one head.

    1.2 It was reported that divergent practices are being followed regarding classification of services being performed within port/airport area. In some places all services performed in these areas (even those falling within the definition of other taxable services) are being classified under the port/airport services. Elsewhere, individual services are classified according to their individual description on the ground that the provisions S. 65A of Finance Act, 1994 prescribes adoption of a specific description over a general one.

    1.3 Further both the definitions use the phrase ‘any person authorised by port/airports’. In many ports/airports there is no procedure of specifically authorising a service provider to undertake a particular activity. While there may be restriction on entry into such areas and the authorities often issue entry passes or identity cards, airports/port authorities seldom issue authority permission letter to a service provider authorising him to undertake a particular task. Many taxpayers have claimed waiver of tax under these services on the ground that the port/airport authority has not specifically authorised them to provide a particular service.

    1.4 In order to remove these difficulties, the definition of the relevant taxable services are being amended to clarify that all services provided entirely within the port/airport’s premises would fall under these services. Further specific authorisation from port/air port authority would not be a pre-condition for the levy.

(b) Extracts from Dept. Circular No. 334/03/2010-TRU, dated 1-7-2010 :

    Para 4.1 :

    In the Finance Bill, 2010, with intent to ease the classification disputes, the definitions of port, other port and airport services were amended to comprehensively cover under their ambit, all services provided within an airport or a port or other port, irrespective of whether or not such activities are authorised by the authorities or whether or not they are otherwise classifiable as distinct taxable services. In effect, all services that are wholly rendered within the prescribed area of the port or other port or an airport, are to be classified within the ambit of ‘port services’ or ‘airport services’.

    Para 4.2 :

    During the post-budget interactions with the stakeholders, apprehensions were expressed that the change may have certain unintended effects and certain services (including certain essential services) hitherto exempted, may attract service tax unintentionally. Further, it was also pointed that the abatements and exemptions presently available under individually defined taxable services would get denied when provided within airport or port, merely as they would now be taxable under newly introduced taxable services.

    Para 4.3(v) :

    Currently abatements are available to certain services such as ‘Renting of a cab’, ‘Erection, Commissioning & Installation Service’, ‘Goods Transport Agency service’ and ‘Construction Services’. Similar abatements would be available to such services, when provided wholly within an airport or a port or other port, under the new definition of airport or port or other port services. (Notification No. 40/2010-ST, dated 28th June, 2010 as corrected by corrigendum dated 30th June, 2010 and Notification No. 43/2010-ST, dated 28th June, 2010.)

    Para 4.4 :

    All other services carried out within a port or other port or an airport would be subjected to service tax under the category of port/other port/airport services.

3. Background & Amendment :

        a) Under the existing provisions for a service to be considered as ‘port services,’ two conditions were required to be satisfied?:

        i) the service must be provided by a port or a person authorised by that port, and

        ii) the service must be in relation to vessel or goods

    In Homa Engineering Works v. CCE, (2007) 7 STR 546 (Tri-Mum.), where the appellant provided dry-dock repairs to its client within the port premises, it was held that such services would not be liable to service tax under ‘Port Services’ due to the following reasons?:

        The appellant was not a port or a person specifically authorised by that port under the Major Port Trust Act, 1963 (MPTA 63) to provide a particular service on its behalf;

        The service such as dry-dock repairs were not in the nature of ‘Port Services’ since the port itself was not statutorily allowed to undertake such service under the MPTA 63; and

        On an application of S. 65A of the Act, such services were more appropriately classifiable under ‘Maintenance or Repairs’ service.

    This decision of the Tribunal was followed in several cases both in the context of major ports as well as other ports. In CCE v. Kokan Marine Agencies, (2009) 13 STR 79 (KAR) the Karnataka High Court upheld the Tribunal’s view which was based on Homa Engineering (supra) case.

    In order to overcome the judicial pronouncements, definition of ‘Port Services’ is amended w.e.f. 1-7-2010, to the following effect:

  •             Service need not be provided by the port or a person authorised by the port;
  •             Service need not be in relation to vessel or goods, and
  •             Service need not also be one which the port can undertake under the MPTA 63 or the Indian Ports Act, 1908.

    In terms of the amended definition of taxable service, all services rendered wholly within the port would be classified as port services and not under any other category of service, irrespective of the principles of classification laid down u/s.65A of the Act.

        b) Amendments on lines similar to ‘Port Services’ have been made in respect of Airport Services. Under the existing provisions, in order to fall within ‘airport services, the following was essential:

  •             the service should be provided by an ‘airport’ or a ‘person authorised by the airport’; and
  •             the service should be provided in an airport or civil enclave.

    The definition of ‘taxable service’ in the context of airport services is amended w.e.f. 1-7-2010 to the effect that all the services rendered by an airport authority or by ‘any person’ in an airport or civil enclave would be covered under the category of ‘airport services’ and specific authorisation from the airport authority would not be a pre-condition for the levy.

    Further, all services rendered wholly within the airport would be classified as airport services and not under any other category of services, irrespective of the principles of classification laid down u/s.65A of the Act.

        4. Exemptions in regard to amended Port/ Airport Services:
    a) Notification No. 31/10-ST, dated 22-6-2010:

    The following services provided within a port or an airport have been exempted from payment of service tax:
        
    i) repair of ships or boats or vessels belonging to the Government of India including Navy or Coast Guard or Customs, but does not include Government-owned Public Sector Undertakings;

        ii) repair of ships or boats or vessels where such process of repair amounts to ‘manufacture’ and has the meaning assigned to it in clause(f) of S. 2 of the Central Excise Act, 1944;

        iii) supply of water;

        iv) supply of electricity;

        v) treatment of persons by a dispensary, hospital, nursing home or multi-specialty clinic (except cosmetic or plastic surgery service);

        vi) services provided by a school or centre to provide formal education other than those services provided by commercial coaching or training centre;

        vii) services provided by fire service agencies;

        viii) pollution control services.

        b) Notification No. 38/10-ST and Notification No. 42/10-ST, both dated 28-6-2010:
    Commercial or Industrial Construction Services [Clause 65(105)(zzq)] provided wholly within the port/other port for construction, repair, alteration and renovation of wharves, quays, docks, stages, jetties, piers and railways has been exempted from payment of service tax. Similarly, services provided wholly within airport also are exempted.

        c) Notification No. 41/10-ST, dated 28-6-2000:

    The following services provided wholly within the port or other port or airport; have been exempted from payment of service tax:
        i) taxable service provided by a cargo handling agency in relation to agricultural produce or goods intended to be stored in a cold storage;

        ii)taxable service provided by storage or ware-house keeper in relation to storage and warehousing of agricultural produce or any service provided for storage of or any service provided by a cold storage;

        iii) taxable service in relation to transport of export goods in an aircraft by an aircraft operator;

        iv) taxable service of site formation and clearance, excavation and earthmoving and demolition and such other similar activities.

        Notification No. 40/2010-ST, dated 28-6-2010 and Notification No. 43/2010-ST, dated 1-3-2010:
    These Notifications have amended Notification No. 1/2006-ST, dated 1-3- 2006 (read with corrigendum dated 1-3-2010) and Notification No. 13/2008-ST, dated 1-3- 2008, respectively, whereby abatement available under the following existing taxable categories would continue to be available even if these services would now be classified as port services/other port or airport services:

  •         Rent-a-cab service

  •             Commissioning and installation agency
  •             Commercial or industrial construction
  •             Construction of complex
  •             Transportation of goods by rail
  •             Transport of goods by road.


        5.Some issues:

    The basic objective of the amendment, as stated in the Department Circular, is to overcome the judicial view [Homa Engineering case and Konkan Marine Agencies (supra)] whereby the service providers escaped taxation. A close reading of the amended provisions indicates that the amendments in Port/ Airport Services have resulted in large number of issues, legal as well as procedural and administrative. Some of the important issues are discussed hereafter.

    5.1 Whether services rendered wholly within port/ airport would cover service categories which were otherwise not taxable:

    Attention is drawn to Notification No. 31/10-ST dated 20- 6-2010 [Para 4 (a) above], under which specified list of services rendered within port/ airport, have been exempted from payment of service tax. These services include supply of water, supply of electricity and some other services which are not liable to service tax. Does this mean that these services provided within port/airport premises would have been liable to service tax if the exemption Notification had not been issued?? There is no ready answer to this. However it appears that Govt.’s intention is to tax all services rendered wholly within port/airport even if the relevant service does not fall under the taxable service categories specified u/s.65(105) of the Act or is specifically excluded in certain cases.

    This poses a very significant legal issue inasmuch as under the statutory provisions of the Act, the term ‘service’ is not defined. However, taxable services which are liable to service tax have been specified u/s.65(105) of the Act.

    Under Central Excise, it has been held that powers have been granted u/s.5A (1) of Central Excise Act, 1944 to grant exemption. It has been held in Bata India v. ACCE, 2 ELT J211 (PAT) that if a product is not excisable under any Tariff Entry, an exemption Notification issued u/s.5A cannot have the effect of making such a product excisable. The principle laid down is relevant. However, under the law relating to service tax, there is no exhaustive list of taxable services like Central Excise Tariff.

    It would appear that whether a service not otherwise specified u/s.65(105) of the Act, can be taxed under port/airport services, is a highly contentious issue.

    5.2 Services rendered wholly within port/airport —Practical aspects:

    It is pertinent to note that in order to be taxed under the amended port/airport service, it is essential that services are wholly rendered within a port/airport. Hence, if a service is partly rendered outside the port/airport, it would not be taxable under port/airport services but would continue to be taxable under the respective service category.

    This condition it likely to create substantial practical difficulties/hardships. As it is well known, the services are categorised for the purpose of export/ import into 3 categories viz.:

  •             Location of Immovable property

  •             Performance of service

  •             Location of service recipient

    The emphasis in the amendment is on services that can be rendered through physical action/ performance. This may pose substantial practical difficulties. In case of services under criteria of location of service recipient, where a service provider may not necessarily be located at the location of the service recipient.

    It would appear that if it can be established that a service is not wholly rendered within a port/airport, the amended provisions would not apply.

    Let us consider some illustrations.

        a) A practising CA renders consultation services to a client based within port premises. If the services are provided by the CA through physical presence within the port, it would be taxable under port service. However, if the same service is rendered by the CA through a meeting in his office outside port premises, it would be taxable as practising CA service.

    Take the case of auditing services. Audit is conducted by a CA for the above-referred client in his office located within port premises. However, finalising of balance sheet and issue of audit report is done at the CA’s office outside the port premises. In such a scenario, the question arises as to whether such services would be taxable as ‘Port Services’ or Practising CA Services. It is possible to contend that services are not rendered wholly within ‘Port Premises’.

        b) A Goods Transport Agency (GTA) provides services within port/airport as well as outside. If a GTA, provides services wholly within the port/ airport premises, such service would be taxable under port/airport service.

    With regard to GTA services, liability in case of certain specified entities to pay service tax is cast on the persons making the payment to GTA. However, as yet, no consequential amendment has been made in regard to GTA service. Hence, in regard to GTA services wholly rendered within port/airport premises, it appears that GTA would be liable to discharge the service tax liability and not the person making the payment, as was the case before 1-7-2010. Further, a GTA providing services where the freight for a whole consignment does not exceed `1,500 for an individual consignment, the freight does not exceed `750, it is exempt from service tax under Notification No. 34/2004-ST, dated 3-12-2004. Now when a GTA provides transportation service wholly within the port premises and even if each trip is invoiced for less than `1,500, he will be required to register himself under port service and charge service tax to the client, however after availing abatement of 75% thereon.

    5.3 Exemptions issued are ad hoc and inconsistent: A perusal of list of exemptions issued as stated in para 4 above reveals that there are inconsis-tencies and omissions which are likely to cause hardships. To illustrate:

        a) Commercial or industrial construction service rendered wholly within port/airport has been exempted. However, the following have not been exempted:

  •         Works contract services
  •         Residential construction (say, officers/staff quarters)

    The above inconsistencies/omissions need to be speedily addressed.

        b) Cargo handling services in relation to agricultural produce and goods stored in a cold storage have been rightly exempted. However, it needs to be noted that u/s.65(23) of the Act, handling of export cargo is excluded from the purview of Cargo Handling Service liable to service tax. If such services are rendered wholly within a port/ airport it would appear that in the absence of exemption, such services would be taxable under Port/Airport Service.

    5.4 Implications in terms of CENVAT Credit Rules, 2004:

    Under Rule 6(5) of CENVAT Credit Rules, 2004 service tax paid on 16 specified services is fully available as CENVAT Credit, unless such services are provided exclusively for exempted service.

    Management, Maintenance or Repairs is one of the specified services under Rule 6(5). If such service is rendered wholly within port/airport premises, the same would be classifiable, w.e.f. 1-7-2010, under port/airport service. The list of specified services under Rule 6(5) does not include port /airport services. Hence, in such a case, benefit hitherto available under Rule 6 (5) would now not be available. This is an unintended consequence of the amendment.

Part A : Health check-up and treatment services

fiogf49gjkf0d
Service Tax

1. Introduction :


Considering medical or health-related services as essential
services, the Government in the past consciously kept them out of the ambit of
service tax. India being a developing economy, it is hardly able to provide any
social security to its soaring population. A small class of this huge mass is
covered under health insurance schemes floated by various insurance companies.
In the current fiscal, however, the Government decided to levy service tax on
limited health-related preventive care and treatment services provided by
hospitals, nursing homes and multi-speciality clinics under specified conditions
as set out vide the Finance Act, 2010 and notified to come into effect from July
01, 2010.

2. Statutory provisions of health check-up and treatment
services are provided below :


S. 65(105)(zzzzo) of the Finance Act, 1994 (the Act) :

“Taxable service means any service provided or to be
provided by any hospital, nursing home or multi-specialty clinic, —

(i) to an employee of any business entity, in relation to
health check-up or preventive care, where the payment for such check-up or
preventive care is made by such business entity directly to such hospital,
nursing home or multi-specialty clinic; or

(ii) to a person covered by health insurance scheme, for
any health check-up or treatment, where the payment for such health check-up
or treatment is made by the insurance company directly to such hospital,
nursing home or multi-specialty clinic.

3. Scope and coverage :


3.1 Perusal of the above provisions indicates that the
following essential ingredients are required for being covered within the
purview of the above category of service :


  • Who are service providers ?


  • The service should be provided by a hospital, a nursing
    home or a multi-specialty clinic.


  • Who are service receivers ?



  • The service receiver should be; either


    any employee of a business entity; or



    a person covered by a health insurance scheme.




  • What essentially constitutes a service covered under the law ?



  • The service should essentially relate to :

    – 
    Health check-up or preventive care for an employee of a business entity;



    Health check-up or treatment in case of any person covered by a health
    insurance scheme.




    • Under which condition, the service is considered taxable ?



    When the payment is made directly :


    either by a business entity; or



    by an insurance company to the hospital, nursing home or multi-specialty
    clinic, as the case may be, the service is considered taxable.


    3.2 Before analysing further, we consider below the relevant
    extract of Ministry’s Circular letter DOF No. 334/1/2010-TRU (Annexure A), dated


    26-2-2010 issued immediately after presentation of the Finance Bill, 2010.

    “2.2 A large number of health insurance schemes are being
    offered by the insurance companies, under which charges for hospitalisation,
    surgery, post-surgical nursing, etc. are generally paid by the insurance
    company. Such insurance policies, which fall under the category of general
    insurance service, are already taxable. Under general insurance service, an
    insurance company is a service provider to its clients. Under the proposed new
    service, tax is also being imposed on the medical charges paid by the insurance
    companies to the hospitals on behalf of a business entity for its employees. As
    such, the insurance company would be the service receiver and the tax paid by
    the hospital would be available to the insurance companies as credit.

    2.3 The tax on the above-mentioned health



    services would be payable only if and to the extent the payment for such medical
    check-up or treatment, etc. is made directly by the business entity or the
    insurance company to the hospital or medical establishment.
    Any additional
    amount paid by the individual (i.e., the employee or the insured, as the case
    may be) to the hospital would not be subject to service tax. This is to ensure
    that an individual is not required to pay a tax for which he cannot take
    credit.” (emphasis supplied).

    The above clearly indicates that when the payment by a business entity or an insurance company is made directly to any hospital, nursing home or multi-speciality clinic (hereinafter referred to as ‘hospitals’ for all the three) in relation to health check-up or treatment, etc., service tax is attracted. However the words, ‘hospital’, ‘nursing home’ and ‘multi- speciality clinic’ are not defined under the service tax provisions. Therefore, these terms have to be understood as per their common parlance meanings. Hospitals would include all kinds of hospitals whether Central or State Government, private or charitable. Hospitals are generally institutions having a large set-up with many ‘in-house’ curative and diagnostic facilities. Nursing homes as opposed to hospitals are smaller versions of hospitals providing basic and skilled nursing care under doctor’s supervision, but having a limited treatment facility. They are more often than not used for those patients requiring long-term facility where hospitalisation is not required but health care at home is difficult. Multi-speciality clinics are generally those establishments, which are jointly managed by several specialists using common infrastructure facilities.

    3.3 The next important aspect in the statutory provisions is recipients of services. The employees of any business entity are covered. The term ‘business entity’ is defined by S. 65(19b) of the Act as ‘business entity includes an association of persons, body of individuals, company or firm, but does not include an individual’.

    Thus, service tax liability for hospitals arises when the payment is received by them from any business entity directly for its employee/s. Similarly, the service tax is also payable by the hospitals when the payment is made directly by the insurance company to such hospitals for health check-up or medical treatment given to persons covered under the health insurance schemes. These schemes in common parlance are known as mediclaim policies.

    3.4    Health check-up, preventive care and medical treatment services:

    •     Health check-up or preventive care for employees of business entity:


    Health check-up would generally cover periodic or annual physical examination or tests of various organs including diagnostic tests under health check- up schemes. The other term used in sub-clause (i) of the definition is ‘preventive care’. This may also either interchangeably be used for the health check-up or it may mean as little extension of health check-up and would cover measures to prevent a disease from occurring as against curing a disease. Thus preventive care would certainly pre-suppose undergoing physical examination and/ or diagnostic tests and post- diagnostic measures or programmes, but payment made by a business entity for any curative treatment would not be covered for the levy of service tax.

    •     Health check-up or treatment provided to persons covered under health insurance schemes:

    When an insurance company pays directly for a health cover of a policy holder (which in common parlance is known as “cashless policy”) whether for health check-up or for any medical treatment, service tax is payable by the hospitals. Instead, when a person insured at the threshold pays directly to the hospital for the health check-up or medical treatment and subsequently claims reimbursement, no service tax is required to be charged or paid by the hospital. Further, under mediclaim policies of this kind, when various medical treatments also get covered, service tax would be attracted.

        Exemptions:

    No specific exemption is provided to any person or any service as the scope of the category of service itself is limited to certain services and when paid directly by any business entity or insurance company. However, general exemptions applicable to all other taxable services apply to this service as well. These exemptions are services provided to the United Nation or other international organisations under Notification No. 16/2002-ST, dated 2-8-2002, services provided to a developer or unit of Special Economic Zone under Notification No. 9/2009-ST, dated 3-3- 2009 and services provided to foreign diplomatic mission or diplomat agents or career consular officials, etc. under Notifications No. 33/2007 -ST and No. 34/2007-ST, both dated 23-5-2007 as per terms and conditions mentioned under respective notifications.

        Some issues:

    5.1 Company A, a manufacturing company as per its policy provides facility of health check -up as well as various medical/surgical treatments to its employees at empanelled hospitals. The treatments include bypass surgery, hernia, various orthopedic surgeries, angioplasty, ENT surgeries, etc. The Company’s employee, Mr. X was hospitalised and had to undergo a bypass surgery in October 2010. The Company paid directly to the hospital for his hospitalisation, surgery and related other expenses including diagnostic tests. Whether the hospital is obliged to pay service tax on the above and therefore collect it in its invoice on Company A?

    5.1A Vis-à-vis employees of a ‘business entity’, only the services in relation to health check-up or preventive care are specifically covered. When an employee is admitted to a hospital for a bypass surgery, it would mean a medical and surgical treatment to remove and cure blockages in the arteries. This service is not covered in sub-clause of S. 65(105)(zzzzo). The first sub-clause is specific to the employees of a business entity, wherein only services in relation to health check-up or preventive care are covered. Therefore the hospital is not liable to pay service tax in the invoice raised on Company A.

    5.2 Many insurance companies appoint Third Party Administrators (TPAs) for facilitating payment to hospitals on their behalf. Often the hospitals therefore raise bills on such TPAs. Whether service tax is to be levied by the hospitals?

    TPAs act on behalf of the insurance companies. Their services are outsourced by the insurance companies for administration, management and processing of hospital bills. Even if the invoices are issued by hospitals on such TPAs, generally the payment is made by the insurance company as the person is insured by the insurance company. The payment in terms of the legal provisions discussed above would be treated as made by the insurance companies and subject to fulfilment of other requirements discussed above would be liable for service tax. This comment is however subject to specific terms and conditions of the agreement between an insurance company and a TPA.

    5.3 Many corporate entities like airlines, shipping companies or other multinational companies while recruiting new employees require them to undergo medical examination/fitness tests and pay directly to the hospital for the same. Whether this would also attract service tax?

    5.3A Technically, the persons, prior to their being recruited, are not employees of the organisation and therefore they are not covered by the insurance scheme meant for the employees. The definition as discussed above specifically covers employees only and therefore medical examination for persons other than employees would not attract service tax. However, unless the concerned corporate notifies the hospital as to the tests/ examination conducted for non-employees, the hospital would not be able to distinguish since they receive payment directly from corporates against their invoices raised on them; they would assume their service tax liability on such invoices as well.

    5.4 Whether pathology laboratories conducting blood tests would also be considered part of health check-up and therefore liable for service tax?

    5.4A There is a taxing entry ‘technical testing and analysis’ notified in S. 65(106) of the Act. Under this clause, an explanation is provided whereby testing and analysis for determination of nature of diseased condition, identification of disease, prevention of any disease or disorder on human being or animals is specifically excluded. When specific exclusion is provided under one taxing entry, it would not be under another taxing entry. Further, the overall physical check-up undertaken under a mediclaim policy may include pathological tests conducted at a hospital. But the definition above in S. 65(105) (zzzzo) specifically includes only three kinds of service providers viz. hospitals, nursing homes and multi-speciality clinics, but does not include pathological laboratories.

    5.5 In most cases of claims submitted by a person under health insurance/mediclaim policies for medical or surgical treatments, it is observed that substantial amount in a hospital invoice includes cost towards medicines, implants or stent, etc. and other consumables. Whether service tax is chargeable on the entire amount of invoice including the value of supply of goods also?

    5.5A As it is known, Notification No. 12/2003-ST, dated 20-6-2003 in unambiguous terms exempts value of goods and material sold or supplied during the course of providing services. Many rulings have been pronounced by judicial forum, whereby the principle is upheld that supply of goods (which is chargeable to VAT) cannot be subject to service tax, as service tax is levied on the value of taxable services. However, as per requirement of the above Notification, whether value of ‘goods’ supplied is indicated in the invoice or whether any other documentary evidence thereof is available, etc. Therefore, the liability of service tax would have to be determined on a case-to-case basis.

    Judicial interpretation of the term ‘Input Service’

    1. Background :

        Since the introduction of tax on services in 1994 and till the prescription of CENVAT Credit Rules, 2004 — (CCR), service tax on various key services like telephone, insurance, consulting engineers, advertising, manpower recruitment, management consultancy, audit, etc. meant a cost addition initially of 5% and from 2003 of 8% for the entire manufacturing — industrial sector. As a measure of integrating tax on goods and services, extension of intersectoral credit was introduced by prescribing CENVAT Credit Rules, 2004 to come into effect on 10th September, 2004 both under the Central Excise Act, as well as under the service tax law which is part of the Finance Act, 1994. Under the premise that credit would be available of service tax paid on input services, the rate of service tax was simultaneously increased from 8% to 10%.

        A Press Note dated August 12, 2004, [Reported at 2004 (17) ELT-T19] highlighted salient features of the proposed CENVAT Credit Rules. The relevant paras (iii) and (iv) are reproduced below :

        (iii) In principle, credit of tax on those taxable services would be allowed that go to form a part of the assessable value on which excise duty is charged. This would include certain services which are received prior to commencement of manufacture but the value of which gets absorbed in the value of goods. As regards services received after the clearance of the goods from the factory, the credit would be extended on services received up to the stage of place of removal (as per S. 4 of Central Excise Act). In addition to this, services like advertising, market research, etc. which are not directly related to manufacture but are related to the sale of manufactured goods would also be permitted for credit.

        (iv) Full credit of service tax on services (such as telephone, security, construction, advertising service, market research, etc.) which are received in relation to the offices pertaining to a manufacturer or service provider would also be allowed.

    2. During the past five years of introduction of CENVAT Credit of service tax on input services, innumerable litigations across the country took place at all levels involving both interpretational as well as procedural issues. However, the most significant among them revolved around interpretation of the definition of ‘input service’ and more so in relation to the manufacturing activity. Consequent upon divergent views and conflicting opinions of various Benches of CESTAT, at least in two important cases the matter was referred to Larger Benches. The decision in both viz. CCE, Mumbai-V v. GTC Industries Ltd., 2008 (12) STR 468 (Tri. – LB) and ABB Ltd. v. Commissioner of C. EX. & S.T., Bangalore 2009 (15) STR 23 (Tri. – LB) — (provided in BCAJ in Part-B under Service Tax feature in December 2008 and July 2009 issues, respectively) analysed the term ‘input service’ to reach the conclusion. Soon thereafter, independently i.e., without considering any of the above decisions, the Bombay High Court in the case of Coca Cola India Pvt. Ltd. v. CCE-Pune-III, 2009 (15) STR 657 (Bom.) examined and made in-depth analysis of ‘input service’.

    3. What is ‘input service’ :

        The term ‘input service’ in Rule 2(1) in CCR is defined as follows :

        ‘Input service’ means any service, —

        (i) used by a provider of taxable service for providing an output service; or

        (ii) used by the manufacturer, whether directly or indirectly, in or in relation to the manufacture of final products and clearance of final products up to the place of removal, and includes services used in relation to setting up, modernisation, renovation or repairs of a factory, premises of provider of output service or an office relating to such factory or premises, advertisement or sales promotion, market research, storage up to the place of removal, procurement of inputs, activities relating to business, such as accounting, auditing, financing, recruitment and quality control, coaching and training, computer networking, credit rating, share registry, and security, inward transportation of inputs or capital goods and outward transportation up to the place of removal.” (emphasis supplied)

    4. In the case of GTC Industries Ltd. (supra), the Larger Bench of CESTAT, Mumbai examined the above definition in a fairly detailed manner. The definition was analysed in the context of services of outdoor caterer used by the manufacturer in the canteen for workers. Both the appellant and the respondent agreed in principle that the said service of outdoor caterer was to be considered as one relating to business and therefore, would fall under the inclusive part of the definition and not the main definition. Therefore, the analysis of the definition was focussed with special and specific reference to the word ‘includes’ and the term ‘activities relating to business’ used in the definition. The appellant in this case contended that the term ‘includes’ enhances the scope of the definition and therefore it cannot take a restrictive approach. In this regard, inter alia the extract from the Apex Court’s decision in the case of Regional Director v. Highland Coffee Works, 1991 (3) SCC 617 was cited as follows :

    “The word ‘include’ in the statutory definition is generally used to enlarge the meaning of the preceding words and it is by way of extension, and not with restriction. The word ‘include’ is very generally used in interpretation clauses in order to enlarge the meaning of words or phrases occurring in the body of the statute; and when it is so used, these words or phrases must be construed as comprehending, not only such things as they signify according to their natural import but also those things which the interpretation clause declares that they shall include. [See (i) Stroud’s Judicial Dictionary, 5th edn. Vol. 3, p. 1263 and (ii) CIT v. Taj Mahal Hotel 1, (iii) State of Bombay v. Hospital Mazdoor Sabha]”

    It was further contended that the term ‘such as’ used in the definition was an adjective indicative of the draftsman’s intention that he is assigning the same meaning or characteristic to the noun as has been previously indicated, but it does not prohibit any other activity which can define noun in a similar way and therefore, the expression only connotes that whatever activities are given are only illustrations that relate to the business. Therefore, any activity relating to business of the assessee would be covered as an input service. Further, stress was laid for this interpretation by stating that the words ‘such as’ used after the expression ‘activity relating to business’ in the inclusive part of the definition further supported the contention that the activities mentioned therein were illustrative and not exhaustive and it could not limit the scope of the definition of the input service once the term was used after the usage of the word ‘includes’ in the said definition. In this context, the reference was also made to the extract of the Press Note of the Draft Rules made at point 1 above. By facilitating comparison between the Draft Credit Rules and the CCR, the scope and application of the term ‘activities relating to business’ was construed wide enough to cover various aspects of the activities relating to business. The submissions of the Revenue with the aid of several Supreme Court decisions however revolved around contending that the list in the inclusive part of the definition is exhaustive. The Larger Bench however concluded with the following remark :

    “We find that it is well settled that every clause of the statute should be construed with reference to the context in which it is issued. A bare mechanical interpretation of words and application of legislative intent is devoid of concept and purpose will reduce most of the remedial and beneficial legislations to futility. To be literal in meaning is to see the skin and miss the soul.” . . . . “The context in which and the purpose for which the Credit Rules have been issued are clear from the Press Note dated August 12, 2004 issued by the Ministry of Finance, prior to introduction of the Credit Rules wherein the draft rules were circulated for inviting comments from trade and industries. This Note clearly states that “in principle, credit of tax on those taxable services would be allowed that go to form a part of the assessable value on which excise duty is charged.”

    5. Little different dimension and perspective was provided by the Larger Bench in the case of ABB Ltd. v. CCE & ST, Bangalore (supra). While examining allowability of CENVAT credit service tax paid on outward transportation service for movement of final products from the place of removal till the customer’s place, it was observed that the definition of input service could be conveniently divided into the following five categories vis-à-vis the manufacturers :

    •  Any service used by the manufacturer, whether directly or indirectly, in or in relation to the final products.

    • Any service used by the manufacturer, whether directly or indirectly, in or in relation to clearance of final products from the place of removal.

    •  Services used in relation to setting up, modernisation, renovation or repairs of a factory, or an office relating to such factory.

    • Services used in relation to advertisement or sales promotion, market research, storage up to the place of removal, procurement of inputs.

    •  Services used in relation to activities relating to business and outward transportation up to the place of removal.

    On making the above division, the Larger Bench observed that each of the above was an independent benefit or concession and even if one was satisfied, the credit on input service would be admissible.

    In this case also, the expression ‘activities relating to business’ was analysed in depth by examining the expression ‘in relation to’ as analysed in the case of Doypack Systems (P) Ltd. v. UOI, (1988) (36) ELT 201 (SC) and also examining the qualification ‘activities’ and the expression ‘such as’.

    In the case of ABB Ltd. (supra), the Bench relying on and discussing the decisions of Kerala State Co-op-erative Marketing Federation Ltd. & Ors. v. CIT, (1998) 5 SCC 48, Share Medical Care v. UOI, 2007 (209) ELT 321 (SC) and HCL Ltd. v. Collector, 2001 (130) ELT 405 (SC) held that when the general expression ‘activities relating to business’ covered transportation up to the customer’s place, credit could not be denied by relying on specific coverage of outward transportation up to the place of removal in the inclusive clause. According to the Bench, the principle laid down in various Supreme Court cases that a specific provision will override a general one did not apply to exemptions. On the basis of this contention, the Bench held that the Revenue’s view was incorrect to contend that “since outward transportation was specifically mentioned in the inclusive clause of the definition, credit for outward transportation could not be allowed with reference to other general limb of the definition. Also, in this decision, there was a categorical observation by the Larger Bench as to the wide import of the word ‘business’ as held in the case of Mazagaon Dock Ltd. v. CIT, (AIR 1958 SC 861). The Tribunal reached the conclusion by stating that the use of the expression ‘outward transportation’ in the inclusive clause was by way of abundant caution so as to avoid any dispute being raised on the ‘means’ clause (which refers to clearance from place of removal).
     
    According to the Larger Bench in ABB Ltd.’s case (supra), as opposed to the decision in the case of GTC (supra) discussed above, there was no requirement in law that the cost of freight should have entered transaction value to qualify for admissibility of credit or stated in other words non-inclusion of a particular cost in the transaction value by itself is not a limiting factor for admissibility of credit as the issue did not relate to valuation of excisable goods and the issues of ‘valuation’ and CENVAT credit were independent of each other.

    (Note : Karnataka High Court has stayed the operation of decision in the above ABB Ltd.’s case.)

    It is to be noted here that the Punjab and Haryana High Court, a few months earlier, also reached a similar decision in the case of Ambuja Cement Ltd. v. UOI, 2009 (14) STR 3 (P & H) that outward transportation up to the place of removal was an input service. However, the premise under which this was held was somewhat different. In this case, reliance was placed on the Board’s Circular No. 97/6/2007-ST of 23/08/2007 and the principle that the Revenue was precluded from challenging the correctness of the Circular which provided that when the ownership of the goods remained with the seller of the goods till its delivery, the seller bore the risk of change during transit to destination and when the freight formed part of the price of goods, the credit was admissible. Further, a subtle mention was also made to the definition of ‘input service’ that the definition inter alia includes outward transportation up to the place of removal and since in the instant case, ownership of goods remained with the seller till the doorstep of the buyer, insurance was borne by the seller and also that freight formed part of the value of goods, the conditions of the Circular were satisfied and therefore, the credit was admissible. To sum up, this case did not discuss or analyse the definition of input service to reach the conclusion.

    However, the decision of the Bombay High Court in the case of Coca Cola India Pvt. Ltd. v. CCE, 2009 (15) STR 657 (Bom.) — 22 STT 130 (Bom.) (discussed in BCAJ October 2009 issue) interpreted the definition ‘input service’ at great length discussing the terms used in the definition ‘means’, ‘includes’, ‘such as’, ‘business’ while examining whether or not advertising service used by a concentrate manufacturer was an admissible credit when the soft drinks were bottled and removed for sale by a group company and the advertisement related to the final product as bottled and sold by the latter.

    • In the case of Coca Cola India (supra) while interpreting the definition, relying on the decisions in cases like Regional Director v. Highland Coffee Works, 1991 (3) SCC 617 (reiterated in CIT v. TTK Health Care Ltd., 2007 (11) SCC 796), M/s. Mahalakshmi Oil Mills v. State of Andhra Pradesh, AR 1989 Supreme Court 335 and Bharat Co-operative Bank (Mumbai) Ltd. v. Co-op. Bank Employees Union, (2007) 4 SCC 685, it was held that the expression ‘means and includes’ is exhaustive. By the word ‘includes’ the services which otherwise may not have come within the ambit get included and by the word ‘means’, they are made exhaustive.

    •  After reaching this conclusion, the High Court considered and analysed the meanings of the term ‘such as’ relying on Good Year India Ltd. v. Collector, 1997 (95) ELT 450 and concluded that the words ‘such as’ are illustrative and not exhaustive.

    • Next, it was held that the expression ‘business’ meant a continuous activity, which is not confined to a mere manufacture of the product. Therefore, activities in relation to business could cover all the activities related to the functions of business. Relying on State of Karnataka v. Shreyas Paper Pvt. Ltd., 2006 SCC and Mazagaon Dock (supra), [(also relied on by the Larger Bench in ABB Ltd., (supra),] it was held that the ‘business’ in particular in fiscal statutes is of wide import.

    • Thereafter in paras 26 to 30, the phrase ‘activity relating to business’ was analysed citing extracts from Supreme Court cases viz. Doypack Systems Limited v. UOI, 1988 (36) ELT 261 (SC), CIT v. Chandulal Keshavlal & Co., (1961 38 ITR 61 (SC), Eastern Investments Ltd. v. CIT, 1951 (20) ITR 1 and Allahabad High Court’s decision in Additional Commissioner of Income Tax v. Symonds Distributors (P) Ltd., (1977) 108 ITR 947 (All) to conclude that the scope of the said phrase widens the scope of the definition. Among the quotes used in the decision, the following extract from the speech of Lord Hope of Craighead in the context of credit under VAT in Customs and Excise Commissioners v. Redrow Group Plc, (1999 Simon Tax cases 161) is both apt and interesting to note :


    “The word services is given such a wide meaning for the purposes of value added tax that it is capable of embracing everything which a taxable person does in the course or furtherance of a business carried on by him which is done for a consideration. The name or description, which one might apply to the service, is immaterial, because the concept does not call for that kind of analysis. The service is that which is done in return for the consideration. As one moves down the chain of supply, each taxable person receives a service when another taxable person does something for him in the course of furtherance of a business carried on by that other person for which he takes a consideration in return. Questions such as who benefits from the service or who is the consumer of it are not helpful. The answers are likely to differ according to the interest, which various people may have in the transaction. The matter has to be looked at from the standpoint of the person who is claiming the deduction by way of input tax. Was something being done for him for which, in the course or furtherance of a business carried on by him, he has had to pay a consideration which has attracted value added tax ? The fact that some-one else, in this case the prospective purchaser, also received a service as part of the same transaction does not deprive the person who instructed the service and who has had to pay for it for the benefit of the deduction.”
    (emphasis supplied)

    •  Like in the case of ABB Ltd., (supra), in the case of Coca Cola India (supra) as well, it was discussed that the definition of ‘input service’ could be effectively divided into five categories vis-à-vis a manufacturer (not reproduced here as it is along the same lines as provided above at para 5).

    7. It is further noteworthy at this point that in all the three cases viz. GTC Industries Ltd. (supra), ABB Ltd. (supra) and Coca Cola India (supra), the definition of ‘input service’ as a whole was examined with reference to Draft CENVAT Credit Rules, 2004, Ministry’s Press Note on the subject matter and considering the underlying factor that service tax is a value added tax and therefore the ultimate burden of service tax must be borne by the ultimate consumer and not the intermediary i.e., the manufacturer or the service provider.

    8. With the above important decisions in place, the readers may be shocked to note that in a very recent decision given by the Single Member Bench of the Mumbai CESTAT in the case of CCE, Nagpur v. Manikgarh Cement Works, 2009 TIOL 2059 CESTAT-Mum. wherein primarily the Tribunal examined the allowability of credit on service tax paid on construction service, repairs and maintenance service, manpower recruitment service, etc. used for residential colony outside the assessee’s factory and relying on the Supreme Court’s decision in the case of Maruti Suzuki Ltd. v. CCE, Delhi 2009 (240) ELT 641 (SC) (this decision related to examination of the term ‘input’ vis-à-vis use of fuel in the electricity generation, the excess of which was sold to power grid), held as follows :

    “Where an inclusive part of a definition provides a list of items, any such item should also satisfy the quint-essential ingredients of the main part of the definition. In other words, the definition has to be considered in its entirety. The inclusive part is not independent of the main part. It is not a stand-alone provision. This ruling in the case of Maruti Suzuki Ltd. (supra) is applicable to ‘input services’ given the definition of this expression under Rule 2(1) of the CENVAT Credit Rules. There is nothing in this definition to indicate that the legislative intent behind it is different from the one underlying the definition of ‘input’.

    Accordingly, I hold that any service which is apparently covered by the parameters of the inclusive part of the definition of ‘input service’ should also satisfy the quintessential requirements of the main part of the definition and, accordingly, any person claiming the benefit of CENVAT credit on input service in terms of the inclusive part of the definition of ‘input service’ should establish that such service was used, directly or indirectly, in or in relation to the manufacture of the final products or the clearance of such products from his factory.”

    The Tribunal went on to further hold that the Supreme Court’s ruling in Maruti Suzuki Ltd. (supra) case implicitly overruled the High Court’s decision in Coca Cola India Pvt. Ltd. (supra) and is constitutionally binding on the Tribunal. As a matter of fact, in the earlier case of the same assessee, the Coordinate Bench of the Tribunal had held that CENVAT credit was admissible [refer to 2008 (9) STR 554 (Tri.-Mum.)] (the decision is presently under challenge by the Revenue before the High Court).

    Conclusion :

    From the above, it can be observed that in spite of the two Larger Benches of the Tribunal and a High Court doing in-depth analysis of the term ‘input service’, the era of dispute sees no end, given the fact that the issue involved in the decision in the case of ABB Ltd would be examined a fresh by Karnataka High Court. Much remains to be examined yet as to the allowability of credit on service tax paid on various services used for providing output services in spite of the fact that various Tribunals have examined this aspect and rendered decisions using pragmatism. One such instance is the case of Deloitte Tax Service India Pvt. Ltd. v. CCE, Hyderabad-IV, 2008 (11) STR 266 (Tri.-Bang). Nevertheless, seeing conflicting stands followed by various Benches of the Tribunals, both manufacturing and service sector would like to see the issue settled, given the fact that service tax is a value added tax and that interpretation of the term is done with the underlying consideration that intersectoral credit was facilitated with a view to reducing cascading effect of the taxes.

    India likely to pitch for deeper tax information exchange at G-20 meet

    New Page 1

    50 India likely to pitch for deeper tax information exchange
    at G-20 meet

    New Delhi is expected to present a detailed paper on the
    issue at the forthcoming Seoul meeting, urging that domestic laws of countries
    must support such agreements for effective information exchange.

    In some countries, for instance, domestic laws relating to
    privacy protection tend to come in the way of sharing information with other
    countries, defeating the very purpose of such pacts.

    The proposal for a multilateral information exchange comes
    even as India has initiated talks with Switzerland for revising its tax treaty
    to include tax information exchange agreements, or TIEA, to get details on
    likely tax evaders.

    New Delhi also wants the current system of peer review under
    the global forum to ensure that such agreements are meaningful and have not been
    entered into just to get a tax haven struck off from the list of non-compliant
    countries of the Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development. Nearly
    500 such bilateral pacts have been signed so far since last April, after the
    G-20 pledged to crackdown on tax havens at the London summit.

    Immediately after the G-20 pledge, the OECD came out with a
    list of non-compliant countries, based on compliance with international tax
    standards. Since last April, as many as 28 jurisdictions have joined the list of
    countries that have substantially implemented the international tax standards.
    Going by the latest OECD list, there are no jurisdictions that have not
    committed to international tax standards where there were four countries — Costa
    Rica, Malaysia (Labuan), the Philippines and Uruguay — in that category last
    April.

    (Source : The Economic Times, dated 7-7-2010)

    [Does India have the necessary and adequate infrastructure and
    trained personnel in the Finance Ministry/CBDT to process the information
    received and the political will to take necessary action against the offenders
    who receive political patronage ?]

    levitra

    SC wants a break from frivolous pleas

    New Page 1

    48 SC wants a break from frivolous pleas

    The Supreme Court has called for effective laws to stop
    frivolous litigants. It asked the Legislature and Law Commission to revisit laws
    relating to imposition of cost meant to curb the menace of frivolous litigation.
    There are more than 3 crore cases pending in the country. The Apex Court,
    however, set aside an innovative order of the Delhi High Court, which directed
    the litigant to give an undertaking to pay a huge sum to the other party in
    event of rejection of the case. “The lack of appropriate provisions relating to
    costs has resulted in a steady increase in malicious, vexatious, false,
    frivolous and speculative suits, apart from rendering S. 89 of the Code (Civil
    Procedure Code) ineffective. Any attempt to reduce the pendency or encourage
    alternative dispute resolution processes or to streamline the civil justice
    system will fail in the absence of appropriate provisions relating to costs.
    There is therefore an urgent need for the Legislature and the Law Commission of
    India to re-visit the provisions relating to costs and compensatory costs
    contained in S. 35 and S. 35A of the Code,” said a bench comprising Justice R.
    V. Raveendran and Justice R. M. Lodha.

    (Source : The Economic Times, dated 8-7-2010)

    levitra

    State of our Mumbai University — 130 teaching posts lie vacant

    New Page 1

    49 State of our Mumbai University — 130 teaching posts lie
    vacant

    The faculty of Mumbai University are always complaining that
    they are short-staffed. Now, positions sanctioned by the University Grants
    Commission (UGC) are lying vacant.

    Around 30 teaching positions were sanctioned under the 11th
    Five-year Plan. Three years of the plan period have already gone by, but the
    varsity has not started the appointment process. Burdened faculty members blame
    red tape and also the fact that ever since the university has been headless, no
    major decision has been made.

    Around 100 additional teaching positions, recommended by the
    Joint Director of Higher Education, have been pending with the Government since
    2009.

    (Source : The Times of India, dated 5-7-2010)

    [Note : Can we hope that it will ever regain its premier
    position in the academic world ?]

    levitra

    US tax crackdown extends to residents with Indian ties

    New Page 1

    47 US tax crackdown extends to residents with Indian ties

    In a crackdown on offshore tax evasion, American authorities
    have begun a criminal probe into HSBC individual account holders, who may not
    have disclosed their accounts in India. Indian Finance Ministry officials
    admitted that authorities in New Delhi “must have passed on the information to
    their US counterparts as part of bilateral or multilateral agreements”. It was
    reported that the US Justice Department has initiated a criminal investigation
    of HSBC Holdings’ clients who may have failed to disclose their accounts in
    India or Singapore to the US Internal Revenue Service (IRS). “The information
    about the accounts is unlikely to have come from the HSBC Bank and is also very
    unlikely that US authorities or its agencies would have gone fishing for the
    individual accounts which are outside their country,” he said. In India, the
    financial information is gathered by different authorities such as Reserve Bank
    of India, various banks, Financial Intelligence Unit and the Income-tax
    Department. “It is possible that one of these authorities passed on the
    information about the bank accounts of foreigners in India to the US IRS under
    an exchange of information programme,” the official said. In the US, it is
    obligatory for any citizen to provide details regarding any financial
    transaction he or she may have carried out overseas.

    (Source : The Economic Times, dated 7-7-2010)

    levitra

    Govt. gets ball rolling on FDI in retail

    New Page 1

    46 Govt. gets ball rolling on FDI in retail

    The Union Government has initiated a move to open the
    country’s multi-brand retail segment to foreign investment, without revealing
    its mind on details such as how much investment will be permitted.

    In a 21-page discussion paper, it has sought comments from
    stakeholders on a dozen issues, ranging from allowing retail chains with foreign
    capital to open stores in select cities to government approval for opening each
    store, mandatory hiring of rural population and sourcing from small and medium
    enterprises.

    (Source : The Economic Times, dated 7-7-2010)

    levitra

    FEMA violations — India Inc breathes easy as RBI ready to forgive

    New Page 1

    Even a few months ago, businessmen and corporate honchos
    shuddered to visit Mint Street whenever they found themselves on the wrong side
    of foreign currency regulations. Frosty conversations with hard-nosed officials
    of RBI inevitably ended with grim penalties — at times stiff enough to cripple
    business for some time. Not any longer.

    The same officials are more willing to listen and quick to
    forgive the violations as ‘technical’ errors. What’s more interesting is the
    drop in the amount of fines. Earlier, these could be anything from Rs.20 lakh to
    as high as Rs.3 crore, today the figures have plummeted to Rs.25,000-40,000.

    (Source : The Economic Times, dated 6-7-2010)

    levitra

    SC Notices by E-Mail

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    New Page 1

    81 SC Notices by
    E-Mail

    With the pendency
    of cases refusing to come down, the Supreme Court decided to experiment with
    email notices to respondents to cut the delay in the traditional method of
    serving notices.

    The traditional
    method — registered post with acknowledgement due — usually takes a long time
    and mostly results in adjournment of hearings because of non-service of the
    notices on the
    respondents. Chief Justice of India S. H. Kapadia, sitting with Justices K. S.
    Radhakrishnan and Swatanter Kumar, realised the difficulty and took immediate
    action by asking all the lawyers present in the Court about putting in practice
    the serving of notice through emails, at least to start with in commercial
    matters. When Attorney General
    G. E. Vahanvati and senior advocate Harish Salve welcomed the idea, it took
    Justice Kapadia no time to dictate an order to that effect — sending notices
    through email in commercial cases.

    To help speed up
    the process, Vahanvati volunteered to give within two weeks details of email
    addresses of every Central Government department, which is the single largest
    litigant in the Court. The AG said : “The cabinet secretariat will provide email
    addresses of each and every department and regulatory authorities and names of
    nodal officers.”

    But the
    traditional method of serving notices would not be given up. “We hereby direct
    the SC registry to send additional notice at the email addresses of respondents,
    whenever the advocate . . . furnishes them with a soft copy of the petition or
    appeal,” the Bench said.

    (Source : The Times of India, dated 27-7-2010)

    levitra

    Many of India’s billionaires have made money from proximity to government.

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    New Page 1

    80 Many of India’s
    billionaires have made money from proximity to government.

    The proliferation
    of dollar billionaires in India in recent years has often been cited as evidence
    of the country’s growing economic might, but Raghuram Rajan, previously chief
    economist of the International Monetary Fund and now an economic advisor to the
    Prime Minister said he had no problems with wealth creation, “but I do think
    there is a problem if much of this wealth comes from proximity to government’’.

    Pointing out that
    India had the second largest number of billionaires per trillion dollars of GDP
    in the world (after Russia) prior to the crisis, and now possibly the largest,
    Rajan said “If you look at the areas where we have so many billionaires, many of
    them are not software entrepreneurs, it’s things like land, real estate, natural
    resources and areas that require licences.’’

    While conceding
    that some of these people have genuinely created entrepreneurial firms that have
    done wonderful things, in telecom for instance, Rajan added, “There are other
    areas which are less competitive and where proximity to government helps. That’s
    a worrisome factor.’’

    India, he said,
    faced the danger of sliding into some sort of oligarchic capitalism like Mexico.
    “I would argue that there is a danger that if we let the nexus between the
    politician and the businessman get too strong, we could shut down competition.
    That could slow us down tremendously and also maybe create questions eventually
    for our democracy,’’ he warned.

    Rajan, said there
    has been a ‘privatisation by stealth’ of the state in India. Expanding on that
    phrase, he said “I worry that in the areas where there isn’t adequate
    governance, we are letting the private
    sector determine things that should naturally be the prerogative of the state.’’

    As with the
    billionaires, so too with India’s membership of the G-20 — Rajan is not overly
    impressed by this apparent sign of the country having arrived at the high table.
    First, he maintained that international meetings rarely achieved anything
    concrete.

    Characterising the
    NREGS as a stop-gap measure, Rajan said at least four elements were needed to
    move the bulk of the population in the rural areas to the modern economy —
    infrastructure to connect them to towns, education and healthcare to enable them
    to participate in a modern economy, and financial inclusion. Without these, he
    warned, India’s much-touted ‘population dividend’ could turn into a ‘population
    curse’.

    (Source : The Times of India, dated 31-7-2010)

    levitra

    Comments and Suggestions by Bcas to Accounting Standards Board of ICAI on Exposure Drafts

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    Representation

    Reference :

    Calculation of EPS : Weighted average number of treasury shares
    held.

    Comments :

    In India, publishing of standalone financial statements is
    required. At present, publishing of consolidated financial statements is
    required only for listed companies. In this context clarification is required
    that treasury shares held by subsidiaries are not required to be adjusted in
    working of weighted average number of shares for standalone financial
    statements.

    Reference :

    Para 26 and 27(b) — example 4, calculation of basic EPS for
    the year 2001.

    Comments :

    Regarding rights issue, clarification is required on the
    treatment to be given to the effects of the rights issue in working out diluted
    EPS.

    Reference :

    Para 45, 46, 47 and 63.

    Comments :

    Clarification is required to calculate Average Market Price
    (AMP) based on simple or weighted average.

    Reference :

    Appendix B : Example 1.

    Comments :

    In India, dividend on preference shares is liable to
    dividend distribution tax
    . In our view, for calculation of profit available
    for equity shareholders, such distribution tax also needs to be deducted in
    addition to dividend on pReference : shares. The same needs to be incorporated
    in the illustration.

    Reference :

    Appendix B : Example 7.

    Appendix B : Example 7 Note (e) of Diluted EPS.

    Comments :.


    Contingently issuable shares : Example explains that in
    the working of basic EPS, earnings contingency for which shares are to be issued
    at the year-end need not be considered in working out basic EPS for each quarter
    of that year. The question arises whether the same treatment is required even if
    there is substantial certainty of achieving the required earnings. Similarly, in
    case of diluted EPS sum of EPS for all the quarters do not total to the EPS of
    full year. An explanation for the same is required.

    Note (e) mentions that anti-dilution rules do not apply
    because the loss during the third quarter is attributable to a loss from
    discontinued operations. It is not clear as to why anti-dilution rule is not
    applicable in such circumstances. We believe that even if the rule is made
    applicable, diluted EPS for quarter 3 will remain the same.

    Reference :

    Appendix B : Example 8.

    Comments :

    In the example, convertible bonds carry interest rate of 6%
    against prevailing market rate of 9%. It seems that the issuing entity has
    option to settle principal amount in cash. In such circumstances, question may
    arise as to why lower rate for bond will be acceptable to the investors ?
    Clarification is required in the context of breaking up components of liability
    and equity in convertible bond. (as per related provisions of AS 31).

    Reference :

    Appendix D dealing with difference between the revised draft
    and existing AS 20.

    Comments :

    The Appendix does not specify the following
    additional differences :

    (a) Para A16 deals with treatment to be given in
    calculation of diluted EPS for partly paid shares. This has not been dealt
    with in existing AS 20.

    For the last sentence of Para A16 i.e., ‘the
    number of shares included in diluted earnings per share is the difference
    between the number of shares subscribed and the number of shares assumed to be
    purchased’
    , clarification is required whether it is applicable only if
    partly paid shares are not entitled to participate in dividend or otherwise ?

    (b) Paragraph 64 is different from paragraph 44 of the
    existing AS 20. It does not provide for restatement of EPS for changes in
    accounting policies.

    Paragraph 64 of the draft contains the following :

    In addition, basic and diluted earnings per share of all
    periods presented shall be adjusted for the effects of errors and adjustments
    resulting from changes in accounting policies accounted for retrospectively.

    Comments on ED of Ind-AS 41

    (Corresponding to IFRS 1)

    ‘First-Time Adoption of Indian Accounting Standards’

    Reference :

    Example in Para 8.

    Comments :

    Para 8 requires an entity not to apply different versions of
    Ind-ASs which were effective at earlier dates. However, it (entity) can apply
    new Ind-AS that is not mandatory if early application is permitted.
    Concession on similar lines is also provided under IFRS. This requirement of
    Para 8 is also indicated in the example to the said Para, under the heading
    ‘Application of requirements’,
    which reads as under :


    “If a new Ind-AS is not yet mandatory but permits early
    application, entity A is permitted, but not required, to apply that Ind-AS in
    its first financial statements.”


    This requirement as specified in the example is restricted
    only to an entity which applies Ind-ASs effective for financial year/periods
    ending on March 31, 2012, but does not present
    comparative information. However, the said requirement should also apply to an
    entity which decides to present comparative information in those financial
    statements for one year. Not considering the aforesaid requirement for the other
    entities seems inadvertent.

    In view of the foregoing, it is necessary that the aforesaid
    Para (given in bold herein) either should be moved at the end of the example or
    a new para with the same wordings be added at the end of the example.

    Reference :

    Appendix D — Para D5 and D6 on Deemed Cost.

    Comments :

    Para D5, allows an entity to measure an item of property,
    plant and equipment (PPE) at the date of transition to Ind-ASs at its fair value
    and use the same as its deemed cost.

    Para D6 allows a first-time adopter to use a previous GAAP revaluation of an item of PPE at, or before, the date of transition to Ind-ASs as deemed cost at the date of the revaluation, if the revaluation was, at the date of the revaluation, broadly comparable to: (a) fair value; or cost or depreciated cost in accordance with Ind-ASs, adjusted to reflect, for example, changes in a general or specific price index.

    It is not clear whether the fair value referred to in (a) has a Reference: to the fair value as on the date of transition or on the date of revaluation.

    It may be appreciated that the revaluation carried out on an earlier date may not broadly be comparable to the fair value on the date of transition (which would be later than the date of the revaluation) and in that case, such concession to use the previous GAAP revaluation may not have any practical utility. Clarification is desired that on which date ‘the fair value’ in (a) should be comparable Is it at the date of transition or the date of the revaluation? It may be known that almost in all cases, the revaluation carried out at an earlier date, may not be broadly comparable with the fair value on the date of the transition.

    Comments on ED ON AS 14 (revised) (corresponding to IFRS 3) ‘Business Combinations’

    Reference:

    Paragraph B56 of the Application Guidance.

    Comments:

    In the ED, the word ‘award’ has been replaced by ‘transaction’, (refer para 30, para 52 of the ED).

    COMMENTS ON EXPOSURE DRAFT OF SCH. XIV OF COMPANIES ACT, 1956

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    Representation

    COMMENTS ON EXPOSURE DRAFT OF SCH. XIV OF COMPANIES ACT, 1956

    19th October, 2010

    To,

    The Secretary, Accounting Standard Board
    The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India
    ICAI Bhawan
    Post Box No. 7100, Indraprastha Marg, New Delhi-110002.

    Dear Sir,






  • Subject : Comments to the Exposure Draft of Schedule
    XIV to the Companies Act, 1956



  •  

    1. The current Schedule XIV
    prescribes minimum depreciation rate to be charged by all the companies. It
    covers different type of assets and residual category and prescribes
    depreciation rate for the same. It also prescribes extra shift depreciation and
    also rate for ‘continuous process plant’. Since the minimum depreciation rates
    were prescribed, companies also had an option to charge higher rate of
    depreciation than prescribed. It also has relevance in calculation of managerial
    remuneration u/s. 350 and distribution of dividend u/s.205 of the Companies Act,
    1956.

    2. The proposed Schedule XIV
    prescribes indicative useful life of various assets. Since the same is
    indicative, it means that applying the said useful life is not mandatory and
    company may choose a different useful life, either lower or higher than what is
    indicated in the proposed Schedule.

    3. For working out depreciation
    rate, two elements are required viz. useful life and residual value. In the
    Schedule, indicative useful life is given, but in the absence of indication of
    residual value, it will not give desired result of providing guidance to
    companies which do not want to technically assess applicable depreciation rate.
    It is suggested that guidance on indicative residual value is also required, if
    at all the proposed Schedule XIV is to form part of the statute.

    4. A question also arises as to
    whether technical assessment by each company is required for ascertaining useful
    life of assets or a company can simply adopt the useful life as given in the
    Schedule. It is important to provide guidance for the same.

    5. AS-10 (revised) ‘Property
    Plant and Equipment’ requires separate identification of major components of
    each asset and it requires to be separately depreciated. It is difficult to
    envisage applicability of the proposed Schedule XIV to each component. In our
    view, there is no point in indicating useful life of asset without indicating
    useful life of major component of the asset. It is likely to create confusion
    rather than resolving the issue. It is better left to the management of
    respective companies to ascertain useful life of assets and their components.

    6. In the proposed Schedule XIV
    indicative life is also prescribed for mobile phones, library books and other
    similar items. In our view, in most cases such items are not treated as assets
    but charged to the Profit and Loss account. Providing an indicative life for
    such assets would force many companies to treat such items as assets, which may
    not be really required.

    7. Part B of proposed Schedule
    prescribes that for the purpose of S. 350 of the Companies Act, 1956, the useful
    life of any specific asset may be provided by the Regulatory Authority or by the
    Government. It is not clear to us whether or not technical assessment of useful
    life is required in case the useful life of any specific asset is specified by
    the Government. Is it mandatory to go by useful life prescribed by the
    Government even for providing depreciation in books ? If that is the case, it
    may override provisions of AS-10. A clarification may be required on this issue.

    In conclusion, we are of the
    view that the
    proposed Schedule XIV giving indicative useful life of assets would in addition
    to going against the spirit of AS-10 (revised) would also lead to unnecessary
    complications in applying AS-10 (revised).

    It is therefore suggested that
    the proposed Schedule XIV may be dispensed with.

    Thanking you,

    Yours sincerely

    Mayur B. Nayak
    President, BCAS
    Himanshu V. Kishnadwala
    Accounting & Auditing Committee, BCAS
       


    SUGGESTION REGARDING INCREASE IN RETIREMENT AGE OF HIGH COURT
    JUDGES

    6th October, 2010

    To,

    Smt. Jayanthi Natarajan
    Chairperson,
    Parliamentary Standing Committee on Personnel, Public Grievance, Law and
    Justice,
    201, 2nd Floor, Parliament House Annexe,
    New Delhi-110001.






    Subject : Suggestions on the Constitution (One
    Hundred and Fourteenth Amendment) Bill, 2010 — Increase of Retirement
    Age lime of the High Court Judges from 62 years to 65 years.






    Madam,

    The Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society (BCAS) is a
    voluntary organisation established on 6th July 1949. BCAS has about 8,000
    members from all over the country at present and is a principle-centred and
    learning-oriented organisation promoting quality service and excellence in the
    profession of Chartered Accountancy and is a catalyst for bringing out better
    and more effective Government policies & laws and for clean & efficient
    administration and governance. We make representations regularly on Direct and
    Indirect Taxes.

    Madam, we believe that due to longevity or increase in life expectancy the age limit which requires to be increased in all judicial and quasijudicial bodies/institutions from present age limit of 62 years to 65 years.

    At present the Judges of the Apex Court retire at the age of 65, whereas the Judges of the High Courts retire at the age of 62. Most of the Judges of the Apex Court after retirement render service to the nation by chairing various forums, like Authority for Advance Rulings till the age of 68 years. Similarly, the Judges of the High Courts also serve as Chairman, President or Members of various quasijudicial forums, like Administrative Tribunals, Customs Excise and Service Tax Appellate Tribunal, SEBI Tribunal, etc., where the age limit is 65. When the Judges can render service as Chairman of various judicial forums and render the judicial service which they were rendering earlier on the bench, there is strong reason to increase the age limit of retirement from 62 years to 65 years.

    Madam, if the Government can retain the services of such experienced Judges for another three years, it will be a great service to the nation and the pendency of cases before High Courts can be reduced.

    In India many professionals join the judiciary with the intention of serving the nation and not with the intention of getting a permanent job in the Government. A fresh law graduate when he joins a multinational gets emoluments more than that of a sitting Judge of a High Court, who may have put in more than 20 years of practice in law. Experience of a Judge and his knowledge is an asset to the justice delivery system; hence it is in the interest of the nation to raise the age limit of retirement of Judges to 65 years.

    Madam, the sanctioned strength of the Judges of the 21 High Courts is 895. Hence, it cannot be viewed as a vast opportunity in the employment sector, yet retention of less than 895 persons will have multiplier effect on justice delivery system. In the United States there is no age of retirement for Federal Judges. They are tenured posts. If a Federal Judge feels that by reason of old age he cannot function, he will receive the last-drawn salary as pension for the rest of his life. In the U.K. and Canada, Judges retire at the age of 75. In Australia, Judges of the Federal Court and Supreme Court retire at the age of 70. Similarly, in Japan Judges of the High Court retire at the age of 65.

    We therefore, strongly support for the proposal to amend clause (3) of Article 224 of the Constitution

    by substituting the words ‘sixty-five years’ for the words ‘sixty-two years’.

    Thanking you,

    Yours sincerely

    Mayur B. Nayak

    Kishor B. Karia

     

    President

    Chairman, Taxation Committee

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Representation in respect of Procedure for Registration of Digital Signature and uploading of Income-tax Returns using Digital Signature

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    Representation

    Representation

    3rd September, 2010

    To,

    Chairman,

    Central Board of Direct
    Taxes,

    Government of India,

    North Block, Vijay Chowk,

    New Delhi-110001.

    Dear Sir,


    Subject
    :
    Representation in respect of
    Procedure for Registration of Digital Signature and uploading of Income-tax
    Returns using Digital Signature


    We refer to the amendment to
    Rule 12 of the Income-tax Rules, 1962 (the Rules) which has made it mandatory
    for all companies filing ITR-6 to digitally sign the I-T return for A.Y. 2010-11
    and the Note regarding changes in the Procedure for Registration of Digital
    Signature and uploading of Income-tax Returns using Digital Signature (The
    Changed Procedure Note).

    The Changed Procedure :

    A. Para C of the Changed
    Procedure Note recognises that in the following scenarios, taxpayers may find it
    difficult to register the DSC as per the existing procedure as mentioned in the
    aforesaid Note :

    1. “Non-resident companies
    where the Directors are foreign nationals.

    2. Companies where the I-T
    return is being filed for the first time.

    3. Companies where the
    Managing Director has changed and other Directors are either unavailable or
    also have changed.

    In all such cases it is
    difficult to verify the identity of the person and his relationship with the
    Entity for which he is the authorised signatory. With a view to make
    registration simpler in such cases, the procedure has been changed to enable
    registration of a DSC where the PAN is also provided in the DSC as per the
    latest Interoperability guidelines issued by the Chief Controller of
    Certifying Authorities. Such DSCs with encrypted value of PAN are now
    available in the market.”

    B. Para D of the Changed
    Procedure Note prescribes the changes in the process of Registration of DSC on
    the e-filing website. In this scenario, the Authorised Signatory has been given
    the following options :

    1. To select the existing
    procedure to register the DSC, in case the scenarios mentioned in sub-para 1,
    2, or 3 in para C of the Note, as reproduced above, are not applicable; or

    2. “To select the new
    procedure as given below :

    (a) The Authorised
    Signatory must use a fresh DSC having encrypted value of his PAN, as issued
    by Certifying Authorities with effect from 1-8-2010.

    (b) Enter Authorised
    Signatory’s PAN number while registering the DSC. The same person must also
    enter the same PAN in the Verification portion of the I-T Return which he is
    signing in his capacity as Director/ Partner/Karta/Authorised Signatory.

    (c) If the Authorised
    Signatory’s PAN number matches the encrypted value of the PAN present in the
    DSC — then the DSC will be registered after selecting the appropriate type
    of DSC (.pfx or USB token) and clicking on ‘Select Your .pfx File
    Certificate’.

    (d) In case an
    Individual is registering his DSC for submitting own ITR (ITRs 1-4 case)
    then his PAN as per his login should match the encrypted PAN contained in
    the DSC — then the DSC will be registered after selecting the appropriate
    type of DSC (.pfx or USB token) and clicking on ‘Select Your .PFX File
    Certificate’.

    (e) Now, the I-T Return
    for the Self/Company/Firm/Entity PAN can be signed using this registered
    DSC.”



    The implications of the Changed
    Procedure :

    C. As mentioned in para
    B.2.a above, as per the new procedure, the Authorised Signatory must use a fresh
    DSC having encrypted value of his PAN.

    D. The relevant portion of
    the Rule 114C of the Rules provides as under :



    “Class or classes of
    persons to whom provisions of S. 139A shall not apply 114C.

    (1) The provisions of S. 139A shall not apply to following class or
    classes of persons, namely :

    (a)

    (b) the non-residents
    referred to in clause (30) of S. 2;”


    E. Accordingly, as per the
    explicit provisions of Rule 114C(1)(b), provisions of S. 139A do not apply in
    case of non-residents.

    F. However, in order to sign
    the return with Digital Signature and upload the Return of Income in Form ITR-6,
    the non-resident directors of the foreign companies would be compelled to obtain
    the PAN in India and after obtaining the PAN would have to obtain a fresh DSC
    having encrypted value of their PAN and then only they would be able to
    digitally sign and upload the Returns of Income in Form ITR-6 for the A.Y.
    2010-11.

    G. Thus, effectively, in
    case of non-residents, though the Rules do not require them to have a PAN in
    India, the same has been made mandatory indirectly by the Changed Procedure
    Note, particularly in case of foreign companies.

    Practical difficulties :

    H. It is irrational and
    unlawful to insist upon a large number of directors of foreign companies to have
    PAN in order to enable them to obtain DSCs having encrypted value of their PAN,
    in order to enable them to sign the return of income of their companies.

        I. Most of the Directors signing the Returns of Income of the Companies, would have no connec-tion with India and also have no income at all in India and yet they would be forced to obtain the PAN in India, merely for the purposes of signing the Return of Income of the companies of which they are directors.

        J. The documentary requirements and procedure for obtaining PAN, particularly the requirement of Consularisation of the proof of identity and proof of address in case of foreign citizens which takes a lot of time, cost and effort, would cause undue hardship and anguish among many non-resident directors and foreign companies, particularly in view of the fact that PAN is NOT required as per the explicit provision contained in Rule 114C.

        K. We understand that the Consularisation process in many cases takes about a month’s time. In that event it would be very difficult or nearly impossible for many directors of foreign companies to obtain their PAN before 30-9-2010 and then to obtain their DSCs having the encrypted value of their PAN. This would result into unnecessary and unavoidable delay in filing the Returns of the foreign companies, due for filing on or before 30-9-2010 for ITAY 2010-11. Further in case of loss return, the company may lose the benefit of carry forward of loss if the return is not filed in time.

        L. Answer to Q 5 of the FAQs attached with the aforesaid Changed Procedure Note, provides that the Power of Attorney (PoA) holder is authorised to sign ITR of foreign company as per S. 140 of Income-tax Act, 1961. The PoA holder can register his DSC having encrypted value of his PAN against the foreign company PAN as per the new procedure.

        M. However, it is to be noted that in most cases the foreign companies are NOT comfortable or at ease, for various commercial and business consid-erations, to give PoA to third parties for signing the Return of Income with their digital signature. Conversely, an Indian resident may be unwilling to act as an authorised signatory of a foreign company and step into the shoes of such an assessee.

        N. Further, practically, most of the private limited companies (which form a bulk of the thousands of companies that file tax returns in India) have been filing their e-returns for past few years without DSC. For all such companies, it would now be mandatory to obtain a PAN-encrypted DSC. The time available for such a large number of companies to do this is very short and this is likely to cause a serious problem in smooth filing of returns in the month of September.

    Our request?:

        P. In view of the above mentioned practical difficulties, we request you to amend the rules and make the digital signing of the Returns OPTIONAL particularly in case of non-resident/foreign companies.

        O. Alternatively, the entire process of signing the Return Form ITR-6 with digital signature should be made simple i.e., without PAN and the requirement of obtain DSCs having encrypted value of their PAN, should be done away with.
     

    Q. We sincerely hope that you would consider the above and issue a public clarification by way of a Notification/Circular and/or make necessary amendments in the rules. It is further requested that a copy of the said Notification/Circular be sent to the Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society.

    Considering the urgency of the matter and in view of the very limited time available to enable companies and their signatories to comply with the new procedure, an early response in the matter would be greatly appreciated.

    Thanking you,

    Yours faithfully,

    For Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society

    Mayur Nayak                  Kishor Karia
    President                         Chairman
                                      Taxation Committee

    Representation on Compounding under FEMA

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    Representation

    Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society
    7, Jolly Bhavan No. 2, New Marine Lines,
    Churchgate, Mumbai-400020.

    The Chamber of Tax Consultants
    3, Rewa Chambers, Ground Floor, 31,
    New Marine Lines, Mumbai-400020.

    Date : 23rd February, 2010

    To

    Chief General Manager,

    Foreign Exchange Department,

    Reserve Bank of India, Central Office,

    Mumbai-400001.

    Dear Sir,


    Re : Joint Representation on Compounding under FEMA


    First of all we thank you for giving us a personal hearing on
    this subject. Considering the issues
    discussed at the hearing, we have had discussions within our organisations.
    Final drafting has taken some time. We are sorry for the delay.

    We now submit as under :

    1. Amnesty Scheme :


    1.1 An Amnesty Scheme exclusively under FEMA may be announced
    with effect from 1st April, 2010. It may remain open till 30th September, 2010.
    In our opinion, this scheme will not violate Government’s undertaking to the
    Honourable Supreme Court regarding future Amnesty Schemes.

    1.2 We may divide the FEMA lapses & violations in following
    categories :


    Amnesty Scheme to cover bona fide
    cases in following situations :


    (i) Procedural Lapses e.g.,
    Forms/declarations have not been filed in time or filed late. Other than the
    above, the transactions per se are permitted; or would be permitted if
    an application had been made.

    (ii) Innocent Lapses — especially where there is no
    loss of foreign exchange, or where the loss is minimal. (e.g., an NRI
    has given a loan to his brother/friend.)

    Amnesty Scheme NOT to cover :


    (iii) Serious violations where transactions are not
    permitted per se. (e.g., ECB funds used in stock market.)

    (iv) S. 3 Violations like Smuggling, Hawala, etc. S. 8
    violations like — Indian residents keeping funds abroad in violation of FEMA.

    The Amnesty Scheme should be for all lapses covered under the
    first two categories. (The above will need more elaboration. We can provide the
    same.) A scheme which may be declared may carry detailed lists to avoid
    ambiguity. The scheme may not cover violations listed under paragraphs (iii) and
    (iv) above. Our entire representation does not cover these exclusions.

    1.3 Wide publicity may be given and the scheme may be
    explained by a series of conferences and lectures throughout the country.

    More details of the scheme are given in Annexure 1.

    After 30th September, 2010 a lenient scheme may be adopted
    for compounding. This is discussed below.

    2. Small offences :


    2.1 A threshold-amount of small offences may be determined.
    All lapses below the threshold may be ignored as far as compounding/penalty
    procedures are concerned. For example, a limit of U.S. $ 20,000 or Indian rupees
    ten lakhs per person per year may be fixed. These amounts may be considered
    insignificant, not liable to any penal proceedings. For comparison, under the
    Income-tax Act, all amounts earned by a person below Rs.1,50,000 per year are
    totally exempt from Income-tax. The person is not liable to tax at all. This
    leaves 96% of Indians outside tax discipline.

    A blanket exemption may be abused. However, RBI will always
    have the power to issue appropriate instructions under FEMA. RBI may refer a
    case to the Enforcement Directorate whereever it finds a deliberate abuse of any
    reliefs.

    2.2 At present, while computing the amount of offence, series
    of transactions are totalled up. For example, in case of an impermissible loan
    by an NRI to a resident friend/relative, all receipts and payments during the
    period are added and counted as several lapses. In fairness, the loan should be
    considered as one violation. Peak amount outstanding during a period may be
    considered as the amount of lapse.

    3. Technical lapses :


    Amounts above the threshold may be considered leniently if
    they are technical lapses i.e., covered under the first two categories
    listed in paragraph 1.2. Some illustrations of technical offences are considered
    below and in Annexure 2.

    4. NRI investment :


    NRIs were specifically permitted around the year 1982 by the
    then Finance Minister Mr. Pranab Mukherjee to invest in India through OCBs.
    Around 1992, the scheme was further liberalised by the then finance minister Dr.
    Manmohan Singh. Then because one Indian share-broker committed frauds through
    Mauritius OCBs, in 2003 all NRIs were prohibited investment through OCBs. An
    arbitrary step where innocent NRIs have been punished.

    Unfortunately, NRIs still keep investing in India through
    their own trusts or offshore companies. These are lapses, not violations. These
    investments are not crimes. They should be dealt with leniently and regularised
    with token compounding sums.

    5. Compounding sums :


    5.1 FEMA is not a revenue law. Compounding process is to
    deter people from repeating FEMA lapses; and to save them from Enforcement
    Directorate’s procedures. RBI may not be tough with common men and may not link
    the amount of compounding sums with presumed gains made by the investors. The
    compounding sum may be linked to the gravity of the offence concerned and
    intention of the parties. It should not have any relationship with the amount of
    investment or gains.

    There have been cases where the Compounding Authority has
    presumed gains where the investor has made no gains. This is arbitrary and
    unjust.

    5.2 S. 13 of FEMA is an indication of the amount of
    compounding sum that the law-makers intended. In most cases, the compounding sum
    may not exceed Rs.2,00,000. If the matter is found to be far more serious, the
    Compounding Authority may specify the reasons in the Compounding Order and then
    charge a higher amount.

    5.3 Time for paying compounding sum should be 3 months. The
    current time of 15 days is too short.

    6. FIPB and RBI :


    6.1 In case of FDI in real estate development, there is a difference of opinion between RBI and FIPB. Investors who would have taken FIPB ap-proval; or gone under automatic route as permitted by the Industrial Policy would naturally follow FIPB view. They should not be considered as violators of FEMA. Some day the difference would be resolved. Once the final policy is announced, investors should follow the policy. Until then all investments made and properties held should be permitted. Even after the announcement, past investments should not be disturbed.

    6.2 At present, certain areas under FEMA are administered by FIPB and certain areas by RBI. In case of a violation of Industrial Policy, the investor has to go for regularisation to FIPB and for compounding to RBI. Dual procedures for one single offence is against natural justice. For all matters administered by FIPB, the regularisation and compounding powers should vest with FIPB. Since the Compounding Rules do not grant authority to FIPB for compound-ing, let FIPB give post facto approvals.

        Accused person’s views?:

    7.1 Difference of opinion between two honest and knowledgeable persons is normal. Difference between FIPB and RBI is a strong illustration. Similarly, there can be differences between the RBI/ FIPB and a professional or an investor. When there is an honest difference of opinion in interpretation of law, no penalty may be levied.

    7.2 Currently, the person making a compounding application has to admit the offence. This is unfair. A person should be allowed to represent his views.

    It is normal that a person may not admit to the violation, but to buy peace, he is willing to pay the compounding sum. If the person is forced to admit a violation without an opportunity to defend himself, it will defeat the principle of natural justice.

    An applicant may not agree with Compounding Authority’s order and may not pay the compounding sum. Transferring all papers submitted by him including evidences and confession to the Enforcement Directorate would amount to gross injustice.

    7.3    Legal representation?:

    Under FERA, people were regularly represented by professionals — chartered accountants and lawyers. Legally, even under FEMA, people have a right to be represented by professionals. In practice however, for almost ten years, RBI officers flatly and strongly refuse professionals’ representations.

    Legal representation should be allowed for all matters including compounding.

        Appellate process?:

    If the applicant does not agree with the Compounding Order, he should get an opportunity to appeal. This is necessary as there can be differences of opinions between RBI and the businessman. These can be resolved only by an independent Appellate Authority.

    We suggest that the Executive Director, FEMA should constitute first Appellate Authority. Appropriate authority (more senior to the RBI Director) in the Fi-nance Ministry may constitute final Appellate Authority within the Government. Further appeal may lie in the appropriate Court of Law.

        A speaking Order?:

    In order that the person can appeal, the compounding order should be a ‘speaking order’. i.e., the order should give full reasons for arriving at a particular decision. For example, “considering the circumstances, I am of the view that penalty should be Rs.?.?.?.?.?.”, may not be sufficient.

    The order may state the specific circumstances that guided the Compounding Authority to come to a particular view. The order may also state the interpretation of the accused which is not accepted by the Compounding Officer. Reasons may be given.

        Compounding and post facto approval?:
    The compounding order should mean that the trans-action has been approved. There should be no need for taking any further approval.

    Alternatively, where an approval is required, both the compounding process and post facto approval should be given simultaneously. The time for such a process may be increased from 6 months to 9 months.

        Authorised Dealers (ADs)?:

    Authorised Dealers (ADs) are the major stumbling block in FEMA compliance. RBI insists on all forms being filed through ADs. But the ADs are neither interested, nor competent to understand and implement FEMA.

    Please introduce the procedure of E-Filing of all forms and even compounding applications and Amnesty applications. Where necessary, the Authorised Dealers’ report may be called for separately.

        Other FEMA issues?:

    We submit that there are several rules which cause avoidable difficulties to the concerned persons. If the rules are made clearer, it will help in reducing the lapses and violations. These issues are separate from the Compounding rules. Hence we are not submitting anything on the FEMA rules in this representation.
    We request you to allow us to submit separate representation for FEMA rules. We can first discuss the modalities before we submit the same.

    We wish to once again thank you for allowing us to represent before you. We will be glad to discuss the matter personally. We request you to kindly grant us an appointment for discussion.

    Thanking you,

    Yours faithfully,

    For Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society    
    Vice-President    
    Mayur Nayak
        
    For The Chamber of Tax Consultants
    President
    Gopal Kandarpa

    Withdrawal of registration u/s. 12-A of the Income Tax Act, 1961

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    Representation

    Representation

    February 8, 2010

    The Chairman

    Central Board of Direct Taxes

    Department of Revenue

    Ministry of Finance

    Government of India

    North Block

    Delhi-110 001

    Dear Sir,

    Sub:
    Withdrawal of registration
    u/s. 12-A of the Income Tax Act, 1961

    Brief Background:
    Section 11 of the Income Tax Act 1961 (Act) grants exemption in respect of
    income applied by any person, (normally a trust or an institution) for any
    charitable or religious purpose. In order to avail of an exemption u/s. 11, such
    a trust or institution is required to be registered u/s. 12A of the Act. Such an
    application is to be made within a period of one year from the date of creation
    of the trust or establishment of the institution and the exemption would be
    available in respect of the year in which such an application for registration
    was made.

    Up to 1st June 2007, the registering authority, which is
    either the Commissioner or Director of Income Tax (Exemptions) had a power to
    condone the delay in making such an application. Finance Act 2007 has withdrawn
    that power from the date aforesaid.

    Section 12AA of the Act prescribes the procedure for
    registration, under which, the registering authority is required to be satisfied
    about the genuineness of activities of the trust or institution. The section was
    inserted from 1.04.1997.

    The registration procedure is prescribed by rule 17A and the
    form in which the application is to be furnished is Form 10A. Form 10A, contains
    an undertaking by the applicant as follows:

    "I undertake to communicate forth with any alteration in the
    terms of the trust or in the rules governing the institution made at any time
    hereafter."

    However neither the governing sections nor the rules contain
    any similar condition or the consequence of the non-furnishing of such a change.

    Withdrawal of 12A registration in case of change in objects

    As stated aforesaid, the governing sections and the rules are
    silent about the intimation in change of objects / rules being given to the
    registering authority. Prior to 1997, even the certificate issued in response to
    the application did not contain any such condition.

    We have been informed by our members that the assessing
    officers are now calling for details of any change in objects and rules and in
    case of such a change and the absence of intimation thereof to the registering
    authority, proceeding to deny exemption under section 11. The view being taken
    is that on such a change occurring and the same not being intimated to the
    registering authority, the registration is treated as withdrawn.

    For this we understand that reliance is being placed on the
    following three decisions.

    Allahabad Agricultural Institute & Another Vs. Union of India
    291 ITR 116 (All)

    Sakthi Charities
    Vs CIT 182 ITR
    483 (Mad)

    Sakthi Charities
    149 ITR 624 (Mad)

    We now understand that, such a stand is being taken by the
    registering authority in Mumbai i.e. Director of Income Tax (Exemptions). In
    some cases, a communication is being sent that the registration is treated as
    withdrawn while in some cases, show cause notices are being issued with similar
    result.

    Without going into the rationale of these decisions, merits
    thereof, and the peculiar facts on the basis of which they have been rendered,
    we submit that the stand taken by the Department will cause untold hardship.

    It must be borne in mind that many registrations under
    section 12A are more than three decades old and without any specific provision
    or rule, it is virtually impossible that trustees or persons in management of
    these charitable institutions would have been aware of the existence of such an
    undertaking which was given at the time of application. This must be viewed in
    light of the fact that most charitable institutions are run by persons working
    on an honorary basis, and they rarely have professional help on a regular basis.
    In any event, even those professionals would not be aware of the undertakings,
    particularly when there is no express provision.

    If the assessing officers deny exemption under section 11,
    based on the interpretation aforesaid (many have already completed that
    process), genuine charitable trusts / institutions will face huge tax arrears,
    and the work of charity will suffer substantially. Moreover, even if these
    trusts apply for registration again, such a registration will, be available only
    from the year in which the application is made (the power of condonation having
    been withdrawn)

    We appreciate that it is necessary to ensure that the
    exemption is granted to only deserving institutions. It is also accepted that
    institutions claiming these exemptions must submit themselves to the scrutiny of
    the registering authority, in case of change in objects. However, relying on a
    technical interpretation to deny an exemption of this nature should be avoided.

    We therefore feel that-

    a) In case of change in objects being noticed, the trust /
    institution be issued a show cause notice.

    b) The trust be asked to explain the rationale behind the
    change and if the objects are still charitable, the registration be continued.

    c) If the objects are not charitable then the registration be
    withdrawn by a specific order, so that the remedy of appeal is available to the
    trust / institution by way of an appeal to the tribunal.

    d) During the time that the proceedings in which the impact
    of the change is being verified by the D.I.(Exemptions) / Commissioner, the
    assessing authority be restrained from assuming / presuming that the 12A
    registration is cancelled.

    e) This fact of 12A registration being conditional, and the
    fact of change of objects being required to be intimated to the registering
    authority be given widest publicity

    f) A suitable amendment be recommended in the Act, so that in
    future, the trusts are suitably forewarned.

    We hope quick action is taken in this regard so that genuine
    trusts do not suffer on account of technical lapses. If any assistance is
    required from the Bombay Chartered Accountants Society, we will be glad to
    provide the same.

    Yours faithfully,

    Representation in respect of Returns processed u/s.143(1) of the Income-tax Act, particularly at Mumbai.

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    Representation

    To
    The Chairman
    Central Board of Direct Taxes
    Department of Revenue, Ministry of Finance
    Government of India, North Block
    Delhi-110001

    Dear Sir,


    Subject : Representation in respect of Returns
    processed u/s.143(1) of the Income-tax Act, particularly at Mumbai.

    We refer to the returns being processed by the income-tax
    authorities u/s.143(1) of the Income-tax Act, 1961.

    In this regard, we appreciate the steps taken by the Hon’ble
    Finance Minister and the Department in trying to ensure that the returns are
    speedily processed and the refunds are issued to assessees in a reasonable time
    of their filing the returns.

    Errors in the intimations :

    However, the intimations recently issued u/s.143(1) of the
    Income-tax Act, 1961 to various assessees contain many errors causing great
    hardship to the assessees. Some of the common errors are listed below :

    • Credit for
      self-assessment tax, advance-tax and tax deducted at source has been not
      granted/short-granted.


    • Interest u/s.234C is
      charged in case of salaried employees even though no advance tax is payable by
      them or the advance tax payable by them is below the threshold limit of
      Rs.5,000. Additionally, many assessees have received intimations demanding a
      sum of Rs.1,200 towards deferment of tax payment u/s.234C.


    • Interest u/s.234C is
      charged even in case where the income is below taxable limit.


    • Interest u/s.234C is
      calculated before giving credit for taxes deducted at source.


    • Capital gains are taxed
      twice, once on special rates and again as part of the Total Income on normal
      rates.


    • Tax on short-term capital
      gains is calculated at normal rates instead of special rates prescribed.


    • Deduction u/s.80C and
      other sections of Chapter VI-A are not considered.


    • Income under one head of
      income is considered as income under another head or repeated under another
      head of income.


    • Tax demand is not rounded
      off. Even though the law states that taxes payable have to be rounded off to
      the nearest multiple of ten, demands are being raised for Re.1, Rs.3, etc.


    • In many cases, the due
      date for filing the return of income by assessees getting remuneration from a
      partnership firm as a partner of the firm and liable to tax audit, is taken as
      31 July instead of 30 September and consequently, interest u/s.234A is charged
      for late filing of the return of income.


    • The credit for dividend
      distribution tax paid is not granted resulting in huge tax demands.



    Practical difficulties





    • Filing of
      rectification applications :



    Due to the various errors, the assessees are under a burden
    to prepare and submit an application u/s.154 of the Act for rectification of
    the intimation issued to them so as to avoid making unnecessary tax payments.

    Further, past experience of processing applications filed
    u/s.154 by the Income-tax Department is not encouraging. Though the law states
    that the applications filed u/s.154 have to be disposed of within six months
    from the end of the month in which the applications are received, very few
    orders u/s.154 are passed by the income-tax authorities within the time
    prescribed and majority of the orders are not passed even after a considerable
    period of time. It is very painful for the assessees to get an order u/s.154
    passed by the income-tax authorities. Even after rigorous follow-up at the tax
    offices, the orders u/s.154 are not passed in many cases.

    Further, with the commencement of processing of returns for
    assessment year 2009-10, the refunds if any may get adjusted against the
    wrongful demand raised in processing the returns of assessment year 2008-09.





    • Entries in the
      income-tax return form :



    As per Explanation (a)(i) to S. 143(1) of the Act, an
    incorrect claim apparent from any information in the return shall be an item
    which is inconsistent with another entry of the same or some other item in the
    return of income. In this regard, we would like to bring to your kind
    attention that the new income-tax forms issued for filing of the returns do
    not allow attachment of any documents/evidence for claim of taxes paid and
    deductions claimed. Thus, the returns filed will have only entries in the
    return of taxes paid and deductions claimed and no supporting documents will
    be available with the income-tax authorities while processing the returns of
    income. Accordingly, the claim for advance tax paid, self-assessment tax paid,
    taxes deducted/collected at source will be shown only at one place in the new
    forms and accordingly, there cannot be any inconsistency and thus, denial of
    credit in this regard is bad in law.


    • Place of filing the rectification applications :



    (a) Further, in few cases, the intimation states that an
    application u/s.154 is to be made to the Centralised Processing Centre at
    Bangalore, which has only a Post Box Number. The postal authorities do not
    accept registered post to a post box number and thus the assessees have no
    knowledge as to when the application is received by the income-tax
    authorities.

    (b)     In Mumbai, the Salary Section have started accepting the applications u/s.154 of the Act, however, considering the errors in number of cases, it would take lot of time to accept the application u/s.154 and dispose of the same. There are number of small assessees who are not very conversant with the process as well as the working of the Department. In such cases, a suo moto action by the Department would be advisable.

    Our request:

    a) We understand that the errors mentioned above are due to software error in the computer programme. Accordingly, we request your good-self to kindly:

       b)  direct the income-tax authorities to suo moto pass an order u/s.154 of the Act after rectifying the errors mentioned above or in the alternative, to reprocess all the returns and issue a fresh intimation after rectifying the errors.

       c)  We request you to issue a Notification/Circular in this regard stating that all such intimations issued during the said period will be treated as null and void and that fresh intimations would be issued.

    If such reprocessing is done, the whole exercise of writing letters by a large number of assessees to the Income-tax Department for rectification could be avoided and huge burden of receiving letters from the assessees and then dealing with the same can be dispensed with. It will also create goodwill in the minds of the general public.

    Accordingly, we would really appreciate if a Circular/Notification is issued in this regard and fresh intimations are issued or orders u/s.154 of the Act are suo moto passed by the income-tax authorities rectifying the mistakes in the intimations issued.

    Hope you would consider the above and issue a public clarification by way of a Notification/Circular and let all the recipients of such notices know what they are supposed to do. It is further requested that a copy of the said Notification be sent to the Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society.

    Thanking You,

    Yours faithfully

    For Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society

    Mayur Nayak           Kishor Karia                    Rajesh Shah
    Vice-President    Chairman, Taxation     Co-chairman, Taxation Committee
                                  Committee

    Undue hardship faced by assesses in filing signed acknowledgement (i.e. ITR-V) of the Return of Income in view of directions contained in the Circular issued by the Central Board of Direct Taxes (‘CBDT’) – Circular No. 03/2009 dated 21.05.2009

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    Representation

    30th December 2009

    The Chairman
    Central Board of Direct Taxes
    Department of Revenue
    Ministry of Finance
    Government of India
    North Block
    Delhi-110 001

    Dear Sir,


    Sub:
    Undue hardship faced by
    assesses in filing signed acknowledgement (i.e. ITR-V) of the Return of Income
    in view of directions contained in the Circular issued by the Central Board of
    Direct Taxes (‘CBDT’) – Circular No. 03/2009 dated 21.05.2009

    We refer to the CBDT Circular No. 03/2009 dated 21.05.2009 (‘CBDT
    Circular’) in connection with the filing of returns of income for assessment
    year 2009 2010. We appreciate the efforts made by CBDT with regard to e-filing
    of the returns of income.

    Background

    An assessee is required to file its return of income on or
    before the due date mentioned in section 139(1) of the Income-tax Act, 1961
    (‘Act’).

    From AY 2006-07, certain assessees are mandatorily required
    to upload the return of income electronically. In case the return is furnished
    with digital signature, the date of uploading the return electronically as
    mentioned in ITR-V is treated as the date of filing of the return of income. In
    case the return is not uploaded with digital signature, the acknowledgement form
    of the return of income, i.e., ITR-V is required to be signed by the assessee
    manually and then furnished to the Income-tax Department within a certain time
    limit.

    Prior to the existing CBDT Circular, an assessee was required
    to file the ITR-V post uploading its return on the income-tax website, with the
    respective Assessing Officer (‘AO’) within 15 days of filing the return
    electronically. This enabled assessees to get an acknowledgement from the
    Department for having furnished ITR-V with the concerned Officer having
    jurisdiction.

    A number of claims such as carry forward and set of losses
    and allowances, claim of deduction under Chapter VI-A of the Act and various
    other benefits depend very much upon filing of the return on or before due date
    mentioned under section 139 of the Act. Any failure on the part of the assessee
    to file the return of income on or before the due date will lead to disallowance
    of claims mentioned above.

    The assessee is concerned primarily with proof of filing the
    return of income with the Department. The acknowledgement bearing the stamp of
    income-tax office is very much preserved and used by the assessees for various
    purposes including compliances under the Act; obtaining bank loan; obtaining
    visa/ passport; registration with various government authorities, etc.

    As per the existing CBDT Circular, from assessment year
    2009-10, the ITR-V duly signed by the assessee has to be furnished by

    ordinary post
    to “the Income-tax Department, Centralised Processing Centre, Post Box No.1,
    Electronic City Post Office, Bangalore – 560 100, Karnataka” within 60 days of
    uploading the return or 30 September, whichever is later.


    Hardships and practical difficulties

    The position has been drastically changed and made difficult
    after the issue of the above CBDT Circular. Those assessees furnishing the
    returns without digital signature are facing and are also likely to continue to
    face unintended difficulties and hardships for the following reasons:

    The assessee does not have in his possession any
    acknowledgement as the ITR-V is to be sent by only Ordinary Post.

    Unfortunately, no other
    mode of sending the same is feasible under the new system and hence, the
    assessees will have to rely only on the efficiency of the postal department.



    Further, the assessee gets to know about the fact and date of
    receipt of such ITR-V by the CPC at Bangalore only when he receives the
    intimation by e-mail to that effect from the CPC and till then, uncertainty
    continues (for minimum 3 to 4 weeks) and the assessee is

    effectively helpless
    to do anything in that regard.


    Also, the assessee will be at the
    mercy of Postal Department
    (India)
    over which neither the CBDT nor
    the assessee has any control.

    Further, any failure or delay on the part of the Postal
    Department may lead to the return of income not being filed before the due date
    and consequentially lead to disallowance of claims made by the assessee. The
    onus that is likely to be cast on the assessee is going to be of a serious
    nature over which the assessee has no control whatsoever.

    If such ITR-V does not reach the CPC at Bangalore within the
    specified period of 60 days, the ROI electronically transmitted by the assessee
    will become automatically invalid. Since the return will be deemed to have not
    been furnished at all in case the duly signed ITR-V is, for some reason or
    other, not delivered to CPC within the due date, besides other consequences, the
    assessee will be saddled with liability for payment of interest under sections
    234A and 234B and levy of penalty under section 271(1)(c) of the Act.

    Accordingly, assessees will have to face undue hardships
    without any fault on their part, since they would have no proof that they had
    sent the ITR-V to the specified address well within the time limit of 60 days.
    Apart from this, it is not fair to expect every assessee in the country from
    different places to send such ITR-V to Bangalore by post.

    It has also been experienced this year that several assesses
    who had sent the ITR-V immediately after uploading their returns but had not got
    any intimation about receipt sent the same again and in some cases this was done
    twice or thrice after which they received the intimation that their form had
    reached Bangalore. It is quite natural that in their anxiety, assessees who have
    no proof or intimation of their form being received would tend to send the same
    repeatedly. It is also not fair to place extra burden the already over burdened
    postal department.

    On the other hand there are several assesses who after
    sending the ITR-V felt they had completely complied with the law and did not
    send the same again. How can they escape the consequences of not furnishing a
    valid return if the same for any reason has not reached the given address, since
    they have no proof whatsoever of sending the ITR-V as it was mandated to be sent
    by Ordinary Post.

    Prayer

    In light of the above, we humbly request that taxpayers be permitted to furnish such ITR-V at their respective places in the office of the Assessing Officer or at any centralized place in the local income-tax office from where, the De-partment can thereafter forward the same to CPC at Bangalore. This will also enable the assessee to get proper acknowledgement with regard to the date on which such ITR-V is submitted so that there remains no ambiguity about the date of their furnishing the same and the consequent date of furnishing the return of income.

    Further, we are informed that for the assessment year 2009-10, many assesses who have uploaded their returns without digital signature within the prescribed time but have not yet received intimation of their ITR-V having reached Bangalore and having been processed ought to be allowed to file their ITR-V with their respective Assessing Officers till 31st January, 2010.

    It is, therefore, humbly submitted that CBDT may kindly consider the request and modify the regulations.

    We shall be pleased to provide any information or clarification that your goodself may need in respect of the above.

    Thanking you,       
    Yours faithfully,       
           
    CC:

    (1) Shri  S.S.  Palanimanickan,    Hon.Union Minister of State for Finance.   


    Ameet Patel    Kishor Karia    Rajesh Shah

    President     Chairman,    Co-chairman,

                       Taxation    Taxation

                        Committee    Committee

    (2)    Shri Pranab Mukherjee, Hon’ble Union Finance Minister.   
           
    (3)    Shri Rahul Gandhi, Gen.Secretary, Indian National Congress.   


    Unjust Enrichment and Refund of CENVAT Credit to Exporters

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    New Page 2

    1. Background :


    Exporters of services experienced rough times during
    the past four to five years claiming refund or rebate of service tax
    paid on various input services used in exported services and there has
    been tremendous amount of litigation already pending at different
    levels, wherein various issues both legal and procedural have been
    raised by the Department which inter alia include the following :

    • Whether the
      service per se can be considered export in terms of the Export Rules,
      2005.


    • Non-filing of
      declaration form prior to exporting service.


    • Inadequacy of
      documents evidencing export of service.


    • Services on
      which service tax paid is taken as CENVAT credit are not considered
      ‘input services’.


    • Inadequacy of
      documents for CENVAT credit.



    • Non-registration or late registration of the assessee as service
      provider.


    • Refund claims
      filed beyond limitation period u/s.11B of the Central Excise Act.


    • Refund
      relating to export of exempted service.


    • Refund
      inadmissible on account of unjust enrichment.


    Realising difficulties faced by the export-oriented
    units, the Government issued Circular No. 120, dated 19-1-2010 to
    simplify and standardise refund procedure to expedite the process of
    refund applications and grant refunds although the procedure is already
    in place for granting rebate of service tax paid by cash or CENVAT of
    input services or for claiming refund under Rule 5 of the CENVAT Credit
    Rules, 2004. Question here is whether or not and how the doctrine of
    unjust enrichment should apply to the refund claims filed by exporters
    of services for service tax paid on input services. For this purpose,
    the doctrine of unjust enrichment and provision of S. 11B need
    examination.

    2. Doctrine of unjust enrichment :

    In ordinary course, when any claim of refund is filed
    by an assessee, he is required to file an application of refund in the
    prescribed format under the law along with required documentary
    evidence. On receipt of the application, the Assistant Commissioner of
    Central Excise or Deputy Commissioner of Central Excise after being
    satisfied may himself make an order for the refund of the whole or any
    part of tax. The claimed amount is refunded to the applicant only if the
    incidence of tax has not been passed on by the applicant to any other
    person; or else if the amount considered due to be refunded, is
    transferred to the Consumer Welfare Fund as the claimant is not allowed
    to be unjustly enriched i.e., the claimant cannot get an amount which he
    has not suffered. This law cannot be better understood than by the
    quotes per majority decision in the landmark judgment of Mafatlal
    Industries Ltd. v. Union of India, 1997 (89) ELT 247 (SC) :

    Á claim for refund, whether made under the
    provisions of the Act as contemplated in Proposition (i) above or in a
    suit or writ petition in the situations contemplated by Proposition
    (ii) above, can succeed only if the petitioner/plaintiff alleges and
    establishes that he has not passed on the burden of duty to another
    person/other persons. His refund claim shall be allowed/decreed only
    when he establishes that he has not passed on the burden of the duty
    or to the extent he has not so passed on, as the case may be. Whether
    the claim for restitution is treated as a constitutional imperative or
    as a statutory requirement, it is neither an absolute right nor an
    unconditional obligation but is subject to the above requirement, as
    explained in the body of the judgment. Where the burden of the duty
    has been passed on, the claimant cannot say that he has suffered any
    real loss or prejudice. The real loss or prejudice is suffered in such
    a case by the person who has ultimately borne the burden and it is
    only that person who can legitimately claim its refund.”

    Also interesting are the quotes of the Larger Bench
    decision of the Supreme Court in the case of Sahakari Khand Udyog Mandal
    Ltd. v. CCE&C, 2005 (181) ELT 328 (SC) which have aptly and precisely
    described this doctrine.

    “31. Stated simply, ‘Unjust enrichment’ means reten-tion of a benefit by a person that is unjust or inequi-table. ‘Unjust enrichment’ occurs when a person re-tains money or benefits, which in justice, equity and good conscience, belong to someone else.

    3.2 The doctrine of ‘unjust enrichment’, therefore, is that no person can be allowed to enrich inequitably at the expense of another. A right of recovery under the doctrine of ‘unjust enrichment’ arises where retention of a benefit is considered contrary to justice or against equity.

    3.3 The juristic basis of the obligation is not founded upon any contract or tort, but upon a third category of law, namely, quasi-contract or the doctrine of restitution.

        From the above discussion, it is clear that the doctrine of ‘unjust enrichment’ is based on equity and has been accepted and applied in several cases. In our opinion, therefore, irrespective of applicabili-ty of S. 11B of the Act, the doctrine can be invoked to deny the benefit to which a person is not otherwise entitled. S. 11B of the Act or similar provision merely gives legislative recognition to this doctrine. That, however, does not mean that in absence of statutory provision, a person can claim or retain undue benefit. Before claiming a relief of refund, it is necessary for the petitioner/appellant to show that he has paid the amount for which relief is sought, he has not passed on the burden on consumers and if such relief is not granted, he would suffer loss.”

    Thus, in principle, it is just and fair that this doctrine is followed while granting a refund application. To better understand its applicability, it is necessary to briefly examine the relevant provisions of S. 11B of the Central Excise Act, as Chapter V of the Finance Act, 1994 dealing with the service tax law does not contain specific provisions for claim of refund, but through its S. 83, specific provisions of the Central Excise Act including S. 11B have been made applica-ble to service tax as they apply in relation to excise duty. Accordingly, claim of refund for service tax also is governed by the provisions of S. 11B of the Central Excise Act discussed below.

        3. S. 11B of the Central Excise Act, 1944 :

    Claim for refund of duty and interest, if any, paid on such duty

        1) Any person claiming refund of any duty of excise and interest, if any, paid on such duty may make an application for refund of such duty and interest, if any, paid on such duty to the Assistant Commis-sioner of Central Excise or the Deputy Commissioner of Central Excise before the expiry of one year from the relevant date in such form and manner as may be prescribed and the application shall be accom-panied by such documentary or other evidence (in-cluding the documents referred to in S. 12A) as the applicant may furnish to establish that the amount of duty of excise and interest, if any, paid on such duty in relation to which such refund is claimed was collected from, or paid by, him and the incidence of such duty and interest, if any, paid on such duty had not been passed on by him to any other person :

    Provided that where an application for refund has been made before the commencement of the Cen-tral Excises and Customs Laws (Amendment) Act, 1991, such application shall be deemed to have been made under this sub-section as amended by the said Act and the same shall be dealt with in accordance with the provisions of Ss.(2) substituted by that Act.
    Provided further that the limitation (of one year) shall not apply where any duty and interest, if any, paid on such duty has been paid under protest.

        2) If, on receipt of any such application, the As-sistant Commissioner of Central Excise or the Dep-uty Commissioner of Central Excise is satisfied that the whole or any part of the duty of excise and inter-est, if any, paid on such duty paid by the applicant is refundable, he may make an order accordingly and the amount so determined shall be credited to the Fund.

    Provided that the amount of duty of excise and interest, if any, paid on such duty as determined by the Assistant Commissioner of Central Excise or the Deputy Commissioner of Central Excise under the foregoing provisions of this sub-section shall, instead of being credited to the Fund, be paid to the applicant, if such amount is relatable to –

        a) rebate of duty of excise on excisable goods exported out of India or on excisable materials used in the manufacture of goods which are exported out of India;

        b) unspent advance deposits lying in balance in the applicant’s account current maintained with the Commissioner of Central Excise;

        c) refund of credit of duty paid on excisable goods used as inputs in accordance with the rules made, or any notification issued, under this Act;

        d) the duty of excise and interest, if any, paid on such duty paid by the manufacturer, if he had not passed on the incidence of such duty and interest, if any, paid on such duty to any other person;

        e) the duty of excise and interest, if any, paid on such duty borne by the buyer, if he had not passed on the incidence of such duty and interest, if any, paid on such duty to any other person;

        f)…………….

    Provided ………..

        Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in any judgment, decree, order or direc-tion of the Appellate Tribunal or any Court or in any other provision of this Act or the rules made thereunder or any other law for the time being in force, no refund shall be made except as provided in Ss.(2).

    (4) & (5) ……………….

    Explanation — For the purposes of this Section, :

        A) ‘refund’ includes rebate of duty of excise on excisable goods exported out of India or on excisable materials used in the manufacture of goods which are exported out of India;

        B) ‘relevant date’ means, :

    (a)  to (f)……………………………………

    Perusal of proviso (a) to Ss.(3) indicates that in spe-cific terms, excise duty paid on exported excisable goods or excisable inputs used in the manufacture of such exported goods outside India qualifies to be allowed as rebate or refund. The law has specifically provided for this to be in tune with the broader and outer framework of the fiscal policy of the Govern-ment viz. zero rating of exports, whether of goods or services. An exporter–manufacturer may have paid such duty in cash or from his CENVAT credit account he is entitled to receive refund/rebate, provided he has presented the required documentary evidence and has followed the prescribed proce-dure for claiming refund or rebate, as the case may be. Similarly, with reference to proviso (c) to Ss.2 of S. 11B above, refund of CENVAT credit of duty paid as inputs under Rule 5 of the CENVAT Credit Rules, 2004 is also available to an exporter. The question arises therefore is whether or not the doctrine of unjust enrichment is applicable to refund in case of export of goods as well as of services.

    A manufacturer exporting excisable goods often does not have potential to use accumulated CENVAT credit on inputs, when he wholly or substantially exports all that he manufactures and eventually, he is necessitated to claim either rebate of duty paid on excisable goods by making a payment of duty from CENVAT account on exports and claiming rebate of CENVAT credit or opting to file a refund claim of CENVAT of duty paid on inputs under Rule 5 of the CENVAT Credit Rules, 2004 as the case may be. In the scenario, the Tribunal in CCE, Kolkata-VI v. Black Diamond Beverages Ltd., 2006 (200) ELT 317 relying upon the earlier decision in the case of Dura Syntex Ltd., 2003 (154) ELT 422 (Tri.) held that in case of re-fund related to input credit, the principle of unjust enrichment is not applicable. Recently in Balkrishna Textiles P. Ltd. v. CCE, Ahmedabad-I, 2009 (239) ELT 279 (Tri.-Ahmd.) also, it was held that the doctrine of unjust enrichment is not applicable in respect of exports and S. 11B of the Central Excise Act specifically provides that credit on duty paid can be given as cash refund if admissible and principle of unjust enrichment is not applicable. In case of CC&CE Ahmedabad v. Dura Syntex Ltd. (supra), it was categorically held that principle of unjust enrichment is not applicable in view of the proviso (c) to Ss.(2) of S. 11B of the Central Excise Act, which carves out an exception in respect of credit of duty. It is quite interesting to note that despite there being excep-tions in the proviso whereby the question of examining whether duty is passed on to the buyer does not arise as the refund relates to duty paid on Inputs and therefore arising out of input credit, the authorities while issuing show-cause notice repeatedly attempt to shift the onus to the assessee to prove that unjust enrichment has not arisen. In this frame of reference, the Supreme Court’s observation in Rochiram & Sons v. UOI, 2008 (226) ELT 20 (SC) is notable : “It is a cardinal principle of law which has been settled by a Bench of seven Judges of this Court in the case of Mafatlal Industries v. UOI, 1997

        ELT 247 (SC) that refund of a claim made by the assessee can be denied on the principle of undue enrichment if the assessee has passed on the burden to consumers. The principle would be equally applicable to the Revenue as well as it cannot have the double advantage.” The Supreme Court in the case of Sandvik Asia Ltd. v. CIT I, Pune, 2007 (8) STR 193 (SC) held that even if the Revenue has taken an erroneous view of law, that cannot mean that withhold-ing of money is justifiable or not wrongful. Thus, it is imperative that the Government cannot withhold due refund to the claimants.

        4. Exporters of services :

    In the above background and given the fact that there are no separate provisions as regards refund in the service tax law, by merely making provisions of S. 11B of the Central Excise Act applicable to service tax, intangibles like services are placed on par with goods. When services are invoiced to clients, ‘costing’ in most cases is difficult or almost impossible. There can neither be MRP (Maximum Retail Price) concept, nor can there be cost plus profit concept, especially for services provided by all professionals including investment bankers, architects, chartered accountants, legal services, management consultants, consulting engineers, etc. Even in the case of various other services requiring skills, it may or may not be possible to attribute precise ‘cost’ of a service as service is provided based on mental skills. Consequently, when the value of a service is recovered without service tax, yet whether the burden of tax paid on input service is still passed on to the recipient cannot be put to judgment. For argument’s sake, a professional ‘A’ may charge $ 100 for a task and for the same task ‘B’ may charge $ 500 and ‘C’ may charge $ 120. Would it mean that ‘C’ or ‘B’ have included incidence of tax in their price for their service and therefore there is unjust enrichment ? In fact, ‘A’ may charge $ 100 to one person and another $ 75 or $ 125 and yet in no way one can prove that burden of tax is necessarily passed on in one or the other case.

    In a recent decision of the Commissioner of Service Tax, Ahmedabad v. S. Mohanlal Services, 2010 (18) STR 173 (Tri.-Ahmd.) in its second round of litigation, the Tribunal fully endorsed observations of the Commissioner Appeals viz. “the adjudicating authority’s reliance on the judgment in the case of Mafatlal Industries [1997 (89) ELT 247] is misplaced inasmuch as it relates to sale of goods wherein cost of inputs are necessarily incurred, whereas in the present case it is provision of services especially as commission agents wherein mental inputs are incurred which cannot be compared in monetary terms.” The Tribunal further observed, “the refund claim has been made u/s.11B of the Central Excise Act, 1944 made applicable for service tax matters. S. 11B provides that where the amount is reliable to rebate of duty of excise on excisable goods exported out of India, the amount shall be paid to the claimant. This means that provisions relating to unjust enrichment are not applicable in respect of export of services.”

    Although a single Member Bench decision, the intangible characteristic of service being aptly considered, it should serve as a useful guidance for all refund claims made by exporters of services to reduce the amount of litigation.

    Whilst it is in fitness of things to require a claimant to provide chartered accountant’s certificate that tax was not recovered from recipient of services or buyer, it will be equally fair not to stretch application of doctrine of unjust enrichment to exports too far. Non-granting of legitimate refund claim under one or the other pretext is a burning issue that several assessees face from the Department and an early resolution being need of the day, it is high time that the Board does the needful in the matter to remove impediments in genuine claims of exporters.

    Part B : Some Recent Judgments

        I. High Court :

    1.(a) Authorised Service Station : Whether C & F agency ?

    CCE v. Amitdeep Motors, 2010 (17) STR 514 (All)

    The assessee, an authorised dealer of cars was registered under the category of authorised service station. The assessee received commission from the manufacturer for sourcing orders for them from Government agencies, receiving the vehicles from them and delivering the same to the Government agencies. The Revenue sought to tax these servic-es as clearing and forwarding agent’s service. The Tribunal ruled that the services of arrangement of documentary requirements from the customers for principal, liaison with customers for timely delivery, delivery of vehicle to the consignees, sending of provisional receipt and inspection notes from con-signee to the principal and arrangement of way or entry permits required for dispatch of the vehicles, etc. could not be considered clearing and forward-ing services.

    Not finding substantial question of law, the High Court dismissed the appeal.

        b) Whether services to bank for loans exempt under Notification No. 25/2009 ?

    CCE v. Car World Autoline, 2010 (17) STR 449 (Ker.)

    The assessee aided a bank to advance loans to parties and for recovery of the same. The Tribunal in its order stated that the assessee’s services were tax-able as business auxiliary services. It also stated that the assessee discharged its service tax liability under business auxiliary services from September 11, 2004. The Tribunal had allowed the assessee’s exemption claim under clause (e) of Notification No. 25/2004– ST, dated September 10, 2004.

    The Revenue questioned whether the claim of the assessee was justified in light of the facts of the case. The clause (d) of the said Notification awarded exemption to business auxiliary services while the clause (e) awarded exemption to the banking and financial services. The relevant clause (d) and (e) are reproduced for ready reference :

    “(d)    services provided to a client by a commercial concern in relation to the following business auxiliary services, namely :

        i) procurement of goods or services, which are inputs for the client;

        ii) production of goods on behalf of the client;

        iii) provision of service on behalf of the client; or

        iv) a service incidental or auxiliary to any activity specified in (i) to (iii) above;

        e) services provided to a customer by any body corporate or commercial concern, other than a banking company or a financial institution including a non-banking financial company, in relation to banking and other financial services.”

    The Court stated that the assessee did not provide banking and financial services and hence the clause  was not applicable. The clause (d) was applica-ble, hence before declaring the eligibility, the Tribunal was required to consider it with reference to the agreement between the parties, the exact nature of service rendered by the assessee to the bank and whether any of the service so provided was covered under the categories (i) to (iii) and if so, whether any service rendered was incidental to the items of services mentioned in sub-clause (i) to (iii) of (d). Accordingly, the matter was remanded to the Tribunal for reconsideration after hearing both the sides and after calling for relevant records, etc.

        2. Violation of principle of natural justice : Court exercises extraordinary jurisdiction :

    Wasp Pump Pvt. Ltd. v. Union of India, 2010 (17) STR 613 (Bom.)
    The petitioner manufactured pumps and also the inputs for the pumps. There was no dispute as to exemption for pumps or its classification. Later, the Revenue demanded duty on the CI castings holding that they were marketable goods. The assessee filed an appeal to Commissioner (Appeals), however beyond the time of limitation. The Commissioner (Appeals) held that he had no jurisdiction to condone the delay. Aggrieved by the order, the appeal was filed with the CESTAT and CESTAT confirmed that the Commissioner (Appeals) was right in not con-doning the delay. In view of that, the application for waiver was rejected and the appeal was dismissed.

    Consequently a petition was filed with the High Court. Relying on the judgment of the Supreme Court in the State of U.P. v. Modh Nooh, AIR 1958 SC 86 which held that the Revenue before quantifying the demand ought to have given a hearing to the assessee and there being a violation of principle of natural justice, the Court could exercise extra-ordinary jurisdiction. Plea was also made that the inputs were exempt from tax under relevant Notification. In the rejoinder it was also explained as to why they could not file the appeal in time.

    The Court observed that generally when the alternate remedy sought was exhausted and the Tribunal for some reason declined to entertain the same, the Court normally does not interfere and exercise extra jurisdiction unless the order is a nullity in law. However, the order suffered from violation of principles of natural justice and denial of ‘fair’ hearing and therefore rejecting Revenue’s objection to extraordinary jurisdiction, the Court decided to hear the petition on merits. The Court relied on the Modh Nooh case (supra) and the Notifications cited by the petitioner. The Court also placed reliance on the judgment of the Supreme Court in W.P.I.L. Ltd. v. CCE, 2005 (181) ELT 359 (SC) wherein pumps as well as parts thereof were held as exempted from excise duty. The case was therefore allowed quashing the order and remitting the matter back to the Tribunal to consider afresh assessment of duty after consid-ering the Notifications issued from time to time.

        II. Tribunal :

        3. Banking and Financial Services : Pre-closure charges :

    Indusind Bank v. Commissioner of Service Tax, Chennai 2010 (17) STR 565 (Tri.-Chennai)
    The assessee did not pay service tax on pre-closure charges treating this as charges for loss of interest.

    As per the Revenue, in a similar case, in appeal No. S/152/08, the Tribunal had ordered pre-deposit of 50% of the tax amount. Relying on the case of GE Money Financial Services Ltd. CST, Chennai 2009 (15) STR 722 (Tribunal), it was held that since the asses-see had not furnished the details pertaining to pre-closure charges to the Department till the assessee was audited by the Department, the invocation of longer period was justified. Also held that the pre-closure charges could not be equated with interest and therefore pre-deposit of 50% of the liability was ordered.

    4.(a) CENVAT Credit : Whether input service is required to be reversed on removal of inputs :

    J. S. Khalsa Steels (P) Ltd. v. CCE, Chandigarh 2010 (17) STR 517 (Tri.-Del.)

    The assessee a manufacturer was also registered under the category of GTA. The assessee claimed CENVAT on the inputs, capital goods and input services. The assessee reversed the CENVAT credit on inputs and capital goods in terms of Rule 3(5) on clearance of the inputs.

    The Revenue issued a SCN for non-reversal of credit on input services. The original authority and the Commissioner (Appeals) upheld the demand.

    It was contended by the appellant that Rule 3(5) provides for reversal of credit on capital goods or inputs and not for input services. It was also submit-ted that the Rule 2 defines input, input services and capital goods separately. Reliance was placed on the decision in the case of Chitrakoot Steel & Power Pvt. Ltd. v. CCE, Chennai (2008) 10 STR 118.

    The Tribunal concurred with the appellant and set aside the order and held that no provision for rever-sal of input service existed in the law.

        b) Input services : Credit not to be restricted to ‘manufacture’ alone :

    Jaypee Rewa Plant v. CCE, Bhopal 2010 (17) STR 519 (Tri.-Del.)
    The assessee availed CENVAT credit on the invoices issued by the input distributor. The Revenue denied CENVAT credit on the services like rent-a-cab service, courier service, air travel agent service, maintenance and repair service and telephone service on the ground that no evidence was submitted to show that the said services were utilised for the manufacture of the final product. It was alleged in the SCN that the input services have been taken in or in relation to the handling of marketing of goods after the place of removal and hence not admissible.

    Placing reliance on the decisions of the Larger Bench in the case of ABB Ltd. v. CCE & ST, Bangalore 2009 STR 468 (Tri.-LB) and also CCE Mumbai v. GTC Industries Ltd., 2008 (12) STR 468 (Tri.-LB) it was held that input service credit cannot be restricted only in relation to the manufacture and their clearance from the place of removal. Hence the matter was remanded to original authority to allow the credit, subject to the input services being used in relation to the business activities and in the light of the Larger Bench decisions.

        c) Documents for claiming credit :

    CCE, Vapi v. ITW India Ltd., 2010 (17) STR 587 (Tri.-Ahmd.)

    The assessee claimed CENVAT credit on input services including CENVAT on mobile bills. The Revenue contended that the invoices which captured the address of the centralised registered office at Silvassa, was improper document for claiming credit. Further the credit was considered not allowable on the mobile phones.

    The Tribunal stated that there was no dispute that the input services received were utilised by the respondent and therefore the benefit could not be denied on the ground that the invoices bear the name and address of the head office or any branch. Reliance was placed on the case of Electro Steel Castings v. CCE, Calcutta 2001 (136) ELT 929 (Tri.-Kolkata).

    As regards the credit on the mobile phones, the Tribunal relied on the judgment pronounced in the case of Indian Rayon Industries Ltd. v. CCE, 2006 (4) STR 79 and CCE v. Excel Corp Care Ltd., 2008 (12) STR 436 (Guj.) and confirmed the Commissioner (Appeals)’ order.
        
    5. CHA Services & Port Services :

    Aspinwall & Co. Ltd. v. Commissioner of Central Excise, Cochin 2010 (17) STR 496 (Tri.-Bang.)

    The demand of service tax was confirmed under port services and CHA services. Further, as regards CHA services, the order stated that the assessee was given a contract indicating agency commission separately and hence the assessee would not be entitled to claim the benefit provided by the Board’s Circular No. 843/1/17-TRU; dated 6-6-1997. However, the Tribunal found that the assessee prima facie discharged obligation of tax and the amount other than commission was towards reimbursable expenses and in identical issue of the very assessee, this Bench has granted waiver of pre-deposit of the disputed amounts.

    In the case of port charges, the issue was squarely in favour of the assessee as held in the case of Kinship Services Pvt. Ltd. v. CCE, Cochin 2008 (10) STR 331 (Tri-Bang) and also in assessee’s own case as decided by the Bench in 2009 (15) STR 466 (Tri.-Bang.).

    Considering that prima facie case in favour of the appellant was made out, waiver was granted.

        6. Pre-deposit dispensed with for case on merits :

    Aster Teleservices Pvt. Ltd. v. Commr. of Cus. & C. Ex., Hyderabad 2010 (17) STR 584 (Tri.-Bang.)

    The assessee was rendering the following services :

        a) Erection of telecommunication tower

        b) Construction of petrol pumps, industrial buildings

        c) Erection and painting of telecommunication towers

        d) Erection and installation of telecom equipments (subcontractor)

        e) Erection of railway signaling system (railways)

    The Revenue demanded service tax on activities mentioned in (a), (d) and (e) under the category of erection and commissioning. According to the Revenue the activities could not be considered as works contract as the entire material was supplied by the principal. Plea was made by the assessee to grant stay till the matter pending before the Larger Bench could be decided. They further submitted that while determining the liability, the adjudicating authority considered the invoiced amount instead of actual receipts.

    The Tribunal observed that the assessee contested the liability on the ground that the activity was works contract. Considering that the decision was pending before the Larger Bench, and further that the assessee had substantiated their claim by producing sales tax returns and they had deposited about 25% of the service tax liability, the deposit was held sufficient and waiver was granted for the balance.

    7.(a) Penalty : U/s.78 : Whether non-filing and non-payment necessarily indicate suppression ?

    Commissioner of Central Excise, Surat v. Star Crane Service, 2010 (17) STR 576 (Tri.-Ahmd.)

    The Commissioner (Appeals) reduced the penalty levied u/s.78 of the Finance Act, 1994. The Appellate Authority stated in its order that neither the show-cause notice made any allegation of existence of any suppressions, mismanagement, etc. with the intention to evade any payment of duty nor did the adjudicating authority recorded any such finding. Further the Commissioner (Appeals) also observed that the quantum of penalty could not exceed the amount of liability.

    The Revenue contended that the assessee failed to apply for registration, pay service tax and failed to file return and this has to be held as suppression on the part of the assessee.

    The Tribunal stated that in a number of cases it is held that non-application for registration does not construe suppression with an intent to evade duty in the light of fast-changing service tax law. The Revenue did not refer to any evidence of non-payment of tax due to any mala fide intention. Hence the order reducing penalty was good in law.

        b) Bona fide reasons : Penalty not leviable :

    Bureau  of  Indian  Standards  v.  Commissioner  of Custom and Central Excise, Nodia 2010 (17) STR 527 (Tri.-Delhi)

    The assessee is a national standard body under the administrative control of the Ministry of Consumer Affairs and availing benefit under the Income-tax Act as charitable institution. The assessee’s training programme for development and implementation of quality environment, occupational health and safety, etc. on payment of fees was treated as commercial coaching & training by the Revenue and service tax, interest, penalty, etc. were demanded.

    The assessee took up the issue with its Ministry and was advised to pay service tax with interest.

    The Tribunal held that the facts and circumstances of the case indicated that the cause was reason-able for their failure to pay service tax undertaken by them and in absence of any intention to evade service tax, it is a fit case for invoking the provision of S. 80 of the Finance Act, 1994.

        c) Bona fide reasons :

    Adani Enterprises Ltd. v. Commissioner of Service Tax, Ahmedabad 2010 (17) STR 457 (Tri.-Ahmd.)

    Penalty was imposed on the appellant receiving GTA services for several payments made delayedly. The reason for delay was explained as occurred on account of operational difficulty in implementation of new SAP software. The appellant paid interest of its own volition and several times made excess payment rather than short on account of software difficulty. The appellant relied on the decisions of C. Ahead Info. Technologies India Pvt. Ltd. v. CCE (A), Bangalore 2009 (14) STR 803 (Tri.-Bang.) and Santhi Casting Works v. CCE, Coimbatore, 2009 (15) STR 219 (Tri.-Chennai) as well as on the Board Circular No. 341/18/2004-TRU (Pt.), dated Dec 17, 2004 wherein the Department was directed not to impose penalty for procedural lapses in respect of GTA services till 31-12-2005. It also stated that no penalty would be levied unless default was on account of deliberate fraud, collusion, suppression, etc. Further the action of payment of service tax as a service recipient although they were not liable to pay it prior to 18-4-2006 indicated its bona fides. Further, the assessee contended that they were covered u/s.73 and not u/s.76 of the Act.

    The Revenue’s contention was that the delay was very high as compared to the excess payment, as it ranged from 20 days to 166 days which was indicative of other reasons than mere software problem and that the SCN imposed penalty u/s.76 and u/s.73 was not invoked at all.

    The Tribunal set aside the case holding that the assessee’s case was fit for waiver of penalty u/s.80 of the Act.

        d) In absence of suppression, penalty u/s.78 not leviable :

    Sahara Power Products v. CCE, Mangalore 2010 (17) STR 463 (Tri.-Bang.)

    The assessee was rendering repair and maintenance services of faulty distributor transformers of different capacities to Mangalore Electricity Supply. The Revenue issued a SCN as the assessee was not registered and also did not pay service tax. The Revenue demanded service tax from 1-7-2003 to 31-3-2006 invoking longer period of limitation along with interest and penalty u/s.76, u/s. 77 and u/s.78 of the Act. In response to the assessee’s appeal, the Commissioner (Appeals) remanded the matter with certain directions. The adjudicating authority in the de novo order confirmed the service tax liability, interest and penalty u/s.76, u/s.77 and u/s.78. In the second round of appeal, the Commissioner (Appeals) confirmed service tax along with interest and penalty u/s.76, u/s.77 and u/s.78 although in an earlier order, the Commissioner (Appeals) did not confirm any existence of suppression.

    The Tribunal held that for the defaults of non-registration and non-payment of tax, penalty u/s. 76 and u/s.77 is leviable. However, the assessee paid service tax with interest without contesting and the Commissioner (Appeals) in his earlier order levied service tax from 1-6-2005 onwards, thus indicating non-invoking of longer period of limitation and non-existence of fraud or suppression, no penalty was leviable u/s.78 of the Act.

        8. Rebate : Export of Services :

    Dell International Services India P. Ltd. v. CCE, Banga-lore 2010 (17) STR 540 (Tri.-Bang.)

    The assessee, a 100% EOU call centre filed five rebate claims which were rejected primarily on the ground that they did not export taxable service and input services were not used for exported services. In assessee’s own case, earlier the Assistant Commissioner on detailed scrutiny found that services were taxable and this fact was not disputed. Similarly, in another claim of the assessee, the Commissioner (Appeals) held that the assessee provided taxable services. In case when an issue is settled between the parties, the same cannot be argued again by the Department. Reliance was placed on the decision of the Apex Court in the case of Suptd. of Central Excise v. D.C.I. Pharmaceuticals Pvt. Ltd., 2005 (181) ELT 189 SC.

    In order to determine whether the assessee was rendering business auxiliary services or the services rendered by the assessee were excluded from the definition of business auxiliary services i.e., information technology services, the cases of CCE, Hyderabad–IV v. M/s. Deloitte Tax Service (I) Pvt. Ltd., 2008 STR 266 (Tri.-Bang.) and Circular No. DOF No. 334/1/2008-TRU, dated 29-2-2008 were relied upon.

    To refute the contention of the Department that the services exported were not taxable services but exempt services and hence the rules of export were not applicable, it was submitted that Rule 3 of the Export Rules applied to taxable services. In other words, there was no restriction on the exempted services from being eligible for benefit under the Export of Rules, 2005.

    For the status of services as input services, decision of CCE, Mumbai-V v. M/s. GTC Industries Ltd., 2008 STR 468 (Tri-LB) among others was relied upon, which held that CENVAT was allowable on input services utilised for business.

    It was accordingly held that the conditions under the Notification 12/2005 were satisfied and rebate was allowed.

    9.(a) Valuation : Inclusion of amount declared to Income-tax Department :

    CCE, Chandigarh. v. Bindra Tent Service, 2010 (17) STR 470 (Tri.-Del.)

    The assessee, a pandal and shamiana keeper pursuant to an Income-tax Department survey, deposited certain amounts, based on which, the Revenue demanded service tax on the amount deposited contending that the surrender of monies without explaining the source implied that the amounts related to the taxable services and the burden of proof to prove contrary was with the assessee.

    The assessee pleaded that the amount deposited pertained accumulation in the previous six years and not of the particular year in question. In order to compute the undisclosed income only, it was taken as income in that particular year by the IT Department.

    The Commissioner (Appeals) in his order placed reliance on the judgment in the case of Kipps Education Centre, Bhatinda v. CCE, Chandigarh wherein it was held that the income voluntarily disclosed before the Income-tax authorities could not be added to the taxable value merely based on presumption without evidence. The burden to prove evasion lay on the Department. Since no inquiry was conducted by the Department as to the assessee’s claim that monies deposited were of earlier period, no tax could be levied and accordingly, cross objections were disposed of.

        b) Club or Association Service : Membership deposit :

    Adarsh Realty & Hotel Pvt. Ltd. v. Commr. of S. T. Bangalore, 2010 (17) STR 569 (Tri.-Bang.)

    The Revenue demanded service tax under the Club or Association Services. The appellant paid service tax on the annual subscription of the members, health club and spa services, guest charges, banquet halls, laundry service, internet service and travel desk except on membership deposit and service tax was demanded on the entire revenue streams. They also deposited a sum of Rs.12,44,722, pursuant to the order of the Adjudicating Authority pertaining to membership deposit in dispute.

    The Tribunal held that there being no dispute over other revenue streams, whether membership deposit is refundable or not, shall be considered at the time of the final disposal and since the assessee has deposited an amount disputed under the membership services, the pre-deposit of balance amount was waived and recovery was stayed.

        c) Simultaneous availment of CENVAT with abatement :

    CCE, Vadodara v. Ram Krishna Travels Pvt. Ltd., 2010 (17) STR 487 (Tri.-Ahmd.)

    The assessee availed abatement under Notification No. 1/06-S.T. and CENVAT credit simultaneously. The Revenue demanded service tax due to non-availability of benefit of abatement. The assessee subsequently reversed the credit so availed.

    The Commissioner (Appeals) by taking note of the judgment of the Supreme Court in the case of Chandrapur Magnet Wires Pvt. Ltd. v. CCE, 1996 (81) ELT 422 (All) and the High Court’s order in the case of Hello Minerals Water (P) Ltd. v. UOI, 2004 (174) ELT 422, held in favour of the assessee. The Tribunal found no infirmity in the order of the Commissioner (Appeals) as the assessee had admittedly reversed the credit.

    Part A : INTEREST ON CENVAT CREDIT TAKEN OR UTILISED WRONGLY

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    Service Tax

    1. Relevant statutory provisions :


    (a) Rule 3(1) of CENVAT Credit Rules, 2004 (CCR
    04) :


    A manufacturer or producer or provider of taxable
    service shall be allowed to take Credit (hereinafter referred to as CENVAT
    Credit) . . . . . .

    (b) Rule 4(1) of CCR 04 :


    CENVAT credit in respect of inputs may be taken
    immediately on receipt of the inputs in factory of the manufacturer or premises
    of provider of output service . . . . . .

    (c) Rule 4(2)(a) of CCR 04 :


    The CENVAT Credit in respect of Capital goods
    . . . . . . at any point of time in a given financial year shall be taken only
    for an amount not exceeding fifty per cent of duty paid on such Capital goods in
    the same financial year.

    (d) Rule 4(7) of CCR 04 :


    The CENVAT Credit in respect of input service shall
    be allowed, on or after the day on which payment is made of the value of input
    service and service tax paid or payable as indicated in Invoice . . . . . .

    (e) Rule 14 of CCR 04 :


    “Where CENVAT Credit has been taken or utilised
    wrongly or has been erroneously refunded, the same along with the interest shall
    be recovered from the manufacturer or provider of the output service and the
    provisions of the S. 11A and S. 11AB of the Excise Act, or S. 73 and S. 75 of
    the Finance Act, shall apply mutatis mutandis for effecting such
    recoveries.”

    2. What constitutes CENVAT Credit ‘taken or
    utilised wrongly’ :


    (a) Some of the meanings attributed to the terms
    ‘take’, ‘utilise’ and ‘wrongly’ are as under :

    (i)
    Take


    • Lay
      hold of with one’s hands; reach for and hold

    • To get
      possession of; to gain, to choose; select

    • To gain
      or receive into possession; to seize; to assume ownership

     

    Concise
    Oxford English Dictionary

    Webster’s
    Concise Dictionary


    Black’s Law Dictionary

    (ii)
    Utilise

    • To make
      practical or worthwhile use of

    • Make
      practical and effective use of

    • To make
      use of; turn to use

    • To make
      use of, turn to account, use


     

    New Collins Dictionary

    Concise Oxford English Dictionary

    Concise Dictionary


    COD 6th Ed.

    (iii)
    Wrongly

    • ‘Wrong’
      has various shades of meaning like mistake, not true, in error


    • Wrongful — Characterised by unfairness of injustice, contrary to law

    • Wrong —
      Any damage or injury, contrary to right, violation of right or of law


     

    Concise Oxford Dictionary

     

     

     

     

     

     

    P. Ramanatha Aiyer’s Law Lexicon.

    (b) The following emerges from the foregoing
    analysis :

    • Taking of credit would
      imply an act of availment of credit/benefit under CCR 04. [This could be
      demonstrated by making entry in records, returns, etc.]
      It is possible that an assessee makes entries for ‘CENVAT Credit taken’ in their records but does not actually utilise it. [He may have some doubts about the entitlement of the credit taken or for other reasons like no service tax payable to enable set-off]

      •     Taking or utilising credit wrongly both could be offences. ‘Taking’ can be compared to ‘attempt to commit an offence’ while ‘Utilise’ would mean actually committing of an offence.


      •     The word ‘wrongly’ is stronger than ‘mistakenly’ or ‘erroneously’ and would usually imply an intention to take CENVAT Credit which an assessee was not entitled in terms of CCR 04.


         3.  Reversal of CENVAT Credit before utilisation — Settled position:

          In a landmark ruling in Chandrapur Magnet Wires (P) Ltd. v. CCE, (1996) 81 ELT 3 (SC) it has been held by the Supreme Court that when MODVAT Credit taken is reversed, it would mean that MODVAT Credit was not taken at all. This principle is relevant for CENVAT Credit as well. Relevant observations of the Supreme Court are reproduced hereafter?:

      Para 7
      In view of the aforesaid clarification by the Department, we see no reason why the assessee cannot make a debit entry in the credit account before removal of the exempted final product. If this debit entry is permissible to be made, credit entry for the duties paid on the inputs utilised in manufacture of the final exempted product will stand deleted in the accounts of the assessee. In such a situation, it cannot be said that the assessee has taken credit for the duty paid on the inputs utilised in the manufacture of the final exempted product under Rule 57A. In other words, the claim for exemption of duty on the disputed goods cannot be denied on the plea that the assessee has taken credit of the duty paid on the inputs used in manufacture of these goods.

      The above-stated principle laid down by the Su-preme Court has been followed in large number of cases.
          In CCE v. Bombay Dyeing & Mfg. Co. Ltd., (2007) 215 ELT 3 (SC) also it has been held that reversal of credit before utilisation amounts to not taking credit.

      In view of the Supreme Court ruling in the Bombay Dyeing case, CBEC has in the context of Textiles

      Textile Articles vide its Circular No. 858/16/2007 –CX, dated 8-11-2007, clarified as under?:

      Para 3

      …..it is clarified that para 2 of the said Circular stands amended to the extent that in case, credit taken on inputs used in the manufacture of the said goods cleared under Notification No. 141/2002–C.E. or Notification No. 30/2004–C.E., has been reversed before utilisation, it would amount to credit not having been taken.

      c)    However, it needs to be noted that rulings of the Supreme Court in Chandrapur Magnet & Bombay Dyeing, have been distinguished by the Bombay High Court in CCE v. Nicholas Piramal (India) Ltd., (2009) 244 ELT 321 (Bom.) while interpreting Rule 6 of CCR 04.

      4.    Recent clarification of the Board

      CBEC, vide Circular No. 897/17/2009–CX, dated 3-9-2009 has clarified as under:

      “The Tribunal decision and the High Court judgment referred to above, was delivered in the context of erstwhile Rule 57I of the Central Excise Rules, 1944 and that the Supreme Court order under reference is only a decision and not a judgment. Since, Rule 14 of the CENVAT Credit Rules, 2004, is clear and unambiguous in the position that interest would be recoverable when CENVAT Credit is taken or utilised wrongly, it is clarified that the interest shall be recoverable when credit has been wrongly taken, even if it has not been utilised, in terms of wordings of the present Rule 14.”

      It may be noted that erstwhile Rule 57I of the Central Excise Rules, 1944 did not specifically provide for any interest payment along with reversal of wrongly taken credit while present Rule 14 of CCR 04 provides for payment of interest along with reversal of wrongly taken credit.

         5.  Interest:

      In Pratibha Processors v. UOI, (1996) 88 ELT 12 (SC), it was observed by the Supreme Court as under:

      “In fiscal statutes, the import of the words-, — ‘tax’, ‘interest’, ‘penalty’, etc. are well known. They are different concepts. Tax is the amount payable as a result of the charging provision. It is a compulsory exaction of money by a public authority for public purpose, the payment of which is enforced by law. Penalty is ordinarily levied on an assessee for some contumacious conduct or a deliberate violation of the provisions of the particular statute. Interest is compensatory in character and is imposed on an assessee who has withheld payment of any tax as and when it is due and payable. The levy of interest is geared to actual amount of tax withheld and the extent of delay in paying the tax on due date. Essentially, it is compensatory and different from penalty — which is penal in character.” (p. 20).

      Thus, interest is not a penalty but is essentially compensatory in nature. If CENVAT Credit is taken in books but not actually utilised, it would appear that since there is no loss of revenue to the Government, it may not be required to be compensated by a taxpayer.

          6. Interest on credit taken but not utilised — Judicial views:.
          In CCE v. Maruti Udyog Ltd., (2007) 214 ELT 173 (P & H)], the Punjab & Haryana Court agreed with the views of the Hon’ble CESTAT that the assessee was not liable to pay interest as the credit was only taken as entry in the MODVAT record and was in fact not utilised. SLP filed by the Revenue against this order of the P & H High Court has been dismissed by the Supreme Court (2007) 214 ELT A 50 (SC) on 10-10-2006.

      In the case of Maruti Udyog, the assessee claimed Modvat Credit which was not allowable in absence of requisite certificate under Rule 57E of the Central Excise Rules, 1944, being produced within six months but still the assessee claimed the same and credited the amount in RG – 23A Part II. The authorities disallowed the Modvat Credit relying upon judgment of the Supreme Court in Osram Surya (P) Limited v. Commissioner of Central Excise, Indore, (2002) 142 ELT 5 (SC).

      The Tribunal, however, had held that the assessee was not liable to pay interest as the credit was only taken as an entry in the Modvat record and was not in fact utilised. The Tribunal held that in absence of utilisation of credit, the assessee was not liable to pay interest.

      The P&H High Court held as under:
      “Learned counsel for the appellant is unable to show as to how the interest will be required to be paid when in absence of availment of Modvat Credit in fact, the assessee was not liable to pay any duty. The Tribunal has clearly recorded a finding that the assessee did not avail of the Modvat Credit in fact and had only made an entry.

      In view of this factual position, we are unable to hold that any substantial question of law arises.”

         b) Attention is particularly drawn to the ruling of the Punjab & Haryana High Court in the case of Ind–Swift Laboratories Ltd. v. UOI, (2009) 240 ELT 328 (P & H), relevant extracts from which, are reproduced hereafter for reference?:

      Para 9

      The Scheme of the Act and the CENVAT Credit Rules framed thereunder permit a manufacturer or producer of final products or a provider of taxable service to take CENVAT Credit in respect of duty of excise and such other duties as specified. The conditions for allowing CENVAT Credit are contained in Rule 4 of the Credit Rules contemplating that CENVAT Credit can be taken immediately on receipt of the inputs in the factory of the manufacturer or in the premises of the provider of output service. Such CENVAT credit can be utilised in terms of Rule 3(4) of Credit Rules for payment of any duty of excise on any final product and as contemplated in the aforesaid sub-rule. It, thus, transpires that CENVAT credit is the benefit of duties leviable or paid as specified in Rule 3(1) used in the manufacture of intermediate products, etc. In other words, it is a credit of the duties already leviable or paid. Such credit in respect of duties already paid can be adjusted for payment of duties payable under the Act and the Rules framed thereunder. U/s.11AB of the Act, liability to pay interest arises in respect of any duty of excise has not been levied or paid or has been short levied or short paid or erroneously refunded from the first day of the month in which the duty ought to have been paid. Interest is leviable if duty of excise has not been levied or paid. Interest can be claimed or levied for the reason that there is delay in the payment of duties. The interest is compensatory in nature as the penalty is chargeable separately.

      Para 10
      In Pratibha Processors v. Union of India, 1996 ELT 12 (SC), (1996) 11 SCC 101, it was held that interest is compensatory in character and is imposed on an assessee who has withheld payment of any tax as and when it is due and payable. The levy of interest is geared to actual amount of tax withheld and the extent of the delay in paying the tax on the due date. It is compensatory and different from penalty which is penal in character. Similarly, in Commissioner of Customs v. Jayathi Krishna & Co., 2000 (119) ELT 4 (SC) (2000) 9 SCC 402, it was held that interest on warehoused goods is merely an accessory to the principal and if principal is not payable, so is it for interest on it. In view of the aforesaid principle, we are of the opinion that no liability of payment of any excise duty arises when the petitioner availed CENVAT Credit. The liability to pay duty arises only at the time of utilisation. Even if CENVAT Credit has been wrongly taken, that does not lead to levy of interest as liability of payment of excise duty does not arise with such availment of CENVAT Credit by an assessee. Therefore, interest is not payable on the amount of CENVAT Credit availed of and not utilised.

      Para 11
      Reliance of respondents on Rule 14 of the Credit Rules that interest u/s.11AB of the Act is payable even if CENVAT Credit has been taken. In our view, the said clause has to be read down to mean that where CENVAT Credit taken and utilised wrongly. Interest cannot be claimed simply for the reason that the CENVAT Credit has been wrongly taken as such availment by itself does not create any liability of payment of excise duty. On a conjoint reading of S. 11AB of the Act and that of Rules 3 and 4 of the Credit Rules, we hold that interest cannot be claimed from the date of wrong availment of CENVAT Credit. The interest shall be payable from the date CENVAT Credit is wrongly utilised.

      Though the above ruling was pronounced on 3-7-2009 (i.e., before the issue of Circular by CBEC on 3-9-2009), it is very relevant for interpretation of Rule 14 of CCR 04.

          Conclusion:
         a) Under the Scheme of CCR 04 there is a clear mismatch as to time of availment of credit and time of utilisation of credit. In case of Service Providers rendering multiple services through loca-tions spread across the country, it becomes very difficult, to ascertain whether credit availed has been actually utilised or not.

      However, the principle laid by the Supreme Court in a landmark ruling CCE v. Dai Ichi Karkaria Ltd., (1999) 112 ELT 353 (SC) that, MODVAT does not envisage one to one correlation between ‘Inputs’ and ‘Outputs’ and credit once availed is indefeasible, is very much relevant in the context of CCR 04 as well.

      Under the scenario of timing mismatch between credit availment and credit utilisation, at a practical level, issues would remain as to how do service tax authorities monitor correctness of CENVAT Credit availed & its subsequent utilisation.

          b) Under CCR 04, the onus for availment of credit is on the person taking credit. Hence, it would appear that a person taking the credit may have to satisfy with reasonable certainty as to the credit entitlement and its subsequent utilisation in terms of conditions stipulated under CCR 04.

      In cases where, there is a very remote possibility of entitlement to credit availment & utilisation of credit [e.g., credit of Input services availed by a retailer] Rule 14 of CCR 04 could be invoked, despite subsequent reversal by such retailer, on the ground that there was no entitlement to credit inasmuch as a retailer is not a beneficiary under CCR 04.

      There could also be cases where there is a genuine error in availing CENVAT Credit (e.g., simultaneous availment of CENVAT benefit on Capital Goods & depreciation under income-tax). However, subsequently on its own but before utilisation of credit, the same is rectified by filing revised return before IT Authorities. This could be a good case for non-recovery of interest.

          c) As regards clarifications issued by CBEC vide Circular dated 3-9-2009, it would appear that interpretation of Rule 14 of CCR 04 by the Punjab & Haryana High Court [discussed in para 6(b) earlier] to the effect that Rule has to be read down to mean ‘credit taken and utilised wrongly’ reflects a correct view. Hence, if bona fides of credit availment can be established, there may not be a case for interest recovery on account of subsequent reversal of credit. However, this would depend on the facts and circumstances, of each case.

      It needs to be expressly noted that though correctness of CBEC Circular dated 3-9-2009 would be judicially tested, the field formations are likely to follow the Circular resulting in extensive litigations.

        d)  To end, since under CCR 04 the onus as to the availment of CENVAT Credit is on the service provider, it is felt that, due diligence need to be exercised at the point of availment of credit through a good system in place.

    Mentoring of Articled Students – the Need of the Hour

    Mentoring

    What is meant by Mentoring?


    Mentoring, as defined by the Encarta Encyclopedia, means
    “serving as a guide, counselor and teacher for another person, usually in an
    academic or occupational capacity”. Some professions have “mentoring programs”
    in which newcomers are paired with more experienced persons who advise them and
    serve as examples as they advance. Schools sometimes offer mentoring programs to
    new students or students having difficulties. Mentorship refers to a
    developmental relationship in which a more experienced or more knowledgeable
    person helps a less experienced or less knowledgeable person — someone who can
    be referred to as a protégé, or a mentee — to develop in a specified capacity.

    The term ‘mentoring’ is, therefore, wider than training or
    teaching; it entails providing guidance and direction at a personal level that
    is often missed out in the Indian scheme of education, but is so critical for
    higher levels of education and development! “Mentoring is a process for the
    informal transmission of knowledge, social capital and the psychosocial support
    perceived by the recipient as relevant to work, career or professional
    development; mentoring entails informal communication, usually face-to-face and
    during a sustained period of time, between a person who is perceived to have
    greater relevant knowledge, wisdom or experience (the mentor) and a person who
    is perceived to have less (the protégé).” (Bozeman, Feeney, 2007).

    How is mentoring relevant to the CA profession?



    The CA
    profession provides a unique opportunity to its members to nurture budding
    professionals, usually referred to as ‘articled students’. Articled students
    generally venture into the world of Chartered Accountancy at a tender,
    impressionable age, generally between 18 to 21 years. For most, this is their
    first introduction to work and to some extent, ‘real life’. The experiences and
    values that they imbibe during these years of articleship stay with them for the
    rest of their lives. It is also their first exposure to the real world, where
    they apply their knowledge to real life situations in a significant manner.


    In recent years, the lives of articled students in Mumbai
    have become stressful because of a variety of reasons ranging from long
    commutes, long hours of work, balancing between the regime of coaching classes
    and the demands of work, college attendance and examinations and an all-round
    pressure to perform in exams and at work. The relationship between the student
    and the principal has also changed from the ‘guru-shishya’ relationship to the
    ‘employer-employee’ relationship, with the principals using the articled
    students as cheap resource. The principals, at times, forget their role of
    grooming the students who work under them for three years to become
    professionals. The ‘me first’ attitude of the current world, manifested in both
    the principal and the student is also not conducive to a healthy
    principal-student relationship.

    It is in this context that mentoring gains relevance for the
    CA profession; effective mentoring would lead to well rounded professionals,
    greater respect for the principals and also enhancement to the image of the
    profession by ensuring that the new entrants are professionally nurtured.


    Where does BCAS come into the picture?


    BCAS as an Enabler for Effective Mentoring

    BCAS has always been an incubator of new ideas and an
    initiator of novel initiatives. In the context of mentoring, BCAS has decided to
    launch a unique initiative: Mentoring Articled Students. The objective of this
    initiative is to build bridges where there are walls — to help members to start
    thinking of articled students not as their workers but as a responsibility and a
    privilege. This initiative entails creating a framework for mentoring articled
    students that will lead to grooming and nurturing young minds beyond the
    technical skills required for the profession — in the areas of communication,
    self management, purposeful living and constant learning. It also entails
    providing support to members who wish to ‘mentor’ their articled students by
    providing a ready-to-use framework by organizing mentoring sessions in areas
    where specialized guidance is required, and compiling a ‘mentoring guide’ for
    use by the members.

    The objective of this initiative may be summarized as:




    §
    Creating awareness amongst the members for the need to ‘mentor’ articled
    students.



    §
    Preparing a ‘Framework for
    Mentoring’ that can be implemented by an interested principal.



    §
    Creating awareness among
    articled students to focus on holistic development during articleship that
    stretches beyond technical training, such as developing inter-personal
    communication and presentation skills, inculcating habits of reading, engaging
    in purposeful activities and becoming a life-long learner.


    This initiative envisages that while mentoring will be an
    internal process between the principal and the student, BCAS will complement
    individual efforts by providing a framework for mentoring and periodic updates
    to the principals, and also by arranging group sessions for the students where
    leading professionals from different fields will be invited to share their
    experiences and knowledge with the students.

    An Invitation to Participate
    in this Unique Initiative


    Recognizing that mentoring of articled students is the need
    of the hour, BCAS commits itself to be a catalyst in this area and becomes an
    enabler in promoting this noble cause — for the students of today are the
    Chartered Accountants of tomorrow, and the Chartered Accountants of tomorrow are
    the future of our profession.

    So, come join us, to pioneer a mentoring movement for the students of our
    profession.

    Tax Due Diligence — Direct Taxation

    M&A

    Introduction:


    Devising an M&A strategy is the first critical step for any
    business contemplating a transaction. Armed with a plan and knowledge of the
    competitive marketplace, companies are ready to practise the art of the deal.
    But the need for a speedy transaction and post-merger integration should not
    entice companies to take short cuts along the way. Companies should follow
    necessary steps to execute an M&A transaction in a way that drives shareholder
    value. All transactions — whether mergers, acquisitions, joint ventures, private
    equity investments, etc., are full of complex business and tax issues that
    require an expert to get on top of the transaction process and to reach the best
    solution that is tax-efficient and meets commercial and business expectations.

    The Indian tax regime is as complicated as any other matured
    regime. Over the years, the Indian regulations have provided sufficient leverage
    to foreign investments and at the same time, have ensured a closely controlled
    mechanism on these investments.

    In the M&A world, some of the typical tax challenges faced
    today include non-availability of interest deduction for funds borrowed for
    investment in shares of Indian companies, restricted group relief on asset
    transfers, restricted debt push down mechanism and existence of high tax
    compliance.

    Every deal is unique in itself. It brings with it a basket of
    complexities and issues, be it accounting, regulatory or taxation. Given the
    complexities, it has become incumbent upon a good service provider to have a
    dedicated and experienced team to provide tax due diligence services.

    This write-up seeks to provide an overview of the key
    features of a tax due diligence; it touches upon the procedure to be followed;
    and it provides some ground rules for reporting findings so as to meet the
    expectations of all stakeholders to the transaction.

    Scoping of work:

    One of the initial steps to be undertaken is to formulate the
    scope of the assignment. One’s drafting skills are tested to the core whilst
    formulating the scope for the tax piece of the due diligence. An essential
    aspect of this is to explicitly provide for areas which would not be covered as
    part of the due diligence process (generally referred to as ‘scope
    limitations’).

    Given the complexity and the time required to resolve
    disputes with the tax authorities, it is of utmost importance to clearly bring
    out the period of coverage as part of the scope of work to be covered in a due
    diligence assignment. As a general practice, the tax returns filed by the target
    company in the last 2 to 3 years are reviewed. Further, the status of all
    pending assessments, disputes is obtained and reviewed for the earlier years.
    One of the reasons for reviewing the last 2 to 3 years tax returns is that the
    audit by the tax authorities for these years is typically not complete on the
    date of carrying out the due diligence exercise.

    Apart from the coverage, the scope of the tax piece of the
    due diligence process needs to be very case-specific i.e., it would
    depend upon the Industry to which the target company pertains, the age of the
    target company, the shareholding pattern, etc.

    For example, in a transaction in the power sector, it would
    be critical to examine the continuity of availability of tax holiday and
    incentives claimed by the target entity. Further, in case the target is a
    private limited company, it would be essential to review the movement in its
    shareholding pattern with a view to assess the continuity of availability of
    business losses.

    Characteristics and key features:

    The tax specialists who are part of the due diligence team need to work very closely with the financial and accounting
    specialists.

    Before discussing the methodology to be adopted to conduct a
    tax due diligence, it is imperative to understand the characteristics and
    features of conducting the tax due diligence. The main objectives can be
    classified as under:



    Understanding the target:





    • its legal structure, cash flow mechanism and its operational strategy.






    Assessment of tax impact arising from ‘change in control’




    •   carry forward of past tax losses, relevant exchange control regulations
      (especially recent developments)



    •   availability and continuity of tax holidays/concessions




    Assessment of
    historical tax exposures





    •   pending tax litigations, aggressive tax positions adopted in the past (possible


    consequences)



    •   risk of disallowance of expenditure for tax purposes



    •   interest and penal consequences




    Assessment of current
    tax position





    •   possible disallowances



    •   ramification of past tax audits.




    Tax benefits





    •   There are various direct and indirect tax benefits in India for
      companies/businesses. The conditions attached to such benefits are
      important.




    Contingent liabilities — disputed tax demands





        These are largely potential liabilities (i.e., tax demand + interest + penalty which could extend to 300% of the tax sought to be evaded) arising on account of disputes with tax authorities. Since it is difficult to predict the outcome of such disputed demands, it is likely that in some businesses, even genuine tax demands may not be provided on the ground that such liabilities are ‘contingent’ and are being disputed (depending upon the likelihood of the company succeeding in defending these disputes).

    Tax litigation procedure:

        The tax litigation procedure in India is cumber-some and time consuming (the average time frame for an appeal to attain finality is in the range of 10-15 years). Further, positions adopted by the tax authorities in the initial years are generally followed by them in the subsequent years as well, unless there is a strong reason or a judicial/appellate pro-nouncement to change the position earlier adopted. Accordingly, disallowances made in a particular year are likely to be a routine occurrence in future years as well and the only option in such a scenario is to litigate. Hence, it may be advisable to be cautious while evaluating targets which are engulfed in too many tax litigations involving sizeable tax demands.

    Current assets:

        These may include balances that may not be realisable in the short term — such as (i) tax refunds due (ii) deposits with various tax authorities, etc. — such deposits generally are not realised for a very long time. These would consequentially have an impact on the working capital financing needs of the target.

    Various tax compliances (including withholding tax):

        The Indian tax laws prescribe several tax compliances for Indian companies. Failure to comply with these could inter alia give rise to penal consequences. Especially, in case there is a default in withholding taxes on payments made, it could have several con-sequences for the payer, such as recovery of the tax not so with held/deposited, interest thereon, penalty (which could be equivalent to the tax amount) and disallowance of the expenditure in relation to which tax has not been withheld/deposited. Hence, one should ensure that the target is tax compliant (more importantly, the withholding tax compliant).

    Typical areas prone to income-tax litigation: While there is surfeit of issues that is prevalent in the tax litigation environment in India, there are some issues that typically arise during a tax due diligence, viz.:

    •     ramification of past tax audits.


    •     Depreciation for income-tax purposes and its impact on the deferred tax calculations.


    •     allowability of expenses which are quasi-capital in nature (e.g., non-compete fee payments).


    •     computation of various tax deductions/exemptions available.


    •     disallowances on account of failure to withhold tax on payments (especially in cases where payments are made to non-residents).


    •     levy and computation of interest on tax demands and refunds.


    •     income characterisation (say, business income v. income from house property).


    •     carry forward and set-off of tax losses.


    •     levy of penalty.


    •     taxability under presumptive taxation provisions.


    •     computation of tax liability as per ‘Minimum Alternate Tax’ provisions, etc.


    Transfer pricing adjustments:

    Given that the tax authorities have commenced reacting to the transfer pricing report, policy and documentation filed by the taxpayers, it is very important to consider the rationale and reasoning behind determining the arm’s-length price, level of compliances and filings as required by the regulations. These are particularly important in the context of the potential future impact of similar transactions.

    Fringe Benefit Tax:

    In the short span when Fringe Benefit Tax was applicable, there were emerging controversial issues, some of which were resolved by the circulars/clarifications issued by the tax authorities. Although this legislation does not exist today, there is litigation which is gradually surfacing on this count.

    The mechanics:

    Tax is a complicated subject and to carry out a tax review which involves an understanding of the tax disputes, challenges faced from the tax authorities by the target entity, tax positions taken by the target entity, and to formulate a view on the basis of the documents reviewed and analysis performed normally within a short span of time is an uphill task. This is the precise reason that the tax due diligence team members need to be experienced, and should be well equipped to dissect and digest the flow of information and documents provided to them in the data room within the stipulated time.

    Success, in the backdrop of the above challenges can be achieved by following an appropriate methodology while conducting the tax review.

    Activities to be performed while conducting a tax due diligence would mainly include?:

    •     Examination of status of tax assessments — cur-rent tax position, open years and evaluation of past liabilities.
    •     Review the income-tax/fringe benefit/wealth tax returns filed for the open years.
    •     Study the disputes between the entity and the tax department.
    •     Identify potential liabilities on account of pending assessments and disputes.
    •     Discuss the various direct tax benefits availed and attached conditions for continuation of the same with the target management and tax advisors.
    •     Analyse the withholding tax compliance.


    •     Examine the applicability of the double taxation avoidance agreements entered into by India while reviewing the tax treatment given to various transactions entered into by the target and analyse the implications arising thereof.


    •     Read opinions obtained by the target management from external counsel and stands taken by the target/target’s advisors during assessment.


    •     Peruse transfer pricing policy adopted.


    •     Examine the various tax balances (particularly the deferred tax asset/liability) reflected in the financial statements.


    The procedure to be followed while conducting tax due diligence has to be very discreet and well planned. There is an expectation of providing comments on the tax position adopted by the target entity. Given the areas to be covered in the tax due diligence, one is saddled with a large number of tax documents, records in relation to tax matters of the target. The tasks to be performed in the above context would include carrying out a review and check of the following:

    •     Correspondence with the tax authorities.


    •     Current and deferred tax calculations — reconciliations with the amounts disclosed in accounts.


    •     All tax payments made within due dates — if not, check interest/penalties arising on account of the same.


    •     Calculations supporting advance tax payments made.


    •     Carry forward losses schedule — both as returned and also as assessed — also confirm the expiry dates/restrictions on utilisation of the same.


    •     Details of transactions with related parties (interacting with the team carrying out the financial due diligence on this aspect should be useful as at times identification of all ‘related parties’ itself raises challenges).


    •     Transactions with related parties from the transfer pricing perspective and confirm the pricing method/documentation maintained.

        

    • Details of permanent establishments in other countries.


    •     Whether withholding tax provisions are being adhered to — also examine as to whether the withholding tax returns are filed in time.


    •     Tax findings of non-India jurisdictions, if any, in which the target company operates — this may require liaising with local tax experts.


    •     Potential implications of the existing tax position for future years considering the proposed Direct Taxes Code Bill, 2010, which has been recently introduced.

       

     

     

     

    Years
    subject to statute of

     

     

     

    Limitation

     

     

     

    Outside
    scope (entities,

     

     

     

    years, taxes)

    Controlling

     

     

     

    tax due

     

     

    Materiality

     

     

    diligence
    risk

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    External
    advice

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Low
    risk areas

     

     

     

    • Applicability of Wealth-tax.


    Like any other due diligence process, the tax due diligence is also prone to risk. Con-trolling the tax due diligence risk therefore becomes a key aspect of the process. The elements of a tax due diligence risk can be addressed by considering the aspects shown in the diagram?:

    Submission of findings and reporting:

    It is always easy to document a detailed analysis arising out of the due diligence process. However, this may not serve the purpose of the report and the investor’s expectations. It is therefore advisable to articulate and document the findings in a reader- friendly manner. In addition to the complexities and the volume involved whilst carrying out the tax due diligence process, some ground rules which need to be followed include?:

    Anticipate problems and opportunities

        Early identification of and discussion of preliminary issues with client.

    Measure exposures and seek solutions

        Quantify estimated amounts and likelihood of exposures resulting in future cash outflows (range/sensitivity analysis).

    Interpret findings in ways clients can use

    •     Focus on material issues.


    •     Use plain English — many of the decision-makers may not understand or appreciate a detailed technical tax answer to a question.


    Timely communication of findings:

    In order to generate a report which meets the expectations of all stake-holders, certain ground rules need to be followed as under:

    One needs to

    •     be clear and concise.
    •     focus on key issues.
    •     classify tax exposures into high/medium/low risk category and estimate the quantum.
    •     consider additional verbal feedback.
    •     issue a draft for comment and discussion prior to finalising the report.
    •     add additional information as appendix.
    •     be mindful of other readers e.g., financiers.
    An integral part of the tax due diligence process is to identify issues and more importantly discuss the same with the target management, their advisor, as the case may be. This ensures that the tax findings given in the due diligence report do not give rise to surprises when these are discussed with the target management.

    Tax Issues could primarily be classified as:

        Deal breakers — Those issues which would impediment the consummation of the proposed transaction. For example, sizeable risk on account of various tax disputes, some of which may be quite material, could act as a ‘Deal Breaker’.

        Negotiation points — Those issues which would be necessary to consider in the valuation of business/negotiation of bid price.

        Issues for agreements — Those issues which would warrant indemnities and identify conditions precedent for happening of the transaction

        Commercial override — Those risks and issues which are knowingly taken over as a calculated commercial decision.

    In summary:

    The due diligence exercise maps the way forward for transaction closure. Tax-related findings would form the bases of valuation of the target and aid in negotiating for a better price. These are also relevant for consideration in some of the key areas of the transaction documents. Tax indemnities and conditions precedents incorporated in the agreements are based on the due diligence exercise. Some of the observations and areas falling out in a tax due diligence report could also be relevant whilst structuring the transaction.

    Studies suggest that tax factors are of significant magnitude in less than 10% of merger transactions. Be that as it may, there have been some large transactions which have fallen apart primarily due to adverse tax findings as a result of the due diligence exercise.

    Therefore, the onus is on the tax specialist to identify the potential tax risks and exposures and to document them appropriately in order to provide adequate visibility to the investor.

    Financial and Accounting Due Diligence — Some Aspects

    M&A

    Part-IV

    Conducting a financial due diligence — A well-planned
    approach

    This is the fourth part of the article on ‘Financial and
    accounting due diligence — Some aspects’. The first three parts highlighted the
    various forms of due diligence, the process of carrying out an FDD exercise and
    some of the key focus areas in an FDD exercise. This part continues and
    concludes the discussion on the key focus areas.

    Loans & Net Debt :

    Analysis of the debt position is important and significantly
    depends upon the transaction structure and valuation mechanism. As mentioned
    earlier, the transactions are generally valued based on a debt-free, cash-free
    mechanism. In view of the same, it is critical to define the components of debt
    and quantify the same. The elements of trapped cash (i.e., cash that is not
    freely usable, such as deposits with government authorities, margin monies,
    etc.) need to be highlighted to allow for computation of equity value.

    In most situations, particularly in the case of distressed
    assets, the analysis of debt and related covenants assumes the most important
    aspect of the transaction. Typically, the loan documents, including the
    documents approving the restructuring, provide for conditions attached to the
    loan including repayment terms, interest rates, stipulation of minimum financial
    ratios, security mechanism and prepayment terms and each such provision would
    need to be carefully assessed to identify its impact on the transaction.

    Key elements to be analysed while reviewing loans are :

       • Negative covenants in loan agreements/sanction letters (change of control) : a very common covenant is the need for prior approval of lenders for the transaction including release of charge on the assets;

        • Compliance with terms of debt restructuring schemes : with a need to assess the level of promoter contribution required as per the scheme approved.

        • Debt-like items (pension underfunding, severance and other non-operating liabilities) to be considered in valuation : identification of non-operating liabilities (capital creditors, etc.) reported as part of current liabilities under working capital that should be identified as debt-like items.


    Potential liabilities and commitments :

    This area is particularly important in the case of a complete
    acquisition of a target with no future involvement of the existing promoters.
    The extent of availability of representations and warranties and indemnities in
    this area, although considered as a must in any transaction, should at best
    provide only limited comfort. This is primarily considering the ability of the
    acquirer to enforce such claims in the courts of law in India and the time value
    of such claims. The identification/estimation of such liabilities therefore has
    a direct valuation impact.

    It is equally difficult to analyse this area since the
    procedures are expected to identify liabilities that are not accounted for in
    the books of account and may or may not have come to the notice of the existing
    management and they may not have a basis to provide reasonable estimates.

    The areas to be covered in the analysis and identification of
    liabilities are summarised below :

     • Provisioning policy : assessing the general approach towards cut-off and provisioning policies adopted by the management; (for example in the financial sector when the target management tries to postpone provisioning for non-performing assets or in the manufacturing sector when provisions for warranties tend to get accounted for only on cash basis or in the mining sector when future costs for rehabilitation under environmental regulations are currently ignored and provided for only when incurred);

        • Contingent liabilities and off balance sheet items : (where aggressive tax opinions enable a target not to provide against matters in litigation); assessing guarantees/off balance sheet obligations in respect of related parties;

        • Change of control matters : potential payments arising out of change of control/additional costs; severance/retention pay upon the occurrence of transaction;

        • Pension and related obligations : assessing the provisioning and funding of liabilities; this is particularly important in cross-border transactions — there is a need to take the help from specialised local resources to assess the liabilities;

        • Earn-outs/contingent consideration from prior business combinations : for e.g., an acquisition in the past that may have contingent payments to be taken into consideration or where receivables are securitised with a bank with recourse i.e., the target has an obligation to buy back delinquent receivables.

    Separation, structuring and integration issues :

    Typically, these issues are relevant for a strategic investor
    engaged in a similar line of activity. The FDD exercise would focus on
    identifying areas that may result in changes in the cost structure post
    transaction, requirement of additional infrastructure to be created by the
    client or potential utilisation of the existing infrastructure of the client or
    additional cost of integration.

    The areas that may be covered from a financial viewpoint
    would typically cover :

    • Identification of broad synergies : due diligence process should identify different kinds of synergies, and then an estimate of their potential value, likelihood, time and cost to achieve the synergies.

    • Accounting policy conformity : extent of differences between the accounting policies of the buyer and the seller and its impact post the transaction. This assumes significant importance particularly in the case of a transaction where the buyer and the seller are from different countries — foreign buyer following a local GAAP — IFRS, USGAAP, etc. and the Indian seller following Indian GAAP. The differences in accounting may have a significant impact on the reported profitability/value of assets post the transaction. This may also create significant challenges in upgrading the existing systems and procedures of the target to be able to support the reporting requirements of the buyer.

    • Transition services agreement : the target may have dependencies on the parent entity (the seller) and would thus require an agreement for continuity in the availability of goods or services in future (utilisation of common utilities, distribution network, etc.).

    •    Stand-alone considerations (impact of economies of scale, support functions) : it is essential to understand the dependencies on the parent entity and enter into the transition services agreement as mentioned above. However, it is also important to understand the impact on costs on a go-forward basis considering potential stand-alone operations.


    Other matters :

    During an FDD exercise, apart from the aforesaid broad areas that are directly linked to accounting matters, there are other aspects relating to the business that may have an impact on the financial position of the business and are thus important to consider during an FDD exercise. These are discussed below.

    Related-party transactions :

    Related-party transactions could have a significant impact on the reported historical earnings/margins of the business. Further, these transactions may also create significant dependencies and have a material impact on the continuity of the operations on the business. In such situations, it is important to identify the nature of transactions, the level of existing charges recovered from the target business, the availability of such services/facilities in future and the charges thereof. The arrangements that would need to be agreed during the transition period should be identified and provided for in the transaction documents. Further, any impact on the valuation model would also need to be considered for any revisions in the current costs.

    Generally, ‘related parties’ are defined by law and the transactions are required to be reported in the financial statements. However, it is important to identify the related parties that are not covered by the definition as per law, but that are de facto related parties in common business parlance. This identification is generally achieved based on discussions with the management of the target and analysis of the key transactions in respect of purchase and sales relating to the terms and conditions.

    Key aspects while reviewing related party transactions would involve an assessment of :

    •    Financial appropriateness of transactions within family-run businesses (arm’s-length pricing);

    •    Level of dependency of the target operating within a ‘group’ (assets used by the target entity but that are actually owned by a related party; e.g., office premises, the IT infrastructure or even the title to the corporate/product brand);

    •    Extent of sharing of resources and the allocation of common costs;

    •    Details of financing arrangements with related parties;

    •    Arrangements that are based on oral under-standings and/or are on a ‘no-cost’ basis.

    Human resources :
    Analysis of human resources is a multifaceted task and is generally covered by the legal due diligence, HR due diligence with defined inputs from the FDD exercise. The key focus areas of the FDD exercise in relation to human resource matters are to establish the total cost to the company (CTC) of all human resources, to assess the extent of accumulated unprovided/unfunded for liabilities in relation to employee benefits and to also understand the level of current charge of such costs and any underprovisioning thereof.

    Identification of the total employee strength and total CTC of the target company may become an issue where there is a high level of contracted employees (like in the media advertising sector) or when there is high level of casual labour that is ‘permanently temporary’ !

    In certain instances such as relocation of facilities post acquisition, the analysis may need to be extended to understand the implication of severance of employees not willing to transfer to the proposed new location and also additional facilities/ benefits that may need to be incurred to ensure transfer of necessary employees to the new location besides addressing the issues relating to availability of skilled resources in the new location.

    It is important to analyse the movements in the level of staff in the recent period with specific emphasis on understanding if there have been attrition in respect of key staff. Particularly, in a distress situation, the current staff may not be adequate and may not represent the true requirement for the business and would need to be replenished. The costs relating to such optimum level of requirements of the staff would need to be assessed and considered in the valuation model.

    In case of a strategic acquisition, matters relating to integrating the two businesses assume importance. The compensation levels and structure may be significantly different across the buyer and the seller and may have material implications for the buyer post acquisition. Thus a careful analysis is required in relation to the current staff cost of the target and potential changes post the transaction.

    Conclusion :
    In today’s environment, as a key input during the decision-making process and also as a part of general corporate governance, financial due diligence is considered as a must. It is not just checking of facts and summarising them, but it is about evaluation, interpretation and communication that require a proficient understanding of the business and of the transaction besides exercising strong financial and accounting skills.

    Companies making acquisitions typically look for answers to four basic questions :

    •    What is being acquired ? (customers, competition, costs, capabilities)

    •    What is the target’s stand-alone value ?

    •    Where are the synergies and skeletons ?

    •    What is the walk-away price ?

    It is vital that the FDD team remembers the above and exercises a degree of prudence and professional skepticism when carrying out the assignment — deal making is glamorous, due diligence is not. The FDD team may focus on negative information and on identifying the risks and problems surrounding the transaction, but as a professional service provider, the FDD team must devise solutions to problems or mechanisms to reduce or manage the risks involved in the transaction. For every man-made problem there is a man-made solution — the skill is to find it !

    LEGAL DUE DILIGENCE IN M&A TRANSACTION

    M

    Any responsible management will
    require a comprehensive assessment of the possible legal risks related to the
    corporate status, assets, contracts, securities, intellectual property, etc. of
    the target company concerned before concluding any merger and acquisition
    (‘M&A’) deal. Therefore, the process of legal due diligence assumes great
    importance in a M&A transaction.

    Meaning :

    The expression ‘due diligence’
    in a M&A transaction is used to refer to sort of an audit of a company’s legal,
    financial, environmental and business affairs, and includes investigations into
    the acquisition of the assets, risk analysis and general inquiries about the
    company prior to entering into a contract. This process is undertaken by the
    buyer before investing in a company, to ensure that the seller and the target
    company have good title to assets proposed to be bought and also to know the
    extent of the liabilities it will assume. Therefore, this data gathering process
    forms an integral and critical part of the M&A process as it provides
    information about the target’s business that enables the buyer to decide whether
    the proposed acquisition represents a sound commercial investment.

    Purpose :

    Typically in an acquisition, the
    purpose of legal due diligence is for the acquirer to check :


    (i) the value of the assets
    the seller is proposing to sell,

    (ii) that the seller has
    good title to the assets/shares free from all encumbrances,

    (iii) that there are no
    liabilities or risks that will reduce the value or use of the assets,
    i.e.,
    no third party has any right to use the assets,

    (iv) applicable labour laws
    and service contracts, etc.; and

    (v) that there are no
    existing or potential undisclosed liabilities that may adversely affect the
    business of the target company and also evaluate disclosed liabilities.


    The due diligence process helps
    the buyer to properly evaluate the target company by investigating items that
    either validate the offered price or items that diminish the company’s value and
    its purchase price. The buyer may seek contractual protection from the seller in
    the form of representations and warranties, but in practice, the protection
    offered may be limited by disclosure and other contractual provisions. The
    seller is required to disclose all relevant information relating to the target
    to the buyer and often finds himself in a conflicting situation. On the one
    hand, the seller wants to provide all relevant information to the buyer so as to
    make the buyer comfortable with the seller’s offered price and on the other
    hand, the seller does not want to reveal unnecessary information to the buyer,
    for fear that should the deal not consummate, the prospective buyer may obtain
    valuable commercial information and use to compete unfairly with the seller. In
    the event of buyer’s breach, seller’s right to sue for damages and injunctive
    relief may not be adequate protection or remedy, as such damages for breach may
    be difficult to quantify and to enforce. Some prudent sellers require the buyer
    and its advisers to enter into a confidentiality agreement.

    Scope :

    The scope of due diligence
    review will depend on the purpose and nature of M&A transactions. For example,
    acquisition of a company will demand extensive areas of inquiry than the
    investigation made by a potential joint venture partner on the other joint
    venture partners or inquiry made by a purchaser of shares in a company. The
    extent of due diligence review is also likely to be governed by factors such as
    available time, cost, the need to get the transaction done and the seller’s
    sensitivity about the exercise.

    In a due diligence process,
    risks are identified and are borne by one or both parties and the parties will
    negotiate the risks and the bargaining between the seller and the buyer will
    relate to apportionment of the risks between them. The seller may give
    warranties and indemnities with respect to risks that are identified, but more
    often the seller is not aware of its problems until the buyer discovers it
    during the due diligence process. However, representations, warranties and
    indemnities from a seller covering a particular risk is not an adequate
    substitute for carrying out the due diligence, because :


    (i) warranties and
    indemnities survive only for a few years by operation of law and contract,

    (ii) warranties are often
    qualified as to the materiality or the warrantor’s best knowledge,

    (iii) indemnity claim have a
    de minimis limit,

    (iv) there is a time limit
    in which the claim must be made usually within two to three years after
    closing,

    (v) sellers are more
    cooperative prior to the closing as they need to close the transaction, but
    are reluctant to address even the most valid warranty claims post closing,
    and

    (vi) by the time the
    warranty claim is made, the warrantor may not be in existence or may not be
    in a position to meet the claims.


    The information obtained in the
    due diligence review will place the buyer in a better position to assess the
    risks and advantages of his investment and enable him to appropriately
    renegotiate the terms of the acquisition. Therefore, a buyer not undertaking due
    diligence would lose the opportunity to obtain more favourable terms of
    purchase.

    It must be noted that every due
    diligence investigation depends on the quantity of data supplied by the seller.
    The data may be sent to the buyer and its due diligence team to analyse at it
    own offices or the buyer’s due diligence team is sent to the target’s office
    where it is given access to the data room. It is necessary for the buyer to
    support the data collection by securing representation, warranties an indemnity
    from the seller, wherever possible, on those issues that are impossible for the
    buyer to check and verify.The buyer usually requires that the seller warrants that the information supplied by the seller to the buyer’s due diligence team is complete and accurate. The seller more often would not war-rant those matters that would be known to the buyer during the course of due diligence process. In a situation where the due diligence exercise is limited, the buyer usually investigates key issues and may take the following precautionary steps to protect itself, such as:

        i) secure appropriate representations, warranties and indemnities;

        ii) consider negotiating a retention of the purchase price to cover potential claims;

        iii) propose a price adjustment, if required;

        iv) require compliance of certain conditions as a condition precedent to close of transaction, for example, obtaining of consents to the change of control from lender, etc.

    Team conducting due diligence:

    The legal due diligence team of a law firm usually consists of a partner, a senior associate, associates and paralegals (number of associates and para-legals will depend on the volume of documents to be reviewed). The senior associate is generally responsible for preparing the due diligence report for the client. The partner will be responsible for supervising the due diligence report and negotiating the acquisition agreements. The legal team prepares the legal due diligence questionnaire/ checklist and same is forwarded to the buyer’s personnel who after reviewing it will forward it to the seller. The legal team is constantly in touch with the buyer’s personnel to discuss issues arising out the due diligence review as the buyer’s personnel is the only person who will be able to make effective judgments as to the commercial importance and potential risk brought to light by the information revealed in the due diligence process.

    Areas of legal due diligence:

    The legal due diligence exercise will generally cover all of the areas listed below. This list is usually indicative and not conclusive and is tailored according to such factors as to whether the transaction is an asset purchase or share purchase and will also depend on the target’s industrial sector and size of the transaction:

        i) Secretarial

        ii) Real Estate

        iii) Intellectual Property

        iv) Litigation

        v) Insurance

        vi) Licences

        vii) Employees

        viii) Loans/Debts

        ix) Material Contracts

        x) Investments

        xi) Environmental

        xii) Competition

        xiii) Other Laws

    Gist of what the due diligence team investigates under the following heads are given below?:

    Secretarial:

    The investigation of corporate secretarial focus on the incorporation particulars, memorandum of association containing details about its objects, paid up capital, authorised capital, the number of shares issued, and the articles of association of the target containing provisions as to the directors, restrictions on shares, if any, shareholding pattern, etc. Under corporate secretarial, the register of members and directors and the minutes of meetings of the target are examined as well. Every company under the provisions of the Companies Act, 1956 is liable to maintain a register of members, register of charges and a register of directors to record and maintain minutes of all meetings of shareholders and of the board of directors held in the course of transacting business of the company. The target company is required to file records pertaining to their balance sheet and profit & loss account, annual return, consent of persons to act as directors, in case of increase of share capital/members, registration of resolution, creation/modification of charges, return of allotment, share transfer form, etc. with the registrar of companies. The due diligence team reviews all filings made with the registrar of companies. In case a company commits default in maintaining the said registers, or do not file their records with the registrar of companies in time, penal action may be initiated against the target company. The due diligence team besides examining compliance under the general provisions of the Companies Act, 1956, also gives particular attention to review compliances with provisions requiring government sanction.

    Real Estate:

    Investigation of real estate should delineate the immovable property held by the target, to whether it is leased, licensed or owned. If it is an owned property, the title of the target to such property must be ascertained. The due diligence team examines covenants attached to the transfer deed which may prohibit certain activities or may reserve easement rights and also assesses if there is a situation where the target may not have fully paid up the consideration or certain installments may be pending. In some cases, the target may not have obtained final deed of conveyance/sale deed in respect of the owned immovable property and there could also be outstanding dues pertaining to such property, namely, property tax, electricity and water charges, all of which needs to be checked. In case of leased and licensed property, one must check its capability to transfer the said property.

    Intellectual property:

    As regards the intellectual property, such as patents, designs, softwares, trade marks, careful assessment is required to ascertain whether they are owned and/or licensed by the target company and/ or licensed to the target company and whether they are registered or unregistered and whether they are in compliance with the relevant laws. The due diligence team examines whether there are any challenges, disputes or infringements of any registered and unregistered intellectual property rights licensed or owned by the target company. The due diligence team will also review pending applications related to intellectual property.

    Litigation:

    The due diligence team examines significant details of any disputes by or against the target company. Buyers may set a threshold in monetary terms to determine those litigation matters to be reviewed (for example, the buyer may not be interested in any claims for outstanding amounts from debtors below a certain figure). The diligence team may assess the contingent liability that the target may incur and examine the likely impact on the business of the target and details of any judgments given against the target and its assets as a result of litigation.

    Insurance:

    The investigation of documents relating to insurance would involve assessing the significant details of the insurance arrangements for the target company, such as whether there are any circumstances likely to give rise to a claim under insurance policies for the target company, whether insurance obtained by the target is valid, or whether the renewal of the policy is refused or premiums increased, whether there are any unusual terms in the insurance policies, and whether the target’s assets have been fully insured.

    Licences:

    The due diligence team must assess whether the licences or consents necessary to the operation of the target’s business, have been obtained, are valid and whether they are capable of being transferred/assigned to the buyer.

    Employees:

    With respect to employees and consultants of the target company, due diligence review would involve examination of service/employment contracts, letters of appointments, the executive and non-executive directors, consultants, key employees and managers have signed with the target company and the significant terms of those letters of appointments and contracts such as remuneration provisions, notice period for termination, any special payments on termination, term of contracts, absence of provisions on confidentiality, any restrictions during employment, restrictive covenants post-employment and confidentiality clause, etc.

    The due diligence team inquires if there are any employees who have terminated or intend to terminate their employment in the period leading up to the transaction and examines the employee benefits such as share option schemes, bonus schemes, employee provident fund, gratuity, retirement benefits, etc. Investigation would also identify whether there are any trade unions / associations representing the personnel of the target company. The due diligence team makes inquiries about payment obligations to employees, whether relevant labour legislation has been complied with, whether there has been any strikes or litigation with respect to trade unions and employees or if there are any anticipated, industrial disputes or employment related litigation, involving the target company.


    Loans:

    Investigation with respect to loans would involve assessment of loans given by the target company to third parties and other members of the target group, whether there are any pending instalments or restrictive covenant in the loan documents that requires intimation to the lender in case of change in constitution of the target or whether the liability under the loan documents can be transferred to the buyer. The due diligence team also inquires if the seller has given any guarantees or indemnities in respect of the target and whether the target has provided any guarantees or indemnities for any other third party.

    Material Contracts:

    Evaluation of material contracts would include review of commercial agreements to which the target is party for example, any agency agreements, distribution agreements, share purchase agreements, licensing agreements and supply or purchase of goods agreements, hire-purchase agreements, etc. The due diligence team draws attention of the buyer to the relevant provisions in such agreements, such as obligations of the parties, termination provisions and effect of termination, change of control provisions, non-assignment provisions, representations and warranties, indemnities and guarantees, any other restrictive covenants.

    Investments:

    The due diligence team makes inquiries regarding any investments made by the target, including shares held in other companies, or fixed deposits or purchase of any other kind of instruments.

    Environmental:

    Environmental due diligence may be required in case of acquisition of a company which is a manufacturing company, or whose assets include land used for industrial processes. Environmental due diligence is conducted by lawyers or technical personnel who are experts in the field of environment. The environment due diligence team investigates potential responsibility for any clean-up and liability in relation to environmental damage. The investigation may range from a brief site visit to a more detailed survey involving detailed sampling of soil and ground water.

    Competition:

    The competition law is at a nascent stage in India, but the lawyer engaging in the diligence exercise is required to bear in mind the general competition law principles while reviewing the data of the target company. The due diligence team would need to seek information from the sellers to assess anti-competitive behavioural risks. Competition issues may have an effect on the acquisition value of the business or target, or may have an impact on the timelines for an M&A transaction. The analysis on competition issues is undertaken in consultation with lawyers specialising in competition law.

    Other laws:

    In case the target company is listed in any of the stock exchanges, the due diligence team would review all compliances the listed company is required to make under the Securities and Exchange Board of India Act, 1992, the Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 and other applicable laws.

    Legal due diligence report:

    The legal due diligence report is prepared by the buyer’s lawyers and addressed to the client-buyer, pursuant to the due diligence process of reviewing documents provided by the seller. The client may request for detailed form of report or just an executive summary summarising all the key findings of the legal due diligence review. The key findings in the executive summary will enable the buyer to consider issues for negotiations with the seller and help in deciding whether or not to proceed with the transaction. The description of key issues would include the change of control provisions in material contracts, prohibitions on assignment in material contracts, expiration of critical agreements, licences and registrations necessary for the operation of the target’s business, high-value on-going litigation matters, etc. Detailed reporting would include summary of all the documents reviewed in all areas of law.

    Discounted Cash Flow

    1 Introduction

    Discounted Cash Flow (DCF) is a widely used method in the value analysis of any business. The value of an asset is the present value of expected cash flows from an asset. In this context, all the valuation methods including Net Asset Value (NAV),Profit Earning Capacity Value (PECV) and market price endeavour to determine the economic value of an asset but by using different approaches.

    The relevance of Net Asset Value (NAV) derived from accounting books continues to diminish as self-generated intangible assets, which are key value drivers of modern corporations, are not recorded under accounting conventions. In PECV, profitability, sales and other relevant multiples derived from the market price of a comparable business is used as the metrics to arrive at the value of the subject business. It is assumed that market participants have paid for the expected future cash flows (FCF) from the asset when price under free market conditions is considered as indicative of value.

    Though DCF is the application of the Net Present Value (NPV) rule, which in essence could be reduced to two variables – discount rate and cash flows, the application of DCF could be challenging as cash flows are impacted by several variables and the appropriate discounting rate is always a matter of debate. Several adjustments are also required to derive a finely calibrated value estimate. This article aims to provide an overview of the application of the DCF method in a practical context and the underlying theoretical concepts.

    Description

    The DCF method values a business based on the projected cash flows the subject business is expected to generate over a given period of time. The expected cash flows are discounted at an appropriate discount rate to determine its present value and thus the time value of money is provided for. A business is assumed to have a perpetual existence and DCF value is the summation of the present values of the cash flows expected in the projected horizon and estimated for perpetuity beyond the horizon.

    Future cash flow (FCF) projections are the basic requirement for application of DCF. FCF usually forms part of the projected financial statements or may be derived from the projected income statements and the balance sheets. The FCF could be at the firm level available to the financiers of the business (both debt [D] and equity [E]) or to the equity holders. Generally the FCF to the Firm (FCFF), which represent business related cash flows available for distribution to both the owners (equity holders) of and the lenders to the business, is used in DCF . FCFF is equal to Profit before Interest, Tax, Depreciation and Amortisation (PBITDA) less Capital Expenditure (Capex), Taxes and adjustment for working capital changes. From the foregoing, it is evident that the FCFF is not impacted by the financing pattern of the enterprise. Conceptually, therefore, the value outcomes should not change whether the FCFF is used or Free Cash flow to equity (FCFE) is used.

    Projections

    1. The valuation estimate which is the output of a DCF model is only as good as the projections, which are built on subjective assumptions both at the macro level concerning the overall economy and business environment and at the micro level specific to the enterprise. In other words, integrity of the valuation output is largely determined by the thoroughness of the projections and its underlying assumptions. Projections review, therefore, entails a through understanding of the overall economy and the market in which the subject enterprise operates.

    Common size statements, ratio analysis, peer group comparisons are analytical techniques employed in projections review. Inflationary expectations, currency movements, tariff levels are among the key macro assumptions. Business specific assumptions include pricing policy, salary levels and capital expenditure, which need to be consistent with the overall macro trends that are being projected. For example, it may not be realistic to assume a commodity would fetch prices higher than ruling market prices or to assume that raw material can be procured at lower than ruling market prices. In fact, it is likely that the prices may be influenced by the entry of other competitors prompting the incumbents to counter competition by reducing prices and influence the overall market.

    At the micro level specific to the enterprise, working capital assumptions such as number of days of receivables and payables, inventories, trade advances and deposits will need to be estimated. Reasonableness of capex estimate may be ascertained through quotations/ orders placed for machinery and equipment. In this connection, it must be noted that maintenance capex should also be provided for in the projections. However, interest cost, if any, capitalized for accounting purposes is not be considered as capex for determining the FCFF.

    Actual tax outflow must also to be projected with reference to the tax laws. Tax deduction on account of interest is to be ignored for computing the FCFF as the tax benefit on interest cost is captured in the discounting rate formula. Though the future FCF is derived from the accounting statements, it is the timing of the cash flows that is important and not the accounting distinction between revenue and balance sheet items. To illustrate- accounting of deferred tax does not impact cash flows but the actual outflow on payment of tax will affect the same.

    2 A business entity under ordinary circumstances is expected to have a perpetual existence. But, projections are usually for a finite period. In a DCF model, the estimate of cash flows beyond the horizon is based on the cash flows generated in the last year of the horizon after appropriate adjustments. In order to fit the cash flow projections in a DCF model, the projections need to be at least up to the year in which the business is expected to achieve stable cash flows as the cash flows for perpetuity are based on the cash flows of the last year of the horizon after suitable adjustments. Conceptually the length of the forecast period should not impact value outcome.

    It is important to note that it is not possible to forecast the behaviour variables with certainty and projected numbers may be considered as the outcome derived from various possibilities and the probability of their occurrence. In this context, a sensitivity analysis to assess the impact on cash flows by changes in the behaviour of variables is a necessary part of a value analysis exercise.

    Theoretical Concepts

    There are various theoretical concepts underlying the application of the DCF method. These are explained below:

    Discount rate is the return expected by investors after taking into consideration the risk associated with the business. The investor raises return expectations when there appears to be an increase in risk.

    Measurement of risk is at the heart of finance and we rely on theoretical insights and certain statistical concepts to arrive at the discount rate. In 1952, Harry Markowitz formulated the Portfolio Theory in a paper entitled “Portfolio Selection” wherein the principle of creation of the frontier of invest-ment portfolios is such that each of them had the highest expected return, given the level of risk that was set out and thus gave formal expression to the intuitive idea that diversification reduces risk. In Markwitz’s formula, Standard deviation (s) of the return on the security is considered as the risk. An investor is concerned with the risk of the portfolio which is the variance (s2) of the portfolio. A well diversified portfolio would encompass all securities in the market and would react to the general market movement and market risk.

    Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM) is a theory about pricing assets in relation to the risks, which was independently formulated by John Lintner , Jan Mossin and William Sharpe in the 1960s. CAPM continues to be widely used although alternates such as Arbitrage Pricing Theory (APT) and Fama-French Three-Factor Model have been developed subsequently. Among other assumptions, CAPM assumes that all the investors employing Harry Markowitz theory are holding portfolios that are efficient and will maximize return at a given level of risk. An individual is concerned with the risk attached to the final portfolio and thus the risk of the individual asset will be assessed on the basis of the contribution to the variance of the portfolio.

    Beta (b), which is the measure of sensitivity of a security in relation to the market as a whole, is the measure of risk. The statistical formula for Beta of a particular security is b = sim / s m2 where sim is the co-variance between the return of the particular security and the market return and s m2 is the variance of the market return.

    Treasury bills/ government securities returns are assured and considered risk free thus assumed have a beta of 0. The aforementioned assumption is widely used although it is strictly not correct since only the nominal returns are assured while the real returns (inflation adjusted ) are not unless the security is inflation protected. An investor in a portfolio of well diversified stocks would require a premium for the market risk and this premium is the market risk premium.

    Market risk premium = Market returns ( rm ) – Return from treasury/ government securities (rf).

    A firm is exposed to business risk and financial risk. The value of a firm and business risk is dependent on its investment decisions and not by how the investments are funded. The theory that capital structure is irrelevant to the value of a firm is a proposition of Franco Modigliani and MH Miller. From a balance sheet perspective of an accountant, the value of the enterprise on the asset side is in-dependent of the ratios of debt and equity on the liability side. Leverage determines the financial risk. Cost of debt is lower than that of equity since debt holders claim ranks before that of equity holders. Increase in debt, however, increases the financial risk and thus the returns expectation of the equity holders (who are the residual claimants) would increase and the overall return expectations may not change. Equity holders have a limited liability and increase in debt may prompt the debt holder to demand a return closer to that of equity to cover the possibility of failure of debt repayment. In the real world, companies operating in sectors such as technology that have high degree of business risk and probability of failure do not have debt or have very low leverage so that the overall risk does not become unsustainable. In contrast utilities which have stable cash flows and thus lower business risks can afford to assume financial risk.

    Usually the estimate of beta of the business that is valued is derived from the beta of a comparable company listed on the exchange. The leverage of the comparable company may be different from the leverage the target company has or intends to have. Under the circumstances the observed beta is to be unlevered to derive the asset beta and re-levered based on the firm’s targeted debt equity ratio. While the business risk exposure is reflected in the asset beta the financial risk element is captured on re-levering the beta. Levered beta increases as the proportion of debt increases to reflect the risk of volatility in earnings available to equity holders after providing for interest. It is assumed in practice that debt has a beta of 0. The equation bL = ba (1+(1-t)(D/E)) can be used for levering and re-levering the beta (wherein bL is the levered beta observed in the market, ba is the asset beta (unlevered beta), t is the tax rate and the tax shield on interest payments, D is the market value of debt and E is the market equity value).

    Discount rate

    It is important to link the discount rate to the as-sumptions underlying the FCF projections and also the expectations of the investor class who are the claimants of the cash flow. Real cash flows without inflation are to be discounted by the rate without inflation, while nominal cash flows, which have inflationary impact, are discounted using nominal rates. FCFE is to be discounted by the return expec-tations of equity holders while FCFF is discounted by the Weighted Average Cost of Capital (WACC). The WACC represents the returns required by the investors of both debt and equity weighted for their relative funding in the entity. WACC is de-rived based on the principles set out in the earlier paragraph.

    WACC = Cost of equity (rE)* [E/ (D+E)] + Post tax cost of debt (rD)* [D / (E + D)]

    rE = (rf )+ b * (market risk premium)

    rD   = Interest rate on debt* ( 1- tax rate)

    The equity and debt ratios are based on the mar-ket values and not book values. In practice, book value of debt may be considered its market value if it can be retired with minimum cost or has been contracted recently or can be called on by the lender. Exceptions such as sales tax deferral loan (which does not carry interest) may need to be valued suitably. Equity value may need to be obtained by an iterative process because of the interdependence between cost of equity (due to leverage) and the resultant value.

    Thus, the WACC formula clearly illustrates the relationship between return expectations and assumption of risk. Risk that can be diversified away is not rewarded while non-diversifiable risk is compensated in the formula. The minimum re-turn, which is the risk free rate, and market risk are common to all companies. A Beta of 1 means the firm is as risky as the market or a well diver-sified portfolio. Beta of 1.5 means the firms return expectation is 50% more volatile than the market and thus the risk premium increases by 50% over the market risk premium. A firm’s beta of 0.5 would reduce the return expectation to 50% of the market risk premium as the firm is less volatile than the market and its addition to the portfolio reduces the volatility of the portfolio. The building blocks of discounting rate are very clearly visible in the WACC formula.

    The WACC formula also implies that unlisted shares, which do not have an exit mechanism that a listed security affords, may have a higher return expecta-tion from investors because of their lack of market-ability. similarly, in certain cases the project may not be complete and the asset beta of a completed project would not capture the project completion risk. The WACC may have to be appropriately adjusted up to compensate for the aforementioned factors.

    The formula for discounting factor to be applied for each period is 1/( 1+WACC)n where n is the year in which the cash flow occurs. In a business, cash flows are distributed through the year and do not occur as a lump sum at the year end. Therefore n is corrected for midyear (on an average).

    Perpetuity value

    A business is expected to have perpetual life though it is usual to have a financial projection for a limited time horizon. The value of business beyond the horizon is captured in the perpetuity value. Perpetuity value usually accounts for a large part of the business value and needs to be estimated with care.

    Usually the starting point for estimating the FCF

    for perpetuity is PBITDA in the terminal year of the horizon period. Capex/ incremental working capital requirement for perpetuity are to be linked to assumed growth and depreciation. In case full plant utilization has already been achieved in the horizon, growth is not possible without capex invest-ment. Tax is a major outflow and is to be modeled carefully. Tax depreciation benefit is not available unless there is capex. The depreciation benefit may be equated to the capex though the tax benefit is spread over a longer period and its present value is usually lower.

    Additional working capital requirement may be estimated by applying the growth percentage to the net working capital available at the end of the horizon. Year on year growth in cash flows for per-petuity is assumed after considering factors such as the competitive environment of the business, stage of growth of the overall economy, actual growth achieved and expected in the horizon etc. Typically companies in a mature economy grow at a lower rate as compared to entities in a developing economy. The cash flow is capitalized at the rate (WACC – g ) where g is the % growth assumed. The value is discounted for the present using the appropriate discount factor.


    Other adjustments

    The entity being valued may have non -operating assets on the valuation date, the income streams of which do not form part of the cash flows. The market value of such assets (net of taxes and expenses on realization ) is to be added to the business value. Treasury investments, land holdings (surplus) are examples of non- operating assets. Contingent li-abilities on the valuation date needs to be adjusted after considering the probability of materialisation and notional tax relief on the same. Arrears of divi-dend on cumulative preference shares not recoded in books are to be adjusted, if necessary.

    Merits and Limitations of DCF

    DCF explicitly uses forecast of cash flow genera-tion while other methods use proxies to get to the present value of cash flows. DCF unbundles key value drivers and the sources of risk with a great deal of clarity, thus facilitating value analysis and informed decision making much more effectively as compared to other methods. In an acquisition scenario, the synergy benefits and costs can be mapped in the model and its valuation implica-tions clearly understood through a DCF analysis. PECV, for example, captures the risk related return and growth in a single number. Given the forego-ing, DCF is indispensable as a tool to understand value drivers and facilitate value discovery from a corporate finance perspective. To value a finite life project, DCF may be the better alternate as multiples of comparable companies usually factor in perpetual existence.

    The various data parameters used in building the WACC appears objective. On a closer examination, however, each of the parameters is open to chal-lenge and interpretation. Beta estimate of a traded company varies with the time period which is used to obtain the estimate. Risk free rate is strictly not risk free and impacted by several factors. There are theoretical issues with market risk premium. The parameters based on historical data are used to discount future cash flows and there is no assurance that the future will be a repetition of the past (extensive theoretical literature giving the dimensions of the issues involved is outside the scope of this overview).

    In sum, DCF value is as good as the projections it is based on. Any bias in the projections would impact the value. The reasonableness of value and the projections necessarily needs to be tested with market prices of comparable companies. In case the value outcome under DCF is at significant variance with the value derived from market comparables, it would be necessary to inter alia reassess the reasonableness of the projections / market benchmarks applied to attempt to reconcile the values under both the approaches.

    Considering the high level of subjectivity, DCF is seldom used in isolation and market benchmarks are important sanity checks to assess the reasonableness of the value outcome as the fair value is defined as the “the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date”. Under various accounting standards, the projections being unobservable inputs are lower in the hierarchy as compared to market based inputs such as multiples. Thus DCF may have a limited application for pure value measurement required for financial reporting, statutory purposes.

    Practical application (in the Indian context)

    As already discussed application of CAPM in its pure form may not be very challenging particularly in the Indian context. Apart from subscription based data services, stock exchange websites (NSE, BSE) are rich sources of data an d qualitative information and are freely available. The return on 10 year Government of India security may be considered as the rf. A well diversified index (in India– BSE 100, NIFTY, Sensex) is considered as a proxy for the market. The return from the index may be used to derive an estimate of market risk premium. The beta estimate of a particular security (used as a comparable) can be derived from the historical data of the prices and the indices by applying the statistical formula. Betas of the shares that are part of the index are readily available on the websites of the exchanges. An illustrative DCF computation is set out in the annexure.

    Balance Sheet
    Position as at 1Jan 2010 INR
    Share capital 100.00
    Reserves and surplus 200.00
    Loans 400.00
    Total funds employed 700.00
    Fixed assets 400.00
    Investments ( treasury) 100.00
    Net current assets 200.00
    Total application of funds 700.00

    Notes:

    Fixed assets include land not used for business which has book value of INR 100 and market value of INR 300.

    The market value of Investments is INR 90 Excise duty claim of INR 25 is matter of legal dispute. Legal counsel has opined the probability of materialisation of the claim is ~ 25%.

    Income Statements INR
    Actual Projected
    Particulars for the year 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015
    ended 31 December
    Sales 500.00 550.00 600.00 650.00 700.00 750.00 800.00
    Investment Income 10.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00
    Less:
    Rawmaterials 200.00 220.00 240.00 260.00 280.00 300.00 320.00
    Employee costs 100.00 104.00 108.16 112.49 116.99 121.67 126.53
    Sales and administration 100.00 103.00 106.09 109.27 112.55 115.93 119.41
    Profit before Interest, 110.00 135.00 157.75 180.24 202.46 224.41 246.06
    Tax Depreciation and
    Amortisation( PBITDA)
    Depreciation 25.00 23.00 23.00 22.00 20.00 19.00 19.00
    Profit before Interest) 85.00 112.00 134.75 158.24 182.46 205.41 227.06
    and Tax (PBIT
    Interest 45.00 40.00 40.00 30.00 20.00 10.00 8.00
    Profit before Tax (PBT) 40.00 72.00 94.75 128.24 162.46 195.41 219.06
    Tax 14.00 25.20 33.16 44.88 56.86 68.39 76.67
    Profit after Tax (PAT) 26.00 46.80 61.59 83.36 105.60 127.01 142.39
    IDCF Computation
    Valuation Date : 1 Jan 2010 INR
    PBITDA 135.00 157.75 180.24 202.46 224.41 246.06
    Less
    Investment income 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00
    Operational EBITDA 123.00 145.75 168.24 190.46 212.41 234.06
    Taxes ( Refer Note 1) 35.00 42.96 51.18 59.66 67.69 75.27
    Capex 10.00 15.00 15.00 15.00 15.00 15.00
    Working capital requirements 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00
    FCFF 66.00 75.79 90.06 103.80 117.71 131.79
    Discounting Factor ( Note 2) 0.9395 0.8292 0.7318 0.6459 0.5701 0.5031
    Present Value of FCFF 62.00 62.84 65.91 67.05 67.11 66.31
    Perpetuity value INR Remarks
    PBITDA of terminal year 234.06
    Less Depreciation 20.00 equalised to  perpetuity capex
    PBIT 214.06
    Less : Taxes 74.92
    Add: Depreciation 20.00
    Less:
    Capex 20.00 based  on  requirements  conidering  growth,
    depreciation etc.
    Additional Working capital 5.44 2% ( growth rate)  of NWC at the end of horizon
    Net cash flow 133.70
    Add Growth in cash flow 2.67
    Cash flow for 2016 136.37
    Capitalised at ( WACC- g) 11.30%
    Capitalised value 1,206.64
    Discount rate 0.5031
    Perpetuity Value 607.12
    Valuation  Summary
    Particulars INR Remarks
    Present Value of free cashflows
    – Horizon period (upto 2015 ) 391.21
    – Perpetuity( 2016 and beyond) 607.12
    998.33
    Less:
    Contingent Liabililities 4.06 after adjusting for probability of materialisation
    and  net of taxes
    Business Value of Enterprise 994.27
    Add:
    Investments 90.00 at realisable value
    Land 230.00 net of tax on appreciation @35%
    Enterprise Value 1,314.27
    Borrowings 400.00
    Equity value 914.27

    .

    Business WACC Remarks
    Debt weightage 40.0% assuming book value equal to market value and
    debt is for funding business
    Equity weightage 60.0% based on equity value ( surplus assets and invest
    ments funded by equity )
    Cost of Debt 7.8% Post tax cost of debt after tax shield
    Cost of debt 12.00% Interest rate contracted with lenders
    Average Tax Rate 35.00%
    Cost of Equity 17.0%
    Risk Free Rate 7.87% Yield  on 10  year Government  of India
    Security
    Market Premium 7.00% Estimate based on surveys and market returns
    Beta 1.30 Unlevered and  relevered  beta;  asset  beta
    obtained from market price of comparable
    and index movement
    WACC 13.30%
    Discount rate to be used 13.30%
    Growth in  perpetuity assumed 2%
    Capex requirements 10 15 15 15 15 15
    Additional working captal 12 12 12 12 12 12
    requirements
    NWC position 200 212 224 236 248 260 272
    Taxes
    PBT 72.00 94.75 128.24 162.46 195.41 219.06
    Add: Interest 40.00 40.00 30.00 20.00 10.00 8.00
    Less : Investment Income 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00
    PBT 100.00 122.75 146.24 170.46 193.41 215.06
    Taxes 35% 35.00 42.96 51.18 59.66 67.69 75.27


    Suggested Reading / References:

    Damodaran on Valuation ( 2nd Edition) by Aswath Damodaran; Published by John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

    Principles of Corporate Finance (6th Edition) by Richard Brearley and Stewart C Myers; Published by Tata McGraw- Hill Publishing Company Limited.

    Valuation – Measuring and Managing the Value of Companies ( 4th Edition) by Tim Koeller, Mark Goedhart and David Wessels; Published by John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

    Net Assets Method of Valuation

    Background :

        There are many methods of valuation of shares or businesses. One of the commonly used approaches of valuation is Net Assets Approach. Before we look into the finer aspects of this method, it may be important to note that each method of valuation proceeds on different fundamental assumptions. The data which is used for valuation has to be carefully chosen. In current times, when you have lots of data available at a click of the mouse, one needs to obtain and analyse only the relevant data. It is observed that lots of time is wasted in reviewing irrelevant information and at the end, time at disposal to review the relevant data is limited. One more factor which has materially changed in last couple of years is the time available to complete the valuation. There are times when the urgency is self-created or artificial. Only in few cases the urgency is justified.

        Let us now look at some finer aspects of Net Assets Method.

        1. The Net Assets Method represents the value of a share with reference to the historical cost of the assets owned by the company and the attached liabilities on the valuation date. Such value represents the support value of a share of a going concern. It is usual to ignore the market value of the operating assets under this method.

        2. While the historical cost is adopted in respect of the assets that are to continue as a part of the going concern, it is necessary to adjust the market value of non-operating assets such as investments and any assets which are capable of being easily disposed of, without affecting the operations of the company.

        3. The value as per Net Assets Method can also be arrived at by considering the replacement cost or the realisable value of the assets owned by the entity. This value generally represents the amount, which the company can fetch, if the assets are sold.

        4. Under what situations Net Assets Method is adopted ?

        The method to be adopted for a particular valuation must be judiciously chosen. Net Assets Method may be adopted in the following cases :

    •      In case of start-up companies, where the commercial production has not yet started.

    •      In case of manufacturing companies, where fixed assets have greater relevance for earning revenues. It would also be appropriate to use Net Assets Method for valuation in case of companies operating in the industry, which is capital intensive and is relevant to revenues in an industry, where norms are related to the capital cost per unit.

    •      In case of companies where there is no reliable evidence of future profits due to significant fluctuations in the business or disruption of business.

    •      In case of companies, where there is an intention to liquidate it and to realise the assets and distribute the net proceeds.

        5. Methodology :

        The value as per Net Assets Method is arrived at as follows :

    •      Net Assets value represents equity value which is arrived at after reducing all external liabilities and preference shareholders’ claims, if any, from the aggregate value of all assets, as valued and stated in the balance sheet as on valuation date. It is very important that the valuer critically goes through the financial statements (Directors Report, Management Analysis and Discussions, Auditors Report, Accounts including notes). It is experienced that on review of all the above documents, chances of missing any important adjustments are very less.

    •      The value so arrived at is further adjusted for contingent liabilities, if any, as on valuation date and increase in realisable value of surplus assets and investments on a net of tax basis to arrive at the value as per Net Assets Method.

        6. Some issues and its treatment in valuation :

        The following are some issues which one has to deal with in arriving at the Net Assets Valuation :

            6.1 Contingent liabilities :

            The amount of contingent liabilities as disclosed in the financial statements of the entity or otherwise needs to be given due consideration. The management’s perception of such liability materialising may also be considered. It is observed that certain items of contingent liabilities may involve a very peculiar technical or legal issue. It is not uncommon in such situations to seek some expert’s view in the matter. The valuer should mention in his report the adjustments made based on opinion of the expert. When an impact of contingent liabilities is captured in the valuation, if the item is tax deductible, the amount should be considered after taking into account the tax impact. For example if contingent liability on account of excise duty liability is, say, Rs.100. If the valuer has taken probability of 50% for such liability, the amount to be reduced from Net Assets of the company should be Rs.33 [Rs.100 X 50% X (100% — 33.99%)]. If the claim is in arbitration and the award is likely to take a long time, it is usual to take present value of such liability.

            6.2 Investments :

            If the entity which is being valued is holding shares in other companies, the same needs to be valued and captured in the overall valuation. Investment in shares and securities, which are regularly traded in a stock exchange, may be valued on the basis of the prices quoted on the stock exchange. It is usual to take either 3 months or 6 months average if the holding is large. For small lots a single day market price may be used. It must, however, be seen that there is regular trading in those securities. An isolated transaction may lead to erroneous results.

            In case of quoted shares with isolated transactions and also in case of unquoted shares, if the amount is material, a secondary valuation of such shares may be necessary using accepted methodology of valuation.

            In case of investment in subsidiary company, net asset value of the subsidiary may be considered instead of the cost.

            The appreciation or diminution in the value of any investment needs to be taken after taking into account notional tax implications, as applicable.

    6.3 Surplus assets :

    There are many entities which are holding certain assets which are surplus in nature. They are not used for any operations of the entity. It could be a vacant flat, vacant land or a closed factory. It is generally observed that if such assets are disposed off, it will not affect the operations of the entity. The identification of surplus assets is an important task. Generally the valuer accepts management’s representation on the same. However it is always better to review the facts based on which a particular asset has been identified as surplus. In many cases it is observed that the assets identified as surplus were not surplus in nature. For example area vacant between two factory buildings was identified as surplus in one case. However it was not actually possible to dispose of that piece of land as it would have materially affected the operation of the plant. In such case it is not surplus asset.

    It is usual to take the market value of the surplus assets based on a report of the technical valuer. The appreciation or depreciation in the value of surplus assets adjusted for the tax liability on such appreciation or depreciation would be added/deducted from the Net Assets Value.

    6.4 Fixed assets :

    While valuing the Shares/Business of a Company, the valuer takes into consideration the last audited financial statements and works out the net asset value. Following factors needs consideration in respect of fixed assets :

    •  It has to be seen that book value is arrived at after charging adequate depreciation consistently. Any capital improvements in the past, which have been charged-off to revenue, should also be taken into account.

    •  In taking the value of plant and machinery, the factor of obsolescence due to technological improvements, changes in designs, etc., should be given due consideration. If due to technical improvements, the present machinery is found to be so outdated that it has to be discarded, then the value which the plant and machinery would fetch, if sold piece-meal, should alone be taken account of.

    •  At times, when a transaction is in the nature of transfer of asset from one entity to another, or when the intrinsic value of the assets is easily available, or when the projections of future profits cannot be made with reasonable accuracy or where there are losses or where the value of the entity is derived substantially from the value of its assets, the valuer can consider the intrinsic value of the underlying assets. For determining the intrinsic value of fixed assets, the valuers can place reliance on report from the approved Chartered Engineers or other approved valuers.

    6.5 Inventory and debtors :

    Due allowance should be made for any obsolete, unusable or unmarketable stocks held by the company. In case of debtors, bad debts and debts, which are doubtful of recovery need to be adjusted. If the valuation is carried after the Due Diligence Review, all adjustments arising on account of such review need to be captured in the valuation.

    6.7 Contingent assets :

    If the company has made escalation claims, insurance claims or other similar claims, then the possibility of their recovery should be carefully made, particularly having regard to the time frame in which they are likely to be recovered. The present value of such claims can be added to the valuation.

    6.8 Qualifications & Notes to Accounts :

    Qualifications in the Auditors Report and Notes to Accounts should also be given due consideration. If it calls for any adjustment, the same should be carried out while arriving at the Net Assets Value. Such items could be diminution in the value of long term investments not provided for, provision for gratuity and leave encashment not made, provision for doubtful debts not made, etc.
     
    6.9 Liquidation :

    Where the business of the company is being liquidated, its assets have to be valued as if they were individually sold and not on a going concern basis. In such cases, the total net realisable value will often be less than that on the basis of a going concern.

    Regard should also be had to the tax consequences of liquidation. If fixed assets are to be sold at a price in excess of cost, the capital gains tax should be taken into account.

    6.10 Brought forward losses :

    Brought forward tax losses of a business should be considered if the buyer of the business would be entitled to take benefit of set off of such losses. Generally there is a practice to share the benefit of tax losses between both the parties.

    6.11 Warrants :

    If the Company has issued warrants which are yet to be exercised, the valuer has to take a call considering the current fair value and the amount to be paid on warrant conversion. If the fair value is higher, the warrant holder is likely to exercise his right. In such cases, amount receivable on warrant is added to the Net Assets Value. To arrive at the per share value, the current number of shares as well as the additional shares on exercise of warrants is considered.

    Conclusion :

    In many cases, Net Assets Method may not be relevant particularly where human capital or intangible are main assets used for generating revenues. In such cases, the Maintainable Profit Basis or the Discounted Cash Flow Method may be adopted.

    For companies using tangible assets such as plant and machinery, building, etc, this method is relevant. Net Assets Method may sometimes be used as a backup to support the value arrived at as per other methods. In many cases, particularly valuation for mergers, Net Assets Method is used alongwith other methods but is given a lower weightage in arriving at final fair value. In many court cases where valuations were challenged, usage of Net Assets value as one of the methods of valuation was well accepted.

    Following is an illustration of Valuation of Company PQR Ltd. as per the Net Assets Method :

    Tax Due Diligence — Indirect Taxes

    M & A

    After reading the series of
    articles of ‘Financial and accounting due diligence’ and Tax due diligence —
    direct tax
    , readers would be clear about the circumstances under which due
    diligence exercise is performed and its objectives. In the context of mergers
    and acquisitions, due diligence is mandated either by a vendor who intends to
    divest stake in a particular business/unit or by the potential acquirer who
    intends to acquire the subject business/unit. The objective, in both the cases,
    is common i.e., to avoid any post-transaction unpleasant surprises.

    In terms of process of
    performing indirect tax due diligence, it is no different from the manner in
    which it has been discussed in the earlier articles on financial, accounting and
    direct tax due diligence. In fact, the process should be so integrally linked
    that it should appear seamless to the target and the client management.

    Need for indirect tax due
    diligence :

    As the words ‘indirect tax’
    suggest, these taxes are not a direct hit to the person who has the statutory
    obligation to pay these taxes since these are recoverable in nature. However,
    the indirect tax-related exposure, whether emerging from pending litigation or
    from a potential exposure identified during the course of due diligence, remains
    and/or travels with the subject-business.

    This is one of the prominent
    distinctions between direct tax and indirect tax i.e., the indirect
    tax-related risks in terms of statutory liabilities and obligations are largely
    associated with the business, irrespective of the manner in which the business
    changes the ownership; say, by slump-sale or by transfer of equity or by sale of
    merely the manufacturing unit or service centre or a particular branch, etc.
    Thus, unlike income-tax where generally the statutory obligations remain with
    the transferor entity, in the case of a business transfer, the indirect tax
    obligations travel with the business. Hence, identifying and analysing indirect
    tax obligations pertaining to the subject-business remain key focus areas as
    discussed below.

    Incidentally, it would be
    important to also define in the scope of work with the client as to which
    indirect taxes are being covered by the indirect tax diligence and which other
    taxes/duties are excluded, say, that are expected to be covered by the legal due
    diligence. Generally, custom duties, excise duties, sales tax, VAT and service
    tax are covered in an indirect tax due diligence and taxes such as stamp duties
    are picked up by the legal due diligence team.

    Key focus areas :

    One may broadly examine the
    indirect tax diligence through eight key focus areas viz. :

    1. Pending litigations and contingent liabilities :

        This is one of the most common and traditional method of commencing the tax due diligence work. Here, the issues involved initially need to be studied from source documents, say, notices, demand orders and appeal papers made available along with interaction with the management and/or their tax advisors. The next step is to undertake research based on legal provisions, notifications, clarifications and judicial precedents found relevant. This leads to the third and important step involving merit analysis of the issue involved after considering the contentions of both the parties to the dispute and the result of indigenous research work along with tax positions adopted by industry members. Copies of legal opinion obtained should be reviewed with developments subsequent to the date of the opinion.

        It is generally accepted that unlike tax advisors/advocates who are attending to the tax disputes, the diligence team does not have the luxury to take significant amount of time to analyse the issue. Needless to say, the expectations are always there for the diligence team to arrive at an independent and conclusive view on each of the issues involved. Hence, greater focus should be applied on providing ‘substance’ rather than ‘form’ in terms of detailed articulation of arguments of both sides before arriving at the view. For example, in media industry, specifically in production and distribution segment, one of the issues that is under litigation is VAT liability and the state in which such liability to pay VAT arises on transfer of distribution and various broadcasting rights in the content (say, film, television serial, event, etc.). Companies are known to take different positions, ranging from a conservative stand to execute the agreement in the state where the business of the media company resides and pay VAT as applicable in that state, to a more aggressive stand where the agreements are executed outside India or in any of the Indian states where VAT is not applicable or exempted.

        Mere merit analysis of the disputed issues does not complete the exercise. What helps in achieving completion is understanding the accounting treatment in the books/financial statements i.e., the extent to which the amount is paid, provided as liability or disclosed as contingent liability. Even in case of payment, it would be relevant to ascertain the extent to which the amount paid under protest is accounted as a ‘receivable’ or charged to revenue. In case of industry engaged in export of services, say, IT and ITES industries, typically companies account for service tax and excise duty paid on input services, input and capital goods as a receivable, though the time the Tax Department generally takes in accepting the company’s contention, processing the refund claim and granting a refund is such that the possibility of receiving refund in the near future appears remote.

        It is also important to note that the analysis should not be restricted to the disputed period. If the issue involved is ‘recurring’ in nature, the aggregate exposure needs to be quantified including the potential exposure for periods subsequent to the dispute if there is no change in the provision of law and adopted tax position. The two long-ranging disputes that come to mind are applicability of service tax and/or VAT on (i) construction and sale of residential/commercial premises, and (ii) licensing of software/copyrights. These issues are perennially being faced by the construction & real-estate and IT & media industries, respectively.


    2.    Observations in completed assessments and audits:

    Completed assessment orders and audit memos provide opportunity to observe the acceptance or otherwise of the critical tax positions taken by the company. Tax positions include exemptions, abatements, incentives, reliefs, set-off claims, etc. claimed the company.

    It may be noted that even though the assessments and/or audit memos finally do not result in any litigation, it is important to observe any disallowance or rejection of tax relief claimed which resulted into demand, which in turn have been accepted and paid by the company. These observations form the basis for analysing the tax positions in open assessments. At times, companies have been known to claim the benefit of inter-state sales at concessional tax rate against declarations in Form C, etc. in the return, but the collection and furnishing of these forms are not pursued aggressively until assessment (which generally takes after a period of three years or more) and results in some differential tax liability along with interest and penalty, when assessments are concluded. Hence, based on past trend of the company in completed assessments, the potential liability, if observed on this account, needs to be indicated.

    3.    Potential issues in open/unassessed periods:

    The best way to tap the open assessment periods is to peruse the tax returns and filings including VAT Audit reports. However, it is not practical to peruse all the tax returns, payments and filings done say on monthly basis for excise, VAT and service tax for each of the locations where the indirect tax registration has been obtained. This needs to be done judiciously on sample basis.

    The focus here should be applied on the tax claims and tax positions not yet tested in the assessments/audits. On a case-to-case basis, if the stake involved in adopted tax positions is significant, focussed interaction with management is desired to know the rationale and compliance to conditions for taking such positions. When found relevant, key customer contracts and/or vendor contracts may be perused on sample basis. This helps in gathering some comfort about tax positions adopted in the open assessment period which carries higher element of uncertain risk as compared to the risk in the matters already under litigation.

    4.    Positions vis-à-vis industry issues:

    At times, it would be difficult to argue that merely because many/most players in the industry have adopted the same practice, the tax position would be acceptable. However, one cannot afford to ignore this altogether. It is because, there have been instances in the past where mere clarifications to the provisions of law (which otherwise is deemed to have been effective with retrospective effect) have been articulated in the Departmental circular or clarification so as to implement prospectively by providing relief for the past in indirect manner. The one example I recollect here is about clarifications on service tax liability in the case of international roaming under various scenarios of inbound and outbound roaming which provided some relief to telecom operators for the positions taken in historical period. This has happened generally when the issue involved is an ‘industry issue’ and contended on bonafideness. Thus, providing information on industry positions provides different level of business comfort.

    5.    Tax incentives — eligibility, admissibility, fulfilment of terms, conditions & obligations and continuity:

    Tax incentives, specifically area-based tax incentives (say, available to manufacturing units in Uttaranchal, Himachal, Kutch, North Eastern States, etc. and/or to units in Special Economic Zone, Electronic Software/Hardware Technology Park and/ or to units in specified backward areas in States for VAT incentives, etc.) are subject to complying with specified terms and conditions. In this regard, it is important to gauge the continuity of tax incentives post transaction. This is because the quantum of unused tax incentives and its entitlement play a vital role in valuation of the transaction and hence its fate.

    When the transaction structure is known at the time of due diligence, it is appreciated if the things found critical for continuation of tax benefits post transaction are briefly but appropriately communicated along with major concerns and listing of broader compliance steps for continuation.

    6.    Tax balances — perusal of reconciliation statement:

    Understanding the quantum of tax balances accounted as ‘income’ (e.g., tax incentives/refunds), ‘expense’ (e.g., tax paid during audit observations), ‘assets’ (e.g., tax paid under protest and tax credit balance) and ‘liabilities’ (e.g., provision for periodical tax amount and for tax disputes) is important. It is because at the end of the due diligence exercise, one needs to identify the appropriateness of their accounting and the impact on profitability, net-worth and working capital.

    After seeking reconciliation of tax balances, attention here needs to be paid on the rationale/ justification for each of the items forming part of the reconciliation statement. Post analysis, the resultant adjustments in terms of computation of profitability, net-worth, working capital, etc. should be identified and reported. The illustrative list of such adjustments includes (i) service tax refund for export of services, VAT refund for export, export incentives like duty drawbacks, etc. though entitled, not actually claimed before the appropriate authorities and accounted as ‘income’ and ‘receivable’, should be highlighted (ii) VAT/CST, etc. for March payable in April not accounted as ‘expense’ and ‘liability’ in the accounts for financial year, should be highlighted.

    7.    Related-party transactions:

    Transactions with related party(ies) desire twofold attention i.e., (i) when the provision of law (say governing excise duty and VAT in some states), require transactions between related parties to be at fair market value, and (ii) when the provision of law is silent (say, service tax law or VAT in some states).

    In the first scenario, the potential exposure should be identified. While in the second case, it needs to be understood that if the proposed transaction is structured in such a way that the benefit of ‘related party’ may not continue post transaction (say, where only one of the related entities is proposed to be acquired and hence the concessional transaction value regime shall come to an end in commercial terms). In such situations, the consequential tax implications need to be identified, analysed and discussed.

    8.    Important compliance procedures:

    Verifying and reporting compliance matters is generally outside the work scope of due diligence as they generally do not give birth to any deal-breaker or significant valuation/risk issue. Besides, this requires greater amount of time and cost which always are constraints. However, understanding and providing broad flavour of tax compliance management (in terms of tax filings, tax payments, withholding tax on payment to works contract, etc.), tax team (in terms of qualification, level of competencies, etc.) and related systems (say, to undertake tax computations, to monitor collection of declaration forms, etc.) helps the client specifically in transactions envisaging change of management whether partially or completely.

    In this regard, the indirect tax team would be well advised to clearly state the ‘exclusions’ from the scope of work of the indirect tax diligence so that there are no gaps in client expectations. Normally exclusions from an indirect tax diligence are review of tax compliance/procedural matters, providing tax advisory/planning services, etc.

    Reporting:

    Reporting is very critical to the entire exercise. Without adequate and smart reporting, the due diligence exercise may prove futile. While discussing the key issues, it needs to be ensured that though the approach and substance should suggest advisory role, the form in which the report is articulated should in no way appear as advisory deliverable like tax memo or opinion. The reason is obvious; the primary intention is not to repair the potential issue but to understand the worth and implications of the issues correctly.

    For the foregoing reasons, the report is generally divided into three parts i.e.:

    (i)    Key issues (i.e., ‘must to know’ issues involving significant implications on the financial state-ments based on historical issue or from future perspective (say, continuity of tax incentives in special industrial areas, view on high-value litigation matters, etc.)

    (ii)    Other issues (involving non-key but ‘need to know’ issues) and

    (iii)    Informative issues (i.e., help in understanding overview of business from indirect tax perspective).

    It is important to note that when the key issues could be in the nature of potential deal-breakers, there is no formal or structured way to communicate them for the first time during the diligence exercise. It means, such deal-breakers must be communicated ‘as and when’ they are observed without waiting for due date.

    For each of the issues explained in the report, it must cover, inter alia, the exposure period, the quantum of exposure along with interest and mandatory penalty. When the penalty is not mandatory, a broad range should be indicated. Each issue needs to be analysed on merit by classifying risk as ‘probable’, ‘possible’ or ‘remote’ with agreed weightage for valuation adjustments, say for arriving normalised earnings, net-worth and/or working capital.

    Lastly, reporting the issues without mitigation a strategy may leave the client clueless. Hence, it is equally important to provide a risk mitigation strat-egy in terms of obtaining warranty/indemnity, or in making a valuation adjustment, or deferring a part of the consideration in escrow account, etc. till a more definitive resolution of the issues concerned.

    Conclusion:

    It may be said that though there may not be a standard error-proof approach for carrying out a relatively subjective exercise of due diligence under different circumstances, the foregoing should help practitioners in carrying out an indirect tax due diligence exercise in a more structured manner to bring out the value to the client along with building efficiency and superior risk management to the whole diligence process.

    A misperception at times amongst clients and their advisors is that indirect tax does not have the same flamboyance as a direct tax or a legal issue which then dangerously leads to a lack of adequate focus by the client on the unresolved indirect tax issues. We, indirect tax practitioners are well aware of the unending complexities of the indirect tax acts, rules, notifications and clarifications in our country and the multitude of judicial interpretations. And I humbly submit that a majority of my fellow direct and indirect tax practitioners would also acknowledge that more often than not, the potential tax liability arising from an indirect tax issue can be far more crippling than any other demand!

    It remains the responsibility of the indirect tax team to correct any such misperceptions of the client or his advisors about ‘indirect tax’ and to ensure that the client has a true and fair appreciation of the indirect tax issues in the proposed M&A transaction.

    Appeal by Income-tax Act, 1961

    LIGHT ELEMENTS

    Dear Pranabda (Finance
    Minister),

    Recently you tabled Direct
    Tax Code (popularly known as DTC which reminds me of DDT used for killing
    mosquitoes) in the Parliament in August, 2010 when inflation was raining cats
    and dogs outside. What a great achievement ! You’ve been the Finance Minister a
    number of times. Your predecessors (like P. Chidambaram, the most innovative
    Finance Minister we’ve ever had) and you have tinkered me, amended me,
    simplified (?) me by adding or deleting sections, sub-sections, clauses,
    sub-clauses, explanations, using all the alphabets and roman numbers available
    on earth and what not through the finance bills and ordinances one after
    another. Still you’re unhappy with me. I’ve been in service of the nation since
    1961, nearly 50 years. I could have celebrated my golden jubilee in 2011. But
    alas ! You’re trying to evict me from the Indian economy for no worthwhile
    reasons in sight. That’s what I hear from economists (excluding our Prime
    Minister Dr. Manmohan Singh), tax experts, chartered accountants,
    industrialists, even laymen, etc. Believe me, I have everything you want. But
    you’re deliberately ignoring it since you are a man of words. You want to leave
    a mark on the annals of Indian economy. So it’s nothing but a prestige issue. I
    wonder, is it not possible for you to achieve your avowed objective of
    simplification through me, though your predecessors and you’ve kept simplifying
    me for years together. Do you think with the introduction of my ‘step’ law, I
    mean DTC, everything will be simple and easy ? Had it been so, why did you
    revise the DTC before its birth ? My dear Pranabda, from my experience since
    1961, I can say that income-tax law in India can never be simple, it’ll continue
    to be complicated, be it me or DTC. Even you’ll agree with me, at least in
    private if not openly. Look, the term ‘simplification’ is very illusory, it is
    like a mirage. With the passage of time something that’s simple today becomes
    complicated tomorrow. Moreover, on the one hand you talk about simplification
    and on the other hand you introduce stringent anti-tax avoidance provisions to
    make the life of taxpayers miserable and at the mercy of tax authorities with
    powers to suspect (read as discretionary powers). Is it a way to simplify
    income-tax law ? In fact, I’ve been more abused by tax authorities than by
    taxpayers of this country.


    Regarding withdrawal of various exemptions — a number of exemptions have been
    phased out in the past. In fact, I am burdened with the number of redundant
    sections, sub-sections, clauses, sub-clauses, and explanations for years now. I
    didn’t utter a word.

    My
    dear Pranabda, eventually what you want is ‘tax’ on income. I heard that with
    the introduction of DTC, revenue will go down substantially due to changes in
    slabs in the initial years of DTC. Is it worth it ? When taxpayers are ready to
    pay, why are you losing this revenue ? Your political party is voted to power by
    ‘aam adami’ and not by taxpayers. You must be aware that your party needs
    official money for welfare schemes of the ‘aam adami’ to get re-elected and
    govern this country. I urge you to let me continue. You’re committing a blunder.
    People have already started criticising the DTC as my ‘clone’ or as old wine in
    a new bottle and what not. I feel very sad.

    So
    my dear Pranabda, I earnestly request you to let me continue to serve this
    country of millions. I’m capable of generating enough revenue for the
    government. I won’t spare any tax dodger, be it a politician of your party or
    opposition. You can make me as simple as you please. Give more discretionary
    powers to tax authorities so that they can directly withdraw tax from the
    taxpayer’s bank account apart from raids and surveys. I’m sure that I have
    enough power to deal with economic offenders. If you find me inadequate on this
    front, make me more stringent by introducing death penalty to economic
    offenders. I don’t mind. Introduce ‘daily advance tax’ like a piggy collection
    for corporate tax-payers, forget about MAT. Keep on reversing the decisions of
    the Supreme Court and lower courts shielding the taxpayers by amending me from
    time to time, I don’t mind.


    Lastly let me celebrate the golden jubilee of my existence – 2011.

    Jai Hind !

    Yours faithfully,

    Income-tax Act, 1961

    levitra

    Valuation — Market Approach

    New Page 6

    Oscar Wilde once described a cynic as “A man who knows the
    price of everything and the value of nothing”. He was probably describing those
    who believe in ‘survivor investing’ i.e., the theory of the value of an asset
    being irrelevant as long as there is a ‘bigger fool’ willing to buy the asset at
    a higher price.

    A postulate of sound investing is that an investor does not
    pay more for an asset than its worth. While this statement seems logical and
    obvious, it is forgotten and rediscovered at some time in every generation and
    in every market.

    Every asset, financial as well as real, has a value. The key
    to successfully investing in and managing these assets lies in understanding not
    only what the value is but also the sources of the value.

    Valuation is a process of determining a value. It’s a myth
    that the value is nothing but a price. Price paid and the value determined can
    sometimes be two ends of a pole. Valuation is subjective and may not provide any
    precise or accurate estimate of value. Minimal skills sets required to carry out
    a valuation include accounts and finance background, research and analytical
    abilities, technology, communication and common sense.

    Typically, there are three primary approaches to value the
    business in practice. These approaches make very different assumptions but they
    do share some common characteristics and can be classified as hereunder :

    1. Market approach :


    The market approach assumes that companies operating in the
    same industry will share similar characteristics and the company values will
    correlate to those characteristics. Therefore, a comparison of the subject
    company to similar companies whose financial information is publicly available
    may provide a reasonable basis to estimate the subject company’s value. There
    are three forms of the Market Approach — the Comparable Companies approach (‘CoCos’),
    the Comparable Transactions approach (‘CoTrans’) and the Market Price Method.
    Market Approach is typically used to provide a market cross-check to the
    conclusions reached under a theoretical Discounted Cash Flow approach.

    2. Income approach :


    The income approach recognises that the value of an
    investment is premised on the receipt of future economic benefits. These
    benefits can include earnings, cost savings, tax deductions and the proceeds
    from disposition. There are several different income approaches, including
    earnings capitalisation method (ECM), discounted cash flow (‘DCF’), and the
    excess earnings method (which is a hybrid of asset and income approaches). ECM
    considers company’s adjusted historical financial data for a single period,
    whereas DCF and excess earnings require data for multiple future periods.

    3. Cost approach :


    The cost approach considers reproduction or replacement cost
    as an indicator of value. The cost approach is based on the assumption that a
    prudent investor would pay no more for an asset than the amount for which he
    could replace or re-create it or an asset with similar utility. Historical costs
    are often used to estimate the current cost of replacing the entity valued. When
    using the cost approach to value a business enterprise, the equity value is
    calculated as the appraised fair market value of the individual assets that
    consists of the business less the fair market value of the liabilities that
    encumber those assets.

    Under a going-concern premise, the cost approach is normally
    best suited for use in valuing asset-intensive companies, such as investment or
    real estate holding companies, or companies with unstable or unpredictable
    earnings.

    Valuers generally use a combination of different approaches
    to arrive at the fair value of an asset. In this issue we will discuss some
    important aspects of the market approach.

    Important definitions :





    à Fair market value — fair market value means the amount at
    which an asset or property would change hands between, a willing seller and
    a willing buyer when neither is acting under compulsion and when both have
    knowledge of reasonable facts.



    à Enterprise value — market value of invested capital in the
    business which includes all types of stocks and interest-bearing debts or a
    measure of a business value calculated as market cap plus interest-bearing
    debt, minority interest and preferred shares, minus total cash and cash
    equivalents, non-operating assets and surplus assets.



    à Equity value — Equity value is the value of a company
    available to owners or equity shareholders.



    à Book value — Book value is the value at which an asset is
    carried on a balance sheet. In simple words, the book value is nothing but
    an net worth of a company.



    à Valuation multiple — Valuation multiple is computed by
    dividing the price of the company’s stock as of the valuation date by some
    relevant economic variable observed or calculated from the company’s
    financial statements.



    à EBITDA — Earnings before interest tax depreciation and
    amortisation



    à EBIT — Earnings before interest and tax



    à PAT — Profit after tax




    Market approach :

    In the real estate sector, recent sale of comparable homes in
    an area are used to establish the reasonable price range within which any home
    is likely to sell. Similarly, market comparables are used as guidelines to value
    a business, security or an intangible asset based on recent transactions in
    comparable businesses, securities or intangible assets.

    We will discuss in detail the following methods of valuation
    under the market approach :

        a. Comparable companies
        b. Comparable transactions
        c. Market price

    Comparable Company Method (CoCo) or Guideline Company Method :
    Under the comparable company method, valuation multiples are computed based on prices at which stocks of similar companies are traded in a public market. The valuation multiples thus computed will be applied to the subject company’s fundamental data to arrive at an estimate of value for the company.

    The value derived from CoCo method often represents a publicly traded equivalent value or freely traded value. In other words, it is a price at which the stock would be expected to trade if it were traded publicly. Thus, the value indication is appropriate for a marketable, minority ownership inter-est, using the premise of value in continued use, as a going-concern business. The method leads to fair market value, as it is a value at which an asset can be exchanged between willing buyer and willing seller with a full market knowledge and on an arm’s-length transaction.

    We will use an example of AB Television Limited (‘ABTV’) to demonstrate practical application of market approach. ABTV is a general and business news channel with :

        Revenues of INR 5,000 million;
        EBITDA of Loss. INR 2,000 million; and
        EBIT of Loss. INR 2,500 million.

    ABTV has around 6 news channels in its bouquet which includes 1 general English news channel, 1 general Hindi news channel, 1 English business news channel and 1 Hindi business news channel. It also has 2 regional language general news channels. It also has its general news Internet portal named www.abtv.com.

        Identification of comparable companies :

    Comparability of companies often becomes a central issue in litigated valuations. Companies can never be absolutely comparable to each other. The economics that drive the comparable companies should match those that drive the target company.

    In order to determine the comparability factors such as product-mix, geographies, size, stages of business, market positioning, operating or EBITDA margins, dividend history, trading volumes, management, etc. should be considered.

    Table 1 below shows list of broader comparables of ABTV.

    The current portfolio of ABTV constitutes only news channels — business and general. It also includes its Internet business. Based on the business of ABTV and the above selection criteria, we selected com-panies like Zee News Limited, IBN 18 Broadcast Limited, TV Today Network, Television 18 Limited. NDTV has recently announced that it has sold off its 3 entertainment channels NDTV Imagine, NDTV Lumiere, NDTV Showbiz to Turner International. The TTM revenues of NDTV include revenues from the general entertainment business and hence, due to major restructuring of the businesses we have excluded NDTV Limited from the list of comparables. Though we have ignored the multiple of NDTV, we have tried to corroborate news channels’ multiples with the multiple of NDTV Limited.

        Normalise the financial statements :

    Normalising the financial statements is essential to remove the impacts of non-recurring and non-operating income or expenses, accounting differences, etc. from the financials, to arrive at maintainable or sustainable earnings and margins, operating revenues, etc.

        Calculate multiples based on various financial parameters :

    Multiples may take many forms. The numerator may be based on equity or enterprise value and the denominator may be based on a variety of normalised financial performance matrices on pretax or after tax basis.

    If the numerator of a multiple is an equity value, then the denominator of the multiple should be an equity measure, such as PAT or net income or book value. Similarly, if it is enterprise value, then it should be operating parameter like operating revenue, EBIT-DA, EBIT, etc.

     

    Company

    Business

    Country of

    MCap

    Net
    worth

    TTM sales

    EBITDA

    Trading

     

     

    INR Millions

     

    operation

     

     

    margin

    %

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Zee News Ltd.

    General and business

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    news channels

    India

    12,420

    2,406

    5,801

    20%

    52%

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    IBN 18 Broadcast Ltd.

    News and general

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    entertainment
    channels

    India

    18,978

    2,787

    4,826

    -13%

    8%

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    NDTV Ltd.

    General and business

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    news channel and

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Internet

    India

    10,076

    2,614

    5,237

    -66%

    79%

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Sun TV Network Ltd.

    Regional entertainment

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    and news channels

    India

    124,165

    17,016

    12,790

    82%

    4%

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    TV Today Network

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Ltd.

    General news channels

    India

    6,533

    3,212

    2,545

    33%

    23%

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Zee Entertainment

    Regional and

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Enterprises Ltd.

    entertainment
    channels

    India

    96,749

    33,995

    20,611

    34%

    18%

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Television Eighteen

    News channels and

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    India Ltd.

    business news and

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Internet

    India

    11,570

    4,442

    4,853

    -17%

    81%

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    The time period used to calculate multiples is generally trailing twelve months (‘TTM’) or latest fiscal year. Sometimes the estimates of next year’s expected results also are considered.

    Generally, TTM multiples display the latest information and the current state of operations, however they may not be readily available and need to be computed by using interim financial statements. Latest fiscal year multiples are directly available, but would not reflect the current state of operations. Forward multiples give a forward looking valuation, however they may not be accurate as they are estimates.

    Valuation multiples computed from comparable company data for some time period (say, TTM), applied to the target company data for a different time period (say, last fiscal year) can result into consider-able distortions, especially if the industry conditions differ significantly between the time periods.

    Either avoid comparable companies with recent corporate actions like mergers, acquisitions, etc., or make the adjustments to time period to arrive at real value. This is to make like to like comparisons and avoid speculative effect due to corporate announcements.

    To calculate market capitalisation of the comparable companies, calculate 3 months’ or 6 months’ or 12 months’ volume-weighted average market price (‘VWAP’) to avoid daily fluctuations and speculative effect on the market prices.

    In case of ABTV we have selected TTM revenue and TTM EBITDA to arrive at the enterprise value of the company. Further, we have considered 6 months’ VWAP for arriving at market capitalisation for the comparable companies.
     

    Table 2 shows the range of multiples for ABTV Limited.

    Notes : Market Cap. is Market Capitalisation; MI = Minority Interest; EV means Enterprise Value; TTM EBITDA numbers are adjusted for non-operat-ing and non-recurring items; NA is Not Applicable.

        Select the type of multiple to be applied :

    Selecting the type of multiple requires significant judgment. Industry practices are good indicators of the type of multiple that can be selected. In case of companies that are mature and generate stable cash flows, one must consider using earnings multiples.

    In Table 2, we have not considered EBIT multiple or PAT multiple as most of the companies including ABTV Limited are making losses at EBITDA level. Ideally, EBITDA and EBIT multiple are best parameters to judge the business value. Hence, the key parameters for valuing ABTV Limited would be EV/Revenue. EV/EBITDA should also be ignored as EBITDA multiple is derived based on 2 companies’ parameters which may distort the valuation. To get the robust multiple, larger set of comparable should be adopted. But if the similarity of the businesses of the two companies is very similar, then one can consider even two companies as benchmark. In other words, more the disparity in the businesses of the comparable companies, the larger should be the group.

    Further, while valuing ABTV Limited, EBITDA multiple will have to be multiplied with EBITDA number of ABTV which is a negative number. Therefore, for the purpose of this example, we have only considered revenue multiple which is also in range of multiple of NDTV Limited.

        Selected comparable company multiple :

    The median multiple is generally selected because the median provides a better measure of central tendency than the mean. Outliers would have a higher distorting effect on the mean than the median. The selected multiple needs to reflect the relative strengths and weaknesses of the subject company relative to comparable companies. If the outlook of the subject company is lower in terms of risk and/or more in terms of growth, then a multiple which is higher than the median may be selected.

    In our illustration, the comparable companies are comparable in terms of risk and growth opportunities, as more or less all the companies are in business or general news channel except for IBN 18 broadcast which has various entertainment channels under its bouquet like MTV, Colours, Nick, and Vh1. It is also engaged in other businesses like film production, distribution of branded merchandise which though are in a start-up phase and are immaterial to its channel businesses. Therefore, if we remove it as an outlier, then median EV/Revenue is around 2.4x and average EV/Revenue is around 2.7x.

        Apply adjustments for non-operating as sets and liabilities :

    Excess cash and other non-operating assets need to be added and non-operating liabilities and inter-est-bearing debts should be subtracted from the enterprise value arrived at by applying the selected multiple to the financial performance matrices of the target company.

    For example, ABTV has cash and cash equivalent of INR 1,200 million and Debt + Minority interest of INR 9,125 million which needs to be adjusted to its enterprise value. Enterprise Value of ABTV = EV/Rev-enue x TTM Revenue.

    Types of multiples :

        Price to earnings multiple :

    Price to earnings (‘P/E’) multiple is calculated as follows :

    Current Market Price

    PE Multiple  = ————————————————

    Earnings per Share

    Earning power of a company is one of the key drivers of its valuation. P/E ratio is one of the most widely accepted valuation parameters. Net profit after taxes, post adjustments for extraordinary and non-recurring income should be used to calculate the P/E ratio. The ratio cannot be used for companies with negative earnings. The P/E ratio is significantly influenced by the accounting decisions of the company. The guideline companies should have similar financing structures to compare their P/E ratio.

        PEG ratio :

    PEG ratio is calculated as follows :

                                                          PE Ratio
    PEG ratio    =             _____________________________

                                               Expected Growth Rate

    Analysts compare PE ratios of a company with its growth rate to identify undervalued and overvalued stocks. PEG ratio of a firm must be compared with other firms operating within the same industry. A lower PEG ratio indicates undervaluation and a higher PEG ratio indicates overvaluation. The firm’s equity is considered fairly valued if PEG ratio reaches value of one. PEG ratio is useful to predict future growth of companies.

        Price to book value multiple :

    Price to book value multiple is calculated as follows :

                                                      Market price per share
    Price to book value =_______________________________________

                                                   Book value of equity per share

    The price to book (‘P/B’) multiple can be used for companies with negative earnings. The multiple is stable as the book value of a company does not change much from year to year. Book value of an asset is driven by the original price paid for the asset and accounting decisions of the company. As common sense would suggest that there is significant degree of correlation between return on equity and price to book value. Hence, while considering multiples of comparable companies also correlate the return on equities of the comparable companies and subject company.

    Book value multiple is used in traditional manufacturing companies that derive their value from assets in place and high capital expenditure. The multiple is useful to value finance, investment, insurance and banking firms that hold significant liquid assets. P/B ratio can also be used for firms that are going out of business. The multiple is generally not used for valuation of companies in service industries primarily, because the multiple does not capture the potential of identifiable and unidentifiable intangible assets.

        Revenue multiple :

    Revenue multiple is calculated as follows :
    Revenue Multiple = Enterprise Value/Revenue

    Revenue multiple is another widely accepted valuation ratio because of several factors. Firstly, growth rate is a fundamental driver of valuation, which begins with sales. Secondly, sales information is subject to less manipulation than any other financial parameter. Besides, sales information is easily available for all types of firms including troubled and very young firms. Thirdly, revenue multiple is less volatile than the earnings multiple, therefore it can be used in cases where there are large fluctuations in earnings. A drawback of this ratio is that it does not capture the difference in cost structures and capital struc-tures between different companies. Further, it can be one of the best parameters for the companies in growth phase, or when company has launched new products and has not broke even.

        Enterprise value to EBITDA/EBIT :

    EBITDA multiple is calculated as follows :

                                                            Enterprise Value
    EV/EBITDA or EBIT    =            _______________________

                                                             EBITDA or EBIT

    EBITDA or EBIT multiple is one of the best param-eters to analyse the business value of the company. Since EBITDA or EBIT are operating margins of the business they are best to use for any industry. EBIT-DA or EBIT multiple can be used for comparing firms with different degrees of leverage. For these rea-sons, this multiple is particularly useful for valuation of companies in almost all industry. It may not be useful when the companies are in the growth phas-es or haven’t broke even. Best time to use these multiple is when the industry or subject company are in stable phase or mature phase.

        Other multiples :

    Analysts use other valuation multiples such as sec-tor specific ratios, for example price per hit ratio is used to value startup website companies, price per subscriber is used for valuation of cable and telecom companies, price per megawatt is used to value power generation companies, EV per tone can be used for cement or steel industry, etc.

    Comparable Transaction Approach (‘Cotrans’) : One can derive indication of value from the price at which a company or an operating unit of a company has been sold or the price at which a significant in-terest in a company has changed hands. Such data is harder to find as compared to daily stock trading data. The steps followed by a valuer/analyst using the comparable transaction approach are similar to those of the comparable companies approach.

    The primary difference between CoCos method and CoTrans method is that in CoTrans method the transaction price is the basis of calculating the multiple, whereas in CoCos method basis is the current market price of similar companies. Transactions in the target company’s industry or similar industry are analysed over a period of 3 to 5 years depending upon availability of set of transactions and changes in the industry.

    This is because there are fewer transactions, and acquisition price multiples generally do not fluctuate a lot over time as compared to market price multiples. Characteristics of each transaction need to be analysed to decide which adjustments may be necessary in order to use the transaction price multiples. In case of ABTV we have considered the following as comparable transactions :

    Valuer/Analysts should take into account the follow-ing aspects while using the CoTrans method :

        Source of data :

    Generally, the availability of data for comparable transactions is comparatively scarce v. stock price data for comparable companies. Data on the acqui-sitions of private companies are not subject to any regulations and vary tremendously in scope and format. If the subject company itself has changed control in the last few years, the transaction may be an excellent source of valuation multiples.

     

    Date

    Target

     

    Bidder

    Deal

    Stake

    EV/

    EV/

    EV/

     

    P/E

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    value

    acquired

    Revenue

    EBITDA

    EGIT

     

     

     

     

    USD million

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    31st Dec. 2009

    NDTV imagine

     

    Turner

    81

    92%

    n.a.

    n.a.

    n.a.

     

    n.a.

     

     

     

     

     

    International

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    29th Oct. 2009

    Zee News Limited

     

    Zee Entertainment

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Enterprises Limited

    252

    N.A.

    3.8

    16.1

    N.A.

     

    N.A.

     

     

    22nd Dec. 2008

    Broadcast

     

    HDIL Infra

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Initiatives Limited

     

    Projects Pvt. Ltd.

    7

    N.A.

    2.6

    1.0

    1.0

     

    N.A.

     

     

    27th Oct. 2008

    UTV Software

     

    The Walt Disney

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Communications

     

    Ltd.

    302

    N.A.

    18.1

    103.5

    113.6

     

    37.4

     

     

     

    Ltd.

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    7th July 2008

    New Delhi

     

    Prannoy Roy,

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Television Limited

     

    Radhika Roy, RRPR

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Holdings Pvt. Ltd.

    140

    N.A.

    10.9

    96.6

    241.9

     

    N.A.

     

     

    28th Feb. 2007

    Udaya TV Private

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Limited

     

    Sun TV Network

    401

    N.A.

    19.7

    36.5

    N.A.

     

    71.6

     

     

    28th Feb. 2007

    Gemini TV Pvt. Ltd.

     

    Sun TV Network

    603

    N.A.

    15.8

    23.0

    N.A.

     

    59.8

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Average-All

     

     

    11.8

    46.1

    118.8

     

    56.3

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Median-All

     

     

    13.3

    29.8

    113.6

     

    59.8

     

     

     

     

    Average-post
    outliers

     

     

    11.8

    19.1

    1.0

     

    65.7

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Median-post outliers

     

     

    13.3

    19.5

    1.0

     

    65.7

     

     

     

    Average-recent
    (2009)

     

     

    3.2

    8.5

    1.0

     

    N.A.

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Median-recent (2009)

     

     

    3.2

    8.5

    1.0

     

    N.A.

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

    Several databases are also available such as Bloomberg, Merger Market, Capital IQ, etc., which provide information on transactions across different sectors and different geographic locations. We have selected comparable transactions for ABTV from Merger Market.

        Non-availability of data :

    In case of most transactions, financial data is not available. In case of acquisitions of privately held companies, the data with respect to purchase price, revenue or earnings measures of the target company, percentage stake acquired, etc. are usually not available in the public domain. Therefore, analysts need to use appropriate judgment in case of trans-actions where data is not available.

        Understanding the deal structure :

    One must understand the rationale of each comparable transaction. For example, one must understand if the transaction was a strategic investment or financial investment, percentage of stake sold in the transaction, whether the sale was a distress sale, etc. Typically, due to different purposes of investments, transaction rationale and synergy benefits, different control premiums and minority discounts are embedded in the transaction values. Differences between the comparable transactions and the contemplated subject transaction should be noted and adjusted appropriately in developing valuation multiples. Due to lack of information on such parameters it would be difficult to really analyse these aspects of transactions and hence, comes the judgment of the Valuer.

        Announcement versus closing date

    The announcement and the closing date of a trans-action can be months apart. There may be a difference between the indicated deal values on the two dates. Generally, the date used does not make a material difference to the valuation. Most multiples are developed based on announcement date. This gives an indication of what the buyer and seller originally intended to pay or receive for the company based on the information available at the time when the deal was originally analysed and negotiated.

        Rule of thumb :

    Some industries have rules of thumb about how com-panies are valued for transfer of controlling ownership interests. If such rules of thumb are widely disseminated and referenced in the industry then, they should be used. Generally, there is no credible evidence on how these rules of thumb are developed. They fail to differentiate operating characteristics of one company to another and do not consider differences in the terms of the transactions.

        Control premium :

    The value of a majority stake in a company is always more than the value of a minority stake, because the majority shareholder gets control of the financial and operating decisions of the company. Therefore, if a transaction considers the acquisition a majority stake, then the price includes a control premium. The market price considered in calculation of multiples in CoCos method does not take into account any control premium. Therefore analysts should adjust the transaction multiples to remove the effect of the control premium while valuing a minority stake in a company.

    Market Price Method :
    Under the market price method, an asset is valued based on the price at which it is traded in the open market. This method gives a reliable indication of the value of an asset as the market price reflects the value that a buyer is willing pay to a seller for an asset in the free market. In case of shares of a company that is listed on a stock exchange, one can consider the market price of the company based on the last six-month VWAP on the stock exchange where the company’s shares are most frequently traded. It may happen that the equity market may not reflect the fair value of a stock, as the equity prices on a stock exchange get influenced by the market sentiments. It is important for a valuer/analyst to consider these market sentiments while using the market price method. At times the valuation practitioner may choose to ignore this method of valuation if market price is not a fair reflection of the company’s underlying assets or profitability.

    Real Estate Act

    1. Introduction :

        1.1 In September 2009, the Ministry of Housing & Urban Poverty Alleviation, Government of India, introduced the draft of the Real Estate (Regulation of Development) Act (‘the Act’). It is expected that the Ministry would finalise this Act sooner than later. This article gives an overview of this all-important act for the real estate industry.

        1.2 The Act proposes to introduce a radical change in the real estate industry — for the first time a Real Estate Regulatory Authority would be constituted to regulate, control and promote planned and healthy development and construction, sale, transfer and management of residential properties. It aims to protect the public interest vis-à-vis real estate developers and also to facilitate the smooth and speedy construction and maintenance of residential properties. Thus, just as the capital markets have a regulator in the form of SEBI, the banking industry has RBI, the real estate sector would also have an authority. A reading of the Act shows that this is likely to be a State Act with each State having its own Regulator.

    2. RERA :

        2.1 A Real Estate Regulatory Authority (‘RERA’) would be constituted under the Act. It will consist of a Chairman and two Members. The Chairperson must be a person of the post of the Principal Secretary to the State Government while the Members must be persons with expert knowledge in law, finance, management, urban development, etc. The RERA would have various powers and rights.

        2.2 The Act also constitutes a Real Estate Appellate Tribunal to adjudicate any dispute and hear and dispose of appeal against any direction, decision or order of the RERA under the Act. The Tribunal will consist of a Chairman and two Members. The
        Chairperson must be a Judge of a High Court while the Members must have held the post of the  Principal Secretary to the State Government or must be persons with expert knowledge in law, finance, management, urban development, etc.

    3. Application of the Act :

        3.1 Although the Regulator would be known as the Real Estate Regulatory Authority, it is important to note that the Act does not apply to all types of property development. It only applies to the construction of the following properties :

    (a) Construction of apartments : An apartment is defined to mean a dwelling unit by any name which is a separate and self-contained part of any property located in a residential building. Thus, only construction of residential buildings would be covered. A building constructed only for commercial, industrial, office, retail purposes, would not be covered. However, in certain cases this Act would not apply (see para 4.1 below).

    (b) Construction of a colony : A colony has been defined to mean an area of land divided or proposed to be divided into plots or flats for residential, commercial or industrial purpose. Thus, if a colony is to be constructed, then it can include buildings constructed for commercial, industrial, office, retail purposes, etc. However, in certain cases this Act would not apply (see para 4.1 below).

        3.2 The Act applies to a promoter, meaning :

    (a) a person who constructs a residential building consisting of apartments, for the purpose of selling all or some of the apartments to other persons; or

    (b) a person who develops a colony for the
    purpose of selling to other persons all or some of the plots, whether with or without structures thereon.

    4. Registration of Project :

        4.1 The Act provides that a promoter shall not develop land into a colony of plots or construct a building for marketing all or some of the apartments, without registering such project with the RERA. It is important to note that the registration is required qua a project and not qua a developer. Thus, one developer would need to register each and every project to be undertaken by him. However, registration is not required if the number of apartments to be constructed does not exceed four or if the area of the colony’s land to be constructed does not exceed 1,000 square metres (10,764 square feet) or if the number of apartments does not exceed four.

        4.2 For making an application for registration, the promoter needs to apply in the prescribed form, submit all the relevant documents and pay the prescribed fees. One of the documents to be submitted is a copy of the approval and sanction from the Competent Authority, obtained in accordance with the building regulations. This means that the application can only be made after the developer receives the IOD/CC for the project and not before that.

        4.3 If the RERA does not take any action on the application within 30 days, then it is deemed to have granted its approval. In case, the RERA refuses to grant registration, then it must first give a hearing to the applicant.

        4.4 Each registration is valid for three years and can be renewed if the project completion time has been extended for reasons beyond the promoter’s control. A total of two renewals of one year each can be granted. Thus, the maximum time for one registration can be five years.

        4.5 The promoter is also required to make an application for allotment of a password on the RERA’s website. If the project has been registered by RERA, then it will also grant a password to the promoter.

        4.6 The Act provides an imprisonment of up to 3 years and/or a monetary penalty for non-registration of a project.

    Interview – Justice Ajit P. Shah

    InterviewJustice Ajit P. Shah recently
    retired as Chief Justice of the Delhi High Court after a term of 2 years. Prior
    to that, he was Chief Justice of the Madras High Court for over 2 years and a
    judge of the Bombay High Court for almost 13 years. He is regarded as one of the
    finest judges. During his long tenure as a judge, he passed various landmark
    judgments pertaining to right to information, rights of disabled, environment
    and homosexuals. Hailing from a family of lawyers and judges, he is known for
    his forthright and progressive views. In interaction with the BCA Journal, he
    dwelt upon a variety of issues pertaining to law and the legal system.

    Challenges before Judiciary :


    BCAJ
    What are the major problems and challenges faced by the judiciary (and judges
    in particular) today
    ?



    APS Our legal system and judicial apparatus suffer from a
    number of ailments. Our courts at all levels are burdened with dockets that are
    bursting at seams. Around three crore cases are pending in the lower courts and
    the High Courts. Our procedures tend to convert every litigation into a process
    which puts more stress on the form rather than on the content. Our tools and
    techniques of court management, docket management and case management continue
    to be archaic and still depend on the advice of ‘generalists’ rather than
    managerial expertise. Alternative Dispute Resolution system we all love to talk
    about also seems to be reducing into more tokenism rather than becoming a potent
    tool to make a real impact. Criminal justice administration perhaps remains the
    most neglected area where the truth is (more often than not) the casualty and
    where reform or rehabilitation seems to be the last priority. The courts are
    able to dispose of on an average only 19% of the pending criminal cases. Around
    two lacs undertrials are actually in prisons. The state of the prisons and
    lock-ups is a cause of grave concern. Overcrowding in prisons is a rule rather
    than an exception. These are some ground realities that cannot be brushed under
    the carpet. They individually and collectively point to our failure at some
    levels in discharging our obligation to provide good governance through an
    effective legal system.


    BCAJ The Government as well as the judiciary has been
    talking about backlog of cases. What are the causes of delay ? Is the main cause
    inadequate number of judges ? How far are the advocates and lawyers responsible
    for delaying the proceedings ?



    APS Yes, we have been talking about backlog of cases for
    a long time but unable to find a solution to this gigantic problem. There are
    many causes for delay and one of the main causes is certainly the lack of
    adequate number of judges. The Law Commission in its 120th Report recommended
    that the strength of judges per million population may be increased from 10.5 to
    50 judges. The present judge strength in India is 14 per million population
    (approx.). The Vision Paper published by the Law Ministry talks of appointment
    of 15000 ad hoc judges in the subordinate courts and running courts in three
    shifts. More than eight months have passed but no progress has been made. The
    idea of appointment of 15000 ad hoc judges at one go and running the courts in
    shift system is basically flawed and is impracticable and unworkable. The
    establishment of Gram Nyayalayas has not made much progress due to lack of
    support from the State Governments. The need of the hour is to plan gradual
    increase in the strength of judges. The infrastructure provided to the judges in
    most of the States is inadequate and in some places it is virtually
    non-existent. There is a need for firm commitment of the Central and the State
    Governments for making available the necessary infrastructure and financial
    resources to the judiciary.

    No amount of reforms would be meaningful unless the Bar joins
    as partners in the stakes involved. Unfortunately, willingness of the lawyers to
    embrace reforms seems to be amiss. Kathryn Hender from the Law School University
    of Wisconsin posed a very serious question in an article begging for an answer
    in the title itself as to whether the legal community represents ‘gentlemen of
    change or unchanging gentlemen’. Professor Madhava Menon writes about the fear
    psychosis in the judiciary or political class when it comes to confronting the
    Bar which is vastly responsible for the major ill of the system, namely, delay,
    cost and corruption. Adjournment culture, strikes and boycotts by the lawyers
    have virtually paralysed the judicial system. There should be a concerted effort
    from the Bench and the Bar to eliminate this menace. Administration of justice
    is a joint venture in which lawyers and judges are equal participants. This is
    all the more reason why both must take the stick for the ills that plagued the
    judicial system and why they must share the responsibility for reforms.


    BCAJ In your opinion, what steps need to be taken to
    address the delay in disposal of matters ?



    APS The first and foremost priority is to increase the
    number of courts. This could be achieved in a phased manner in the next four or
    five years. Secondly, as suggested by the Jagannadha Rao Committee it would be
    necessary to assess the impact of every new legislation in terms of the burden
    it would put on the judicial system. The burgeoning load of cheque bouncing
    cases is a glaring example of lack of planning. In Delhi out of the pendency of
    9 lac criminal cases, more than 6 lac cases are u/s.138 of Negotiable
    Instruments Act. In 2009, Delhi Courts disposed of around 1.6 lac such cases, of
    which only 400 were disposed of through a trial and the rest were disposed of
    either by settlement or withdrawal. Perhaps these cases can be tried in shift
    system even by appointing ad hoc judges. The Government should also consider
    taking out petty criminal cases from the regular judicial system, so that judges
    can concentrate on more serious cases pertaining to the law and order.

    Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) has been the buzzword for the past two decades. Mediation is now increasingly used as an adjunct to the litigation system in the US and in several other western countries. This is not a marginalised phenomenon, but has been introduced as a case management imperative. Unfortunately, after the build-up of a positive public opinion and securing general cooperation of the Bar (which was originally very resistant) for the past few years, there is a downslide trend which is very disturbing. Mediation centres were set up through missionary zeal of judges who also developed a cadre of trained mediators to run them. Latest statistics signal waning enthusiasm on the part of the judges reflected in steadily declining references and the rate of settlements (For example, the Bombay High Court and the Madras High Court). The Delhi High Court is one of the few courts where mediation policies are being successfully implemented. Especially District Court Mediation Centres are doing extremely well with reported success rate of 15 to 20% of the total filing.

    One of the important tools of ADR in use for many years now is the forum of ‘Lok Adalat’. The problem with this forum is that the proceedings are dominated by judges both as organisers and presiders. Correspondingly, the role of lawyers is notably diminished, compared to regular courts. There is a need to revamp the Lok Adalat organisation making it more participative including the robust support from the Bar.

    Reforms in many fields remain incomplete unless they also utilise modern technology. It is not right to run the court system in the 21st century using a system which is developed in the 19th century. The courts must take advantage of the new technologies and adapt new ways of working. However, full potential of computers has not been fully and optimally tapped. There is no thought about reaping the real benefits of computerisation by redefining our needs and re-engineering our processes. The entire case information system ought to aim for providing a comprehensive management to exploit the available human resources fully.

    The Delhi High Court has achieved significant success in full utilisation of information technology and at least two e-courts (paperless courts) are functioning in the Delhi High Court and one e-trial court has become functional for the first time in India. The Delhi Government fully backed the High Court in computerisation process. The technology involved, if put to optimum use, will virtually revolutionise the case management. It all boils down to change of the mindset and adaption to rapidly advancing technology.

    The Delhi High Court, in one of its initiatives undertook the task of examining the issue of arrears. The Committee of Hon’ble Judges analysing the data scientifically, came out with certain concrete suggestions with regard to the distribution of business amongst various benches, suggested clear targets and change in the rule of procedure. The changes introduced in wake of the report have given encouraging results within a year.

    Judicial appointments :

    BCAJ Do you feel that the system and procedures for appointments of higher judiciary is sound ?

    APS India is perhaps the only country in the world where the judiciary makes the appointments to itself. In the Second Judges’ case, a larger Bench of the Supreme Court reversed the view in SP Gupta’s case and declared that the word ‘consultation’ appearing in Article 142 of the Constitution should be read to mean ‘concurrence’, thereby vesting the CJI with the final say in the mater of appointments. The power so vested in the judiciary would be exercised through the collegiums consisting of the CJI and two most senior colleagues. In the Third Judges’ case, the Court slightly altered the process by directing that the CJI shall make a recommendation to appoint a Judge of the Supreme Court in consultation with four senior-most puisne judges of the Supreme Court and insofar as the appointments to the High Courts are concerned, recommendation must be in consultation with the two senior-most judges of the Supreme Court.

    There is a considerable controversy about whether the Court has not amended the language of the Article by purporting to interpret it. This new dispensation of appointment and transfer of judges laid down by the Supreme Court has not been well received in India. The Bar and other sections of the society have been critical of this. For example, Mr. T. R. Andhyarujina has said : “A collegium which decides the matter in secrecy lacks transparency and is likely to be considered a cabal. Prejudice and favour of one or other member of the collegium for an incumbent cannot be ruled out.” Justice Krishna Iyer has described the pro-tem collegiums — “an egregious fabrication, a functioning anarchy”.

    Vesting the power of appointment only in the executive or the self-selection by the judges are both fraught with difficulties. Hence, the trend now in modern constitutions, is to entrust the power of recommendation for judicial appointments to an independent council or commission. Such a council or commission is composed of representatives of institutions closely connected with administration of justice. The civic society also gets adequate representation. Such councils are now functioning in England, Wales and South Africa. The 1998 European Charter on the Statute of Judges also recommends selection by independent commission where at least 50% of the members should be sitting judges. In the USA, a candidate nominated by the President for appointment to the Supreme Court has to face public hearings conducted by the Senate.

    BCAJ Unfortunately, of late, corruption seems to have crept into the judicial process as well. What are the probable causes of this ? Are the judges underpaid so that they are lured ? What needs to be done to arrest this trend ?

    APS There is no point in saying that there is no corruption in the judiciary. Corruption has definitely crept in the lower judiciary and in some States it has reached disturbing levels. The higher judiciary also cannot be said to be completely free from corruption, though, in my opinion, it is marginal. Former CJI S. P. Bharucha has publicly stated that nearly 10% of the judges of the superior judiciary are corrupt. At present, two High Court judges are facing impeachment proceedings. I may also refer to the infamous incident of ‘cash at door’ in another High Court. Surprisingly, no further action was taken in spite of the report of an in-house committee indicting a sitting judge. I am not prepared to accept that this phenomenon has anything to do with the salary structure of the judges. Salaries of the judges have vastly improved after the VI Central Pay Commission. The problem, according to me, lies with the flawed selection process. Further, the process of impeachment is extremely tedious and has not proved to be effective against erring judges. Perhaps, time has come to devise a new procedure for disciplining judges without in any manner compromising the judicial independence.

    Tribunalisation :

    BCAJ Do you think that the creation of various tribunals being resorted to by the Government will undermine the quality of the judicial process ? Have the tribunals generally done good work ? Have they reduced the burden on the courts or have they, in fact, become one additional forum for litigation ?

    APS In a recent judgment of the Supreme Court in Union of India v. R. Gandhi, the validity of the constitution of National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) and National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT) has been upheld. One of the questions before the Supreme Court was whether the ‘wholesale’ transfer of powers as contemplated by the Companies (Second Amendment) Act, 2002 would have offended the Constitutional scheme of separation of powers and independence of judiciary and to what extent the powers of judiciary and High Court (excepting judicial review under Articles 226-227) can be transferred to tribunals. Though the Apex Court upheld the constitution of the NCLT and NCLAT, further directions were given to the effect that only judges and advocates can be considered for appointment as judicial members. Certain other directions were given protecting the tenure, salaries and perks of the members of the tribunal. As per the direction of the Apex Court, the selection of the members has to be made by a committee presided over by the CJI or his nominee.

    The argument generally advanced to support the tribunalisation is that the court functions under archaic and elaborate procedural laws and highly technical evidence law and all litigation in courts can get inevitably delayed which leads to frustration and dissatisfaction amongst litigants. On the other hand, tribunals are free from shackles of the procedural laws and evidence law. They can provide easy access to speedy justice in a ‘cost-affordable and user-friendly’ manner. But, in India unfortunately tribunals have not achieved full independence. The secretary of the concerned sponsoring department sits in the selection committee for appointment. When the tribunals are formed they are mostly dependent on their sponsoring department for funding, infrastructure and even place for functioning. In L. Chandra Kumar, the Supreme Court observed that the tribunals have been functioning unsatisfactorily because there is no authority charged with supervising and fulfilling their administrative requirements. The tribunals constituted under different enactments are administered by different administrative departments of the Central and State Governments.

    In R. Gandhi’s case, the Supreme Court has extensively referred to the Leggett Committee Report, which was submitted to the Lord Chancellor of Great Britain in March, 2001. Some of the important recommendations in the report are that the members of the tribunal would be independent persons, not civil servants. They should resemble courts and not bureaucratic boards. There is a need to rationalise and modernise the tribunals by creating more coherent framework for their functioning. All tribunals should be supported by a tribunal service i.e., a common administrative service which would raise their status, while preserving their distinctiveness from the courts. The Supreme Court has urged the Central Government to consider and implement the key recommendations of the Leggett Committee. In the absence of these reforms, the objective of forming these tribunals would not be achieved and, as stated by you, they would be merely one additional forum for litigation.

    Arbitration and mediation :

    BCAJ In our practice, we see that when a matter is referred to arbitration panel comprising of retired judges, it gets prolonged like a trial in the court itself. Will arbitration in commercial matters by panel comprising of persons who have expertise in the commercial matters be more effective and speedy than the panel of retired judges ?

    APS The use of arbitration has taken on staggering proportions in international arena. The full potential of arbitration has not been realised in India. The basic problem lies in the system of ad hoc arbitration. According to critics, many arbitrators are not familiar with the practice of arbitration or how to effectively conduct arbitration process. Lawyers are often not trained in the law and practice of arbitration. There is a tendency among them to prolong arbitrations, seek unnecessary adjournments. One of the critics commented that often retired judges are appointed as arbitrators who, by virtue of long tenure on the Bench, have got accustomed to tedious rules pertaining to procedure and evidence. As a result, arbitrations become battle of pleadings and procedure, with each party trying to stall, if it works to their favour. The Parliamentary Standing Committee’s Report of 2003 highlights that there is absence of accountability of arbitrators, huge pendency of cases, no rules as to who can be appointed as arbitrators or regarding their views, time limit for making an award or consequences of not making an award within the time limit.

    The need of the hour is institutionalisation of arbitration in India, along the lines suggested by the Parliamentary Standing Committee Report. The Ministry of Law and Justice has published a consultation paper suggesting extensive amendments to the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996. One of the proposed amendments is to S. 11 whereby the Chief Justice, instead of choosing an arbitrator may choose an institution and such institution shall refer the matter to one or more arbitrators from their panel. As a result of the decision of 7-Judges Bench judgment in SBP Company v. Patel Engineering Limited, the provisions contained in Ss.(4), Ss.(5), Ss.(7), Ss.(8) and Ss.(9) of S. 11 with regard to appointment of arbitrators by any person or institution designated by the Chief Justice rendered totally ineffective. I hope that with the amendment institutionalised arbitration will develop in India.

    The Delhi High Court has started an arbitration centre in its own precincts. The endeavour is to create a system that would ensure expeditious disposal of the matters referred to arbitration. The Centre has state-of-the-art infrastructure and elaborate rules have been laid down to govern the mattes referred to it. The panel of arbitrators of the Centre includes not only retired judges but also eminent chartered accountants, engineers, architects, etc. Incidentally, I may also mention that some of the other amendments proposed by the Law Ministry would be able to clear the confusion created by the recent Supreme Court judgments and make the implementation of the Act smooth and effective. Lok Sabha has passed the Commercial Division of High Court Bill, 2005 which provides for constitution of arbitration division in the High Courts to deal exclusively with arbitration cases.

    BCAJ Courts,  tribunals  (e.g.,  CLB)  often  informally ask parties to settle the matter by negotiations. Will statutory recognition to this help in reducing the backlog? What can be done to promote and make effective the alternate dispute resolution mechanism ?

    APS I fully agree that there is an urgent need to introduce provisions on the lines of S. 89 of the CPC for tribunals like CLB, DRT, etc. S. 89 itself requires an amendment to bring clarity in the process of mediation and conciliation. Mediation and court-supervised mediation in particular, has become more common place in the US and in many countries. The procedure has become increasingly a standard practice. Court-ordered mediation has proved to be a very good way to involve and commit lawyers and participants to the mediation process, because in essence they have no other choice. In the UK penalties in terms of cost can be imposed on parties that refuse to mediate on unreasonable and unsatisfactory grounds. With the active support of the Bench and the assistance of trained mediators, many of the matters can be resolved in CLB or even in DRT.

    Right to Information :

    BCAJ The RTI Act has been servicing the citizens fairly well. No doubt it has some deficiencies. Huge controversy is on between the Government (DoPT, Ministry of Personnel, Public Grievances and Pensions) and citizens, between Sonia Gandhi and PM and so on. What are your views on this issue ?

    APS The right to access the information has been described as a right to citizenship or a right to humanity. All major human right conventions such as UDHR, ICCPR, incorporate specific provisions on the right to information. By a series of decisions of the Supreme Court, (State of UP v. Raj Narain and S. P. Gupta v. Union of India), the right to information is held to be implicit in the guarantee of free speech and expression under Article 19(1)(a) of the Indian Constitution. In a recent decision in Secretary General Supreme Court of India v. Subhash Chandra Aggarwal, the Delhi High Court has held that the right to information is embedded in Article 14 (equality), Article 19(1)(a) (free speech and expression) and Article 21 (life and liberty). The right to know and freedom of information are inalienable components of freedom of expression and participation in public affairs.

    Corruption is now recognised as violation of human rights and one of the objectives of right to information is eradication of ineffective and corrupt governance. UNDP has reported decline in ‘Human Development Index’ (HDI) in more than thirty countries, which affects ordinary man. Therefore, it is really necessary that the ordinary man is enabled to participate in the process that affects his daily life and is empowered with the information to play an effective role in policy making and legislative decision making. With access to information, poor people can begin to organise themselves to form groups to be able to influence the decisions that affect them.

    Some of the most serious violations of human rights and fundamental freedoms are justified by governments as necessary to protect the national security. It is therefore imperative to enable people to monitor the conduct of the Government to participate fully in democratic society by giving them access to Government-held information and to limit the scope of restrictions of freedom of expression that may be imposed in the interest of national security. Without free access, the common man is likely to feel ‘powerless’, ‘alienated’ and ‘left out’.

    Any attempt to dilute the RTI Act must be discouraged. The Government machinery must now learn to live with the information regime.

    BCAJ The CJI has been advocating for exemption of judiciary from the application of RTI Act. As per the press reports the CJI has pointed out that the ‘independence of the higher judiciary needs to be safeguarded in the implementation of the RTI Act’. What are your views on this ?

    APS Independence of judiciary cannot be separated from judicial accountability. The guarantee of judicial independence is for the benefit of the people and not the judges. It is neither a right, nor a privilege of the judges. An accountable judiciary without any independence is weak and feeble and independent judiciary without any accountability is dangerous. The usual recommendations for increasing accountability in general are not very different for the judiciary than they are for any other public institution. The total transparency in the judicial system can be achieved

        (a) by a transparent system of selection of judges, publicised criteria and discussion on their applications, and (b) transparency of internal operations and their subjugation to pre-established rules, use of resources, salaries, judicial standards of behavior and evolution etc. and (c) functional system for registering complaints for institutional operations or behavior of individual trust. As observed by the Delhi High Court, well defined and publicly known standards and procedures complement, rather than diminish, the notion of judicial independence. The former CJI in subsequent interviews clarified that he is not in particular against the application of the RTI Act to the judiciary, but his reservation is only to the disclosure of information relating to the appointments. As stated earlier, the present system of appointments is opaque and shrouded in secrecy, there is need to bring total transparency even in the procedure for appointments to the superior courts.

    BCAJ Under the RTI Act, ‘Information’ includes information relating to any private body which can be accessed by a public authority under any other law for the time being in force.

    Considering this, can one access documents of public companies, especially public utility companies as ‘information’ ?

    APS The term ‘information’ is widely worded and includes information relating to any private body which can be accessed by a public authority under any law for the time being in force. Right to information is defined to mean information accessible under the Act, which is held by or under the control of any public authority. In Secretary General, Supreme Court of India v. Subhash Chandra Aggarwal, the Delhi High Court gave a broad meaning to the word ‘held’ to mean the information which has been created, sought, used or consciously retained by a public authority. Both the provisions will have to be read together and the applicant will not have any right to access the information of any corporations or public utility companies unless it is held by the public authority within the meaning of S. 2(j) of the RTI Act.

    BCAJ What changes could be made in RTI Act for furthering its objectives?

    APS From the screened system of governance protected by the Official Secrets Act, we have taken more than 70 years to enact the Right to Information Act. We cannot really say it is a voluntary movement towards openness, this is more a reaction to the unstoppable global trend towards the recognition of the right to information. Ideally the Act should also apply to the corporations and MNCs which are engaged in public utility services. NGOs, educational institutions, charitable trusts, and trade unions should be just as accountable and as transparent as the Government in a developing democracy. The involvement of MNCs in human rights violations and generating hazards is well documented. The Bhopal gas tragedy is a glaring example of violation of human rights at the hands of MNCs. Corporations produce wealth; they also produce risk, both to humans and to the eco system. Further the Act provides for sweeping exemptions, there is no mechanism to deter the delay or refusal in granting information, there is no scope for intervention in spreading awareness. . . . . suo moto or proactive duty on the part of the authorities to furnish information, information is given only on demand. Notwithstanding all these, it is a great move towards the access.

    Criminal justice system :

    BCAJ In criminal matters the conviction rate is said to be rather low. Is it that investigations are shoddy or do we need to review the way courts consider the evidence ?

    APS First, let me give some statistics. On an average about 60 lac crimes are registered in each year in the States and Union Territories. 1/3 of these are IPC crimes and the rest are offences under Special and Local laws. Under the CrPC, as it exists today, the investigation of a criminal offence is by the police, whose duties are the maintenance of law and order. The strength of the police force over the years (from 1995 onwards) has remained between 12 and 13 lac, and they are expected to handle virtually unimaginable workload.

    In India, not even 45% of the people charged with IPC offences, including mob violence, are ultimately convicted. In other countries like the UK, France, the USA and Japan, the conviction rate for similar offences is over 90%.

    Huge number of criminal cases are pending for years together. When they are placed before Magistrates or Sessions Courts at the stage of evidence, due to excessive lapse of time, the witnesses are either dead or have left to some other place or their whereabouts are not known to the prosecution. There are many causes for failure of prosecution and delay is certainly the main cause.

    The Malimath Committee’s report has suggested many reforms and although one may not agree with all the recommendations, at least some of them were excellent, but not implemented by the Central Government. For example, the Committee recommended that there should be a separate investigation wing with experienced police officers trained in forensic methods of investigation to be in charge of the investigation, leaving the law and order to be dealt with by a separate and distinct enforcement wing.

    Plea bargaining was an important recommendation by the Malilmath Committee, which has been partially accepted but its implementation is far from satisfactory. The Malimath Committee also recommended stringent action against perjury. It has recommended to States for providing more infrastructures to the investigating machinery, especially in regard to accommodation, mobility, connectivity, use of technology, training facilities, etc. It has emphasised that forensic science and modern technology must be used in the investigation, right from the commencement of the investigation. There are some excellent suggestions like representation to victims or if he is dead, to his legal representatives and creating a victim compensation fund. Even after passage of more than ten years, there is not much progress on these recommendations. It is a pity that the much-needed police reforms are not taking place in spite of specific directions of the Supreme Court.

    Short-Term Capital Gains on Shares Taxed at a Rate Higher Than Normal Slab Rate — Anomaly in S. 111A

    S. 111A(1) and the proviso thereto, read as under :

    Tax on short-term capital gains in certain cases.

    111A. (1) Where the total income of an assessee includes any income chargeable under the head ‘Capital gains’, arising from the transfer of a short-term capital asset, being an equity share in a company or a unit of an equity-oriented fund and —

    (a) the transaction of sale of such equity share or unit is entered into on or after the date on which Chapter VII of the Finance (No. 2) Act, 2004 comes into force; and

    (b) such transaction is chargeable to securities transaction tax under that Chapter, the tax payable by the assessee on the total income shall be the aggregate of —

    (i) the amount of income-tax calculated on such short-term capital gains at the rate of fifteen per cent; and

    (ii) the amount of income-tax payable on the balance amount of the total income as if such balance amount were the total income of the assessee :

    Provided that in the case of an individual or a Hindu undivided family, being a resident, where the total income as reduced by such short-term capital gains is below the maximum amount which is not chargeable to income-tax, then such short-term capital gains shall be reduced by the amount by which the total income as so reduced falls short of the maximum amount which is not chargeable to income-tax and the tax on the balance of such short-term capital gains shall be computed at the rate of 15%.

            Short-term capital gains arising from transfer of equity shares is taxable u/s.111A @ 15%. The proviso to S. 111A(1) gives some relief to a resident individual or HUF in case such income of the assessee forms part of the income within the basic exemption limit.

            As per literal reading of the proviso to S. 111A(1), in such a case, that portion of such short-term capital gains which exceeds basic exemption limit, would be taxable @ 15%. In other words, such an assessee is entitled to claim basic exemption in respect of such short-term capital gains, but the excess of such income above the basic exemption limit is taxable @ 15%.

            The Finance Act, 2009 provides for a 10% tax slab on income between `1,60,000 to `3,00,000 for individuals (other than specified individuals) and HUFs for A.Y. 2010-11. Further, the Finance Act, 2010 provides for a 10% tax slab on income between `1,60,000 to `5,00,000 for individuals (other than specified individuals) and HUFs for A.Y. 2011-12.

            A literal reading of the proviso to S. 111A(1) would make such short-term capital gains arising to a resident individual/HUF falling within the income bracket of `1,60,000 to `3,00,000 (or `1,60,000 to `5,00,000, as the case may be) liable to tax @ 15%, whereas normal income (i.e., incomes other than such short-term capital gains) falling within such income brackets would be taxable @ 10%.

            It would be recalled that S. 111A was inserted by the Finance (No. 2) Act, 2004, w.e.f. 1-4-2005, on restructuring of the provisions relating to taxation of capital gains on transfer of equity shares. This could never have been the intention of the law-makers to tax such short-term capital gains at a rate higher than the tax rate on other income falling within the above-mentioned slab.

            Therefore, there is a clear and patent anomaly which has crept in after increase in the rate of tax u/s.111A(1) from 10% to 15% by the Finance Act, 2008, coupled with significant restructuring of the tax slabs by the Finance Act, 2009 and 2010. This anomaly is likely to give rise to litigation. This anomaly is adversely impacting small taxpayers the most. To provide clarity to the assessees and the Assessing Officers, this anomaly requires to be corrected by way of an amendment to the law.

            Pending such an amendment, we would request CBDT to kindly issue a suitable Circular/Instruction granting relief to the taxpayers in such cases.

    LISTED COMPANIES REQUIRED TO INCREASE AND MAINTAIN 25% PUBLIC SHAREHOLDING

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    Securities Laws

    A recent amendment dated 4th June 2010 to the Securities
    Contracts (Regulation) Rules, 1957 (‘the Rules’) requires that existing
    companies whose public shareholding is less than 25%, shall increase such
    holding to that level in a phased manner. For companies seeking listing for the
    first time, the initial level of public holding would need to be at least 25%
    with one exception discussed later herein.

    This amendment is not a major policy change except that it is
    one more effort — in the background of consistent earlier failures — to increase
    the public holding to 25%. However, one change — and effectively it is a major
    change at least in terms of impact on capital markets — is that now even the
    government companies would be required to attain and maintain 25% public
    holding.

    It will have to be seen whether this fresh attempt is
    successful in achieving the objective. If it is, a substantial quantity of
    equity shares would flow into the market raising funds, as per some reports, of
    nearly Rs.2 lakh crores over a period of the next few years. However, as we will
    see later on, the provision relating to public shareholding is mentioned at
    multiple places and unfortunately this is an amendment of just one provision of
    law, leaving others untouched resulting in overlap, contradiction and confusion.

    While a detailed historical analysis of this issue may not be
    of interest here, generally, it can be stated that the level of public holding
    has been the subject of continuous change. At an early stage the level of public
    holding required was 60%, then it was 25% and an exception was made for a group
    of industries, particularly emerging ones such as software, etc., to allow 10%
    public holding. There were also some conditions and exceptions to these
    holdings.

    Note also that there was a distinction in the provisions for
    minimum public holding at the time of public issue and minimum public
    shareholding thereafter. The problem gets complicated not only because these
    requirements at these two stages were different, but also that the regulators
    was different. The initial listing requirement is prescribed by
    the Central Government through ‘Rules’, while the continuing listing
    requirements are prescribed by SEBI through the listing agreement and other
    regulations.

    The situation in law and facts today is thus as follows. The
    old Rules prescribed initial listing requirements and while it generally
    required a minimum initial public issue of 25%, under certain situations, such
    issue could be of just 10%. Logically, the provisions of law, though prescribed
    by SEBI, should state that after the public issue, the company should maintain
    these respective percentages. However, partly on account of changing policies
    and partly on account of poor drafting, the requirements of law as contained
    particularly in the listing agreement are ambiguous. Essentially, the intention
    was that not only the 25/10% public shareholding should be maintained, but that
    even those companies who had a lower public shareholding for any reason should
    also raise their holding to such percentages. In practice, owing to poor
    drafting, poor enforcement, practical problems, keeping exceptions, etc., this
    was not achieved.

    Thus, to reiterate, the objective of the law-makers was to
    ensure that the public holding should be of a reasonable minimum level so as to
    serve the purposes of listing. The amended law now provides that this minimum
    level is 25% uniformly for all companies. The intention also is that the
    ambiguities in the provisions be eliminated partly by better drafting and partly
    by simplifying by not allowing any exceptions to this Rule.

    In the light of general discussion as above, let us now
    consider the amendments made.


    (a) The term ‘public shareholding’ is defined and it
    would mean the holding of persons other than (i) Promoters and the Promoter
    Group (both defined as per the SEBI (ICDR) Regulations, 2009 (ii)
    subsidiaries and associates of the company.

    (i) The ‘public shareholding’ is intended to be of
    equity shares. However, this is not well brought out. The requirements of
    initial public issue cover both the issue of equity shares as well as the
    convertible debentures, but the requirements of continuing public
    shareholding thereafter refer only to equity shares.

    (b) At least 25% of all public issues of equity shares
    and convertible debentures under an offer document shall be to the public
    shareholders.

    (i) An exception to the above is that if the post-offer
    market capitalisation calculated with reference to the offer price is at
    least Rs.4000 crores, then a 10% issue is sufficient. However, even such
    companies would be required to increase the public shareholding to at
    least 25% in a phased manner, with at least 5% every year till this 25% is
    reached.

    (c) All existing listed companies are required to
    maintain 25% public shareholding. Those companies that do not have such
    minimum 25% public shareholding are required to increase the public
    shareholding by at least 5% every year till such 25% public shareholding is
    reached. Thus, the intention is that within a maximum period of 5 years, all
    companies should have at least 25% public shareholding.

    (d) The provision enabling exceptions to be made for
    government companies has been omitted. This is a significant amendment. As
    per some press reports, to achieve 25% public holding, almost 85% of the
    fresh issue of shares would be by the ‘government companies’.


    A clear time frame to achieve 25% public shareholding has
    been prescribed. However, what happens if the company does not comply with such
    requirement for any reason ?

    (i) There is no specific provision in the Securities
    Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956, dealing with violation of this new Rule 19A.
    It appears that the following could be the consequences :


    • A
      penalty of up to Rs.1 crore.



    • Imprisonment up to 10 years or a fine up to Rs.25 crores or both.



    • Suspension of listing/delisting may also be possible.



    (ii) Of course, the usual provisions governing
    penalty/prosecution would apply. For example, the facility of compounding of
    the violation would be available.

    Now let us see some of the concerns with regard to the
    amendment.

    A major puzzle is that the provisions of Clause 40A of the listing agreement have not been repealed/ modified. It can be seen that this is the provision, howsoever defective, that specifically deals with requirement of increasing the public holding to the specified levels. As can also be seen, this Clause is plainly contradictory with the new requirements. For example, the new requirement requires all companies to maintain/increase their public holding to a common 25%, while Clause 40A has many exceptions. In fact, the scheme of the law till now was simple that is the Rules dealt with ‘initial listing’ while ‘continuing listing’ was dealt with by the listing agreement. However, now there is overlap that does not serve any purpose. While one could technically take a view that a later provision of law overrides an earlier one, this can hardly be a happy approach to take either for the company or even for SEBI.

    Unlike the existing Clause 40A, there is no provision for an exception or extension. No exception is given to any type of company. No power is also given to SEBI or the stock exchanges to make any exception or granting any extension to the time schedule for raising public holding.

    A major concern is how can the public shareholding be increased?? What are the permissible methods — or, to put it the other way, are any methods prohibited?? SEBI has been authorised to specify the manner in which the public shareholding shall be increased. The common methods may be a fresh public issue, offer for sale by the Promoters, offloading of shares by Promoters in the open market or through off-market deals, etc. One will have to wait for SEBI to prescribe these methods.

    The scheme of having a minimum public shareholding has to be built in not only in the Rules and the listing agreement but also in other provisions of law such as the ‘Takeover Regulations’. These will also need amendment to achieve 25% public shareholding.

    For the record, it may be recollected that the definition of ‘public’ itself was criticised. It was stated that the inclusion of FIIs, etc. in public effectively resulted in the net holding of the remaining ‘actual public’ to be quite small. Thus, removing such entities from this category was seriously considered. However, no such exclusion has been made and thus holding of FIIs, NRIs, FIs, etc. would be included in ‘public’ shareholding.

    It is seen from various published reports that basically companies that would be affected would be the large government companies. In fact, these reports estimate that almost all of the issues in terms of amount would come from such companies. However, it is also true that such companies have not always been found to be wholly compliant with listing requirements. For example, many of government companies have not yet complied with the requirements of ‘corporate governance’. SEBI

    has actually passed orders recording this and while it has not awarded any punishment, the orders have highlighted the plight of companies which are effectively at mercy of the government.

    Companies that made a public issue of 10% in recent years can rightly air a grievance that had they known that they would be required to make a 25% public issue, they would not have made a public issue in the first place. I think this is a serious and a fair concern and an exception would have to be made for such companies. Having made a public issue of, say, 10%, they can now neither stay, nor exit easily without causing problems to many. To put it simply, they cannot delist and they cannot dilute?!

    In conclusion, it appears that unless the new provision is strictly implemented and enforced, it would be merely another half-hearted paper attempt. Newspapers are already reporting that the Finance Ministry is considering tweaking with the new rules. If this happens, it will be another instance of lack of co-ordination between the Government and the Regulator, and perhaps yet another attempt and opportunity going waste.

    The CII Corporate Governance Code — a fresh and realistic approach — and a glimpse of things to come

    fiogf49gjkf0d
    Securities Laws

    (1) The Confederation of Indian Industry (CII) has issued a
    draft Corporate Governance Code (‘the Code’). The Code has importance for
    certain reasons. The fact that the topmost of thinkers, who are usually
    associated with drafting of such Codes or law, makes it almost certain that it
    will receive wide acceptance and get included in forthcoming amendments in law.
    Those thinkers amongst others include Naresh Chandra, Dr. J. J. Irani, our past
    President Y. H. Malegam.

    (2) The Code represents a fresh and innovative approach and
    after almost a decade of trial and error where mostly foreign models were
    adopted, this Code now takes into account some essential unique features of
    Indian listed companies.

    (3) The Code however, comes at a time when the concept of
    corporate governance is being viewed with cynicism. Both Enron and Satyam were
    perfect and award-winning companies for adopting best corporate governance
    model. Everything was done right in having the finest and reputed persons as
    Independent Directors, members of Audit Committee, to having top audit firms,
    etc. — and everything went horribly wrong.

    (4) What I find special is that the Code finally recognises
    that India has unique features. Most of Indian companies are promoter-controlled
    and managed with the Promoters having either
    substantial or majority holding. This is in contrast with US and other Western
    companies where the holding of the management is often in single digit and even
    this holding is not concentrated in a single family
    or group but is often dispersed. The Code specifically comments that in India,
    typically, the Promoter Group/family holds at least 50% of the voting capital.
    With such dominant promoter holding and control the problems and issues of
    governance are very different from companies where the Promoter holding is
    barely a small percentage. Hence, if the problems are different, the solutions
    have to be different. Adopting Western Corporate Governance models and concepts
    make them not only inappropriate in the Indian context, but creates resistance
    and results only in paper acceptance. This ‘box-ticking’ acceptance, in the
    author’s view creates a false sense of assurance. A good example of such
    difference relates to the recom-mendation of having separate offices of Chairman
    and CEO. In Western countries, the CEO typically does not belong to a Promoter
    group and there is a need to have a check on him, since it is often found that
    malpractices originate from this office. If the CEO is also the Chairman,
    considerable power gets concentrated in one person as compared to other
    directors and officers. In India, the power is concentrated with the Promoters
    and the CEO and Chairman are often from the Promoter group and, if not, they are
    often effectively nominated by such group. Requiring that these two offices are
    separated in India, firstly, does not serve any purpose and, secondly, creates
    practical problems of requiring a non-promoter as ‘Chairman’ which could be
    counter-productive. Take an example of, say, a company such as Bajaj Auto or
    Reliance Industries. The company would be forced to have a Chairman
    from the non-promoter group. The CII Code recog-nises this anomaly and unique
    Indian conditions and notes that this does not make total sense in India. At the
    end, though, it makes a compromise and instead of recom-mending that the present
    requirement be wholly dropped, it only suggests that wherever possible, the two
    offices should be separated.

    (5) Having said that, the CII Code strangely contradicts
    itself and instead of consistently taking a total Indian approach, the Code, for
    several important requirements, recognises the Indian differences but still,
    recommends following of foreign models.

    (6) Let us now examine some important requirements of the
    Code.

    (7)
    The Code is voluntary :




    (a) The CII Code clearly specifies that it is voluntary and
    it is up to the Company to decide whether and how much to follow its
    recommendations. Of course, one could argue that this is a spacious point
    since CII does not have any statutory authority to enforce the Code. But the
    point makes sense on a different footing since the intention is that the Code
    be enshrined in law, the acceptance may be mandatory. The danger is and will
    always remain that mandated Governance Codes are often followed only in the
    letter. Hence, in the author’s view the code though voluntary should be based
    on the concept of ‘comply or explain’.

    (b) While keeping the Code voluntary is commendable, it
    needs to be reckoned that the code is not meant for mere quiet internal
    adoption but is for public knowledge. Hence the concept of ‘comply or
    explain’, because the public should know its ethical practices. In case the
    company adopts, in my opinion, it gains reputation which eventually helps it
    ‘commercially’.

    (c) In the absence of ‘comply or explain’ model there would
    be uneven reporting. It is not as if the choice is that the Code can be
    adopted wholly or rejected wholly. The Company may adopt it wholly. The
    Company may adopt only some of the recommendations. The Company
    may even adopt a modified version. The public should know the reasons for
    non-adoption. Good governance requires transparency in reporting.

    Appointment of Independent Directors :

    (d) The Code attempts to meet the serious dilemma of the
    manner of appointment of Independent Directors. The issue faced is how to make
    the Independent Director really independent even for appointment. If the
    Independent Director’s appointment is left to the Promoters, the purpose may
    be lost.

    (e) For this requirement, however, the Code does not take a
    fresh approach. The Code leaves the present concept of having a Nomination
    Committee as it is and merely provides for certain procedural requirements of
    evaluation of Independent Directors.


    Duties, liabilities and remuneration of Independent Directors :



    (f) The Code recognises the present problem that while a relatively new concept of Independent Director has been introduced for adoption by all listed companies, there are no special provisions for their rights, duties, and remuneration.

    g) Perhaps realising that the law may or may not make provisions for these matters and makes a unique suggestion of making the obligations, duties, etc. contractual by appointment letters. The Code further makes an interesting requirement that the details of this appointment letter be disclosed to the shareholders at the time of their appointment.

    h) Thus, the duties and obligations will not only be transparent, but to a certain degree can even be enforced, albeit through the Company. In a way, this requirement fills in the lacuna in law.

    Remuneration of Independent Directors :

    i) The Code recognises a special problem in India and that is the statutory limits on managerial remuneration. As may be recollected, in India, the maximum remuneration is linked as a percentage of profits, though certain minimum remuneration can be paid under certain circumstances. This archaic requirement creates problems even for Independent Directors since particularly for loss-making companies or companies with inadequate profits, payment of reasonable remuneration may become difficult. The Code recommends that the law be amended to make suitable exceptions.

    j) Of course, the remuneration issue is anomalous from a different angle. Pay too less remuneration and the Independent Director is not available even for appointment. Pay too much and the Independent Director loses his independence! Actually, the root problem also is that the remuneration is effectively decided by the Promoters, but this issue is not seriously addressed by the Code.

    Audit Committee :

    The Code rightly says that the recent amendment in clause 49, whereby only the majority of the Audit Committee members need to be Independent Directors, is unwarranted. Thus, the Code makes a valid suggestion that the Audit Committee should consist only of Independent Directors.

    Another important recommendation is that all related party transactions should be pre-approved by the Audit Committee.

    Auditors :

    There are several recommendations in respect of Auditors that may be found radical but realistic also. There are numerous requirements made and a more detailed study would be required. A few of the requirements are highlighted.

    The Code recognises audit firms often have networking arrangement or relations with group or other entities that render non-audit services. When such group entities render non-audit services, the independence of the audit firm may be compromised and at the very least, the fees paid to such firms should be taken into account while determining whether the audit firm is independent and for disclosure and limits on such other revenue by such related entities.

    The Code also recognises that if the audit firm is unduly dependent on one group for its fees, then its independence could be lost. The Code places, however, a fairly low benchmark of 10% of the total revenues of the audit firm for calculation whether the firm is dependent on a group.

    The Code also suggests a requirement of ‘audit partner rotation’ and also of the audit team.

    The Code makes the radical requirement of creating unlimited auditor liability and also specifically makes the requirement that all the partners of the audit firm and not merely the signing partner should have unlimited liability. If the audit firm is a limited liability partnership, still, the Code says, the audit partner should have unlimited liability for at least the audit under question. One will have to see how far this recommendation will be effective unless statutory provisions and not mere corporate governance codes or even contractual terms seek to create such unlimited liability.

    Then the Code raises issue regarding the numerous disclaimers and varying drafting of qualifications in the audit report. The Code recommends that the ICAI involve outside nominees, particularly government representative, and come out with requirements to avoid this.

    There are several other recommendations in the Code. While suffering on some counts, the Code attempts to inject some fresh life and practical use-fulness in corporate governance requirements.

    Rebirth Of Stock Lending – Opportunities, Confusion and Contradictions

    This series of articles introducing securities laws for listed companies to the lay reader continues…

    1) A recent and relatively minor amendment suddenly infuses life into the otherwise dead instrument, that is, scheme of stock lending. The amendment provides that now Stock Lending can be for one year, thereby increasing the period from 30 days, which, incidentally initially was, for just seven days. This short lending period was probably the main reason why there was practically no interest in using stock lending, though the scheme has existed since 1997!

    2) Let us broadly understand what Stock Lending is and understand some important developments till date. I may add that, as we will see later, numerous other things in securities laws and outside have to be resolved but this latest amendment is, I think, sufficient reason to take Stock Lending seriously now.

    3) Stock Lending, as the name suggests, is lending of shares by an owner to a borrower. The borrower pays charges for “using” the shares and is required to return the borrowed stock by the end of the borrowing period. The Borrower normally cannot close the transaction in cash. The arrangement provides that all other benefits of ownership go to the Lender, such as dividends, bonus issue, etc. Hence, if a company makes a 1:1 bonus issue, the Borrower would then have to return double the number of shares he has borrowed. However, all benefits of ownership cannot be protected, such as the ‘right to vote’.

    4) The Borrower normally sells the shares in the market, as he is bearish on the scrip and believes that the price of the shares will fall in the ‘borrowing period’. Thus, he will be able to buy shares back at a lower price and return them to the Lender and earn profit.

    5) Conceptually, thus, the Lender would have to be a person who is either a long term investor or a promoter who is bullish on the scrip and desires to earn return in the interregnum. Another reason for not selling the shares himself could be that the Promoter may be interested in retaining the shares for the long term for the benefit of control through the shares.

    6) In theory, private parties could carry out Stock Lending amongst themselves. The Lender would lend the shares to the Borrower by a private arrangement. The Borrower would sell the shares, buy them back at a later date and return the shares. However, there would be several complexities. The Lender would also have concerns about default in recovery of his shares. Further, the Lender/Borrower would have to search for counter parties and there would not be the benefits of an open market of Stock Lending where parties could find many counter parties. In an open market, the Stock Lending rates would be market determined owing to wider participation.

    7) The advantages of a statutory lending scheme are many and in theory, many of the above disadvantages can be overcome. However, SEBI has been struggling, since 1997, to lay down a scheme that retains the aforesaid advantages while ensuring that the terms and conditions do not create problems. However, it has not been successful so far.

    8) SEBI had introduced in 1997 a Scheme of Stock Lending. The principal concept was of approved intermediaries, who would act as intermediaries for parties on both sides, i.e., lending and borrowing. Strict approval norms were laid down for approval of intermediaries so that the intermediaries were strong in terms of net worth, which may lend confidence to the Lender. The intermediaries would also be under regulatory control of SEBI. For various reasons, including tax uncertainty (which since 1997 was partly resolved), the Stock Lending Scheme did not take off at all.

    9) A decade later, around 2007, SEBI took steps to revive it. A principal change made was that that the stock exchanges themselves would be the intermediaries. It appears that the objective was also of allowing Stock Lending transactions to be effected through the stock exchange. Thus, one could theoretically borrow and lend in a manner similar to buying and selling shares or derivatives. The stock market would also protect the parties for due honour of the terms such as return of the shares and corporate benefits.

    10) However, SEBI was unduly cautious. Stock Lending is actually intended to facilitate
    short-selling. And short-selling is incorrectly and unfairly seen as a stigmatic act. So much so that the recent recession in the US is blamed on short-sellers. Even in India, a few years earlier, short-sellers were claimed to be behind the huge fall in the stock markets. However, short-selling and speculative buying are two sides of the same coin. If markets are undervalued, a spirited speculator is seen as heroic when he buys, raises the market and then sells the same. The same speculator who feels that the market is overpriced, becomes a villain if he short sells. Speculation is part of the market. But if speculation is indulged in for price manipulation, then, and only then, it should be punished. However, short-selling continues to be stigmatic, at least in perception.

    a) Having stated this, Stock Lending is better than naked short-selling in which any quantity of shares could be sold. In Stock Lending, every short sale has to be backed by available shares.

    11) Hence, as said earlier, SEBI was unduly cautious. It initially allowed barely 7 days of lending, as if prices would move towards a particular value in such short period. Such a Scheme was bound to fail and it did. It remained a failure when the lending period was increased in 2008 from 7 to 30 days. Now, SEBI has, in one stroke, increased the period to 12 months and there is some excitement in the market. This move has the potential to be the proverbial Tipping Point, when there is a major take-off on account of a small change, though some minor issues in the Scheme and tax and other uncertainties remain.

    12) As the revised scheme is now in place, let us note some important features which make the Scheme attractive:-

    a) Any person can carry out stock lending and thereby short-selling. The Borrower and the Lender can be any person, individual, corporate, institutional investor, etc.

    b) Initially, Stock Lending will be allowed in shares in which futures and options are allowed. SEBI will review this list from time to time.

    c) The lending/borrowing period is upto one year.

    d) The Lender can request an early termination and the Approved Intermediary can, on a best effort basis, seek to get shares from another lender and give them to the original Lender.

    e) The Borrower can also return the shares earlier and the Approved Intermediary can attempt to find another borrower.

    f) Timely disclosures will have to be made of the shares that are sold using the Stock Lending mechanism.

    g) The clearing corporation/clearing house of the stock exchanges having nationwide terminals will be registered as Approved Intermediaries, through which the Stock Lending would be carried out. The Borrowers and Lenders would approach authorized Clearing Members for their transactions.

    h) The Stock Lending would be through the screen-based, order-matching platform. Thus, like derivatives, parties can find out orders available on either side and carry out “trades” of borrowing/lending.

    i) There will be a contractual/statutory framework between the parties involved, viz., the Borrowers, Lenders, Approved Intermediaries and the Clearing Members. However, there will not be any direct agreement between the Borrower and the Lender.

    j) The contracts would effectively be standardized and thus comparable and capable of being valued uniformly.

    k) The Approved Intermediaries will lay down the risk management mechanism so as to ensure that shares lent are recovered or due compensation is otherwise received from the Borrower. This is an important pillar of the Scheme, which would give comfort to the Lender.

    l) There are overall limits of shares that can be lent as a percentage of capital. At least in this respect, SEBI has been realistic and has allowed a fairly high percentage of the share capital—10%—though one could argue that even this is arbitrary. There are sub-limits though, at various lower levels.

    m) The lending and borrowing would not be deemed to be sale and purchase of shares for various purposes such as for Takeover Regulations. However, one will have to look at actual amendments in the law, if there would be any.

    13) Note that while the Stock Lending scheme is approved, steps would have to be taken by stock exchanges and others concerned to lay down the systems and procedures for the same to make it operational.

    14) While the Scheme is attractive generally, there are various concerns.

    15) The tax law remains uncertain, and though there is a specific but old Section 47(xv) that deals with Stock Lending, some questions worth considering are:-

    a) Will lending be deemed to be a sale and borrowing deemed to be a purchase in the revised statutory framework, particularly where there
     

    are no direct agreements between Borrower and Lender? Similarly, what will be the treatment of the reverse transactions when shares are returned from the Borrower to the Lender through the Approved Intermediaries?

    An incidental question would be how would the period for which the stock is lent be treated? Will it be part of the continuous period for which the shares were held by the Lender?

    b) The Borrower would be in a peculiar position. Assuming that he is not deemed to be a purchaser, he would be selling the shares first and then buying them back. How would the surplus/loss be treated? How would he account for his position for tax purposes at the yearend when he has sold shares but he has not yet bought them back? Will he be able to book a provisional loss if the market price is higher than the price at which he sold? How much of such loss will he be able to book?

    c) How would the income from Stock Lending be treated? How would the Stock Lending charges paid be treated? How will the treatment differ for those who hold the shares as stock in trade and for those who hold it as capital assets?

    d) If there is finally a default in return of the shares and the Lender is compensated in money, what would be its tax treatment? When would the “transfer”/sale be deemed to have taken place?

    I must confess that I have only scratched the surface and I am sure readers will think of more issues.

    16) Apart from tax, there would be other issues such as:-

    a) Can Stock Lending be deemed to be insider trading? In other words, would a Stock Lend-ing by an insider be deemed to be insider trading if he had access to unpublished price sensitive information?

    b) How would the lending and borrowing be treated for accounting purposes? How will it differ for shares held as investments and shares held as stock in trade? How will the potential loss on account of rise in price be accounted by the Borrower at the yearend?

    c) Will Stock Lending be treated as borrowing for the purposes of Section 58A of the Companies Act, 1956?

    d) Will stock lending be deemed to be a financial activity for the purposes of regulations relating to NBFCs?

    17) Then there are other aspects. Should an act of a Promoter who lends shares be viewed negatively? Should it show an indication that he is himself bearish on his shares and thus he is protecting himself? By lending, is he not encouraging fall in the share price since there would be selling pressure? Or should a view be taken that the fact that the Promoter is only lending and not selling shows that he is actually confident of his company since he would want his shares back eventually? Whatever the theoretical arguments, on either side, may be, a Promoter who lends his shares may face publicity and, often, publicity relating to such transactions is automatically negative publicity!

    18)To conclude, Stock Lending offers a new and attractive instrument but with complex issues that Chartered Accountants, whether in industry or in practice, will have to address.

    Can Chartered Accountants be Punished by SEBI ?

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    Securities Laws

    The issues are:


        (a) Are auditors governed only by ICAI as far as their auditing and certification is concerned?

        (b) Whether SEBI has the right to take action against the auditors, and if so under what circumstances?





    These important issues have been recently answered by the
    Bombay High Court in Price Waterhouse & Co. v. SEBI, [(2010) 103 SCL 96 (Bom.)].
    As we will see later herein, the Court decided against the petitioners. However,
    the Court stayed the proceedings for four weeks to allow filing of a special
    leave petition to the Supreme Court. As of the date of writing this article, the
    status of whether such a SLP has been filed or not is not known.

    The issue is whether the work of an auditor should be judged
    only by an expert body — that is — ICAI — an institution established under a
    statute. It is a matter of serious concern if the same work is also scrutinised
    by another authority that may reach a different conclusion and this also results
    in multiple actions/
    proceedings.

    There is also another important reason to be concerned.
    Chartered Accountants generally and even as Statutory Auditors are not required
    to be ‘registered’ with SEBI. SEBI closely controls registered intermediaries
    not only through the process of registration and suspension/cancellation of
    registration, but also by closely regulating them through Rules and Regulations.
    If SEBI can control and act against unregistered intermediaries, particularly if
    they are regulated by another body, it would be a worrisome precedent for not
    just chartered accountants, but any person having anything to do with listed
    companies or capital markets.

    Further, the anxiety is also because the type of action that
    the SEBI Act permits is quite wide-ranging and the show-cause notice (‘the SCN’)
    that SEBI issued in this matter showed this. The SCN pointed out several actions
    that SEBI considered taking, assuming that the allegations were proved. For
    example, it said: it would consider banning the auditors from carrying out
    statutory audit or other audit/certification of not just listed companies, but
    of any other intermediary, etc. registered with SEBI. It would also ban the CA
    from ‘accessing the securities markets’ (though it is not clear how a CA may
    access it) and certain related actions. It would even initiate prosecution that
    may entail a fine of up to Rs.25 crores and imprisonment up to 10 years.

    Thus, to summarise, the result would be multiple authorities
    judging the auditor, resulting into multiple action and consequences.

    It is to be clarified that the SCN was challenged on the
    issue of the jurisdiction of SEBI to initiate action. There was no finding of
    facts and the Court merely held that it is up to SEBI to investigate the actual
    facts and first establish the allegations. But the Court also held that:



    • SEBI does have the power to investigate an auditor with regard to professional
      work done for listed companies and certain other specified persons.



    • Secondly, if the investigation established the allegations as true, then the
      actions of banning, etc. were permissible. In short, the Court held that the
      ICAI did not have exclusive jurisdiction over a CA with regard to the
      professional work done by them for such entities.



    • Thirdly, SEBI and ICAI operated from different angles and thus their
      jurisdictions are simultaneous but not really overlapping.


    The issue arose out of the Satyam Computers episode where
    several accounting and related frauds have been alleged and are as widely
    reported, backed also by an email by Mr. Raju. The issue relating to the role of
    the auditors arose as to whether there was any failure/deficiency in the
    performance of their professional duties and/or whether there was connivance.

    Now let us review the decision in a little more detail.

    SEBI issued a show-cause notice to the auditors and certain
    other parties. It alleged that in respect of the various alleged accounting
    frauds including showing higher revenue, profits, assets, etc., the auditors and
    other specified persons did not perform their professional work properly. It
    thus asked these parties to explain their stand and said that if the
    explanations were not found satisfactory, then it may take actions such as
    banning the parties from carrying out audit, etc. of listed companies and
    registered intermediaries, accessing capital markets, etc. It even stated that
    prosecution may also be considered.

    The parties raised a preliminary issue that since they were
    Chartered Accountants carrying out professional work and since their
    professional work was sought to be judged, they should be judged by the ICAI
    only and SEBI had no jurisdiction.

    SEBI, however, stated that auditors of listed companies were
    entities associated with the capital market and since SEBI’s role was to protect
    the integrity of capital markets, it had the right to take action against
    persons associated with capital markets. Hence, SEBI has the jurisdiction.

    Various issues were raised and it is worth running through
    how the Court dealt with them.

    The fundamental question is whether SEBI has jurisdiction
    over Chartered Accountants or whether the ICAI has exclusive jurisdiction which
    SEBI cannot encroach on? The Court raised the issue: (emphasis supplied in all
    extracts of the decision in this article):

    “However, it is required to be examined as to whether in substance by initiating the proceedings under the SEBI Act, the SEBI is trying to overreach or encroach upon the power conferred under the CA Act.”

    “Looking to the provisions of the SEBI Act and the Regulations framed thereunder, in our view, it cannot be said that in a given case if there is material against any Chartered Accountant to the effect that he was instrumental in preparing false and fabricated accounts, SEBI has absolutely no power to take any remedial or preventive measures in such a case. It cannot be said that SEBI cannot give appropriate directions in safe-guarding the interest of investors of a listed company. Whether such directions and orders are required to be issued or not is a matter of inquiry. In our view, the jurisdiction of SEBI would also depend upon the evidence which is available during such inquiry. It is true, as argued by the learned counsel for the petitioners, that SEBI cannot regulate the profession of a Chartered Accountant. This proposition cannot be disputed in any manner. It is required to be noted that by taking remedial and preventive measures in the interest of investors and for regulating the securities market, if any steps are taken by SEBI, it can never be said that it is regulating the profession of the Chartered Accountant. So far as listed companies are concerned, the SEBI has all the powers under the Act and the Regulations to take all remedial and protective measures to safeguard the interest of investors and the securities market. So far as the role of Auditors is concerned, it is a very important role under the Companies Act.”

    Further, the Court reviewed the Chartered Accountants Act and the powers therein and did not find any contradiction. Since SEBI was not really seeking to regulate the profession of Chartered Accountants, the Chartered Accountants Act could not prevent SEBI from taking action of the nature proposed in the SCN.

    Can SEBI order that an auditor shall be prohibited from auditing the accounts of a listed company? This is what the Court held:
    “It is not uncommon nowadays that for financial gains, even small investors are investing money in the share market. Mr. Ravi Kadam has rightly pointed out that there are cases where even retired persons are investing their retiral dues in the purchase of shares and ultimately, if such a person is defrauded, he will be totally ruined and may be put in a situation where his life savings are wiped out. With a view to safeguard the interests of such investors, in our view, it is the duty of the SEBI to see that maximum care is required to be taken to protect the interest of such investors so that they may not be subjected to any fraud or cheating in the matter of their investments in the securities market. Normally, an investor invests his money by considering the financial health of the company and in order to find out the same, one would naturally bank upon the accounts and balance- sheets of the company. If it is unearthed during inquiry before SEBI that a particular Chartered Accountant, in connivance and in collusion with the Officers/ Directors of the company has concocted false accounts, in our view, there is no reason as to why to protect the interests of investors and regulate the securities market, such a person cannot be prevented from dealing with the auditing of such a public listed company. In our view, the SEBI has got inherent powers to take all ancillary steps to safeguard the interest of investors and securities market. The powers conferred under various provisions of the Act are wide enough to cover such an eventuality and it cannot be given any restrictive meaning as suggested by the learned counsel for the petitioners. It is the statutory duty of the SEBI to see that the interests of the investors are protected and remedial and preventive measures are required to be taken in this behalf. It is required to be noted that in the instant case the inquiry is still pending, ultimately the decision is required to be taken by SEBI on the basis of available evidence on record. However, in order to determine the jurisdiction of SEBI, the contents of the show-cause notice which is the first step of initiating proceedings are required to be seen. Reading the contents of the show-cause notices and the relevant statutory provisions, it cannot be said that SEBI has no jurisdiction at all to enquire into the affairs of the petitioners insofar as it relates to Satyam.”

    The Court made it clear that SEBI definitely has jurisdiction in such matters by observing, “In our view, it cannot be said that the show -cause notices issued by SEBI are, on the face of it, not sustainable on the ground that SEBI has no jurisdiction to enter into the affairs of the petitioners or that it lacks jurisdiction to go into such questions.”

    A critical question that often arises is who are persons associated with the securities markets since that would give jurisdiction to SEBI to inquire and take action. Thus, the question is whether auditors are such persons associated with the securities market. The Court answered in the positive, stating, “even though the petitioners may not have direct association in share market activities, yet the statutory duty regarding auditing the accounts of the company and preparation of balance-sheets may have a direct bearing in connection with interest of the investors and the stability of the securities market. In our view, the petitioners in their capacity as auditors of the company Satyam, which was at one point of time considered to be a blue chip company who had a defining influence on the securities market, can be said to be persons associated with the securities market within the meaning of the provisions of the said Act.”

    The Court also held that the power of SEBI is over and above the provisions of S. 227 of the Companies Act, 1956, which provided for removal of an auditor. Thus, it negatived the contention that removal of auditor can only be u/s.227. The Court also compared the powers under SEBI Act with the powers under the Consumer Protection Act and said that neither of this can be said to be encroaching on the powers of ICAI. The Court also rejected the argument that such proposed action by SEBI would amount to infringement of fundamental rights under Article 19(1)(g) of the Constitution of India.

    Interestingly, the Court held that the criteria for determining proper performance of duties by the auditors were the very audit norms prescribed by ICAI. The Court, observed, “However, if it is found in a given case that the Chartered Accountant has violated the audit norms prescribed by the Institute under the CA Act, the SEBI can certainly consider the said aspect in order to find out as to whether such a professional person should be allowed to continue to function as an Auditor of a listed company if by continuing such person as an Auditor of a listed company, it may hamper the interest of the investors of such a listed company.”

    An interesting aspect is whether SEBI would have jurisdiction only when there is a mala fide intention or connivance by the auditors or whether professional negligence without such an active involvement is also covered. It is not clear from the decision, but the Court did make some interesting observations. An example of such an observation of the Court is:

    “In a given case, if ultimately it is found that there was only some omission without any mens rea or connivance with anyone in any manner, naturally on the basis of such evidence the SEBI cannot give any further directions.”

    Another thought that comes to the author is: whether the views of ICAI should have been taken here in some manner, since at least indirectly the issue related to the exclusive jurisdiction of ICAI.

    Supreme Court on Takeover Regulations

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    Securities Laws

    (1) A recent decision of the Supreme Court throws light on
    important issues relating to the SEBI Takeover Regulations. Some core concepts
    of the Regulations such as ‘persons acting in concert’ and ‘persons deemed to be
    acting in concert’ are interpreted. It is important to note the reliance placed
    by the Supreme Court on the reports of Expert Committees for interpretation. The
    decision is in the case of Daiichi Sankyo Company Limited v. Jayaram
    Chigurupati & Others,
    C.A. No. 7148 of 2009, dated July 8, 2010.

    (2) Of course, the real issue that was in dispute before the
    Court, though interesting, has application in rare cases. It concerns a
    situation where a listed company was acquired by another listed company and the
    latter company, within a short time, got itself acquired by another company. The
    question before the Court related to the pricing for the open offer of the
    shares of the first company and the interpretation of the legal provisions
    applicable to such a situation. Such quick and sequential takeovers do not
    happen often and hence that part of the decision may have limited application.
    But the other aspects have wider importance.

    (3) Let us then broadly understand the facts, the relevant
    provision of law and the issue, and then know what the Supreme Court held.

    (4) The facts are quite simple. Ranbaxy Laboratories Limited
    (‘Ranbaxy’), a listed company, agreed to acquire a significant stake in Zenotech
    Laboratories Limited (‘Zenotech’), another listed company paying a price of
    Rs.160 per share. As required under the Regulations, it made an open offer @
    Rs.160 which was also the price as per the formula under the Regulations.
    However, within six months, the Promoters of Ranbaxy agreed to sell more than
    15% shares in Ranbaxy to Daiichi @ Rs.114 (rounded off) per share. Eventually,
    Daiichi got more than 51% stake in Ranbaxy, thereby making Ranbaxy its
    subsidiary. Daiichi thereby acquired indirectly more than 15% stake in Zenotech.
    Hence, as required by law, Daiichi made an open offer for shares of Zenotech at
    a price Rs.114. Shareholders of Zenotech, including its erstwhile Promoters,
    complained to SEBI that the open offer should have been @ Rs.160 and not Rs.114.
    As will be seen later on, particularly after considering the decision of the
    Securities Appellate Tribunal (‘SAT’), the point at issue was that since the law
    deems holding-subsidiary companies to be deemed to be acting in concert with
    each other and since the law requires that price paid by a person acting in
    concert to be taken into account, the open offer should be Rs.160 as paid by
    Ranbaxy.

    (5) The law relating to open offer pricing of such ‘indirect’
    acquisitions, i.e., acquisition of shares of a listed company which in
    turn controls another listed company, is as follows.

    (6) Shredded of irrelevant complexities, it can be said that
    when a listed company acquires another listed company indirectly, then it has to
    make an open offer for the shares of the company in which such indirect
    acquisition has been made. For the purposes of pricing of the open offer, the
    law requires that, inter alia, the price paid by the acquirer or any
    persons acting in concert with it during the preceding 26 weeks has to be taken
    account of and if such price is higher, then such higher price shall be the open
    offer price.

    (7) In the present case, Daiichi acquired Ranbaxy. However,
    it was during the preceding six months to this that Ranbaxy had acquired the
    shares of Zenotech @ Rs.160. The law deems a holding and its subsidiary to be
    acting in concert with each other. The issue thus was that since Daiichi and
    Ranbaxy were deemed to be acting in concert and since Ranbaxy had acquired
    shares of Zenotech @ Rs.160 during the preceding six months, whether such higher
    price of Rs.160 should be the open offer price by Daiichi ?

    (8) SEBI rejected the complaint by the shareholders of
    Zenotech that such higher price should have been the open offer price. Such
    shareholders appealed to the SAT, who held that the open offer should have been
    at Rs.160. It held, in essence, that one has to consider the situation on the
    date with reference to which the price formula of preceding 26 weeks was to be
    applied. As on this date, Ranbaxy was a subsidiary of Daiichi. Thus, they were
    deemed to be acting in concert. Since the law requires that acquisition by
    persons acting in concert be taken into account, the SAT held that the higher
    price of Rs.160 paid by Ranbaxy should be the open offer price.

    (9) The matter reached the Supreme Court. The Supreme Court
    considered, inter alia, the history of the provisions and numerous
    provisions not just relating to indirect acquisitions, but even related and
    incidental provisions.

    (10) It held that, firstly, the persons acting in concert
    have to actually come together to acquire the shares of a target company. There
    has to be an agreement (or understanding, etc.) to acquire shares and such
    shares should be of the target company.

    (11) Further, the provisions deeming certain connected
    persons (such as holding-subsidiary companies in this case) as persons acting in
    concert does only that — i.e., it deems that they are acting in concert.
    It does not deem that they have been acting in concert for acquiring shares of a
    listed company and this would have to be established. Importantly, even the
    provision that deems certain related persons as acting in concert has a
    clarification that this deeming provision is subject to the contrary being
    established.

    (12) The Court gave its understanding of the term ‘person
    acting in concert’ as follows :

    “. . . . the concept of ‘person acting in concert’ under
    Regulation 2(e)(1) is based on a target company on the one side, and on the
    other side two or more persons coming together with the shared common objective
    or purpose of substantial acquisition of shares, etc. of the target company.
    Unless there is a target company, substantial acquisition of whose shares, etc.
    is the common objective or purpose of two or more persons coming together, there
    can be no “persons acting in concert
    “. For, de hors the target
    company the idea of ‘persons acting in concert’ is as irrelevant as a cheat with
    no one as victim of his deception. Two or more persons may join hands together
    with the shared common objective or purpose of any kind, but so long as the
    common object and purpose is not of substantial acquisition of shares of a
    target company, they would not comprise ‘persons acting in concert’.” (emphasis
    supplied
    )

    (13) The other condition it laid down for the term persons
    acting in concert to apply in the context of the Regulations is, in the Court’s
    words :

    “The other limb of the concept requires two or more persons joining together with the shared common objective and purpose of substantial acquisition of shares, etc. of a certain target company. There can be no ‘persons acting in concert’ unless there is a shared common objective or purpose between two or more persons of substantial acquisition of shares, etc. of the target company. For, de hors the element of the shared common objective or purpose, the idea of ‘person acting in concert’ is as meaningless as criminal conspiracy without any agreement to commit a criminal offence. The idea of ‘persons acting in concert’ is not about a fortuitous relationship coming into existence by accident or chance. The relationship can come into being only by design, by meeting of minds between two or more persons leading to the shared common objective or purpose of acquisition of substantial acquisition of shares, etc. of the target company. It is another matter that the common objective or purpose may be in pursuance of an agreement or an understanding, formal or informal; the acquisition of shares, etc. may be direct or indirect or the persons acting in concert may cooperate in actual acquisition of shares, etc. or they may agree to cooperate in such acquisition. Nonetheless, the element of the shared common objective or purpose is the sine qua non for the relationship of “persons acting in concert” to come into being.”

    (14) Thus, it noted that “. . . . mere fact that two companies are in the relationship of a holding company and a subsidiary company, without anything else, is not sufficient to comprise ‘persons acting in concert’. . . . . There may be hundreds of instances of a company having a subsidiary company, but to dub them as ‘persons acting in concert’ would be quite ridiculous unless another company is identified as the target company and either the holding company or the subsidiary make some positive move or show some definite inclination for substantial acquisition of shares, etc. of the target company.”

    (15)    In the light of this explanation of the terms ‘persons acting in concert’ and ‘persons deemed to be acting in concert’ that the words ‘unless the contrary is established’ are to be understood.

    (16)    The Supreme Court finally reversed the view of the SAT that the deeming fiction could apply retrospectively and thus, if a person was deemed to be acting in concert on a later date, such connection would apply to an earlier date too. It held, “…..the deeming fiction under sub-regulation (2) can only operate prospectively and not retrospectively. That is to say the deeming provision would give rise to the presumption, as explained above, only from the date two or more persons come together in one of the specified relationships and not from any earlier date. Thus, in the case in hand, the deeming provision under sub-regulation (2) would give rise to the presumption that Daiichi and Ranbaxy were ‘persons acting in concert’, provided of course the other conditions as explained above were also satisfied, only from October 20, 2008, the date on which Ranbaxy became a subsidiary of Daiichi and not before that. Hence, the purchase of Zenotech shares by Ranbaxy in January 2008 cannot be said to be by a ‘person acting in concert’ with Daiichi.”

    (17)    The Supreme Court thus held that the Daiichi and Ranbaxy were not acting in concert when the shares of Zenotech were acquired by Ranbaxy. The latter development of the holding-subsidiary position cannot alter, factually or in law, the earlier unconnected position. The provision relating to determination of price did not apply retrospectively so as to change the status as on the date of acquisition. Thus, the price paid by Ranbaxy on a date when there was no relation with Daiichi was not to be applied for the open offer by Daiichi of Zenotech.

    (18)    Importantly, the Supreme Court relied considerably on the background of these provisions as put forth in the Bhagwati Committee Report to understand the rationale of this provision as well as for its interpretation generally. The Court also recommended that delegated legislations such as the Takeover Regulations should have the ‘objects and purposes’ clause that Acts have.

    The following is what the Court said:

    “Before parting with the records of the case we would like to say that in arriving at the correct meaning of the provisions of the Takeover Code specially regulation 14(4) and 20(12), we were greatly helped by the reports of the two Committees headed by Justice Bhagwati. We mention the fact especially because as per the legislative practice in this country, unlike an Act, a regulation or any amendments introduced in it are not preceded by the “Object and Purpose” clause. The absence of the object and purpose in the regulation or the later amendments introduced in it only adds to the difficulties of the Court in properly construing the provisions of regulations dealing with complex issues. The Court, so to say, has to work in complete darkness without so much as a glimpse into the mind of the maker of the regulation. In this case, it was quite apparent that the 1997 Takeover Code and the later amendments introduced in it were intended to give effect to the recommendations of the two Committees headed by Justice Bhagwati. We were, thus, in a position to refer to the relevant portions of the two reports that provided us with the raison d’etre for the amendment(s) or the introduction of a new provision and thus helped us in understanding the correct import of certain provisions. But this is not the case with many other regulations framed under different Acts. Regulations are brought in and later subjected to amendments without being preceded by any reports of any expert committees. Now that we have more and more of the regulatory regime where highly important and complex and specialised spheres of human activity are governed by regulatory mechanisms framed under delegated legislation, it is high time to change the old practice and to add at the beginning the ‘object and purpose’ clause to the delegated legislations as in the case of the primary legislations.”

    (19)    In conclusion, the decision is welcome as it clarifies and gives the final word on important concepts in Takeover Regulations. The considerable reliance of the Court on the Expert Committee Reports, albeit in the absence of ‘objects and purpose’ clause, increases the value of such reports generally for the student in securities laws. Of course, the irony is that this only increases the complexity of the law for such students. Now, they will have to read and know the recorded history of such law, in addition to the very voluminous bare text of the Act, Regulations, etc.

    (20)    P.S.: As this article goes to press, SEBI has released the report on revising the Takeover Regulations and has recommended changes in, inter alia, the subject matter of this article. More on this in the next issue.

    Pre-Emptive Rights Held Void — Trouble in Joint Venture Paradise

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    Securities Laws

    The Bombay High Court has
    recently held (in Western Maharashtra Development Corpn. Ltd. vs. Bajaj Auto
    Ltd.
    — unreported, Arbitration Petition No. 174 of 2006, order dated
    February 15, 2010) that an agreement between two shareholder groups that one
    will not sell its shares, without offering them at the proposed sale terms to
    the other, shall be void. This decision would effectively make other similar
    agreements such as ‘tag-along rights’ (explained later) also void. Fears have
    been expressed, exaggerated I think, that the decision is so unequivocal that
    even statutory restrictions such as those under SEBI Guidelines and Regulations
    such as those for lock-in period would also be affected.

    This decision would apply
    not just to listed companies but also to other public companies. However, its
    significance and wide implications made it a worthy topic for this column.
    Shareholders of surely thousands of companies have entered into such agreements
    and clearly all these will suddenly find their arrangements disturbed.

    The implication is that not
    only the company cannot honour such agreements — not even if the terms of this
    agreement are incorporated in its articles — but the agreement is void even
    between the shareholders themselves.

    The decision affects not
    merely promoters who often have such agreements amongst themselves but also to
    the large number of companies having private equity/strategic investors who are
    relatively passive but still hold significant quantity of shares.

    Let us make a quick review
    of why and how such agreements are entered into. Typically, when two shareholder
    groups join together in a company and invest in it, they would like to ensure
    that the other group does not exit leaving the former halfway. This is
    particularly so in case of investments by private equity and similar investors
    who invest on the faith of the main and working promoters continuing with their
    stake. There is also usually a certain level of faith on the skills and other
    personal qualities of such promoters that prompt them to invest. Such investors
    thus insist on certain terms. For example, they require that if the main
    promoter seeks to sell his shares, he shall offer those shares to such other
    group first at the same price and other terms offered by the outsider (‘right of
    pre-emption’). The other group may alternatively ask that his shares be
    ‘tagged-along’ with the proposed sale and also sold at the same terms offered by
    the outsider.

    Depending upon the needs and
    often the bargaining strengths of the parties, other terms are also agreed upon.

    Often the company is also
    made a party to such agreements and is required to effectively honour such
    agreements, particularly by not allowing transfer of shares that are in
    violation of such agreements. This raises the protection, practically and also
    legally, since this is consistent with what the Supreme Court held in V. B.
    Rangaraj v. V. B. Gopalakrishnan
    [(1992) 1 SCC 160]. The Supreme Court had
    held that for such restrictions to be binding on the company, such terms should
    be incorporated in the articles of association of such company.

    In a sense, then, it
    appeared to be well-settled law, in the light of the aforesaid decision of the
    Supreme Court and several other decisions that some of such restrictions are
    valid inter-se the shareholders and also binding on the company if they are
    incorporated in the Articles. The recent Bombay High Court decision now
    overturns this state of affairs.

    The facts of the case are
    complicated and actually involved appeal against a ruling of an arbitrator on
    several issues, but essentially, the issue for discussion here is whether such a
    right of pre-emption was valid under law.

    The Court considered the
    Supreme Court’s decision in Rangaraj and also another Supreme Court’s decision,
    i.e., M. S. Madhusoodhanan v. Kerala Kaumudi [(2003) 117 Com. Cases 19].

    The Court then analysed the
    provisions of S. 111A of the Companies Act, 1956, the relevant Ss.(2) of which
    reads as under :

    “Subject to the provisions
    of this Section, the shares and debentures and any interest therein of a company
    shall be freely transferable”. (emphasis supplied)

    The aforesaid provision is
    applicable to public companies, as compared to the provisions of S. 111 that is
    applicable to private companies.

    The Court then applied the
    provisions of S. 9 of the Act, which says that any provisions in the Memorandum
    and Articles, in any agreement entered into by the company or in resolutions,
    etc. that is repugnant to the provisions of the Act would be to that extent
    void.

    The Court also analysed the
    meaning of the term ‘freely transferable’ referring to dictionaries and
    decisions and also the implications of such restrictive clauses being
    incorporated in the Articles of Association of the company.

    The Court held that in case
    of private companies, the Articles are required by law to provide for
    restrictions on transfer of shares. However, the position for public companies
    is different. It observed, “situation involving the restriction on the
    transferability of shares in a private company has to be contrasted with cases
    involving public companies where the law provides for free transferability. Free
    transferability of shares is the norm in the case of shares in a public
    company”.

    When persons form a public
    company or buy shares of a public company, they should be conscious that the
    shares are, by law, freely transferable and they cannot enter into agreements
    that restrict such free transfer. The Court observed :

    “The provision contained in the law for the free transferability of shares in a public company is founded on the principle that members of the public must have the freedom to purchase and, every share-holder, the freedom to transfer. The incorporation of a company in the public, as distinguished from the private, realm leads to specific consequences and the imposition of obligations envisaged in law. Those who promote and manage public companies assume those obligations. Corresponding to those obligations are rights, which the law recognises as inhering in the members of the public who subscribe to shares.

    The principle of free transferability must be given a broad dimension in order to fulfil the object of the law. Imposing restrictions on the principle of free transferability, is a legislative function, simply because the postulate of free transferability was enunciated as a matter of legislative policy when the Parliament introduced S. 111A into the Companies’ Act, 1956. That is a binding precept which governs the discourse on transferability of shares. The word ‘transferable’ is of the widest possible import and the Parliament by using the expression ‘freely transferable’, has reinforced the legislative intent of allowing transfers of shares of public companies in a free and efficient domain.”

    The Court particularly relied on a decision of the Delhi High Court in Smt. Pushpa Katoch v. Manu Maharani Hotels Ltd., [121 (2005) DLT 333] where too the grievance was that some shareholders, in violation of the agreement between the shareholders, transferred their shares without offering to others. The Court held that no provision was made in the articles of association recognising such restriction. Morever, even if such a restriction was contained, such restriction would have been void since the provisions of Act override the Articles and make contrary provisions void u/s.9. This part is as important as it is controversial, since it now holds that even a specific provision in the Articles of the company will not help — in fact, even this provision would be void.

    The Court specifically rejected the argument that private agreements could still be made for such restrictions. The Court rejected the argument that the provisions of S. 111A were intended to curb the directors from refusing the transfer of shares.

    To reiterate, the decisions would have far-reaching implications both for existing and new arrangements. Numerous companies, listed and unlisted, have entered into some form of such agreements to provide for rights for preemption and similar other restrictions. If the decision reflects the correct state of law, all these agreements would be deemed to be void.

    It is submitted that, with great respect, this decision requires reconsideration on several grounds.

    Firstly, the decision incorrectly relies on S. 9 which holds that provisions contained in articles, agreements, etc. that are contrary to the provisions of the Act are void. S. 9 clearly refers to such provisions in the “articles of a company, or in any agreement executed by it.”. Thus, S. 9 applies only where the company is a party and I also submit that it makes even such agreement void only as far as the company is concerned. While in the early part of the decision, the Court refers to the exact wording of this Section, in the concluding part, the Court observes that “A provision contained in the Memorandum, Articles, Agreement or Resolution is to the extent to which it is repugnant to the provisions of the Act, regarded as void.”. I submit respectfully that the Court has cast the net unjustifiably wider and has held even agreements to which the compa-ny is not a party to be void on account of S. 9 when that Section covers only agreements to which the company is a party.

    Even the provisions of S. 111A are read out of context and particularly out of the mischief that provision was designed to cure. If one reads the heading of S. 111A, it reads ‘Rectification of register of transfer’. Even its originating S. 111 has the heading ‘Power to refuse registration and appeal against refusal’. If one traces the history and purpose of this Section, they were meant to cover the circumstances under which the Board of Directors of a company can refuse transfer of shares. Indeed, simultaneous with the introduction of S. 111A, the counterpart provision in the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act, 1956, S. 22A, was omitted and this S. 22A dealt with the circumstances under which transfer of shares of a listed company could be refused.

    S. 111A was also introduced in the context of demate-rialisation of shares and dealing of transfer of shares by a depository. In case of dematerialised shares, the transfer takes place electronically and there is no formal process of approval by the Board. In fact, for this reason itself, S. 111A was introduced to provide for ‘rectification’ post-transfer and a fairly wide power is given for raising objections against transfers taken place and reverse them.

    However, having said that, it has to be conceded that the intention was also to emphasise free transferability of shares. The technical argument also could be that when the words itself are clear and unambiguous, one cannot refer to headings, history, etc.

    Nevertheless, the scheme of provisions does point to the role of the company and its Board in inter-fering with transfer of shares. In fact, even for the Board, specific power has been given to interfere when there are specified factors present, such as violation of laws, etc. or even generally if there is ‘sufficient cause’.

    Having stated the above, it is also apparent that many of these defensive arguments were actually raised before the Court and the Court did consider and rule on them. Thus, it may be tough to argue that the decision should have restricted application.

    While one hopes that there is an early re-consideration of this decision at a higher appellate level, companies and promoters will have to be careful as regards their existing agreements and also new ones.

    Countries see hazards in free flow of capital

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    New Page 1

    30. Countries see hazards in free flow of capital


    In China and Taiwan, regulators are imposing fresh
    restrictions on stock market investments by foreigners. In Brazil, officials
    have twice raised taxes on foreign investors. Even in South Korea, host to this
    week’s Group of 20 meeting, pressure is building on the government to take
    similar steps.

    As the leaders of the 20 major economic powers gather in
    Seoul, an increasing number of them have either imposed curbs or are in the
    process of doing so to slow the torrent of hot money into their markets.

    Short-term investment is now increasingly viewed as something
    that needs to be controlled.

    Emerging markets have been grappling all year with the
    consequences of a flight of investor capital from rock-bottom interest rates in
    Western countries in search of higher yields. Short-term capital investment in
    emerging markets — largely in stock markets, which are at an all-time high — are
    expected to hit $ 458 billion this year, the highest figure since 2007 when $
    784 billion flowed into these markets, according to the Institute of
    International Finance.

    (Source : The Business Standard, dated 12-11-2010)

    levitra

    Indian veggies, fruits remain highly toxic

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    New Page 1

    28. Indian veggies, fruits remain highly toxic


    Rampant use of banned pesticides in fruits and vegetables
    continues to put at risk the life of the common man. Farmers apply pesticides
    such as chlordane, endrin and heptachor that can cause serious neurological
    problems, kidney damage and skin diseases. A study conducted by Delhi-based NGO
    Consumer-Voice reveals that the amount of pesticides used in eatables in India
    is as much as 750 times the European standards. The survey collected sample data
    from various wholesale and retail shops in Delhi, Bangalore and Kolkata.

    (Source : The Times of India, dated 4-11-2010)

    (Comment : The issue is what should the citizens do when the
    authorities are apathetic to the consequences. The farmers should be made aware
    of the harmful consequences. These also harm the health of the farmers coming in
    contact with the chemicals.)

    levitra

    Soon, pay just Rs.50k for heart surgery

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    New Page 1

    29. Soon, pay just Rs.50k for heart surgery


    Want your heart fixed for just Rs.50,000 by skilled surgeons
    in a top hospital with a family member to care for you ? Your wish will soon
    come true. For, India’s first low–cost hospital will be up and running in Mysore
    early next year.

    These state-of-the art hospitals will be built at a cost of
    Rs.16 crore, about one-fifth the cost of constructing a 300-bed super-speciality
    hospital.

    The brainchild of renowned cardio surgeon Dr. Devi Shetty,
    this unique hospital will be piloted in Mysore and then in Siliguri (West
    Bengal) and Bhubaneswar (Orissa).

    Narayana Hrudayalaya has tied up with Larsen & Toubro to
    execute the Mysore project which uses prefabricated material transported from
    Puducherry. The general wards will receive daylight to the desired levels. Only
    the OT complex and pre/post operation and ICU areas will have a conventional
    concrete structure. “Most hospitals have huge vertical structures with heavy
    air-conditioning. The best sanitizer for a hospital is sunlight and fresh air.
    Dr. Shetty said, heart surgeries will be performed for Rs.50,000 and other
    surgeries like gall bladder and hernia will cost between Rs.10,000 and
    Rs.15,000. While hospitals in Mysore, Bhubaneswar and Siliguri will come up on
    land given at subsidised rates, other hospitals will come up on the public
    private partnership model.

    (Source : The Times of India, dated 25-10-2010)

    (Source : The Business Standard, dated 11-11-2010)

    levitra

    Human development — India at the bottom of the barrel

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    New Page 1

    27. Human development — India at the bottom of the barrel


    The most important takeaway for India from the recently
    released United Nations Human Development Report, The Real Wealth of Nations :
    Pathways to Human Development, is the ‘crucial and compelling evidence’ that
    there is a lack of any significant correlation between economic growth and
    improvements in health and education.

    In the last few years, investments — and interest — in
    India’s social sector have improved. Yet, as the report proves, the work is far,
    far from over : between 2005 and 2010 — also the years of economic growth —
    India has moved up only one step on the Human Development Index ladder. It’s now
    at 119, out of 169 countries and areas.

    This year, being the 20th edition of the HDR, three new
    indices were introduced to make the process more robust : the
    inequality-adjusted Human Development Index, the Gender
    Inequality Index (GII) and the Multidimensional Poverty Index (MPI).

    Though India’s HDI (0.519) is above the average of 0.516, for
    countries in South Asia, in GII, it is embarrassingly behind even Bangladesh and
    Pakistan, ranked at 116 and 112, respectively. The GII reflects women’s
    disadvantages in reproductive health, empowerment and economic activity.

    With women at such a low priority level, is it surprising
    that we languish below on other indicators too ? Equally sad is our MPI : 55%
    Indians suffer from multiple deprivations; the average in South Asia is 54%.

    (Source : The Hindustan Times, dated 11-11-2010)

     

     

    levitra

    McKinsey suggests e-payment to plug leakage of government funds

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    New Page 1

    26. McKinsey suggests e-payment to plug leakage of government
    funds


    An inefficient payment system is leading to an annual loss of Rs.1 trillion for the Government, and this can be tackled through
    an electronic payment model, management consulting firm McKinsey and Co. said in
    a report titled Inclusive growth and financial security : The benefits of
    e-payments to Indian society. The report was commissioned by the Bill and
    Melinda Gates Foundation.

    A major chunk of this leakage — nearly Rs.71,000 crore — is
    part of the Government welfare schemes to households, the McKinsey report said.

    Current payment flows between the Government and individual
    households, including subsidies and social services to individual citizens, is
    around Rs.13 trillion.

    According to the report, transaction costs account for 15-20%
    of total losses to the Government and overhead and administrative costs around
    5-10%. Leakages account for 75-80% of total losses.

    Transaction costs are associated with cash or cheque payments
    at payment source and destination, and overhead and administrative costs are a
    result of manual payment processing, audits, and payment reconciliation.
    Leakages are caused when payments of benefits or for services are diverted to
    unintended individuals or groups, the report said.

    (Source : The Mint Newspaper, dated 2-11-2010)

     

     

     

     

    levitra

    Apple flips the playbook, putting mobile technology in PCs

    fiogf49gjkf0d

    New Page 1

    24. Apple flips the playbook, putting mobile technology in
    PCs


    Over the last few years, Apple used technologies from its
    Macintosh computers to create the iPhone and the iPad, building a multi-billion
    dollar mobile computing business that now accounts for 60% of its revenue.

    Now Apple is doing the reverse, taking technologies like the
    multi-touch user interface from the iPhone and the iPad and using them to
    refresh its Mac business. Steven P. Jobs, the chief executive, unveiled two
    versions of its ultra-thin MacBook Air laptops. He also demonstrated an early
    version of Apple’s new OS X operating system, which will be available next
    summer.

    The new MacBooks come in two sizes of screens, 11.6-inch and
    13.3-inch. They weigh 2.3 pounds, and 2.9 pounds, respectively. For comparison,
    the iPad weighs 1.5 pounds. The laptops’ thickness tapers from 0.68 of an inch
    at one end to 0.11 of an inch at the other. They have no optical or magnetic
    storage. Instead, like the iPad, they are built on Flash storage, which allows
    them to turn on instantly when powered up.

    (Source : The Economic Times, dated 22-10-2010)

    levitra